Number System Number System

Types of Number System

1. Hindu Number System 2. English Number System 3. Roman Number System

10,00,00,000

1,00,00,000
Ten Crores

Ten Lakhs
10,00,000

Thousand

Thousand

Hundreds
1,00,000

Tens 10

Units 1
10,000
Crores

Lakhs

1000
Ten

100
Hindu Number System

108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 1

Hundred Thousand
Millions 1,000,000
Hundred Millions

Ten Thousands
Ten Millions
100,000,000

10,000,000

Thousands

Hundreds
100,000

10,000

Units
1000

Tens
100

10
English Number System

1
Roman Numerals I V X L C D M
Roman Numbers
Hindu-Arabic Numerals 1 5 10 50 100 500 1000

 Classification of Numbers :
Numbers

Real Numbers Imaginary Numbers

Rational Numbers Irrational Numbers

Fractions Integers

Negative Zero Positive

Whole Numbers Natural Numbers

Prime Composite Even Odd

Numbers Numbers Numbers Numbers

ANCE 1
 Number System

(i) Natural Numbers: (N) 33

e.g., (0.75, – 0.02, etc)
Set of all counting numbers from 50
1 to  , N 1, 2, 3, 4, ... .  Non-Terminating Repeating
(ii) Whole Numbers: (W) (Recurring) Decimals Numbers :
Set of all natural numbers including p
zero, W  0,1, 2, 3, 4, ... . Rational numbers   for which the long
q
(iii) Integers : division is non terminating but repeating are
Set of all positive and negative counting called Non Terminating or Recurring
numbers including zero from –  to , Decimals
I or Z = {...,-3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, ...}.
or
Positive integers = {0, 1, 2, 3, 4..........} m n
If q  (2 × 5 )
Negative integers = {............–3, –2, –1}
(iv) Rational Numbers : 17
e.g., (0.666, –2.333, etc)
These are real numbers which can be 90
expressed in the from of p/q, where p and  Pure Recurring Decimals :
q are integers and q  0. The decimal representation in which all the
e.g., 2/3, 37/15, -17/19. digits after the decimal point repeat is called
Pure Recurring Decimals.
Rational Numbers in decimal form
Every rational number when expressed in e.g., 0. 3 , 1.09 etc.
decimal form is expressible either in  Mixed Recurring Decimals :
Terminating or in Non-Terminating The decimal representation in which atleast
Repeating Decimal form.
one digit after the decimal point does not
 Classification of Decimals :
repeat is called Mixed Recurring Decimals.
Decimals
e.g., 0.27 , 0.5321 etc.

Terminating Decimals Non-Terminating Decimals Fractions

(Rational Numbers) (Infinite Decimals)
(a) Common Fraction : Fraction whose
denominator is not 10 is called Common
Non-Terminating Non-Terminating-Non-Repeating Fraction
Repeating Decimals Decimals (Irrational Numbers)
(b) Decimal Fraction : Fraction whose
denominator is 10 or any power of 10 is
Pure Recurring Decimals Mixed Recurring Decimals
called Decimal Fraction.
(c) Proper Fraction : Fraction in which
 Terminating Decimals :
Numerator is less than the Denominator i.e.,
p 2
Rational numbers   for which long is called Proper Fraction.
q 3
division terminates after a finite number of (d) Improper fraction : Fraction in which
steps are called Terminating Decimals. Numerator is greater than the Denominator
or
7
When q is of the form (2m × 5n) for some i.e., is called Improper fraction.
non negative integers m and n. 4

ANCE 2
 Number System

(e) Equivalent Fractions : Two or more e.g., 2 , 3 4 , 2  3 , 2  3 , 4 7 3 etc.

functions said to be equivalent if the
(vi) Imaginary Numbers :
multiplication or division of both the
All the numbers whose square is negative
numerator as well as the denominator of
are called Imaginary Numbers.
first fraction by the same number gives
another fraction. e.g., 3i, 4i, i,...; where i =  1
(vii) Complex Numbers :
Eg. 9/5 is multiplied by 3 for numerator as
well as denominator. The combined form of real and imaginary
numbers is called Complex Numbers. It is
9 × 3 / 5 × 3 = 27 / 15 denoted by Z = A + iB where A is real
Here, 9 / 5 and 27 / 15 are called part and B is imaginary part of Z and
equivalent fraction. A,B  R .
(f) Like Fractions : Fractions having the same Note:- The set of complex number is the
denominators are called the like fractions. super set of all the sets of numbers.
Ex. 1/5, 3/5, 7/5, ............. etc. (viii) Real numbers :
(g) Unlike Fractions : Fractions having Rational numbers and Non rational numbers
different denominators are called unlike taken together are called Real Numbers.
fractions. Thus real numbers is either rational or
Ex. 2/5, 4/3, 7/9, ............. etc. irrational but cannot be simultaneously both.
(h) Mixed fraction : Fraction which combines Numbers which can represent actual
3 physical quantities in a meaningful way.
whole number and fractional part i.e., 4 These can be represented on the number
7
is called Mixed fraction. line. Number line is geometrical straight line
(i) Complex fraction : Fraction in which both with arbitrarily defined zero (origin).
Numerator and Denominator are fraction Absolute value of a real number : The
4/5 absolute value or modulus of a real
i.e., is called Complex fraction.
6/7 number x is denoted by |x|, is defined as
(j) Compound fraction : The fraction of a  x, if x  0
fraction is called compound fraction |x| = 
1 1 1  –x, if x  0
i.e., × = (ix) Composite Numbers :
3 2 6
All natural numbers, which are not prime
(k) Continued fraction: Fraction consists of
are Composite Numbers. A number
the fractional denominators
which is divisible by other numbers except
1 one and itself. If C is the set of composite
1
1 numbers then,
2
1 C = {4, 6, 8, 9, 10, 12, ....}.
i.e., 3
1
4 Note :1 is neither prime nor composite number.
5
Note:- Improper fraction can be written in (x) Even Numbers :
the form of mixed fraction. All integers which are divisible by 2 are
(v) Irrational Numbers (Non-Terminating- called even numbers. Even numbers are
Non-Repeating Decimals) : denoted by the expression 2n, where n is
Numbers which can neither be expressed any integer, So, if E is a set of even
as terminating decimal nor as a repeating numbers,
decimal is called Irrational Numbers. then E = {.......-6, -4, -2, 0, 2, 4, 6........}.

ANCE 3
 Number System

(xi) Odd Numbers : e.g., 6, 28, 496 ......... etc.

All integers which are not divisible by 2 Factors of 6 are 1, 2, 3 and 6
are called odd numbers. Odd numbers are Their sum = 1 + 2 + 3 + 6
denoted by the general expression 2n - 1 = 12
where n is any integer. If O is a set of odd =2×6
numbers, then (b) Armstrong Numbers- Number for which
O = {..., -7, -5, -3, -1, 1, 3, 5, 7........}. the sum of the cubes of its digits is equal
to the original number is called an
(xii) Prime Numbers :
Armstrong Number
Number which is not divisible by any e.g., 13 + 53 + 33 = 153
natural number except unity and itself. (c) Palindrome Numbers- If a number and
e.g., 2,3,5,7,11,13,17,19,23.... etc . If P its reverse both are same then those are
is the set of prime numbers, then called Palindrome Numbers
P = {2,3,5,7......}. e.g., 123454321
Prime numbers are divided into three types: (d) Fibonacci Numbers- Fibonacci Numbers
(i) Co-prime (Relatively prime) are sequence of integers where each
(ii) Twin primes number is the sum of two proceeding it
e.g., 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13, 21, 34,......
(iii) Prime Triplet
(e) Powerful Numbers- Powerful Numbers
(xiii) Co-prime Numbers : are the numbers in which base is equal to
If the Highest Common Factor of the given power such numbers are called Powerful
numbers (not necessarily prime) is 1 then Numbers.
they are called Co-prime Numbers. e.g., e.g., 3435 = 33 + 44 + 33 + 55.
4, 9 are co-prime as H.C.F. of (4, 9) = 1. (f) Triangular Numbers- The number can be
represented in the form of a triangle are
Note :- Any two consecutive numbers will always

called Triangular Numbers. They can be
be co-prime. n(n  1)
represented in the form of , where
(xiv) Twin prime Numbers : 2
n is a natural number
The difference between any two primes is
(g) Beast Number- The number 666 is said
2 are called twin primes.
to be a beast numbers having following
Ex.:- 3,5 11,13 17,19 properties
(xv) Prime Triplet :  22 + 32 + 52 + 72 + 112 + 132 + 172
The set of three consecutive primes is called = 666
a prime triplet.  13 + 23 + 33 + 43 + 53 + 63 + 53 + 43 +
Ex. :- set {3, 5, 7} is a prime triplet 33 + 23 + 13= 666
 1.2.3 + 4.5.6 + 7.8.9 = 666
Different kinds of Numbers  (6 + 6 + 6) + (63 + 63 + 63) = 666
(a) Perfect Numbers- A number for which (h) Pythagoren Number- A number is said
the sum of all its factor is twice the number to be Pythagoren Number if
is called a Perfect Number.  One of the legs must be multiple of 3.
If 2k –1 = Prime Number  One of the legs must be multiple of 4.
then, 2k–1 (2k–1) is a perfect number  One of the legs must be multiple of 5.

ANCE 4
 Number System

(i) Hardy Ramanujan Number : A number Some Theorems

factors such that they are in A.P.
 Fermat’s Theorem
e.g., 1729 = 1 × 7 × 13 × 19.
If p is a prime number and N is prime to
(j) Amicable Number : Amicable number is 2 p. Then Np – 1 – 1 is a multiple of p.
2+2=4 Np – 1 – 1 = M(p) where ‘p’ is prime, n
2×2=4 and p are coprimes i.e., they do not have
22 = 4 common factor M(p) means multiple of p.

Properties of Numbers Note:- Np – N = M (p) whether N is prime to p

or not.
1. Closure a + b or a × b = number
2. Commutative Example: 64 – 1 = 1295 = M(5)
a+b=b+a , a×b=b×a But 104 – 1 = 9999  M(5)
3. Associative  Euclidean Theorem
a + (b + c) = (a + b) + c , Number of primes are infinite
a×(b×c) = (a×b)×c Note:- To check up a number ‘n’ where it
is prime, it is to be seen that whether ‘n’ is
Properties N W Z R divisible by all the primes upto n
Closure  Euler’s Theorem
(Addition)
(Subtraction) If (a, n) = 1 then a (n) = 1 (mod m),
(Multiplication) where (n) is the number of integers  n
(Division)
and coprime to n is called Euler’s function
Commutative  Wilson’s Theorem
(Addition)
(Subtraction) If p is prime, p –1 + 1 is divisible by p.
(Multiplication)
(Division) e.g., 4 + 1 = 24 + 1 = 25 = M(5)
 Gauss Theorem
Associative
(Addition) If a, b, c are three natural numbers such
(Multiplication) that ‘c’ divides ‘ab’ and ‘c’ and ‘a’ are
Distributive (Addition over
relatively prime to each other, then ‘c’
Multiplication) divides ‘b’
Ex. Let a = 3, b = 10 and c = 5
Additive Identity
Here c = 5 and a = 3 are co-primes
Multiplicative Identity ab = 3 × 10
Additive Inverse = 30 divided by 5
i.e., ‘c’ divides ab
Multiplicative Inverse
we observed that ‘c’ also divides ‘b’.
4. Distributive law  Euclid’s Division Lemma or
a × (b + c) = (a × b) + (a × c) Euclid’s Division Algorithm:
For any two given positive integers a and
5. Additive Identity a + 0 = 0 + a = a , ‘0’
b there exist whole numbers q and r such
6. Multiplicative identity a×1 = 1×a = a ‘1’ that
7. Additive Inverse a+(–a) = (–a) + a = 0 a = bq + r, where 0  r  b
8. Multiplicative Inverse Here we call a as dividend, b as divisor, q
a × 1/a = 1/a × a = 1 as quotient and r as remainder.

ANCE 5
 Number System

Dividend Since the remainder 16  0. So we consider

= (Divisor × Quotient) + Remainder the divisor 56 and remainder 16 and
Example-1 applying division lemma to get
Use Euclid’s division lemma to show 56 = 16 × 3 + 8 ....(ii)
that the square of any positive integer is  
either of the form 3m or 3m + 1 for some  3
integer m.  16 56 
 48 
Solution:  8 
Let a be an arbitrary positive integer.
We consider the divisor 16 and the
Then by Euclid’s division, A logarithm remainder 8 and applying division algorithm
corresponding to the positive integers a and to get
3, there exist non-negative integers q and
16 = 8 × 2 + 0 .....(iii)
r such that
a = 3q + r, where 0  3  
 2
 a2 = 9q2 + r2 + 6qr ...(i)  8 16 
where 0  r  3  16 
Case-1 when r = 0  0 
putting r = 0 in (i) we get We observe remainder is zero. Therefore
a2 = 9q2 = 3 (3q2) = 3m, last divisor is 8.
where m = 3q2 is an integer i.e., HCF of 56 and 72 is 8.
Case-2 when r = 1 From (ii) we get
putting r = 1 in (i) we get 8 = 56 – 16 × 3
a2 = 9q2 + 1 + 6q = 3 (3q2 + 2q) + 1 8 = 56 – (72 – 56 × 1) × 3
= 3m + 1 [ 16 = 72 – 56 × 1]
where m = ( 3q2 + 2q) is an integer from (i)
Case-3 when r = 2 8 = 56 – 3 × 72 + 56 × 3
putting r = 2 in (i) we get 8 = 56 × 4 + (–3) × 72
a2 = 9q2 + 4 + 12q x = 4 and y = – 3
= 3(3q2 + 4q + 1) + 1 = 3m + 1, Now 8 = 56 × 4 + (–3) × 72
where m = (3q2 + 4q + 1) is an integer 8 = 56 × 4 + (–3) × 72 – 56 × 72 + 56 × 72
Hence, the square of any positive integer is 8 = 56 × 4 – 56 × 72 + (–3) × 72 + 56 × 72
either of the form 3m or 3m + 1 for some 8 = 56 × (4 – 72) + {(–3) + 56} × 72
integer m. 8 = 56 × –68 + 53 × 72
Example-2 x = – 68 and y = 53
If d is HCF of 56 and 72, find x, y Hence x and y are not unique
satisfying d = 56x + 72y. Also show that x
and y are not unique Fundamental Theory of Arithmetic
Solution: Every composite number can be expressed
Applying Euclid’s division lemma to 56 and (factorised) as a product of primes and this
72 we get factorization is unique except for the order
72 = 56 × 1 + 16 ....(i) in which prime factors occur
  or
 1 Every number greater than or equal to
 56 72  2 is either a prime or it can be expressed
 56  as a product of prime a unique way except
 16  for the order in which the factors appears.

ANCE 6
 Number System

 Theorem : Let p be a prime number and Then a and b are integers having no
be positive integer. If p divides a2, then p common factor other than 1 and b  0.
divides a. a a2
 Proof : From the fundamental theorem of Now 2 =  2 = [on squaring
b b2
Arithmetic integer a can be factorized as both sides]
product of primes.  2b2 = a2 ....(i)
Let a = p1p2......pn be prime factorization  2 divides a 2
[ 2 divides 2b2]
of a where p 1....p n are primes, not
2 divides a [ 2 is prime and
necessary distinct 2
divides a  2 divides a]
Now
Let a = 2c for some integer c
a = p1 p2..........pn
Putting a = 2c in (i) we get
 a2 = (p1p2.......pn) (p1p2........pn)
2b2 = 4c2  b2 = 2c2
a2 = (p12 p22.....pn2)
 2 divides b2 [ 2 divides 2c2]
Here p is prime and it divides a2
 2 divides b. [ 2 is prime and 2
 p is a prime factor of a2
divides b2  2 divides b]
here only the prime factors of a2 are p1, p2
.........pn. Therefore p is one of p1,p2......pn Thus, 2 is a common factor of a and b.
This implies that p|p1p2p3......pn  p|a But this contradicts the fact that a and b
have no common factor other than 1.
Example - 3 The contradiction arises by assuming that
Prove that a positive integer n is prime, 2 is rational.
if no prime p less than or equal to n Hence 2 is irrational
divides n.
Solution: Similarly we can prove for 3 and 5
Let n be positive integer such that no prime
less than or equal to n divides n. Square and Square root
Then we have to prove n is prime. Suppose Square :When a number is multiplied by
n is not prime integer. Then we may write itself then the product is called the square
n = ab where 1 < a  b of that numbers.
 a  n and b  n e.g., 2 × 2 = 4
Let p be prime factor of a. Then p  a  Prefect Square : A natural number is
called a perfect square if it is the square of
n and p|a
any other natural number
 p|ab
e.g., 1,4,9,.... are the squares of 1, 2, 3,...
 p|n
respectively.
 a prime less than n divides n.
 Properties of a Perfect Square
This contradicts our assumption that no
prime less than n divides n. So our
Number:
assumption is wrong. Hence n is prime. • Perfect square numbers end with either 0
or 1 or 4 or 5 or 6 or 9.
 Irrationality of 2 • The number of zero at the end of a perfect
If possible, let 2 be rational and let its square ending with zero is always even
a • No. perfect square number can end with
simplest form be . 2, 3, 7 or 8
b

ANCE 7
 Number System

• A perfect square leaves a remainder of 2 800

either 0 or 1, when it is divided by 3. i.e., 2 400
if on dividing a number by 3, we get the 2 200
2 100
remainder as 2, then the number is not a 2 50
perfect square. 5 25
e.g., When 35 is divided by 3, then 5 5
1
remainder is 2, but 35 is not a perfect
square
800 = 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 5 × 5
• A perfect square leaves a remainder of
Clearly 2 has no pair. thus if we multiply it
either 0 or 1 or 4 when it is divided by 5
by 2 then product will be a perfect square.
i.e., if on dividing a number by 5, we get
 Required smallest number is 2.
a remainder of 2 or 3, then the number is
not a perfect square.  Square Roots : The square root of a
e.g., When 147 is divided by 5 the number is that number which when
remainder is 2. So 147 is not a perfect multiplied by itself gives the product. As
square. we say square of 9 is 81, then we can also
• A perfect square leaves a remainder of say that square root of 81 is 9.
either zero or 1 or 2 or 4 when divided by The symbol use to indicate the square root
7. If on dividing by 7 we get a remainder of a number is “ ”
as either 3 or 5 or 6 then the number is not i.e. 289  17, 225  15 ...etc.
a perfect square. Note:- We can calculate the square root
e.g., When 143625 is divided by 7, we of positive numbers only. However the
get 6 as the remainder, so 143625 is not a square root of a positive number may be a
perfect square positive or a negative number.
• A perfect square leaves a remainder of e.g., 49 = +7 or –7
either 0 or 1 or 3 or 5 or 9 when it is
divided by 11.  Properties of Square Roots :
• A perfect square leaves a remainder of 0 • If the unit digit of a number is 2, 3, 7 or 8,
or 1 or 3 or 4 or 9 or 10 or 12 when it then it does not have a square root in N.
is divided by 13 • If a number ends in an odd number of zeros,
• If a number is even, then its square is also then it does not have a square root in N.
even. • If a number has square root in N, then its
• If a number is odd, then its square is also units digit must be 0, 1, 4, 5 or 9.
odd • The sum of first ‘n’ odd natural numbers
Example-4 is n2.
Find the smallest number by which 800 ‘i.e., 1 + 3 + 5 + 7 +.........+ (2n – 1) = n2
must be multiplied so that the product is a • The square root of an even number is even
perfect square. and square root of an odd number is odd.
Solution: e.g., 81  9 , 16 = 4, 625  25 ...etc.
Given number is 800, first we resolve it • Negative numbers have no square root in
into prime factors. set of real numbers.

ANCE 8
 Number System

Example - 5 e.g., 125 is a perfect cube as there is an

Find the square root of 7  6 . integer 5 such that
Solution : 125 = 5 × 5 × 5 = 53
Example - 6
Sol. Let 7 6  p  q What is the smallest number by which 7744
7  6  p q  2 pq must be multiplied so that the product is a
perfect cube.
 By squaring both sides  Solution :
p  q  7 ...(i) Resolving 7744 into prime factors, we get
 By equating the parts  2 7744
2 3872
 2 pq  6 ...(ii)
2 1936
 4pq  6 ...(iii) 2 968
 By squaring both sides of (ii)  2 484
2 2 2 242
 p  q  p  q  4 pq 11 121
2
 p  q   49  6 11 11
2
1
 p  q  43
7744 = (2 × 2 × 2) (2 × 2 × 2) × 11 ×
 p  q  43 ...(iv) 11
 p  q  7 We find that 2 occurs as a prime factor of
7744 thrice but 11 occurs as a prime factor
 By eq n (i)  only twice. Thus, if we multiply 7744 by
1 11, 11 will also occur as a prime factor
 p 
2
7  43  thrice and the product will be 2 × 2 × 2 ×
2 × 2 × 2 × 11 × 11 × 11, which is a
On adding (i) & (iv)  perfect cube.
1 Hence, we must multiply 7744 by 11 so

2
7  q 
43   that the product becomes a perfect cube.
On subtracting (i) & (iv)  Cube Root:
 7  6 If n is a perfect cube, then for some integer
m, n = m3. Here the number m is called the
1
 
2  7  43  7  43 .  cube root of n
If m is a cube root of n we write m = 3 n
Cube and Cube root e.g., 3 is a cube root of 27 we write
Cube : If a number is multiplied by itself 3 = 3 27
thrice then the result is called the Cube of  Cube Root of Negative Number
that Number. If x is any positive integer then – x is a
e.g., 27 = 3 × 3 × 3 i.e., 27 is a cube of 3. negative integer
Perfect Cube : A natural number is said Also we know that (–x)3 = –x3
to be a Perfect Cube. 3
(–x)3 = – x
If there is an integer m such that n = m ×
m × m = m3 Hence 3 – x = – 3 x

ANCE 9
 Number System

Note:- Now (38 14 –100 2)1/ 3 = – (2 2 )

 The cube of a number ending in 0, 1, 4, 5,
6, 9 ends in 0, 1, 4, 5, 6 and 9 respectively (50 – 19 7 )]1/3
 If the cube of a number ending in 3 or 7 = (– 2) (50 – 19 7 )1/ 3
ends in 7 or 3 respectively
 If the cube of a number ending in 2 or 8 Now let (50 – 19 7)1/3  x – y
ends in 8 or 2. ...(i)
Example - 7 and (50 + 19 7 )1/3 = x  y
Find the cube root of 9ab2 + (b2 + 24a2) ....(ii)
multiplying (i) and (ii) we get
(b 2 – 3a 2 )
(2500 – 2527)1/3 = x2 – y
Solution: –3 = x2 – y
Let {9a2 + (b2 + 24a2) (b 2 – 3a 2 )}1/ 3 y = x2 + 3
Cubing (i) 50 – 19 7
=x+ y ....(i)
= x3 – 3x2 y + 3xy – y y
Then {9ab2 – (b2 + 24a2) 2
(b – 3a )} 2 1/ 3
Equation rational parts, we have
x3 + 3xy = 50
=x– y ....(ii)
or x3 + 3x (x2 + 3) – 50 = 0
Multiplying (i) and (ii) together we have on ( y = x2 + 3)
simplification or 4x3 + 9x – 50 = 0
(12a2 – b2) = x2 – y x = 2 (by remainder theorem)
y = x2 + (b2 – 12a2) y=7
cubing (i) on both sides, we get Hence the required cube is
9ab2 + (b2 + 24a2) (b 2 – 3a 2 ) – 2 (2 – 7 )  14 – 2 2
= x3 + 3x2 y + 3xy + y y
Surds and Exponents (indices)
Equating rational parts on both sides
x3 + 3xy = 9 ab2 Surd
or x3 + 3x (x2 + b2 – 12a2) – 9ab2 A surd is an irrational number. In general if
=0 x is rational, n is positive integer and if
[ y = x2 + b2 – 12a2] n
x is irrational, then n x is called a surd
By remainder theorem we get x = 3a. of nth power.
 y = b2 – 3a2 Here x is called radicand, n is called
Hence required cube root is radical sign and the index n is called order
= 3a + (b 2 – 3a 2 ) of the surd. n x is read as nth root of x
Example - 8 1
and can be written as 1/ n .
x
Find the cube root of 38 14 – 100 2 n
x are called simple surds. If n x is a
Solution: surd of nth order then
38 14 – 100 2  When n = 2, it is called quadratic surd
= –2 2 (50 – 19 7 )  When x = 3, it is called cubic surd

ANCE 10
 Number System

 When n = 4, it is called biquadratic surd Similar Surds:

Note:- Every surd is an irrational number If two surds are different multiples of the
but every irrational is not a surd. So the same surd. They are called Similar Surds
representation of monomial surd on a otherwise they are Dissimilar Surds.
number line is same that of irrational
numbers e.g., 2 2, 5 2 are Similar Surds and
e.g., 3 3 , 6 5 are Dissimilar Surds
 3 is a surd and 3 is irrational number Rationalization of Surds:
  is an irrational number but it is not a surd The process of converting a surd to a
rational number by multiplying it with a
 Types of Surds : suitable Rationalising Factor.
Pure Surd : Rationalising Factor:
A surd which has unity only as rational When the product of two surds is a rational
factor the other factor being irrational is
number, t hen each surd is called
called Pure Surd.
Rationalizing Factor (R.F.)
e.g., 2 , 3 3 , 4 4 , 4 5 e.g., ( 3  2) ( 3 – 2) = 3 – 2 = 1
Mixed Surd: which is rational
A surd consisting of the product of a R.F. of Monomial Surd:
rational and irrational is called Mixed Surd
 1
1– 
e.g., 5 3 , 12 , and if a is rational number One of R.F. of a1/n is a  n 
and not equal to zero and n
b is a surd, e.g., 53/5 and 52/5 are Rationalising Factor
then a + n b , a – n b are mixed surd. If of each other
a = 0 they are called pure surd. Mixed R.F. of Binomial Surd:
Surd can be written as Pure Surd.  R.F. of (a + b ) is (a – b)
Compound Surd :
A surd which is the sum or difference of  R.F. of a – b is a  b
two or more surds is called Compound R.F. of Trinomial Surd:
Surd.
R.F. of  ( a  b) – c)  is
e.g., 2 + 3 3 , 1 + 2 – 3 .
Monomial Surd :  ( a  b )  c) 
A surd consisting only one surd is called  
Monomial Surd. Conjugate Surds:
e.g., 3 5 , 5 7 Two conjugate surds which are differ only
Binomial Surd: in signs (+/–) between them
A compound surd consisting of two surds e.g., a + b and a – b are Conjugate
is called a Binomial Surd.
Surds
e.g.,. 2 + 3 3 , 3 – 7
Some times conjugate and reciprocal are
Trinomial Surd: same
A compound surd consist of 3 surds is
called Trinomial Surd. e.g., 2 – 3 is conjugate of 2 + 3 and
e.g., 7 + 5 – 3 , 3 5 – 4 2 – 2 11 reciprocal of 2 – 3 is 2 + 3

ANCE 11
 Number System

 Some Important Results: n

a n a
(ii) n

 If a + b =c+ d where a, c are rational b b
number and b , d are surds, then If the given surds are not of same order
a = c and b = d then they are converted to the lowest
common order then operation is performed.
 If a, b, a 2  b are positive rational
 Identification of Surds :
numbers and b is a surd, then
(i) 4
25 is a surd as radicand is a rational
a  a2 – b number.
a– a2 – b
a b  
2 2 Similar examples 3 5 , 4 12 , 5 7 , 12 , ....
 If a, b, c, d are positive rational numbers (ii)
3  1 is a surd (as surd + rational number
and b, c, d are surds then will give a surd)
Similar examples
bd bc cd
a b  c  d  4 4 4 3– 2 ,2+ 3, 3
3 + 1,....
4c 4d 4b
(iii) 9  4 5 is a surd as 94 5 is a
4b 2  k
 5 ak b  –b b
5 perfect square of 2  5 .  
b–c Similar examples
 3 ab c   c
3 7  4 3 , 7  4 3 , 9  4 5 ,....
3
 a  3 b is a R.F. of (iv) 3 3
5 is a surd as
a2/3 – a1/3.b1/.3 + b2/3 and vice versa 1
 1 3 1
 3
a  3 b is R.F. of a2/3 + a1/3b1/3 + b2/3 and ((5)1/ 2 )1/ 3   5 6   518  18 5
vice versa  
2 2
 (a  b ) x –k
 (a – b) x –k = 2a, a2 – b = 1 Similar examples 3 3 , 4 5 6 ,.....
 x=± (v) These are not a surds:
k 1
(a) 9  3 is not a surd.
 Comparision of Surds :
(b) 1 5 , because 1 5 is not a
If two surds are of same order then one
whose radicand is larger is the larger of the perfect square.
two or if x > y > 0 and n > 1 is + ve (c) 3
3  2 , because radicand is an
n
integer then x > n y irrational number.
e.g., 3
19  3 13 , 7
18  7 93 Laws of Surds and Exponents
 Multiplication and Division of If a > 0, b > 0 and n is a positive rational
Surds : number then
The surds of the same order can be •  a
n n n
 an  a
multiplied or divided by using the rules • n
a  n b  n ab
n n n
(i) a  b  ab [Here order should be same]

ANCE 12
 Number System

n n a Solution :
• a  b  n
b LCM of 3 & 4 is 12
• n m
a  nm
a  m n
a 31/3 = 34/12 = 12
34
12
• n
a 
n p
ap , n
a p  a p/ n 21/4 = 23/12 = 23

Or, n m
a 
np
a m  p = n p (a m ) p =  3  2  
12 4 12 3 12
(34 )(23 )
[Important for changing order of surds] = 12
81 8
• m
a  n a  mn a m  n = 12
648
m
a mn m n Example - 12
• n
 a
a Arrange 4 6 , 3 7 and 5 in ascending
1
• if an = b then a = b  a = n
n
b order.
m Solution :
• n
am  a n L.C.M. of 4, 3, 2 is 12.
Example - 9 1 3
 4
6  6 4  612  12 63  12 216
If x  3  31/ 3  32 / 3 , then find the value of 1 4
x3 - 9x2 + 18x - 12. 3
7  7 3  7 12  12 7 4  12 2401
Solution : 1 6
5  5 2  512  12 56  12 15625
x  3  31/ 3  32 / 3
hence ascending order
x  3  31/ 3  32 / 3
cubing both sides 12
216 , 12 2401, 12 15625

( x  3)3  31 / 3  32 / 3 
3
i.e., 4
6, 3 7, 5
x 3  9 x 2  27 x  27  12 3(3)(x  3)
Logarithm

since 31/3  32 / 3  x  3  If ‘a’ is a positive real number, not equal
x3 – 9x2 + 18 x – 12 = 0 to 1 and x is a rational number such that
Example - 10 ax = N, then x is the Logarithm of N to
If ax = m, ay = n and a2 =(mynx)z then find the base a.
the value of xyz  If ax = N then loga N = x.
Solution : [Remember N will be + ve i.e., N  0]
Given a2 =(mynx)z e.g., 23 = 8 then log28 = 3
a2 = [(ax)y . (ay)x]z [ m = ax, n = ay] System of Logarithms
a2 = [axy . axy]z There are two systems which are general
a2 = [a2xy]z used Napierian Logarithms and Common
Logarithms
a2 = a2xyz
here base is same (a) Napierian Logarithms : The logarithms
of numbers calculated to the base ‘e’ are
hence 2 = 2xyz
called Natural Logarithms or Napierian
xyz = 1 Logarithms. Here e is an irrational number
Example - 11 lying between 2 and 3 (Approx value of
Simplify 3
3 × 4
2 e = 2.73)

ANCE 13
 Number System

(b) Common Logarithms : Logarithms to the (v) log b a log c b  log c a

base 10 are called Common Logarithms.
(vi) logam . logma = 1
Properties of Logarithms (vii) If ‘a’ is a positive real number and ‘n’ is a
 Logs are defined only for positive real positive rational number, then
numbers a log a n = n
 Logs are defined only for positive bases (viii) If ‘a’ is a positive real number and ‘n’ is a
different from 1. positive rational number, then
 In logba, neither a nor b is negative i.e., log log a q n p 
p
log a n
of (–)ve number not defined but the value q
of logba can be negative 1
(ix) log a n m  log m
e.g., 10–2 = 0.01, log10 0.01 = – 2 n
 Log of 0 is not defined as an = 0 not (x) p log a q  p log a p
possible
1
 Log of 1 to any base is 0. (xi) log a m 
log m a
e.g., log21 = 0 ( 20 = 1)
 Log of a number to the same base is 1.
(x) log e  log1e  0
e

e.g., log4 4 = 1  mn 
 Logs of the same number to different base (xi) loga    loga m  loga n  loga p  loga q
 pq 
have different values. i.e., if m  n then
logma  logna. In other words, if logm a = (xii) e log x  x
logna then m = n. (xiii) log b a  log c a. log b c
e.g., log216 = logn16  n = 2, log216  1
log4 16. Here m  n (xiv) log b a  log b a
2
 Logs of different numbers to the same base m
are different i.e., if a  b, then logma  (xv) log a n x m = log a x
n
logmb. In other words if logma = logm b (xvi) If a  1, a > 0 then
then a = b
log a a = 1
e.g., log102  log103 a b
log102 = log10y  y = 2  a=b log e e = 1
(xvii) log a 1 = 0 (a > 0, a  1)
(xviii) alog m = mlog a
Logarithm to any base a (where a > 0 and
a  1).
(i) loga(mn) = logam + logan (i) If a > 1 then
[Where m and n are +ve numbers] (a) loga x < 0 for all x satisfying
0 < x < 1 (curve lies below x axis)
m
(ii) loga  n  = logam - logan (b) loga x = 0 for x = 1
 
(c) loga x > 0 for x > 1
(iii) log am = m log a (curve lies above x axis)
log b m (d) x > y  loga x > loga y i.e., loga x is an
(iv) logam = (change of base rule)
log b a increasing function.

ANCE 14
 Number System

 graph of y = loga x, a > 1 a  2b

log y =
5
Again multiplying (2) by 3 and adding
5 log x = a + 3b
a  3b
log x =
5
Example - 14

Find the value of

 16   25   81 
7 log   + 5 log   + 3 log  
 15   24   80 
(ii) If 0 < a < 1, then
Solution :
(a) loga x < 0 for all x > 1
(curve lies below x axis)  16   25   81 
7 log   + 5 log   + 3 log  
(b) loga x = 0 for x = 1  15   24   80 
(c) loga x > 0 for all x satisfying  24   52   34 
0<x<1  
= 7 log  3 5   5 log 
 23  3    3 log 
4 
(curve lies above x axis)      5 2 
(d) x > y  loga x < loga y i.e., loga x = 7(4log2 – log3 – log5) + 5 (2log5 –
is a decreasing function. 3log2 – log3) + 3(4log3 – log5 – 4log2)
 graph of y = loga x, 0 < a < 1. = 28log2 – 7log3 – 7log5 + 10 log5 –
15log2 – 5log 3 + 12log 3 – 3log5 – 12log2
= 28log2– 27log2
= log2
Example - 15
8
If logx256 = then find x
5
Solution :
8
logx256 =
5
x8/5 = 256
(x1/5)8 = 28
Example - 13
x x1/5 = 2 or x = 25
If log (x2y3) = a and log = b, Find  x = 32
y
log x and log y Example - 16
5
Solution : x Evaluate : 42log 4
 log (x2y3) = a and log   = b Solution :
 y 5 5
 2 log x + 3 log y = a .....(1) Given 4 2 log 4 = 4 2.4  log 4
and log x – log y = b .....(2) [ am+n = am.an]
Multiply (2) by 2 and subtracting from (1) 5–1
= 16.4log 4
we have 16
= 16 × 5 –1 =
5 log y = a – 2b 5

ANCE 15
 Number System

Example - 17 Note :- The numbers with unit digit 0, 1, 5 and 6

always give the same unit digits respectively,
Find x if log x 3  log x 9  log x 729 = 9
on squaring.
Solution :
log x 3  log x 9  log x 729 = 9 Sum of Divisor of Composite Number
log x 3  log x 32  log x 36 = 9  For composite number N and its prime
factors be a, b, c, d......... etc and p,q,r,s
log x 3  2 log x 3  6 log x 3 = 9
etc, be the indices ( or powers) of a, b, c,
9 log x 3 = 9
d.....etc, respectively i.e., N can be
9 expressed as N = ap. bq. cr. ds..............
logx3 = =1
9  Then number of total divisors or factors of
x1 = 3  x=3 N is (p + 1) (q + 1) (r + 1) (s + 1)....

Factors and Multiples  a p 1  1  b q 1  1 

 Sum of divisors is  a  1  b  1  ....
Factors : ‘a’ is a factor of ‘b’ if there   
exists a relation such that a  n  b, where  This includes 1 and number itself.
‘n’ is any natural number.  If a and b leaves same remainder when
e.g., Factors of 35 = 1, 5, 7, 35 divided by m then m divides (a – b)
Multiples : ‘a’ is a multiple of ‘b’ if there  If the sum of the remainders of a and b
exists a relation of the type b  n  a . Thus when divides by m is divisible by m then
(a + b) is divisible by m and conversely.
the multiples of 8 are 8×1 = 8, 8 × 2 =16,
8 × 3 = 24, 8 × 4 =32 and so on. Example - 18
 1 is a factor of every number Find total number of factors & sum of the
 Every number is a factor of itself divisors of 24
Solution :
 Every number except 1 has at least two
Factors of 24 = 23 × 31 = [2 × 2 × 2 × 3]
factors, i.e., 1 and itself
 Number of factors = (3 + 1) (1 + 1) = 8
 Every number is a multiple of itself
sum of all divisors
 Every number has infinite number of its
multiples (a p1 –1)(b q 1 –1)(c r 1 –1)(d s 1 –1)
N =
 Every multiple of a number is greater than (a –1)(b –1)(c –1)(d –1)
or equal to itself
(24 –1)(32 –1) (15) (8)
 Every factor of a number is less than or = = (1) (2) = 60
(2 –1)(3 –1)
equal to that number

 Factorisation : If a natural number is Product of Factors :

expressed as the product of prime numbers Product of Factors of Composite Number
= Nn/2, where n is the total number of
then it is called factorization.
factors of N.
e.g., 72 = 2 × 2 ×2× 3 × 3 is expressed
in the factorised form in terms of it’s basic Example - 19
prime factors. Find the product of divisors of 7056

ANCE 16
 Number System

Solution : Some of these are odd multiples and some

Since 7056 = 24 × 32 × 72 are even. The odd multiples are formed
 Number of factors/divisors of 7056 only with the combination of 3s and 5s.
= (4 + 1) (2 + 1) (2 + 1) = 45 So, the total number of odd factors is
Product of factors = (7056)45/2 = (84)45 (7 + 1) (2 + 1) = 24.
Therefore, the number of even factors
 Number of Odd Factors :
= 168 - 24 = 144.
If N = (p1a × p2b ×.....)
(Here p1, p2.......are odd prime factors and  H.C.F and L.C.M:
e is even prime factor) H.C.F. (Highest Common Factor):
Then total number of odd factors The greatest number which divides all the
(a + 1) (b + 1) (c + 1) given numbers is called Highest Common
 Number of Even Factors : Factor (H.C.F.)
Number of Even Factors of a Composite e.g., 18 and 30 are the given numbers 6 is
Numbers = (Total number of factors of the only greatest number which divides both
given number – total number of odd 18 and 30 exactly
factors) Note :- The product of two numbers a
and b is equal to the product of their
Example - 20
L.C.M. and H.C.F.
If N  a 4  b 3  c 7 . Find the number of a × b = H.C.F. × L.C.M.
perfect squares which are factors of N (The Product of ‘n’ number
three prime numbers a, b, c,>2),.
= (H.C.F. of each pair)n – 1 × L.C.M. of
Solution :
n pair
In order that the perfect square divides N,
the powers of ‘a’ can be 0, 2 or 4, i.e., 3,  L.C.M. (Least Common Multiple):
Power of ‘b’ can be 0, 2, i.e., 2, Power of The least number which is exactly divisible
‘c’ can be 0, 2, 4 or 6, i.e., 4. by all the given numbers is Least Common
Hence, a combination of these powers given Multiple
3  2  4 i.e., 24 numbers. e.g., L.C.M. of 6, 8 and 12 is 24
So, there are 24 perfect squares that
divides N. Example-22
Example - 21 Find the least number which when divided
If N = 123  34  52 , find the total number by 20, 25, 35 and 40 leaves remainder 14,
of even factors of N. 19, 29 and 34 respectively
Solution : Solution:
The fact orised form of N is (20 – 14) = 6, (25 – 19) = 6, 35 – 29 = 6
(22  31)3  34  52  26  37  52. 40 – 34 = 6 = r
Hence, the total number of factors of N is Required number = LCM of (20, 25, 35
(6 + 1) (7 + 1) (2 + 1) = 7  8  3 = 168. and 40) – 6 = 1400 – 6 = 1394

ANCE 17
 Number System

2 2 0, 2 5, 3 5, 40 H.C.F. = 12
2 1 0, 2 5, 3 5, 20 Required No. = 12
2 5, 2 5, 3 5, 10 H.C.F and L.C.M of Fractions
5 5 2 5, 3 5, 5
H.C.F. of fractions
5 1 5 7 1
H.C.F. of Numerators
7 1 1 7 1 
L.C.M. of Denominators
1 1 1 1
 L.C.M. of fractions
Example - 23 L.C.M. of Numerators
Find the least number which when divided 
H.C.F. of Denominators
by a, b and c leaves the same remainder
‘r’ in each case Note : Make sure the fractions are in the most
Solution: reducible form.
Let L.C.M. of a, b and c = M Example - 26
Required number = M + r 2 4 5
Find the L.C.M. of , and
3 5 7
Example - 24 Solution :
The traffic lights at three different road 2 4 5
crossing change after every 48 sec, 72 sec L.C.M. of , and
3 5 7
and 108 sec respectively. If they all change
simultaneously at 8 : 20 : 00 hours, then at L.C.M. of 2,4 and 5 20
= = = 20
what t ime will t hey again change H.C.F. of 3,5 and 7 1
simultaneously ? Example - 27
Solution: L.C.M. of two distinct natural numbers is
Interval of change = (L.C.M. of 48, 72, 211, what is their H.C.F.?
108) sec = 432 sec Solution :
So the light will again change simultaneously 211 is a prime number, so there is only one
after every 432 seconds i.e., 7min 12 sec. pair of distinct numbers possible whose
L.C.M. is 211, i.e., 1 and 211, H.C.F. of
Hence next simultaneous change will take
1 and 211 is 1.
place at 8 : 27 : 12 hrs.
Example - 28
Example - 25 Find number of prime factors in
Find the greatest number that will divide 148, 2222 × 3333 × 5555
246, 623 leaving remainders 4, 6 and 11 Solution :
respectively No. of prime factors = 222 + 333 + 555
Solution: = 1110
Required No. = H.C.F. of (148 – 4), (246
– 6) and (623 – 11) Divisibility
= H.C.F. of (144, 240 and 612) Division Algorithm : General representation
2 144, 240, 612 of result is:
Dividend Re mainder
2 72, 120, 306  Quotient 
Divisor Divisor
3 36, 60, 153
Dividend = (Divisor  Quotient) +
12, 20, 51 Remainder

ANCE 18
 Number System

TEST OF DIVISIBILITY
No. Divisibility Test Examples
2 Unit digit should be 0 or even . 4096, 23548 as they end with 6 and 8
i.e., even numbers
3 The sum of digits of no. should be divisible by 3. 2143251, sum of the digits is 18 and it is
divisible by 3
4 The no. formed by last 2 digits of given no. 548, here 48  4 = 12 and it is divisible by 4
should be divisible by 4.
5 Unit digit should be 0 or 5. 4095 and 235060 as they have 5, 0 at unit places.
6 No should be divisible by 2 & 3 both. 753618, sum of the digits is 30 and it is divisible
by 2 and 3.
8 The number formed by last 3 digits of given 5432, here 432 is divisible by 8
no. should be divisible by 8.
9 Sum of digits of given no. should be divisible 125847, sum of the digits is 27 and it is
by 9 divisible by 9
11 The difference between sums of the digits 9582540, here sum of odd places- sum of
at even & at odd places should be zero or even places (22 – 11 = 11) and 11 is a divisible
multiple of 11. by 11.
25 Last 2 digits of the number should be 2500, 2550 etc.
00, 25, 50 or 75.

 Divisibility of Algebric Expressions: Rule for 13 :

* The expression an – bn is always divisible Four times the last digit and add to
by (a – b) for all values of n (odd or even) remaining number the result should be
* The expression an – bn is exactly divisible divisible by 13.
by ( a + b) when n is even. e.g., 169
* The expression an + bn is exactly divisible  16 + (9 × 4) = 16 + 36 = 52 is divisible
by ( a + b) when n is odd. by 13
* The expression an + bn never divisible by
 169 is divisible by 13
(a – b) whenever n is odd or even.
Rule for 17 :
* The product of n consecutive integers is
divisible by n! Five times the last digit of the number and
* (a1 + a2 + ...+ an)! is divisible by subtract from previous number the result
a1! a2! ...... an! obtained should be either 0 or divisible
by 17.
Rule for 7 : e.g., 1357
Double the last digit of given number and = 135 – 7 × 5 = 135 – 35 = 100
subtract from remaining number the result
should be zero or divisible by 7. = 17 – ( 0 ×5) = 17 – 0 = 17
e.g., 6545  1357 is divisible by 17.
 654 – (5 × 2) = 644, 64 – (4 × 2) Rule for 19 :
= 56 Double the last digit of given number and
It is divisible by 7. add to remaining number. The result
 6545 is divisible by 7. obtained should be divisible by 19.

ANCE 19
 Number System

e.g., 361 Solution:

= 36 + (1 × 2) = 36 + 2 = 38 Since given No. 918 MK is divisible by 3
38 is divisible by 19. So the sum of the digits must be divisible
 361 is divisible by 19. by 3
9+1+8+2+M+K
Example - 29 20 + M + K
Find the smallest number of seven digits Here if M and K = 0, it is not divisible by 3.
which is exactly divisible by 1111 But 918200 is divisible by 4.
Solution: To make it divisible by 3
Smallest number of seven digit = 1000000 20 + M + k must be 24
On dividing by 1111 we get 100 as  we should add 4.
remainder So we can take M = 0, K = 4 .......(i)
Number to be added M = 2, K = 2 .......(ii)
= (1111 – 100) = 1011 M = 4, K = 0 ......(iii)
Required number = 1000000 + 1011 M = 1, K = 3 ......(iv)
= 1001011 M = 3, K =1 .......(v)
Example - 30 Such No.s are
Find the largest 2 digit No. which when 918204 divisible by 3 and 4
reduced by 24 is perfectly divisible by all 918240 divisible by 3 and 4
even numbers less than 10 918222 not divisible by 3 and 4
918213 not divisible by 3 and 4
Solution:
918231 not divisible by 3 and 4
Even natural numbers less than 10 are 2,
 The numbers can be both
4, 6, 8
918204 and 918240 are divisible by 3 and
L.C.M. of 2, 4, 6 and 8 = 24 4 both
ATQ 24 × 4 = 96 is the largest 2 digit 04 and 40 both are correct in place of M
number which when reduced by 24 is and K.
perfectly divisible by all even numbers less
than 10 i.e., 46 – 24 = 72. Remainders
Example - 31 The method of finding the remainder without
How many numbers between 100 and 300 actually performing the process of division
are divisible by 2, 3 and 4 is termed as Remainder Theorem.
Solution: Note :- Remainder should always be positive. For
Each such number must be divisible by example if we divided – 32 by 7, generally
L.C.M. of 2, 3 and 4 we get –4 as quotient and – 4 as remainder.
i.e., 12 But this is wrong because remainder is never
be negative hence the quotient should be
108, 120, 132, 144, 156, 168, 180, 192,
– 4 and remainder is + 4.
204, 216, 228, 240, 252, 264, 276, 288,
300. Example - 33
Example - 32 Two numbers, x and y, are such that when
Which digits should came in place of M and divided by 5, they leave remainders 3 and
K. If the number 9182 MK is divisible by 4 respectively. Find the remainder, when
(x2 + y2) is divided by 5.
both 3 and 4.

ANCE 20
 Number System

Solution :  Respective remainders are 5, 4, 3.

Suppose x = 5K1 + 3 and y = 5K2 + 4 To find the remainder of big number
x2 + y2 = (5K1 + 3)2 + (5K2 + 4)2  Binomial Expansion :
= 25K12 + 30K1 + 9 + 25 K22 + 40 K2 + 16 The binomial expansion is derived by a
= 25K12 + 30K1 + 25 K22 + 40 K2 + 25 famous methamatician Newton.
Obviously when this is divided by 5, the ( x  y) n  n c 0 ( x ) n ( y ) 0  n c 1 ( x ) n  1 ( y) 1 
remainder will be 0. n
c 2 ( x ) n  2 ( y) 2  n c 3 ( x ) n  3 ( y) 3  ......
Example - 34
 n c n ( x ) n  n ( y) n
A number when divided by 189 leaves a
remainder 129. What will be the remainder n n!
Where cr 
when the same number is divided by 27? r ! (n  r)!
Solution :  Properties of binomial expansion :
Let the number be P. (i) The coefficients of the first and last term of
So. P – 129 is divisible by 189. the expansion are one.
P  129 (ii) The coefficients of second & last but one
Let Q be the quotient then, =Q of the expansion are equal to the power of
189
binomial.
 P = 189Q + 129 (iii) The total number of terms in the expansion
P 189Q  129 is (n + 1).
 
27 27 Example - 36
189 is divisible by 27, What is the remainder when 354 + 27 is
 When 129 divided by 27, leaves a divided by 28 ?
remainder of 21. Solution:
Example - 35 354 = (33)18
354 + 27 = (33)18 + 27
A number being successively divided by 4,
= (27)18 + 27
5 and 7 leaves remainders 2, 4 and 6
respectively. Find the respective remainders = (28 – 1)18 + 27
if the order of divisors he reversed. = 28M + (–1)18 + 27
(Binomial Theorem)
Solution :
= 28M + 1 + 27 = 28M + 28
4 X When 28M + 28 divided by 28
5 Y 2 The remainder is 0
7 Z 4 Example - 37
1 6
What is the remainder when 599 is divided
 z = (7  1 + 6) = 13 ;
by 13
y = (5z + 4) = (5 ×13 + 4 ) = 69 ; Solution:
x = (4y + 2) = (4  69 + 2) = 278. 599 = 598 × 5 = (52)49 × 5
7 278 = (26 – 1)49 × 5
5 39 5  (2 × 13 – 1)49 × 5 when divided by 13
Now, 7
4 4 = (–1)49 × 5 = –5 = – 13 + 8
1 3 The remainder is 8

ANCE 21
 Number System

Example - 38  To Find the Unit Digit in Exponential

55
Find the remainder when x = 55 Expressions:
(24 times 5) is divided by 24 is  When there is 2 in unit’s place of any
Solution: number :
55
Note that 55 (23 times 5) is an odd natural Since, in 21 unit digit is 2, in 22 unit digit is
4, in 23 unit digit is 8, in 24 unit digit is 6,
number.
after that the unit’s digit repeats, e.g., unit
 x = 52m + 1 = (25m)5 = (24 + 1) m 5 digit (12)10 is equal to the unit digit of, 22
= 5 + multiple of 24, when divided by 24. i.e., 4.
Remainder is 5. e.g., In (52)43 unit digit is 8
Example - 39  When there is 3 in unit’s place of any
Find the remainder when 2 2002
is divisible number :
by 17 Since, in 31 unit digit is 3, in 32 unit digit is
Solution : 9, in 33 unit digit is 7, in 34 unit digit is 1,
after that the unit’s digit repeats.
24 = 16 = 17 – 1
e.g., In (763)84 unit digit is 1.
(24)500 = (17 – 1)500
2 2000 = 17500 – 500C1 17499 ........  When there is 4 in unit’s place of any
500
C499(17) + 1 number :
= 17 (17499 – 500 17498 ...500) + 1 Since, in 41 unit digit is 4, in 42 unit digit is
6, after that the unit’s digit repeats.
= 17 K + 1 (K  N)
e.g., In (44)33 unit digit is 4.
22002 = 22000 × 22 = 4 × 22000
= 4 (17 K + 1)  When there is 5 in unit’s place of any
= 17 (4K) + 4 number :
Since, in 51 unit digit is 5, in 52 unit digit is
= 17(4K) + Remainder, when
5 and so on.
divided by 17.
e.g., In (65)12 unit digit is 5.
Remainder is 4.
 When there is 6 in unit’s place of any
Cyclicity number :
Since, in 61 unit digit is 6, in 62 unit digit is
We are having 10 digits in our number
6 & so on.
systems and some of them shows special
e.g., In (56)13 unit digit is 6.
characteristics like they, repeat their unit
digit after a cycle, for example 1 repeat its  When there is 7 in unit’s place of any
unit digit after every consecutive power, So, number :
its cyclicity is 1 on the other hand digit 2 Since, in 71 unit digit is 7, in 72 unit digit is
repeat its unit digit after every four power, 9, in 73 unit digit is 3, in 74 unit digit is 1,
hence the cyclicity of 2 is four. The cyclicity after that the unit’s digit repeats.
of digits are as follows. e.g., In (87)99 unit digit is 3.

ANCE 22
 Number System

 When there is 8 in unit’s place of any Solution:

number : Unit digit in (44)44 = 6
Since, in 81 unit digit is 8, in 82 unit digit is Unit digit in (55)55 = 5
4, in 83 unit digit is 2, in 84 unit digit is 6, Unit digit is (88)88 = 6
after the unit’s digit repeats after a group 6 + 5 + 6 = 17
of 4. Last digit is 7
e.g., In (8)25 unit digit is 8. Example - 43
3446
What will be the last digit 4345
 When there is 9 in unit’s place of any
Solution:
number : 46
4534
2
Since, in unit’s digit is 9, in 9 unit’s digit is Let 43 = (43)x
46

1, after that unit’s digit repeats after a group where x = 4534 = (45)even power
of 2. Cyclicity of 3 is 4
e.g., In (49)15 unit digit is 9. To find the last digit we have to find
remainder when x is divided by 4
 When there is zero in unit’s place of x = (45)even power = (44+1)even power
any number : When x is divide by 4 so remainder will
Then the unit digit will always be zero. be 1.
12 3446
e.g., In (400) unit digit is 0.
Therefore, last digit of (43) 45 will be
Example - 40 31 = 3
Find the last digit of 795.
 To Find the Last Two Digits in
Solution: Exponential Expressions :
The cyclicity of 7 is 4 We know that the binomial theorem :
so divide 95 by 4. Hence it gives the
remainder 3. i.e., 73 a  b n  a n  n a n 1b  n (n  1) a n  2 b 2  ...  b.n
1! 2!
so the last digit is 3  Last two digits of numbers ending in 1:
Example - 41 Let’s start with some examples.
Find the last digit of (67)153 × (41)72 Example - 44
Solution: What are the last two digits of 41296
Since cyclicity of 7 is 4 and cyclicity of 1 Solution:
is 1 (41) 296 = (40 + 1) 296 = (40) 296 +
so divide 153 by 4 it gives the remainder 296  40295 2 9 6  4 0 295
one i.e., 7' × 1 + × 40294
1! 2!
Hence unit digit is 7 .........1296
Unit digit of (41)72 is 1 Note that all the terms excluding last two
So product of (7 × 1) = 7 terms will end in two or more zeros. The
last two terms are 296 × 40 × 1296 and
Example - 42 1296. Now the second last term will end
What will be the last digit (44)44 + (55)55 with one zero and the tens digit of second
+ (88) 88 last term will be product of 296 and 4 i.e.,

ANCE 23
 Number System

4. Therefore, the last two digits of the Note :- Here if you need to multiply 76 with 2n,
second last term will be 40. The last digit then you can straightaway write the last
of the last term is 1. So the last two digits two digits of 2n because when 76 is
296
of (41) are 41. multiplied with 2n the last two digits remain
the same as the last two digits of 2n.
Example - 45
Therefore, the last two digits of 76  27
Find the last two digit of (29)26
will be the last two digits of 27 = 28.
Solution:
(29)26 = [(29)2]13 now 292 ends in Example - 47
2
41(29 = 841) Find the last two digits of (76)283.
Therefore we need to find the last two digits Solution:
of (41)13 (76)283 = (22 × 19)283 = 2566 × 19283
Once the number is ending in 1 we can = (210 )56 × 26 × (19)280 × 193
straight away get the last two digits with = (210 )56 × 26 × (194)70 × 193
the help of previous method The last two
= 76 × 64 × (21)70 × 59
digits are 21 (4 × 3 = 12 so the tenth digit
will be 2 and last digit will be 1) = 76 × 64 × (01) × 59 = 76

Example - 46 Example - 48
Find the last two digits of (77)288 Find the last two digits of (94)588
Solution: Solution:
4 72
(94)588 = (2 × 47)588
 (77)  Therefore we need to find the = 2588 × 47588
72
last two digits of = (01) = (210)58 × 28 × (474)147
 4
(77) = 2501 = 76 × 56 × (474)35 × 477
Therefore by previous method = 76 × 56 × (81)35 × 474 × 473
72
(00 + 1) = 00 + 72 × 0 × 1 .......... 72 = 76 × 56 × (1)35 × 81 × 23
× 00 × 1 and 172 = 76 × 56 × 1 × 63
So the last two digits of the second last = 28
term will be 0 and the last digit of the last
term 1. so the last two digits of (2501)72 = Example - 49
0 + 1 = 01 Find the last two digits of (58)279
 Last two digits of numbers ending in 2, 4, Solution:
6 or 8. (58)279 = (2 × 29)279 = 2279 × 29279
There is only one even two-digit number (210)27 × 29 × (292)139 × 29
which always ends in itself (last two digits)  292 = 41
76 i.e., 76 raised to any power gives the = 24 × 12 × 61 × 29 = 52
last two digits as 76. Therefore, our purpose  (41)139 = 61
is to get 76 as last two digits for even
numbers,. When know that 242 ends in 76 Highest Power Dividing a Factorial
and 210 ends in 24. Also, 24 raised to an
Factorial n! : The product of n consecutive
even power always ends with 76 and 24
natural numbers is called Factorial n!
raised to an odd power always ends with
24. Therefore, 2434 will end in 76 and 2453 n! = n (n – 1) (n – 2) .....3.2.1.
will end in 24. e.g., 4! = 4 ×3 × 2 × 1 = 24

ANCE 24
 Number System

Note:- The value of factorial zero 0! is equal to Solution:

value of factorial one 1! i.e., = 1 Number of zeros at the end of (5n – 1)! is
The method to find highest power of p 5n  4n  1
(prime number) dividing n! is 4
n  n n Number of zeros at the end of
k(n!) =   +  2  +  3  + 53  43  1 60
p p  p  3
124! = (5  1)! = = = 15
n 4 4
 p 4  + ...... Example - 53
 
What is the highest power of 15 in 100!
Example - 50 Solution :
Find the highest power of 3 that divides Here 15 = 5 × 3
100!
We first find highest power of 3
Solution:
E3 (100!) = 48
Here p = 3 and n = 100
[ E3 means exponent of 3]
n  100   1
 p  =  3  = 33 3  = 33 E5(100!) = 24
       E15(100!) = min (24, 48) = 24
n  33 
2 =   = [11] = 11 1 Example - 54
p 3
What is the largest power of 12 that would
n 11
    2 divided 49!?
 p3  =  3  = 3 3  = 3
      Solution :
n 3 To check the highest power of 12 in 49!
 p4  =  3  = 1 We need to check the highest powers of 4
   
and 3 in it.
n 1
 p5  = =0 Highest power of 3 in 49! = 22
  3 Highest power of 2 in 49! = 46
Therefore the highest power of P that 46
divides 100!  Highest power of 4 in 49! =  23
2
n  n  n n n  Highest power of 12 will be 22.

 p   p2  +  p3  +  p4  +  p5  (Since the common power between 3 and
         
= 33 + 11 +3 + 1 + 0 = 48 4 is 22).
Example - 55
Example - 51
How many zeros will be there at 26!26! What is the highest power of 6 that
divides 9!.
Solution:
Highest power of 5 in 26! is 6. Solution :
So there will be 6 zeros at the end of 26! 9 9
By the normal method,  1 and 2  0.
6 6
So at the end of 26!, there will be 6 × 26!
Thus answers we get is 1 which is wrong.
zeros.
True there is just one multiple of 6 from 1
Example - 52 to 9 but the product 2  3 = 6 and also
The number of zeros at the end of 124! 4  9 = 36, can further be divided by 6.

ANCE 25
 Number System

Thus, when the divisor is a composite (a) 0 (b) 1 (c) 2 (d) 3

number find the highest power of its prime 6. Find the value of
factors and then proceed. In this case, 9!
Can be divided by 27 and 34 and thus by  1  1  1  1 
1  2  1  3  1  4  . . . . . 1  2007 
64 (in this case we need not have checked        
power of 2 as it would definitely be greater 4 3
then that of 3). (a) (b)
2007 2005
2008 2009
(c) (d)
2 6
1. Which of the following numbers 7. The number of perfect squares below 2007
2 ,
is
3
0. 8 , 4
0.00016 , 3
–1 , 0.001 is/are (a) 25 (b) 35 (c) 45 (d) 44
rational? 8. Expressing 3185 as sum of two squares
(a) (b) is -
3
–1 2
(a) 542 + 52 (b) 562 + 72
(c) 0.001 (d) All of these
(c) 482 + 62 (d) none
2. The value of 9. The least number which is a perfect
square and is divisible by each of 16, 20
1 3 and 24 is -
+
1+ 1 3– 4
(a) 240 (b) 1600
3– 4 3+ 1
1 1 (c) 2400 (d) 3600
2+ 2– 200 192 n
1 2 10. If 2 – 2 . 31 + 2 is a perfect square,
3–
2 then n =
(a) 190 (b) 198 (c) 200 (d) 206
13 15 11 17 11. Find the square root of 7 – 4 3 .
(a) (b) (c) (d)
7 7 21 28
(a) 2 – 3 (b) 5 – 3
3. If the numerator of a fraction is decreased
by 40% and the denominator is increased (c) 5 – 3 (d) None of these
by 100% the new value is 1. What was the 12. The natural number n for which
original fraction ? 3 9 + 3 12 + 3 15 + 3 n is a perfect cube is
10 3 2 5 (a) 11 (b) 12 (c) 13 (d) 14
(a) (b) (c) (d)
3 10 3 2 13. The number of numbers are there which
4. Find the sum of the digits of the largest even are equal to the sum of the digits of their
three digit number which is not changed cubes is -
when its units and hundreds digits are (a) 5 (b) 6 (c) 7 (d) 8
interchanged ? 14. Let a, b, c, p be rational numbers. Such that
(a) 22 (b) 23 (c) 24 (d) 25 p is not a perfect cube.
5. If p, q and r are prime numbers such that If a + bp1/3 + cp2/3 = 0 then.
r = q + 2 and q = p + 2, then the number (a) a = b = c (b) a = b  c
of triplets of the form (p, q, r) is - (c) a  b = c (d) a  b  c

ANCE 26
 Number System

(a) x76/15 (b) x78/15

15. 11 11 11.......4 terms = (c) x79/15 (d) x77/15
(a) 16
115 (b) 16
11 25. Evaluate
2[(16 – 15)–1 + 25 (13 – 8)–2]–1 + (1024)°
(c) 16
1114 (d) 16
1113
(a) 2 (b) 3 (c) 1 (d) 5
16. The value of 2007
26. The sum of all the factors of 7 is
52 5–2 1 2008 1 2008
– 3 – 2 2 is– (a) ( 7  1) (b) (7  1)
5 1 2 6
(a) 1 (b) 2 2 – 1 1 2007 1 2007
(c) (7  1) (d) (7  1)
5 5 4
(c) (d) None of these 27. The product of all the factors of 52005 is
2
2 1
2 (a) 51002 × 2004 (b) 52005 × 2006

17. The value of (23  2 2 ) 3  (140  29) 2  is– (c) 52006 × 2007 (d) 51003 × 2005
 
28. If n = 10800, then number of divisors of the
(a) 196 (b) 289 (c) 324 (d) 400 form 4m + 2 is
18. The value of  6 15  2 56  .  3 7  2 2  (a) 6 (b) 12 (c) 18 (d) 22
    29. If N = 75 38 54, the sum of divisors of N
is –
will be -
(a) 0 (b) 1 (c) – 1 (d) 2
1 7 4  1 38  1 54  1
 1 1
3
 4 (a)  
19. The value of  5 8 3  27 3   is– 7 1 3  1 5 1
    76  1 39  1 55  1
(a) 3 (b) 6 (c) 5 (d) 4 (b)  
7 1 3 1 5 1
20. The exponent of 6 in 33 ! is 7 4  1 37  1 55  1
(a) 12 (b) 15 (c) 20 (d) 24 (c)  
7 1 3 1 5 1
a (d) none
21. If 0.4  .4  a = 0.04 × .4 × b , then
b
is- 30. Find the greatest four digit number which
(a) 16 × 10–3 (b) 16 × 10–4 when divided by 18 and 12 leaves a
(c) 16 × 10–5 (d) None of these remainder of 4 in each case -
(a) 9976 (b) 9940
22. If p = 3 and q = 2, the
(3p – 4q)q– p  (4p – 3q)2q – p = (c) 9904 (d) 9868
31. The number of possible pairs of number,
1 2
(a) 1 (b) 6 (c) (d) whose product is 5400 and the HCF is
6 3
30 is -
1
1
23. If  4
3
2x
2 
32
, then x = (a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 4
1 1
(a) – 2 (b) 4 (c) – 6 (d) – 4 32. The H.C.F. of 10, 20 , is -
10 10 40
x 3  3 x5 (a) 1 (b) 10
24. Evaluate  30 x 77 
5 3
x (c) 1020 (d) 10–40

ANCE 27
 Number System

33. The HCF of two numbers, obtained in three 44. The nearest whole number to one million
steps of division, is 7 and the first 3 which is divisible by 537 is -
quotients are 2, 4 and 6 respectively. Find
(a) 1000106 (b) 999894
the numbers -
(c) 1000437 (d) 999563
(a) 175, 392 (b) 189, 392
(c) 168, 385 (d) None of these 45. What will be t he remainder when
34. If the HCF of 210 and 55 is expressible in 5382 + 53 is divided by 54 ?
the from 210 × 5 + 55y. find y. (a) 0 (b) 2 (c) 50 (d) 51
(a) 9 (b) –19 (c) 29 (d) 39 46. The remainder on dividing
35. Find the largest four digit number which when 121n – 25n + 1900n – (–4)n by 2000 is-
reduced by 54, is perfectly divisible by all (a) 1000 (b) 1 (c) 0 (d) 8
even natural numbers less than 20 - 23 23
47. The remainder, when (15 – 23 ) is divided
(a) 5081 (b) 5094
by 19, is:
(c) 5001 (d) 5196
36. Three bells, toll at intervals of 36 sec, 40 (a) 4 (b) 15 (c) 0 (d) 18
sec and 48 sec respectively. They start 48. If 2100 + 3100 + 4100 + 5100 is divided by 7,
ringing toll at particular time. They next toll then the remainder is
together after - (a) 5 (b) 3 (c) 2 (d) 1
(a) 18 minutes (b) 12 minutes 49. If 3243 + 2243 is divided by 5, then the
(c) 6 minutes (d) 24 minutes
remainder is -
102 102
37. 25 – 4 is divisible by .....
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 4 (d) 0
(a) 21 (b) 25 (c) 29 (d) 30
1! 2! 3! 100!
38. 33 ! is divisible by 50. If 1!   2!   3!  ......  100! is
(a) 210 (b) 215
divided by 5, then the remainder is
(c) 220 (d) None
61 62 63 64 (a) 2 (b) 0
39. 4 + 4 + 4 + 4 is divisible by -
(a) 3 (b) 10 (c) 11 (d) 13 (c) 4 (c) None
40. If n is an odd natural number, 3 + 22n is
2n 51. The remainder when
always divisible by 1! + 2! + 3! + 4! + ..... + 100! is divided
(a) 13 (b) 5 (c) 17 (d) 19 by 120 is
n
41. If 146! is divisible by 5 , then the (a) 1
maximum value of n is - (b) 7
(a) 33 (b) 34 (c) 35 (d) 36
(c) 33
42. The least value of p such that the number
(d) cannot be determined
456p 8 is divisible by 9
(a) 2 (b) 3 (c) 4 (d) 5 52. The sum of the remainders of
43. If the number 243 × 51 is divisible by 9, 1555  1557  1559 1022  1012
and is -
then the value of digit marked as × would 13 17
be (a) 17 (b) 27
(a) 3 (b) 1 (c) 2 (d) 4 (c) 25 (d) 15

ANCE 28
 Number System
129
53. A hundred digit number is formed by 59. The last digit of 7 23 is -
writing first 54 natural numbers in front of (a) 7 (b) 9
each other as 1234578910111213............ (c) 1 (d) 3
Find the remainder when this number is 60. The number of zeros at end of 2005 ! is
divided by 8. (a) 250 (b) 300
(a) 1 (b) 7 (c) 2 (d) 0 (c) 410 (d) 500
100000
54. The unit digit of 6 is. 61. Total number of zeros at the end of
(a) 2 (b) 3 (c) 6 (d) 8 (5n – 1)! is
55. The unit’s place of the number represented 5n  4n  1 5n  4n  1
(a) (b)
by (795 – 358) is - 4 4
n n
(a) 0 (b) 4 (c) 6 (d) 7 5  4 1
(c) (d) None
56. The unit digit of 4
1781 + 2781 + 3781................+ 9781 ? 62. The highest power of 18 contained in
500 ! is
(a) 1 (b) 3 (c) 5 (d) 7
(a) 200 (b) 232
57. The unit digit of 1 ! + 2 ! + 3 ! + 4 ! + ....
(c) 1238 (d) None
+ 1997 is
63. If a number system, the product of 44 and
(a) 0 (b) 1 (c) 2 (d) 3
11 is 1034. The number of this system, when
58. The unit (ones) digit in the product converted to the decimal number system
(5 + 1) (52 + 1) (53 + 1) ... (52005 + 1) becomes:
is - (a) 406 (b) 1086
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 5 (d) 6 (c) 213 (d) 691

Q.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. a b a d b c d b d b
Q.No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. a d d a d a d b c b
Q.No. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans. c c d d a b d b d a
Q.No. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. d d a b b c c b b a
Q.No. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Ans. c c a b a c c a d a
Q.No. 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
Ans. c b a c b c d d a d
Q.No. 61 62 63
Ans. d c a

ANCE 29
 Algebra

Algebra is that branch of Mathematics in which letters represent any value which we can
assign according to our requirement. These letters are generally of two types : constants and
variables (or literal numbers).

 Constant :  Unlike terms :

A number having a fixed numerical value is Terms having different literal coefficients are
called a constant. called unlike terms.
8 Ex. 5x2,–10x and 15x3 are unlike terms.
Ex. 7, , 4.7,16.5 etc  Polynomial :
3
 Variable : An algebraic expression in which the
A number which can take various numerical variables involved have only non-negative
integral powers is called a polynomial.
values is known as variable.
Let x be a variable, n be a positive integer
Ex. x, y, z, a, b, c, etc.
and a1, a 2,....., an be constants (real
 Algebraic expression : numbers). Then,
A combination of constants and variables f(x) = anxn + an – 1xn – 1 +.....+ a1x + a0
connected by +, –, × and  signs is known is called a polynomial in variable x.
as an algebraic expression. In the polynomial,
Ex. 8x + 7, 11x2 – 13x, 5x5 + 8x2y, etc. f(x) = anxn + an – 1xn – 1 +.....+ a1 x + a0 ,
 Terms : anxn, an – 1xn – 1,..., a1x and a0 are known as
the terms of the polynomial and an, an – 1,
The parts of an algebraic expression
an – 2, ...., a1 and a 0 are called their
separated by + or – signs are called the terms
coefficients.
of the expression.
Ex. In the expression 3x + 4y –7, we call 3x, Note : Note t hat the expressions like
4y and –7 as terms. 3
2x 2  3 x  5, 2x 3   4 etc. are not
 Coefficient of a term : x
Consider the term 8x2. In this case, 8 is called polynomials.
the numerical coefficient and x2 is said to be  Degree of a Polynomial :
the literal coefficient.
The exponent of the highest term in a
In case of 9xy, we have the numerical polynomial is known as its degree.
coefficient as 9 and the literal coefficient 1
as xy. f ( x )  3x  is a polynomial in the
2
 Like terms : variable x of degree 1.
Terms having the same literal coefficients are 1
p(x)  5x 3  3x 2  x  is a
called like terms. 2
Ex. 8x2y, 5x2y and –7x2y are all like terms. polynomial in the variable x of degree 3.

ANCE 30
 Algebra

 Types of polynomials with respect to  Binomial : An expression containing two

degree :. terms is called a binomial.
1. Constant Polynomial : Ex. 3x – 8y, 4xy – 5x, 9x + 5x2, etc.
A polynomial of degree zero is called a  Trinomial : An expression containing three
constant polynomial. terms is called a trinomial.
3 Ex. 5x –2y + 3z, x2 + 2xy – 5z.,
Ex. : f ( x )  7, g ( x )   etc. are constant
2  Relation between the HCF, the LCM and
polynomial. the product of polynomials :
2. Zero Polynomial : If f(x) and g(x) are two polynomials then we
The constant polynomial 0 or f(x) = 0 is have the relation,
called the zero polynomial [HCF of f(x) and g(x)] × [LCM of f(x) and
Note : The degree of the zero polynomial is not
g(x)] =  [f (x)  g(x)]
defined, because
 Zero of a Polynomial :
f(x) = 0, g(x) = 0x, h(x) = 0x2, p(x) = 0x3,
A real number  is a zero of a polynomial
q(x) = 0x12 etc. are all equal to the zero
f(x), if f() = 0.
3. Linear Polynomial :
Finding a zero of a polynomial f(x) means
A polynomial of degree 1 is called a linear solving the polynomial equation f(x) = 0.
polynomial.
Geometrical Meaning of the Zeros of a
Generally, any linear polynomial in variable polynomial :
x with real coefficients is of the form f(x) Geometrically zeros of a polynomial are
= ax + b, where a, b are real numbers and the x-coordinates of the points where its
a  0. graph crosses or touches X-axis.
Ex. 11x – 5, 10y + 7 An nth degree polynomial can have at
4. Quadratic Polynomial : most n real zeros.
Polynomial of degree 2 is called a
 Relationship Between the Zeros
quadratic polynomial.
and Coefficient of a quadratic
Ex. 5x2 – 8x + 3 polynomial :
5. Cubic Polynomial : Let  and  be the zeros of a quadratic
A polynomial of degree 3 is called a cubic polynomial f(x) = ax2 + bx + c. By factor
polynomial. theorem (x – ) and (x – ) are the factors
Ex. 5x3– 6x2 + 7x + 8 of f(x).
6. Bi-Quadratic Polynomial :  f(x) = k (x – ) (x – ), where k is a
A fourth polynomial is called a biquadratic constant.
polynomial.  ax2 + bx + c =
Ex. 3x4 – x3 + 7x2 –2x + 1 k {x2 – (  )x + }
 ax2 + bx + c = kx2 – k ()x + k}
 Types of polynomials with respect to Comparing the coefficients of x2, x and
number of terms : constant terms on both sides, we get
 Monomial : An expression containing only a = k, b = – k (  ) and c = k
one term is called a monomial. c
b
Ex. 8x, –11x2y, –15x2y332, etc.       and  
a a

ANCE 31
 Algebra

Coefficien t of x  
 α β   (i)  2  2 (ii) 
Coefficien t of x 2  
Constant term 1 1
and αβ   3
Coefficien t of x 2 (iii) 3  3 (iv) 3
 
Hence,
 2 2
Sum of the zeros (v) 
 
b Coefficien t of x
  Sol. Since  and  are the zeros of the
a Coefficien t of x 2
Product of the zeros quadratic polynomial f(x) = ax2 + bx + c.
c Constant term b c
        and  
a Coefficien t of x 2 a a
If  and  are the zeros of a quadratic (i) We have,
polynomial f(x). Then, the polynomial f(x)  2   2  (  )2  2
is given by
22
f(x) = k {x2 – (  ) x + } 2   b  2c b  2ac
       
or f(x) = k {x2 – (Sum of the zeros) x +  a  a a
Product of the zeros} (ii) We have,
On Finding the values of expressions    2  2 (  ) 2  2
involving zeros of a quadratic polynomial :   
   
Example : b c
2

If  and  are the zeros of the quadratic    2 

a  a
polynomial f(x) = x2 – px + q, then find 
c
the values of
a
1 1 2
  b  2ac
(i) 2  2 (ii)    
    ac
Sol. Since  and  are the zeros of the
(iii) We have,
polynomial of f(x) = x2 – px + q,
p q 3  3  (  )3  3 (  )
        p and    q 3
 1  1 3 b
3 cb
     3  
(i) We have,  a  a a 
 2   2  (  )2  2  b3 3bc  b3  3 abc 3 abc  b3
 3  2  
  2   2  p 2  2q a a a3 a3
(iv) We have,
[ α  β  p and   q]
3abc  b3
(ii) We have, 1 1  3  3
   a3
1 1  p 3 3 ()3 c
3
    
   q a
Example :
If  and  are the zeros of the quadratic 1 1 3abc  b3
  
polynomial f(x) = ax2 + bx + c, then 3 3 c3
evaluate :

ANCE 32
 Algebra
(v) We have,  ax 3  bx 2  cx  d
 2 2 3  3 (  )3  3 (  )  k [ x 3  (    ) x 2  (    ) x
  
      ]
3
 b  c  b   ax3  bx2  cx  d  kx3  k (    )x 2
    3    
a  a  a 
  k (     ) x  k
c
Comparing the coefficients of x3, x2, x and
a
2 2
constant terms on both sides, we get
  3abc  b3 a = k, b = – k (    ), c = k
  
  a 2c (    ) and d = – k ()
Example : b c
If sum of the squares of zeros of the         ,      
a a
quadratic polynomial f(x) = x2 – 8x + k is d
40, find the value of k. and,   
a
Sol. Let  be the zeros of the polynomial  Sum of the zeros
f(x) = x2 – 8x + k. Then, b Coefficien t of x 2
 
 8 k a Coefficien t of x 3
       8 and    k Sum of the product of the zeros taken
 1  1
c Coefficien t of x
It is given that two at a time  
a Coefficien t of x 3
Product of the zeros
 2  2  40
d Constant term
 
 (  )2  2  40 a Coefficien t of x 3
Where k is any non-zero real number.
[     8 and   k ]
If f(x) = ax4 + bx3 + cx2 + dx + e is a
 82  2k  40 polynomial of degree 4 having  and
 2k  64  40  as its zeros, then
 2k  24  k  12 b Coefficien t of x 3
α β  γ  δ   
a Coefficien t of x 4
 Relationship between zeros and
α  β  γ  δ      
b
Coefficients of a Cubic polynomial : a
Let    be the zeros of a cubic Coefficien t of x 2

polynomial f(x) = ax3 + bx2 + cx + d, Coefficien t of x 4
a  0. Then, by factor theorem, x – , c
or, (α  ) (   )     
x –  and x –  are factors of f(x). Also, a
f(x), being a cubic polynomial, cannot have Coefficien t of x 2
more than three linear factors. 
Coefficien t of x 4
 f(x) = k (x – ) (x – ) (x – ) d
        –
 ax 3  bx 2  cx  d a
Coefficien t of x
 k ( x  ) ( x  ) ( x   ) 
Coefficien t of x 4

ANCE 33
 Algebra
d Now,    = 0 and
or,  (   )   (   )  
a
a=±4  b= 4
Coefficien t of x
 Hence, the zeros are 4, – 4 and 5.
Coefficien t of x 4
e Constant term Division Algorithm for Polynomials :
αβγδ  
a Coefficien t of x 4 Dividend = Quotient × Divisor +Remainder
This is known as Euclid’s division lemma
Sum of the zeros
the division of polynomials also follows the
b Coefficien t of x 3
  similar rule which is known as the division
a Coefficien t of x 4
algorithm for polynomials.
Sum of the products of the zeros taken
c Coefficien t of x 2 Example :
two at a time  
a Coefficien t of x 4 Divide the polynomial
Sum of the products of the zeros taken f(x) = 6x3 + 11x2 – 39x – 65 by the
d Coefficient of x polynomial g(x) = x2 – 1 + x. Also, find
three at a time    
a Coefficient of x 4 the quotient and remainder.
Product of the zeros Sol. We have,
e Constant term
 
a Coefficien t of x 4
Example :
Find the zeros of the polynomial
f(x) = x3 – 5x2 – 16x + 80, if its two zeros
are equal in magnitude but opposite in sign.
Sol. Let    be the zeros of polynomial
f(x) such that  = 0.
Then, Clearly, quotient q(x) = 6x + 5 and
2
Coefficien t of x remainder r(x) = – 38x – 60.
Sum of the zeros  
Coefficien t of x 3 Also, 6x3 + 11x2 – 39x – 65
 5 = (x2 + x – 1) (6x + 5) + (– 38x – 60)
         
 1 i.e., f(x) = g(x) q(x) + r(x)
 5 [     0]
or, Dividend = Quotient × Divisor +
Product of the zeros Remainder
Constant term
  Division Algorithm :
Coefficien t of x 3
80 If f(x) and g(x) are any two polynomial
    [   5] with g(x)  0, then we can always find
1
polynomials q(x) and r(x) such that
 5   80
f(x) = q(x) g(x) + r(x), where r(x) = 0 or
   16
degree r(x) < degree g(x).
   2  16 If r(x) = 0, then polynomial g(x) is a factor
   4 of polynomial f(x).

ANCE 34
 Algebra
Example : Therefore, LHS is also divisible by the
Obtain all the zeros of the polynomial divisor. Thus, if we subtract remainder from
f(x) = 3x4 + 6x3 – 2x3 – 2x2 – 10x – 5, if the dividend, then it will be exactly divisible
by the divisor.
5 5 Dividing 8x4 + 14x3 – 2x2 + 7x – 8 by
two of its zeros are and  .
3 3 4x2 + 3x – 2, we get
5 5
Sol. Since and  are two zeros of f(x).
3 3
Therefore,
 5 5   2 5 1
x   x     x    (3x 2  5)
 
3 3   3 3

Also, 3x2 – 5 is a factor of f(x).
Let us now divide f(x) by 3x2 – 5.
We have,  Quotient = 2x 2 + 2x – 1 and
Remainder = 14x – 10
Thus, if we subtract the remainder
14x – 10 from 8x4 + 14x3 – 2x2 + 7x – 8,
it will be divisible by 4x2 + 3x – 2.
Example :If x4 + x3 + 8x2 + ax + b is exactly
divisible by x2 + 1, then find the value of
a and b.
Sol. If x4 + x3 + 8x2 + ax + b is exactly divisible
by x2 + 1, then the remainder should be
zero.
On dividing, we get
By division algorithm, we have
3x4 + 6x3 – 2x2 – 10x – 5 = (3x2 – 5)
(x2 + 2x + 1)
 3x4 + 6x3 – 2x2 – 10x – 5 = ( 3x  5 )
( 3x  5 ) ( x  1) 2
5 5
Hence, the zeros of f(x) are  , ,
3 3
– 1 and – 1.
Example :
What must be subtracted from  Quotient = x2 + x + 7 and Remainder
8x4 + 14x3 – 2x2 + 7x – 8 so that the = x (a – 1) + (b – 7)
resulting polynomial is exactly divisible by
4x2 + 3x – 2. Now,
Sol. We know that, Remainder = 0
Dividend= Quotient × Divisor + Remainder  x (a – 1) + (b – 7) = 0
 Dividend – Remainder = Quotient ×  x (a – 1) + (b – 7) = 0x + 0
Divisor  a – 1 = 0 and b – 7 = 0
Clearly, RHS of the above result is divisible  a = 1 and b = 7
by the divisor.

ANCE 35
 Algebra
 Factorisation of A3 + B3 + C3 –3ABC = ay2 + bxy + ax2
A3 + B3 + C3 –3ABC = ax2 + bxy + ay2
= (A + B + C) (A2 + B2 + C2 – BC – CA –AB)  f(y, x) = f(x, y)
Also,  Hence, ax2 + bxy + ay2 is symmetric.
A3 + B3 + C3 –3ABC Note : An expression which is homogeneous and
1 symmetric is called a homogenous symmetric
 (A  B  C){2A2  2B2  2C2  2BC  2CA  2AB}
2 expression.
1 Ex. ax + ay, ax2 + bxy + ay2.
 (A  B  C)[(B  C) 2  (C  A) 2  (A  B) 2 ]
2
In case A + B + C = 0, we get  Cyclic Expressions :
A3 +B3 + C3 = 3ABC f(x, y, z) is an expression in variable x, y and z.
 Homogeneous expression : If f(x, y, z) = f(y, z, x) then f(x, y, z) is cyclic.
An algebraic expression in which, the degree Example :
of all the terms are equal is a homogenous a2 (a – b) + b2 (b – c) + c2 (c – a)
expression.
Let f(a, b, c) = a2 (a – b) + b2 (b – c) + c2 (c – a)
e.g. bx + ay is a first degree homogenous
Now, f(b, c, a) = b2 (b –c) + c2 (c–a) + a2
expression, ax2 + bxy + cy2 is a second
(a –b) = a2 (a –b) + b2 (b–c) + c2 (c–a)
degree homogenous expression.
f(b, c, a) = f(a, b, c)
Note : The product of two homogeneous  f is cyclic.
expressions is a homogeneous expression. Cyclic expressions are lengthy to write, so
we use symbols  (read as sigma) and
 Symmetric expressions :  (pi) to abbreviate them.
f(x, y) is an expression in variables x and y. is used for sum of terms and  is used for
If f(x, y) = f(y, x), then f(x, y), is called a product of terms.
symmetric expression. Example :
i.e., If an expression remains same after x2 (y2–z2) + y(x2–y2) + z(x2 –y2) can be
interchanging the variables x and y is said to 2
represented as x (y 2  z 2 )
be a symmetric expression. x, y,z
Example : x2 (y2–z2) = x2 (y2–z2) + y2 (z2 –x2) +
Consider the expressions z2(x2–y2)
(i) ax + ay + b Example :
(ii) ax2 + bxy + ay2 (x2 +y3) (y2 + z3) (z2 + x3) can be represented
(i) Let f(x, y) = ax+ ay + b as :
f(y, x) = ay + ax + b  (x2 + y3) = (x2 + y3) (y2 +z3) (z2 + x3)
= ax + ay + b x , y,z

 f(y, x) = f(x, y)
 Remainder Theorem :
 ax + ay + b is symmetric. When a polynomial p(x) in x is divided by
(x – a), the remainder is equal to the value of
(ii) f(x, y) = ax2 + bxy + ay2
the polynomial p(x) at x = a, i.e., equal to
f(y, x) = ay2 + byx + ax2 p(a).

ANCE 36
 Algebra

 Factor Theorem : By long division method

The binomial (x–a) is a factor of a Let we added ax + b (linear polynomial)
polynomial p(x) in x if and only if the value in p(x), so that p(x) + ax + b is exactly
of the polynomial p(x) at x = a is 0, i.e., divisible by 3x2 + 7x –6
p(a) = 0. Hence, p(x) + ax + b = s(x) = 3x3 + x2
Ex. : To find is x – 2 a factor of –22x + b = 3x3 + x2 – x(22–a) + (9 + b)
p(x) = x3 – 3x2 + 4x – 4, we find the
value of p(2). 3x2 + 7x –6 3x3 + x2 – x(22 –a) + 9 + b
3 2
3x + 7x –6x
p(2) = 23 – 3(22) + 4(2) – 4 – – +
–6x2 + 6x – (22 –a)x + 9 + b
= 8 – 3(4) + 8 – 4 or
= 8 – 12 + 8 – 4 = 0 –6x22 + x – (–16 + a)x + 9 + b
–6x –14x + 12
x – 2 is a factor of x3 – 3x2 + 4x – 4. + + –
x(–2+ a) +(b–3) = 0

Ex.1 Find the remainder when f(x) = 4x3 –3x2 Hence, x (a –2) + b –3 = 0. x + 0
+ 2x – 4 is divided by x – 1.  a –2 = 0 and b – 3 = 0
Sol. When f(x) is divided by x – 1, then  a = 2 or b = 3
remainder = f(1). Hence, if in p(x) we added ax + b or
2x + x then it is exactly divisible by
Remainder = f(1) = 4(1 3 ) – 3(1 2) +
3x2 + 7x – 6.
2(1) – 4
= 4 – 3 + 2 – 4 = –1 Ex.4 Find the value of ‘a’ for which
Ex.2 Find the value of a if x + a is a factor of x3 – 7x + 5 is a factor of
the polynomial x3 + ax2 –2x + a + 15. x5 – 2x4 – 4x3 + 19x2 – 31x + 12 + a.
Sol. Here Sol. By synthetic division remainder obtained
on dividing
0 = p(–a) = (–a)3 + a(–a)2 –2(–a) + a + 15
x5 – 2x4 – 4x3 + 19x2 – 31x + 12 + a by
= –a3 + a3 + 3a + 15 = 3a + 15
x3 – 7x + 5 is a – 3.
 3a = –15   a = –5
If x3 – 7x + 5 is a factor of
Ex.3 What must be added to 3x3 +x2 –22x +9 x5 – 2x4 – 4x3 + 19x2 – 31x + 12 + a
so that the result is exactly divisible by  Remainder a – 3 = 0
3x2 + 7x –6.  a = 3.
Sol. Let p(x) = 3x3 + x2 –22x + 9 and
Ex.5 If ‘n’ is odd then prove that x +1 is a
q(x) = 3x2 + 7x –6
factor of xn + 1.
We know if p(x) is divided by q(x) which Sol. Let f(x) = xn + 1
is quadratic polynomial therefore if p(x) is
Remainder f(– 1) = (– 1)n + 1
not exactly divisible by q(x) then the
=–1+1=0
remainder be r(x) and degree of r(x) is
(Since ‘n’ is odd (– 1)n = – 1
less than q(x) or Divisor.
 ‘x + 1’ is a factor of f(x).

ANCE 37
 Algebra
Ex.6 When polynomial f(x) is divided by Sol. Given that
(x – 1), (x – 2) gives the remainders 5, 7 a4 (b2 – c2) + b4 (c4 – a4) + c4 (a2 – b2)
respectively. What is the remainder By putting b2 = c2,
when same f(x) is divided by the (x – 1) We find that the given expression vanishes,
(x – 2)? therefore (b2 – c2) is a factor of the
Sol. If f(x) is divided by (x – 1) then remainder expression.
is f(1) = 5. Similarly (c2 – a2), (a2 – b2) are also the
If f(x) is divided by (x – 2) the remainder factor of the expression.
is f(2) = 7. Now the product factors of (b2 – c2)
If f(x) is divided by (x – 1) (x – 2) then (c2 –a2) (a2 – b2) is of 6th degree and the
remainder is of first degree given expression is of 6th degree.
i.e., mx + n. So the only factor if possible may be some
f(x) = (x – 1) (x – 2) q (x) + mx + n constant factor.
f(1) = 5  m + n = 5 ...(i) Let some constant factor be k.
f(2) = 2m + n = 7 ...(ii) Putting a = 1, b = 2, c = 3, we have
Solving (i) and (ii) we get m = 2, n = 3. (4 – 9) + 16 (9 – 1 + 81) (1 – 4)
Remainder = 2x + 3 = k (4 – 9) (9 – 1) (1 – 4)
Ex.7 Find the factors of a (b – c)3 + b (c – a)3 – 5 + 128 – 243 = k (– 5) (8) (– 3)
+ c (a – b)3. – 120 = k . 120
Sol. To find the factors of k=–1
a (b – c)3 + b (c – a)3 + c (a – b)3 ...(1) Required factors are – (b2 – c2), (c2 – a2),
we see that the given expression vanishes (a2 – b2)
when b = c.  a4 (b2 – c2) + b4 (c2 – a2) + c4 (a2 – b2).
Thus b – c is factor of the given = – (b – c) (c – a) (a – b) (b + c) (c + a)
expression (1) (a + b)
Similarly (c – a), (a – b) are the factor of Ex.9 Find the factors of a (b – c)2 + b (c – a)2
the expression (1). + c (a – b)2 + 8 abc.
Since the expression is of 4th degree, the Sol. a (b – c)2 + b (c – a)2 + c (a – b)2 + 8 abc
remaining factor which should be a (b2  c2 )  b (c2  a 2 )  c (a 2  b2 )  2 abc
Symmetrical in a, b and c must be of the ...(i)
form k (a + b + c).
Now the expression vanishes on putting
Thus a (b – c)3 + b (c – a)3 + c (a – b)3 b=–c
= L (a + b + c) (a – b) (b – c) (c – a)
Therefore (b + c) is a factor is (1).
In order to find the value of ‘k’
Similarly (c + a), (a + b) are also the
Put a = 1, b = – 1, c = 2, we have factors of (1).
1 (– 3)2 – (– 1)3 + 2 (2)3 The given expression is of third degree
= k (1 – 1 + 2) (– 3) (1) and the product of the factors so far
– 27 – 1 + 16 = k (– 12) obtained is also of third degree, hence if
 k = 1 any there may be a constant factor.
Hence a (b – c)3 + b (c – a)3 + c (a – b)3 i.e.,
= (a – b) (b – c) (c – a) (a + b + c). a (b2 – c2) + b (c2 – a2) + c (a2 – b2) +
Ex.8 Find the factor of 2abc = k (b + c) (c + a) (a + b)
a4 (b2 – c2) + b4 (c4 – a4) + c4 (a2 – b2). To evaluate k,

ANCE 38
 Algebra
Putting a = 1, b = 1, c = 1, we have Ex.11 Factorise : –10x2 + 31x –24
1 (2) + (2) + 2 + 2 = k (2) (2) (2) –10x2 + 31x –24
 8 = 8k  k = 1 = –[10x2 –31x + 24]
a (b – c)2 + b (c – a)2 + c (a – b)2 + 8 abc
 31 24 
= (b + c) (c + a) (a + b)  10  x 2  x    =
Ex.10 Prove the identity  10 10 
2 2
a (b  c)2 b (c  a )2 c (a  b)2  2 31  31   31  24 
  10  x  2 x        
(c  a) (a  b) (a  b) (b  c) (b  c) (c  a )  20  20   20  10 
= a + b + c. 2
 31  961 24 
Sol. To prove that  10  x     
a (b  c)2 b (c  a )2 c (a  b)2  20  400 10 
 
(c  a) (a  b) (a  b) (b  c) (b  c) (c  a )  31 
2
1 
=a +b+c  10  x    
 20  400 
L.H.S.
2 2
a (b  c)2 b (c  a)2 c (a  b)2  31   1  
 
= (c  a) (a  b) (a  b) (b  c) (b  c) (c  a)  10  x      
 20   20  
a ( b  c ) 3  b (c  a )3  c (a  b )3  31 1   31 1 
  10  x     x   
(c  a ) (b  c) (a  b) 20 20   20 20 

a (b – c)3 + b (c – a)3 + c (a – b)3 ...(i)
 2x  3  5x  8 
We see that the given expression (i)  10   
vanishes when b = c.  2  5 
Thus b – c is factor of the given expression. = – (2x–3) (5x –8) = (3–2x) (5x –8)
Similarly (c – a), (a – b) are the factors of Ex.12 Suppose f(x) is polynomial of degree 5
the expression. and with leading coefficient 2001. Suppose
Since the expression is of 4th degree; the further that f(1) = 1, f(2) = 3, f(3) = 5,
remaining fact or which should be f(4) = 7, f(5) = 9. What is the value
symmetrical in a, b and c must be of the of f(6).
form L (a + b + c). Sol. f(x) is polynomial of degree ‘5’ with
Thus a (b – c)3 + b (c – a)3 + c (a – b)3 leading coefficient 2001.
= L (a + b + c) (a – b) (b – c) (c – a)  f(x) = 2001 x5 + a1x4 + .........a0
In order of find the value of L Put a = 1,
or f(x) = 2001 (x –l1) (x –l2) (x – l4) (x –l5)
b = – 1, c = 2, we have
f(1) = 1, f(2) = 3, f(3) = 5, f(4) = 7,
1 (– 3)2 – (– 1)3 + 2 (2)3 = L (1 – 1 + 2)
(2) (– 3) (1) f(5) = 9
– 27 – 1 + 16 = L (– 12) Observing functional values 1, 3, 5, 7, ....9
 L = 1 we can say that they follow f(x) = 2x –1
Hence the required factors are Let h(x) = f(x) – (2x –1)
(a – b) (b – c) (a + b + c). h(1) = f(1) –1 = 1 –1 = 0
a (b  c)3  b (c  a )3  c (a  b)3 h(2) = f(2) –3 = 3 – 3 = 0

(c  a ) ( b  c ) ( a  b ) .................................
= (a + b + c). .................................

ANCE 39
 Algebra
h(5) = f(5) – 9 = 9 – 9 = 0 Subtracting (ii) from (iii) m = 211 + 5k
 (x –1), (x–2), ..... (x –5) are factor of .......(v)
h(x) From (iv) and (v) 31 + 3k = 211 + 5k
 h(x) = k(x–1) (x–2) (x–3) (x–4)  –180 = 2k
(x –5)
 k = –90
f(x) = h(x) + (2x –1)
Ex.15 a, b, c are distinct and P(x) is a
= k (x –1) (x –2) .......(x–5) + (2x–1)
polynomial in ‘x’ which leaves remainder
To get ‘f’ as polynomial of degree ‘5’
a, b, c on division by (x – a), (x – b),
with leading coefficient 2001. Consider
(x – c) respectively find the remainder
k = 2001
obtained on division of P(x) by (x – a)
f(x) = 2001 (x – 1) (x – 2) (x – 3) (x – 4)
(x – b) (x – c)
(x –5) + 2x –1
Sol. P(x) = (x – a) q1 + a = (x – b) q2 + b
Ex.13 Find the sum of the coefficients of
polynomial P(x) = (3x –2)17 (x + 1)4. = (x–c)q3 + c
Sol. P(x) = (3x–2)17 (x + 1)4 P(x) = (x –a) (x–b) (x–c)Q + lx2 +
= (a0 + a1x + .....+a17x17) (b0 + b1x + ....+ mx + n
b4x4) For some a1 and b1 Remainder is P(a) = a
= (c0 + c1x + ....+c21x21) for some ck  la2 + ma + n = a. .... (i)
Sum of the coefficients of P(x) = c0 + c1 2
P(b) = b  lb +mb + n = b .... (ii)
+ .....+ c21 which can be obtained by P(c) = c  lc2 +mc + n = c .... (iii)
Putting x = 1
l (a + b) + m = l ( a  b ) .....(iv)
 Sum of the coefficients of P(x) = P(1)
= 3((1) –2))17 (1+1)4 = 16 Similarly subtracting ‘3’ from ‘2’
Ex.14 The remainder x5 + kx2 is divided by l (b + c) + m = 1 ( b  c ) .....(v)
(x –1) (x –2) (x–3) contains no term in x2 (iv) – (v) gives l (a –c) = 0
find ‘k’ with out performing division.
 l = 0 (a  c)
Sol. x5 + kx2 = (x–1) (x –2) (x –3) Q(x) + lx2
+ mx + n. Substituting l = 0 in equation (iv) gives
Where Q(x) is quotient and lx2 + mx + n m=1
is remainder Substituting l = 0, m = 1 in la2 + ma + n
(Degree of remainder is always less than = a gives n = 0
divisor)  Remainder
Remainder does not contain x2 coefficient lx2 + mx + n = 0. x2 + 1.x + 0 = x
from hypothesis  l = 0 Ex.16 Find the remainder obtained when x1999 is
x5 + kx2 = (x–1) (x–2) (x–3) Q(x) + divisible by x2 –1.
mx + n Sol. x1999 = (x2–1)q(x) + mx + n
x = 1 1+ K = m + n .....(i)
For x = 1 m + n = 1 ........(i)
x = 2  32 + 4k = 2m + n .....(ii)
For x = –1 – m + n = –1 .....(ii)
x = 3  243 + 9k = 3m + n ......(iii)
Adding (i) and (ii) we get n = 0, m = 1
Subtracting (i) and from (ii) m = 31 + 3k
........(iv)  remainder = x

ANCE 40
 Algebra

Practice Problems # 1

1. If x + 1 is a factor of (a) –3 (b) –2

ax4 + bx3+ cx2 + dx + e then _________ (c) 0 (d) 3
(a) a + c + e = b + d 9. From the adjacent division
(b) a + b = c + d f (x)
(x  a) (x) which of the following
(c) a + b + c + d + e = 0 R
is true ?
(d) a + c + b = d + e
(a) f (x)  (x  a) (x)
2. If (x –3) is the factor of 3x3 –x2 + px + q
(b) f (x)  (x  a). (x)  R
then ___________
(c) f (x)  (x  a)  R
(a) p + q = 72 (b) 3p + q = 72
(d) f (x)  (x)  R
(c) 3p + q = –72 (d) q – 3p = 72 10. If y = f(x) = mx + c ; then f(y) in terms
3. For what values of n, (x + y) is a factor of x is :
of (x –y)n. (a) mx + m + c (b) m + mc + c
(a) for all values of n 2
(c) m x + mc + c (d) m2x + m2c
(b) 1 11. If 7 + 3x is a factor of 3x3 + 7x, then the
(c) only for odd numbers remainder is :
(d) none of these 490 490
(a) (b)
4. f(x) = 3x5 + 11x4 + 90x2 – 19x + 53 9 9
is divided by x +5 then the remainder 470
(c) (d) None
is ____ 9
12. The remainder when
(a) 100 (b) –100
4 3 x2 x 2
(c) –102 (d) 102 f(x) = 3x  2x    is divided
3 9 27
5. If (x–3), (x–3) are factors of x3 – 4x2 – 2
by g(x) = x  is :
3x + 18 ; then the other factor is : 3
(a) x + 2 (b) x + 3 (a) –1 (b) 1
(c) x –2 (d) x + 6 (c) 0 (d) –2
13. The ramainder when 1 + x + x2 + x3 +
 3  .......+ x2006 is divided by x –1 is :
6. If f   = 0; then for f(x), which of the
 4  (a) 2005 (b) 2006
following is a factor ? (c) 2007 (d) 2008
(a) 3x – 4 (b) 4x + 3 14. If (x –1), (x + 1) and (x –2) are factors of
x4 + (p–3)x3 – (3p–5)x2 + (2p–9) x + 6
(c) –3x + 4 (d) 4x –3
then the value of p is :
7. f(x) = 16x2 + 51x + 35 then one of the (a) 1 (b) 2
factors of f(x) is : (c) 3 (d) 4
(a) x –1 (b) x + 3 15. If the remainder when the polynomial f(x)
(c) x – 3 (d) x + 1 is divided by x –1, x + 1 are 6, 8
8. If ax3 + 9x2 + 4x –1 is divided by (x + 2), respectively then the remainder when f(x)
the remainder is –6; then value of ‘a’ is is divided by (x –1) (x + 1) is :

ANCE 41
 Algebra

(a) 7 – x (b) 7 + x 24. If the polynomial x6 + px5 + qx4 – x2 –

(c) 8 – x (d) 8 + x x – 3 is divisible by x4 –1, then the value
16. The remainder when x100 is divided by x2 of p2 + q2 is :
– 3x + 2 is : (a) 1 (b) 5
(a) (2100 –1)x + (–2100 + 2) (c) 10 (d) 13
(b) (2100 + 1)x + (–2100 –2) 25. Which of the following is a homogeneous
(c) (2100 –1)x + (–2100 –2) expression ?
(d) None (a) 4x2 – 5xy + 5x2y + 10y2
17. Find the remainder obtained when x2007 is (b) 5x + 10y + 100
divisible by x2 –1. (c) 14x3 + 15x2y + 16y2x + 24y3
(a) x2 (b) x (d) x2 + y2 + x + y + 1
(c) x + 1 (d) –x 26. The HCF of the polynomial 12a3b4c2,
18. The remainder on dividing 121n – 25n + 18a4b3c3 and 24a6b2c4 is _______ .
1900n –(–4)n by 2000 is : (a) 12a3b2c2 (b) 6a6b4c4
(a) 1 (b) 1000 (c) 6a3b2c2 (d) 48a6b4c4
(c) 100 (d) 0 27. If the expression ax3 + 2x2y – bxy2 –2y3
19. The quotient and remainder when x2002 – is symmetric, then (a,b) =
2001 is divided by x91 are respectively __ (a) (2, 2) (b) (–2, 2)
(a) x91×22, 2001 (b) x91, 2001 (c) (–2, –2) (d) (2, –2)
(c) x91×21, –2001 (d) x9, –2001 28. The LCM of x –16 and 2x2 –9x + 4 is
2

20. If a polynomial 2x3 – 9x2 + 15x + p, (a) (2x +1) (x + 4) (x –4)

when divided by (x –2), leaves –p as (b) (x2 + 16) (2x + 1)
remainder, then p is equal to : (c) 2(1–2x) (x +4) (x –4)
(a) –16 (b) –5 (d) (2x–1) (x + 4) (x – 4)
(c) 20 (d) 10 29. If g(x) = 3ax + 7a2b –13ab2 + 9by is a
21. If the polynomial x + x17 + x13 + x11 +
19
homogeneous expression in terms of a and
x7 + x5 + x3 is divided by (x2 + 1), then b, then the values of x and y respectively
the remainder is : are __________ .
(a) 1 (b) x2 + 4 (a) 2, 2 (b) 2, 1
(c) – x (d) x (c) 3, 2 (d) 3, 3
22. If (x–2) is a common factor of x3 – 4x2 + 30. What is the first degree expression to
ax + b and x3 – ax2 + bx + 8, then the be subtracted from x6 + 8x4 + 2x3 + 16x2
values of a and b are respectively : + 4x + 5 in order to make it a perfect
(a) 3 and 5 (b) 2 and –4 square ?
(c) 4 and 0 (d) 0 and 4 (a) –4x –4 (b) 4x + 4
23. If the expressions ax3 + 3x2 – 3 and (c) 4x –4 (d) –4x + 4
2x3 – 5x + a on dividing by x –4 leave the 31. Which of the following is a factor of the
same remainder, then the value of a is : polynomial f(x) = 2x3 –5x2 + x + 2 ?
(a) 1 (b) 0 (a) x + 1 (b) x + 2
(c) 2 (d) –1 (c) 2x + 1 (d) 2x –1

ANCE 42
 Algebra
32. x831 + y831 is always divisible by (c) x y z
(a) x –y (b) x2 + y2
x y z
(c) x + y (d) None of these (d)  
yz xz xy
33. If (x +1) (x + 2) (x + 3) (x + k) + 1 is
a perfect square, then the value of k is 4 1
38. Factorize the expression 9x   2.
(a) 4 (b) 5 x4
(c) 6 (d) 7  2 1  2 1 
(a)  3x  2  2  3x  2  2 
34. The HCF of the polynomials x4 + 6x2 +  x  x 
25, x3 – 3x2 + 7x –5 and x2 + 5 –2x is  2 1  2 1 
(b)  3x  2  2  3x  2  2 
(a) x2 – 2x –5 (b) x2 –2x + 5  x  x 
(c) x –1 (d) 3x + 2  2 1  2 1 
(c)  3x  2  2  3x  2  2 
35. The remainder when x45 is divided by x2  x  x 
–1 is -  2 1  2 1 
(a) 2x (b) –x (d)  3x  2  2  3x  2  2 
 x  x 
(c) 0 (d) x 39. If the each of algebraic expression
36. Find the value of lx 2 + mx + n, mx 2 + nx + l and
(a  b)2 (b  c) 2 (c  a) 2 nx2 + lx + m are perfect square, then
 
(b  c)(c  a) (a  b)(c  a) (a  b)(b  c) lm
 _______ .
(a) –1 (b) 0 n
(c) 1 (d) 2 (a) –4 (b) 6
37. Find the square root of the expression (c) –8 (d) None of these
1  1 1 1  
3
(x 2  y 2  z 2 )  2     3
xyz x y z 40. Resolve into factors :   x    x
 x,y,z  x,y,z
xyz
(a) (a) (x + y) (y + z) (z + x)
xyz
(b) – (x + y) (y + z) (z + x)
yz zx xy (c) 3(x+y) (y + z) (z + x)
(b)  
x y z (d) –3(x +y) (y + z) (z +x)

Practice Problems # 1
Q. N. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. a c d c a b d d b c
Q. N. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. b c c d a a b d c b
Q. N. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans. c c a c c c c d d d
Q. N. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. c c a b d a d d a c

ANCE 43
 Linear Equations in two Variables

Step:5 Substitute the value of x obtained in step

A linear equation (or a first-degree 4 in the expression for y in terms of x
equation) in two variables has both its obtained in step 2 to get value of y.
variables raised to the first power only. Step:6 The values of x and y obtained in steps 4
A linear equation in two variables is of the and 5 respectively constitute the solution
form ax + by + c = 0 of the given system of two linear equations.
where at least one of a, b is different from Following solved examples will illustrate
zero. the above algorithm.
Note that 2x + 3 = 0 can be treated as Ex. Solve the following system of equation by
a linear equation in two variables since we using the method of substitution :
can rewrite it as 2x + 0y + 3 = 0. 3x – 5y = –1, x – y = –1
Solution of a linear equation in two Sol. The given system of equation is
variables is a pair of values, one for x 3x – 5y = –1 .............(i)
and the other for y which when substituted x – y = –1 .............(ii)
in the given equation, make the two sides From (ii), we get
of the equation equal.
y=x+1
 Algebraic Methods of solving linear Substituting y = x + 1 in (i), we get
equations in two variables :
3x – 5(x + 1) = –1
The most commonly used algebraic
 –2x – 5 = –1
methods of solving linear equations in two
variables are :  –2x = 4  x = –2
(i) Method of substitution. Putting x = – 2 in y = x + 1 we get
(ii) Method of elimination by equating the y = –1.
coefficients Hence, the solution of the given system of
(iii) Method of cross-multiplication equation is x = –2, y = –1.
 Method of Substitution:  Method of Elimination by equating the
In this method, we express one of the coefficients :
variables in terms of the other variable from In this method, we eliminate one of the
either of the two equations and then this two variables to obtain an equation in one
expression is put in the other equation to variable which can easily be solved. Putting
obtain an equation in one variable as the value of this variable in any one of the
explained in the following algorithm. given equations, the value of the other
variable can be obtained.
Following algorithm explains t he
Step:1 Obtain the two equations. Let the equations procedure.
be
a1x + b1y +c1 = 0 ............ (i)
and a2x + b2y + c2 = 0 ...........(ii) Step:1 Obtain the two equations.
Step:2 Choose either of the two equations, say Step:2 Multiply the equations so as to make the
(i), and the other value of one variable, coefficients of the variable to be eliminated
say y, in terms of the other, i.e. x. equal.
Step:3 Substitute the value of y, obtained in step 2, in Step:3 Add or subtract the equations obtained in
the other equation i.e. (ii) to get an equation step 2 according as the terms having the
in x. same coefficients are of opposite of the
Step:4 Solve the equation obtained in step 3 to same sign.
Step:4 Solve equation in one variable in step 3.
get the value of x.

ANCE 44
 Linear Equations in two Variables

Step:5 Substitute the value found in step 4 in any 1 1 1 1

of the given equations and find the value Hence, x   and y  
u 6 v 4
of the other variable. So, the solution of the given system of
The value of the variables in step 4 and 5 1 1
constitute the solution of the given system equation is x  , y  .
6 4
of equations.  Method of Cross-Multiplication :
Ex.1 Solve the following system of linear Theorem : Let a1x + b1y + c1 = 0
equations by using the method of a2x + b2y + c2 = 0
elimination by equating the coefficients :
be a system of simultaneous linear
3x + 2y = 11, 2x + 3y = 4 equations in two variables x and y such
Sol. The given systems of equations is
a1 b1
3x + 2y = 11 ............(i) that 
a 2 b2
2x + 3y = 4 ............(ii)
i.e. a1b2 – a2b1  0. Then the system has
Let us eliminate y from the given equations. a unique solution given by
The coefficients of y in the given equations
are 2 and 3 respectively. The L.C.M. of  x y 1 
   
2 and 3 is 6. So, we make the coefficients  b1c 2  b 2c1 a1c 2  c1a 2 a 1b 2  b1a 2 
of y equal to 6 in the two equations. (b c  b 2 c1 ) (c a  c a )
Multiplying (i) by 3 and (ii) by 2, we get x 1 2 and y  1 2 2 1
(a1b 2  a 2 b1 ) (a1b 2  a 2 b1 )
9x + 6y = 33 ..............(iii) Ex. Solve t he following systems of
4x + 6y = 8 ..............(iv) equations by using the method of cross-
Subtracting (iv) from (iii), we get multiplication :
5x = 25  x = 5 x + y = 7, 5x + 12y = 7
Substituting x = 5 equation in (i), we get Sol. The given system of equation is
15 + 2y = 11 2y = –4  y = –2 x+y–7=0
Ex.2 Solve the following system of equations : 5x + 12y – 7 = 0
1 1 1 1 By cross-multiplication, we get
  1 ,  8,
2x y x 2y x y
 
where x  0, y  0. 1 7  12  7 1 7  5  7
1 1 1
Sol. Taking  u and  v, 
x y 1 12  5  1
the given equations become
x y 1
u   
 v  1 u  2v  2 ......(i) 7  84 7  35 12  5
2
v x y 1
and, u   8  2u  v  16 ......(ii)   
2 77 28 7
Let us eliminate u from equations (i) and
(ii). Multiplying equation (i) by 2, we get 77 28
x  and y  
2u – 4v = –4 ...............(iii) 7 7
2u + v = 16 ..............(iv)  x = 11 & y = –4
Subracting (iv) from (iii), we get Hence, the solution of the given system of
–5v = –20  u = 6 equations is x = 11, y = –4.

ANCE 45
 Linear Equations in two Variables

 Conditions for Consistency : a1 b1

Clearly, 
The system of equations a 2 b2
a1x + b1y + c1 = 0 .........(1) So, the given system of equations has a
unique solution.
a2x + b2y + c2 = 0 ........(2)
To find the solution, we use the cross-
(i) is consistent with unique solution, if
multiplication method.
a1 b1 By cross-multiplication, we have
 or a1b 2  b1a 2  0
a 2 b2 x y
i.e., lines represented by equations (1) and 
3  11  5  7 2  11  6  7
(2) are not parallel 1
(ii) is consistent with infinitely many solutions, 
25 63
a1 b1 c1 x y 1
if   i.e., lines represented by   
a 2 b2 c2 33  35 22  42 10  18
x y 1
equation (1) and (2) are coincident.   
2 20 8
a1 b1 c1 2 1 20 5
(iii) is inconsistent, if   i.e., lines x    and y  
a 2 b 2 c2 8 4 8 2
represented by equations (1) and (2) are Hence, the given system of equations has
parallel and non-coincident. 1 5
Ex. In each of the following systems of a unique solution given by x   , y  .
4 2
equations determine whether the system (ii) The given system of equations may be
has a unique solution, no solution or written as
infinitely many solutions. In case there is a –3x + 4y – 5 = 0
unique solution, find it : 9 15
x  6y   0
(i) 2x + 3y = 7, 6x + 5y = 11 2 2
15 The given system of equations is of the
(ii) 6x + 5y = 11, 9x  y  21
2 form
9 15 a1x + b1y + c1 = 0
(iii) –3x + 4y = 5, x  6y   0
2 2 a2x + b2y + c2 = 0
Sol. (i) The given system of equations may be where a1 = –3, b1 = 4, c1 = –5 and
written as 9 15
a 2  , b 2  6, c 2 
2x + 3y – 7 = 0 2 2
6x + 5y – 11 = 0 We have,
The given system of equations is of the a1 3 2 b1 4 2
  ,  
form a 2 9 / 2 3 b 2 6 3
a1x + b1y + c1 = 0 c1 5 2
 
a2x + b2y + c2 = 0 c 2 15 / 2 3
where, a1 = 2, b1 = 3, c1 = –7 and a1 b1 c1
a2 = 6, b2 = 5, c2 = –11 Clearly,  
a 2 b2 c2
a1 2 1 b 3 So, the given system of equations has
We have.   and 1  infinitely many solutions.
a2 6 3 b2 5

ANCE 46
 Linear Equations in two Variables
Ex. Find the value (s) of k for which the system b1 c1
of equations Clearly, 
b2 c2
kx – y = 2 So, whatever be the value of k, we cannot
6x – 2y = 3 a b c
has (i) a unique solution (ii) no solution. have 1  1  1
a 2 b2 c2
Is there a value of k for which the system
Hence, there is no value of k, for which
has infinitely many solutions ?
the given system of equations has infinitely
Sol. The given system of equation is many solutions.
kx –y – 2 = 0 Ex. For what value of k will the following
6x – 2y –3 = 0 system of linear equations has no solution?
It is of the form a1x + b1y + c1 = 0 3x + y = 1
a2x + b2y + c2 = 0 (2k –1)x + (k –1)y = 2k + 1
where a1 = k, b1 = –1, c1 = –2 and Sol. We know that the system of equations
a2 = 6, b2 = –2, c2 = –3 a1x + b1y = c1
(i) The given system will have a unique a2x + b2y = c2
solution, if has no solution, if
a1 b1 k 1 a1 b1 c1
 i.e., if  i.e., k  3.  
a 2 b2 6 2 a 2 b 2 c2
So, the given of equations system will have
a unique solution, if k  3. So, the given system of equations will have
no solution, if
So, the given of equations system will have
3 1 1
a unique solution , if k  3.  
(ii) The given system will have no solution, 2k  1 k  1 2k  1
if 3 1 1 1
a1 b1 c1  and 
  2k  1 k  1 k  1 2k  1
a 2 b 2 c2
3 1
b 1 1 c 2 2 Now,   3k –3 = 2k –1
We have, 1   and 1   2k  1 k  1
b 2 2 2 c 2 3 3  k = 2
b1 c1 1 1
Clearly, b  c Clearly, for k = 2 we have 
2 2 k  1 2k  1
So, the system of equations will have no Hence, the given system of equations will
solution, if have no solution, if k = 2.
a1 b1 k 1 Ex. I am three times as old as my son. Five
   k3
a 2 b2 6 2 years later, I shall be two and a half times
Hence, the given system will have no as old as my son. How old am I and how
solution, if k = 3. old is my son ?
For the given system to have infinite Sol. Suppose my age is x years and my son’s
number of solutions, we must have age is y years. Then,
a1 b1 c1 x = 3y ............(i)
 
a 2 b2 c2 Five years later, my age will be (x + 5)
a k b 1
We have, 1  , 1  and years and my son’s age will be (y + 5)
a 2 6 b 2 2
c1 2 2 years.
  5
c 2 3 3  x  5  (y  5) (Given)
2

ANCE 47
 Linear Equations in two Variables
 2x – 5y – 15 = 0 ........ (ii) 8. In a fraction, if numerator is increased by
Putting x = 3y in equation (ii), we get 2 and denominator is increased by 3, it
6y – 5y – 15 = 0  y = 15 3
Putting y = 15 in equation (i), we get becomes and if numerator is decreased
4
x = 45 by 3 and denominator is decreased by 6,
Hence, my present age is 45 years and 4
my son’s present age is 15 years. it becomes . Find the sum of the
3
numerator and denominator.
(a) 16 (b) 18 (c) 20 (d) 14
1. How many pairs of x and y satisfy the 9. If 100 cm is divided into two parts such
equations 2x + 4y = 8 and 6x + 12 y = 24 ? that the sum of 2 times the smaller
(a) 0 (b) 1 1
part and of the larger part, is less than
(c) Infinite (d) none of these 3
2. Find the value of ‘k’for which the system 100 cm, then which of the following is
of linear equations kx + 2y = 5 and 3x + correct ?
y = 1 has zero solutions. (a) Larger portion is always less than 60.
(a) k = 6 (b) k = 3 (b) Smaller portion is always less than 60
(c) k = 4 (d) none of these and more than 40.
3. The total cost of 10 erasers and 5 (c) Larger portion is always greater
sharpeners is at least Rs 65. The cost of than 60.
each eraser cannot exceed Rs 4. Find the
(d) Smaller portion is always greater
minimum possible cost of each sharpener.
than 40.
(a) Rs 6 (b) Rs 5.50
(c) Rs 5 (d) Rs 6.50 10. The fare of 3 full tickets and 2 half tickets
is Rs 204 and the fare of 2 full tickets and
4. If the system of linear equations px + 3y
= 9 and 4x + py = 8 has unique solution, 2 half tickets is Rs. 186. Find the fare of
then a full ticket and a half ticket.
(a) p  2 3 (b) p  3 2 (a) Rs 94 (b) Rs 78
(c) Rs 86 (d) Rs 62
(c) p  2 3 (d) p  3 2
5. In a group of goats and hens, the total 3 x y
11. If x  2y    1 , then x –y =
number of legs is 12 more than twice the 2 4 2
total number of heads. The number of (a) 1 (b) 3 (c) 2 (d) 0
goats is :
12. If we add 1 to the numerator and subract
(a) 8 (b) 6 (c) 2 (d) 10
1 from the denominator a fraction becomes
6. Solve the equations : 4(2x–1) + 9(3y–1) = 17
1
and 3(2x) – 2(3y) = 6. 1. It also becomes if we add 1 to the
(a) (x, y) = (2, 1) (b) (x, y) = (–2, –1) 2
denominator. Then the sum of the
(c) (x, y) = (1, 2) (d) (x,y) = (2, –1)
numerataor and denominator of the
7. If (a + b, a –b) is the solution of the
fraction is
equations 3x + 2y = 20 and 4x –5y = 42,
then find the value of b. (a) 7 (b) 8 (c) 2 (d) 11
(a) 8 (b) – 2 13. If 4x – 3y = 7xy and 3x + 2y = 18xy,
(c) – 4 (d) 5 then (x, y) =

ANCE 48
 Linear Equations in two Variables

1 1 for every question left, then one person

(a)  ,  (b) (3, 4) scores 79. And if half mark is deducted
 4 3 for every wrong option and one-fourth
1 1 mark is deducted for every left question,
(c) (4, 3) (d)  , 
3 4 the person scores 76, then find the number
14. If 2 |x| – |y| = 3 and 4 |x| |+ |y| = 3, then of questions he attempted correctly.
number of possible order pairs of the form (a) 80 (b) 100
(x, y) is (c) 120 (d) 140
(a) 0 (b) 1
18. The number of ordered pairs of different
(c) 2 (d) 4
prime numbers whose sum is not exceeding
15. A father wants to divide Rs 200 into two 26 and difference between second number
parts between two sons such that by
and first number cannot be less than 10.
adding three times the smaller part to half
of the larger part, then its will always be (a) 8 (b) 9
less than Rs 200. How will he divided this (c) 10 (d) 11
amount ? 19. The number of possible pairs of succesive
(a) Smaller part is always less than 50 prime numbers such that each of them is
(b) Larger part is always greater than 160 greater than 40 and their sum is atmost
(c) Larger part is always less than 160 100 is
(d) Smaller part is always greater than 40 (a) 3 (b) 2
16. A bus conductor gets a total of 220 coins (c) 4 (d) 1
of 25 paise, 50 paise and Re. 1 daily. 20. In an election the supporters of two
One day he gets Rs 110 and next day he candidates A and B were taken to polling
gets Rs 80 in that the number of coins of both in two different vehicles, capable
25 paise and 50 paise coins are of carrying 10 and 15 voters respectively.
interchanged then find the total number of If atleast 90 vehicles were required
50 paise coins and 25 paise coins. to carry a total of 1200 voters, then find
(a) 180 (b) 190 the maximum number of votes by which
(c) 160 (d) 200 the elections could be won by the
17. An examination consists of 160 questions. candidates, B.
One mark is given for every correct option.
(a) 900 (b) 600
If one-fourth mark is deducted for every
wrong option and half mark is deducted (c) 300 (d) 500

Q. N. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. c a c c b a d a c b
Q. N. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. b b d a b d b d a b

ANCE 49
 Logarithms

m
(vi) log a n x m    log a x
 If “a” and N are positive real numbers n
where a  1 and x is real, then (vii) logax = 1, if a  1
ax = N  x = logaN. (viii) loga1 = 0, if a  1
e.g. (i) 3x = 2  x = log32 1
(ix) log b a 
(ii) log3x = 5 x = 35 log a b
(x) log b a  log c a. log b c
Note : Logarithms are defined only for positive
values. 1
(xi) log b a  log b a
2
 For a > 0 and a  1.  (i) logax > 0 iff (x > 1 and a > 1)
(i) logax is real if x > 0. (or) (0 < x < 1 and 0 < a < 1)
(ii) logax is imaginary if x < 0. (ii) logax < 0 iff (x > 1 and 0 < a < 1)
(iii) logax is not defined if x = 0. (or) (0 < x < 1 and a > 1)
(iv) Graph for logax (If x > 0, 0 < a < 1) :
 Important note :
a > 1; x > y  logax > logay
(i) a & b > 1 and b > a  logab > 1
(ii) a & b > 1 and b < a  0 < logab < 1
(iii) a & b > 1, then logab > 0
(iv) 0 < a < 1 and b > 1, then logab < 0
(v) 0 < a < 1 and 0 < b < 1, then
(v) Graph for logax (If x > 0, a > 1) : b < a  logab > 1
and b > a  0 < logab < 1

 a log x b  b log x a
log 5 log 2
e.g. If x  2 , y  5 , then x  y
 a, b, c are in G.P.  logax, logbx, logcx are
in H.P.
 For x, y > 0 and “a” > 0, a  1, then e.g. log 1 x , log 1 x , log 1 x are in
2 4 8
(i) logaxy = logax + logay
(A) A.P. (b) G.P.
x
(ii) log a    log a x  log a y (c) H.P. (d) None
 y
 a log a x  x
 mn 
(iii) loga    loga m  loga n  loga p  loga q
 pq 
(iv) loga x n  n. loga x The integral part of a logarithm is called
1 characteristic and decimal part is called
(v) log a n x  log a x Mantissa.
n

ANCE 50 50
 Logarithms

 To find characteristic :  32x 

 2   26
Case1: If the number is greater than unity and if  
 
there are n digits in integral part, then its 3x
characteristic = (n – 1)  6  3x  12
2
Case2: If the number is less than unity and if there 12
 x 4
are n zeros after decimal (and number 3
starts), then its characteristic is n  1 [called  log 2 2
64  4
as Bar (n + 1)]. (ii) Take log9243 = x
Note: 6.325 means – 6 + 0.325 whereas Then 9x = 243
– (6.325) means – 6.325. 9x = 3 5
log a (32)x = 35
 log b a 
log b 32x = 35
2x = 5
 log c a. log b c. log d b  log d a
5
x
e.g. log2 x . log3 2 . log log4 3... logn 1 n  logn1 x 2
5
 log 9 243 
1 1 1 2
   n
log x n ( xyz ) log y n (xyz ) log z n (xyz ) (iii) Take log0.1100 = x
Then (0.1)x = 100
1 1 1
e.g.   2 x
log x 2 ( xyz ) log y2 ( xyz ) log z 2 (xyz ) 1 2
   10
 10 
SOLVED OBJECTIVES (10 1 ) x  102
1. The values of 10 x  102
(i) log 2 64 x  2
2
 log0.1100 = – 2
(ii) log9 243
(iii) log0.1100 is 2. log c2 (a b ) . log a3 (bc ) . log b4 (ca ) 
5 5 abc abc
(A) 4,  2, (b) 4, , 2
2 2 (A) (b)
8 4
5 abc
(c)  2, 4, (d) None of these (c) (d) None of these
2 24
Sol.1 (i) Take log 2 64 = x Sol.2 log c2 (a b ) . log a 3 (b c ) . log b4 (c a )
2

 
Then 2 2  64
x
 b log c2 a. c log a3 b. a log b 4 c
x
 32  log e a log e b log e c
 2   26
  ( 64  2 6 )  b 2
c 3
a
  log e c log e a log e b4

ANCE 51
 Logarithms

b. log e a c. log e b a. log e c 5. x log y  log z  ylog z  log x  z log x  log y 

  
2 log e c 3 log e a 4 log e b (A) 0 (b) 1 (c) 2 (d) 3
abc Sol.5 Let a = x
log y  log z
 ylog z  log x  z log x  log y

24
By taking logarithms
b log a = log x log y  log z  log y log z  log x
3. If a1 2 x .b1 2 x  a 4  x .b 4  x , then x log  =
a  log z log x  log y
(A) log a (b) log b = (log y – log z) log x + (log z – log x) log y
(c) log ab (d) None of these + (log x – log y) log z
Sol.3 Given a1 2 x .b1 2 x  a 4  x .b 4  x = log x log y – log x log z + log y log z
Taking logarithms on both sides – log x log y + log x log z – log y log z
log a = 0
log [a1 2 x .b1 2 x ]  log [a 4  x .b 4  x ]
log a = log 1  a = 1
(1 – 2x) log a + (1 + 2x) log b
1 1 1
= (4 + x) log a + (4 – x) log b 6.   
log a abc log b abc log c abc
i.e., log a – 2x log a + log b + 2x log b
= 4 log a + x log a + 4 log b – x log b (A) log a (b) 1
3x log b – 3x log a = 3 log a + 3 log b (c) 0 (d) None
3x (log b – log a) = 3 (log a + log b) 1 1 1
Sol.6  
b log a abc log b abc log c abc
x . log   log ab
a  log abc a  log abc b  log abc c
ab  log abc abc
4. If a2 + b2 = 7ab, then log  
 3  =1
1 1 7. If logx3 + logx9 + logx729 = 9, then the
(A) (log a  log b) (b) (log a  log b)
2 3 value of x is -
1 (A) 9 (b) 27 (c) 81 (d) 3
(c) (log a  log b) (d) None
2
Sol.4 Since a2 + b2 = 7ab, we have Sol.7 logx3 + logx9 + logx729 = 9

a 2  b 2  2ab  9ab i.e., (a + b)2 = 9ab  log x 3  log x 32  log x 36  9

 a  b  9ab  3 ab  log x 3  2 logx 3  6 logx 3  9

ab  9 log x 3  9
 ab
3 9
 log x 3  1
Taking logarithms on both sides 9
1
ab  x1  3
log    log ab  log (ab) 2
 3   x 3
1
 log (ab)
2 8. If log (x – 1) + log (x + 4) = log (3x + 5),
1 then x =
 (log a  log b)
2 (A) 2 (b) 3 (c) – 3 (d) 5

ANCE 52
 Logarithms

Sol.8 log (x – 1) + log (x + 4) = log (3x + 5)

 log {(x – 1) (x + 4)} = log (3x + 5)
(x – 1) (x + 4) = 3x + 5 1. loge (mn) is equal to
x2 – x + 4x – 4 – 3x – 5 = 0 (a) loge (m + n) (b) logem . logen
x2 – 9 = 0 (c) logem + logen (d) logemn
x2 = 9 2. log x 2 a. log a 3 x is -
x=±3
1
But, for (a) 6 logx a (b) log a x
x = – 3, log (x – 1) and log (3x + 5) are 2
not defined. 1 1
(c) log x a (d)
6 6
9. Given log 2 = 0.3010 and log 3 = 0.4771.
3. log b a. log c b. log a c is -
If x5 – 1 = 62 – x, then the value of x is
(A) 1.45 (b) 1.527 (a) abc (b) 1 (c) 0 (d) None
(c) 0.153 (d) None of these 1 1
4.  is equal to
5–1
Sol.9 Given equation is x = 62 – x loga ab log b ab
Taking log on both sides, we get (a) 1 (b) a (c) ab (d) b
log 5x – 1 = log 62 – x
5. log 4 2  log8 2  log16 2 is -
 ( x  1) log 5  ( 2  x ) log 6
7 1 3
 x log 5  log 5  2 log 6  x log 6 (a) (b) 0 (c) (d)
12 12 16
x log 5  x log 6  2 log 6  log 5 6. If logx 2  log x 4  logx 8  3, then x is -
x (log 5  log 6)  2 log 6  log 5 (a) 2 (b) 4 (c) 8 (d) 16
2 log 6  log 5 7. logaab is equal to -
x ...(i)
log 5  log 6 (a) log a a. log a b (b) log ab – log a
10 (c) 1 + logab (d) None
Now, log 5  log  log 10  log 2
2 8. a log a x is equal to -
= 1.0000 – 0.3010 (given) x
= 0.6990 (a) ax (b) 1 (c) (d) x
a
and log 6 = log (2 × 3) = log 2 + log 3
9. If log4 (log3x)  1 , then x is -
= 0.3010 + 0.4771 2
= 0.7781 (a) 3 (b) 6 (c) 9 (d) 12
Put the values of log 5 and log 6 in (1), we
get  a2   b2   c2 
10. log    log    log    log (abc)
2 (0.7781)  0.6990 2.2552 b  c a
x 
0.6990  0.7781 1.4771 is equal to -
= 1.527 nearly (a) 1 (b) 0 (c) abc (d) None
10. log0.50.0625 =  16   25   32 
(A) 3 (b) 5 (c) 6 (d) 4 11. 2 log    log   log  
 15   24   27 
4
Sol.10 log0.50.0625 = log0.5(0.5) = 4.log0.50.5
(a) 1 (b) 3 (c) 5 (d) 0
=4× 1=4

ANCE 53
 Logarithms

12. If log7 x  log 7 x 2  log 7 x 3  6, then x is - (a) log 7

(b) log 8
(a) 6 (b) 7 (c) 8 (d) 15
(c) log 9
1 (d) log 12
13. If log 4 [log 2 (log 3 x )]  , then x =
2 22. If x = log79, y = log57, z = log35, then
(a) 9 (b) 27 (c) 81 (d) 243 xyz =
(a) 2 (b) 5 (c) 7 (d) 9
14. If logx 2  logx 4  log x 8  6, then x is -
23. If logxy = 10 and log6x32y = 5, then the
(a) 4 (b) 6 (c) 8 (d) 2 value of x is -
log3 64 (a) 10 (b) 3 (c) 32 (d) 5
15. If  x , then the value of x is -
log 9 8 ab 1
24. If log    (log a  log b), then
(a) 3 (b) 8 (c) 4 (d) 9  3  2
16. If log9x + log3x = 3, then x = a2 + b2 =
(a) 3 (b) 9 (c) 18 (d) 36 (a) 7ab
(b) 3ab
17. If (log10 x )2  (log10 x )  6  0, then the
(c) ab
value of x is -
(d) None of these

(a) 1000 or (b) 10 ab
100 25. If a2 + b2 = 7ab, then log  
 5 
(c) 100 (d) None of these 1
(a) (log a  log b)
18. If log2(x + 5) + log2(x – 2) = 3, then x = 2
(a) 5 (b) 6 (c) 7 (d) 3 1
(b) (log a  log b)
3
 16   54   21  1
19. 2 log    log    log    (c) (log a  log b)
9  224   26  2
1
(a) log 1 (b) log 2 (d) (log a  log b)
3
 13  8 26.
 1
The value of log3 1  1  + log3 1   + . .
(c) log   (d) log  
8  13   3  4
 1 
. . . + log 1   is -
 80 
2 1 1
20. The value of log 8  log   is - (a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 4
3 2 4
27. The value of
(a) 2 log 3 (b) 3 log 5 log43.log54.log65.log76.log87.log98 is -
(c) 3 log 2 (d) 4 log 6
1
21. The value of (a) (b) 1 (c) 0 (d) 2
2

6 1  81   196  28. The value of log 2 [{log 3 (log 3 27 3 )}] is -

2 log    log    log   is -
7 2  16   27  (a) 2 (b) 3 (c) 27 (d) 0

ANCE 54
 Logarithms
n (a) log a
29. The value of  log
r2
r
b
a is - (b) log b
(n  1) (n  2) (c) log ab
(a) logba (d) None of these
2
(n  1) 34. If 4 log9 3 + 9 log 2 4 = 10log x 83 , then the value
(b) log b a
2 of x is -
(n  1) (n  2)
(c) logb (a) 4
2
(b) 9
(n  1) (n  1) (c) 10
(d) logba
2 (d) None of these
30. 2
3log22 + 32log3 2 = .......... 35. If loge2.logx625 = log1016.loge10, then x =
((a) 8 (b) 4 (c) 9 (d) 2 (a) 2 (b) 16
-1 (c) 5 (d) 625
 -1 -1  2
x y z w
31. log 1 - 1 - 1 - x 2    is equal to 36. If a = b = c = d , then loga (bcd) =
   
 1 1 1
(a) log x (b) log x2 (a) y x  z  w 
 
1 1 1 1
(c) 2log x (d) log x (b) z x  y  w 
2  
32. If A = log27 625 + 7 log1113 and B = log9125 1 1 1
7 (c) x y  z  w 
+ 13 log11
then  
1 1 1
(a) A = B (d) w  x  y  z 
 
(b) B > A
37. If logsin x 2 + logcos x 2+ (logsinx2)(logcos x
(c) A > B (b) = 0 then the value of x is -
(d) none
   
33. If a1–2x .b1 + 2x = a4 + x. b4 – x, then x log (a)  2n  2  (b) 2n 
  4
b  
 = (c) n  (d) n 
a 2 4

Q. N. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. c d b a a b c d c b
Q. N. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. d b c d c b a d d c
Q. N. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans. d a b a c c a d a b
Q. N. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
Ans. a b c c c c b

ANCE 55
 Quadratic Equations

Standard form of Quadratic Equations Note : The possible values of x which satisfy
the quadratic equation are called the roots of
An equation of the form ax2 + bx + c = 0 the quadratic equation.
where a, b, c  Complex number and a  0
is called a quadratic equation. The numbers  Roots of a Quadratic Equation : Let
a, b, c are called the coefficients of this p(x) = 0 be a quadratic equation, then the
equation and x is real variable, here a is zeros of the polynomial p(x) are called the
coefficient of x2, b is coefficient of x & c is roots of the equation p(x) = 0.
constant term.
Thus  is a root of p(x) = 0, if p() = 0
 Real Quadratic Equation : An Equation
ax2 + bx + c = 0, a  0 & a, b, c  R is Also, x =  is called a solution of the given
equation.
called “Real Quadratic Equation.”
 Monic Quadratic Equation : If the co-  Solving of a Quadratic Equation by
Factorization Method :
efficient of x2 be unity, then the quadratic
equation is called “Monic Quadratic Let ax2 + bx + c = 0 be a quadratic equation
and let the quadratic polynomial ax2 + bx+ c
Equation”.
be expressible as a product of two linear
 Properties of Quadratic Equations factors, say (dx + e) and (fx + g) where d, e,
A quadratic equation has two and only two f, g are real numbers such that d  0 and
roots. f  0.
 A quadratic equation cannot have more than Then,
two different roots. ax2 + bx + c = 0
 If  is a root of the quadratic equation ax2 +  (dx + e) (fx + g) = 0
bx + c = 0, then (x–) is a factor of  dx + e = 0 or fx + g = 0
ax2 + bx + c = 0. e g
 x = or x 
 If the roots  &  be reciprocals to each other, d f
then a = c. e g
 x and x  are t he
 If the two roots  &  be equal in magnitude d f
and opposite in sign, then b = 0 possible roots of the quadratic equation ax2
+ bx + c = 0.
1 1 b
   . Solving of a Quadratic Equation by
  c
Quadratic Formula :
b 2  4ac Consider the general quadratic equation
   .
a ax2 + bx + c = 0
 If a > 0, then minimum value of ax2 + bx + c where a  0, a, b, c  R :
= 0 is (4ac – b2) / 4a. ax2 + bx = – c
 If a < 0, then maximum value of b c
or x2  x = 
ax2 + bx + c = 0 is (4ac – b2) / 4a. a a
b [Dividing both sides by a]
 If c = 0  one root is zero other is – . 2 2
a 2b  b  c  b 
 If b = c = 0 both roots are zero. or x  x   =  
a  2a  a  2a 

ANCE 56
 Quadratic Equations

 b 
2
 Condition for Common Roots :
[Adding   to both sides] Consider two quadratic equations
 2a 
2 a1x2 + b1x + c1 = 0 ...(i) a1  0
 b  b2 c
or x   =  and 2
a2x + b2x + c2 = 0 ...(ii) a2  0
 2a  4a 2 a
2 (A) If one root is common then,
 b  b 2  4ac
 x   = (a1b2 – a2b1) (b1c2 – b2c1) = (c1a2 – c2a1)2
 2a  4a 2
2
(b) If two roots are common then,
 b 
2  b 2  4ac  a1 b1 c1
 x  
 =    
or
 2a   4a 2  a 2 b2 c 2
b b2  4ac  Sum of the roots of a Quadratic Equation:
or x = 
2a 2a If ,  are the roots of the general form of a
b b 2  4ac quadratic equation ax2 + bx + c = 0, where
 x= 
2a 2a a  0.
 b  b 2  4ac  b  D  b D
i.e, x=   
2a 2a 2a
 b  b 2  4ac b D b D
 and 
2a 2a
 2a
 b  b 2  4ac 
 2a
2a b

b  D a
x where D  b2  4ac
2a  (Coefficien t of x )
This is also called Sridharacharya formula. 
Coeficient of x 2
Thus, the equation ax2 + bx + c = 0 has two
roots  and , given by.  Product of the roots of a quadratic
2
Discriminant : b – 4ac determines the equation :
nature of the roots of the quadratic equation,  b  b 2  4ac  b  b 2  4ac
it is called the ‘DISCRIMINANT’ of the   
quadratic equation. 2a 2a

Nature of the roots : (b)2  ( b 2  4ac )2


Condition Nature of roots 4a 2
when b2 – 4ac < 0 the roots are complex b 2  b 2  4ac
conjugates. 
when b2 – 4ac = 0 the roots are rational and 4a 2
equal. 4ac
 2
when b2 – 4ac > 0 the roots are rational and 4a
and a perfect unequal. c

square a
when b2 – 4ac > 0 the roots are irrational constant term
and not a perfect and unequal. 
Coefficien t of x 2
square

ANCE 57
 Quadratic Equations

 Roots of cubic and quadratic equations (i) (  )  (  ) 2  4

(optional) :
If the equation is of a cubic form, ax3 + bx2 + b 2  4ac  D
 
cx +d = 0, and ,  and  are the 3 roots of a a
the cubic equation, then b 2  2ac
(ii)  2  2  (  ) 2  2 
b a2
    (iii)  3 +  3 = (    )3-3  (    )
a
c b(b 2  3ac)
    a  
a a3
d (iv)  4+  4=[(    )2-2  ]2-2  2  2
  
a
2
If the equation is of biquadratic form,  b 2  2ac  c2
ax4 + bx3 + cx2 + dx + e = 0 and , , & 
 2

  2 a2
 a 
 are the four roots of the quadratic equation.
b (v) 5 +  5 = (  3+  3)(  2+  2)-  2  2(    )
     
a
= [(    )3-3  (    )]
c
           
a × [(    )2-2  ] - [  2  2(    )]
d
         (vi)  2  2  (  ) (  ) 2  4
a
e b b2  4ac  D
   
a a2 a
 Formation of a quadratic equation : (vii)  3  3  (  )3  3(  )
If the general form of a quadratic equation is
ax2 + bx + c, where a  0 and , and  are 
 (  )2  4 (  2   
the roots of the equation then,
b c (b 2  ac) b 2  4ac
 =    
a a
2 a3
ax + bx + c = 0
 b c (viii)  4  4  ( 2  2 )( 2  2 )
a x 2  x    0
 a a
 b(b 2  2ac) b 2  4ac

b c a4
x2   x   0
 a  a (ix)  2    2  (  )2  
x 2     x    0
   2  2 (  ) 2  2
x – x (sum of the roots) + (product of the (x)
2   
   
roots) = 0
(xi)  2  2  (  )
 Relation Between Roots and Coefficient:
2 2
If roots of quadratic equation        4  4 ( 2  2 )2  2 22
(xii)       2 2 
     2 2
ax2 + bx + c = 0 (a  0) are  and  then:

ANCE 58
 Quadratic Equations

3. Relationship between discriminant &  Sign of the Roots :

nature of the roots : 1. The roots  are both negative, if 
If ax2 + bx + c = 0, a  0 is a quadratic and  are both positive
equation, then the expression, b2 – 4ac is b c
(i.e., if and are both positive.)
known as its discriminant and denoted by D. a a
2. The roots  are both positive, if  is
 If a, b, c  R and p + iq is one root of negative and  is positive
quadratic equation (where q  0), then the b c
other root must be conjugate p – iq and (i.e., if is negative and is positive.)
a a
vice–versa. (p, q,  R and i =  1 ) 3. The roots  are of opposite signs,  is
 If a, b, c  Q and p + q is one root of the c
quadratic equation, then the other root must negative (i.e., is negative)
a
be the conjugate p – q and vice–versa Sign of ( Sign of(  Sign of the  
(where p is a rational and q is a surd. + ve + ve andare positive
 If a = 1 and b, c  I and the roots of quadratic - ve + ve andare negative
equation are rational numbers, then these + ve - ve is positiveis
negative if  > 
roots must be integers.
(numerically)
 If the quadratic equation has more than 2
- ve - ve is negativeis
roots (complex numbers), then the equation
positive if  > 
becomes an identity i.e., a = b = c = 0. (numerically)
 The condition that a quadratic function f (x,
y) = ax2 + 2 hxy + by2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + c may 4. If sign of a = sign of b  sign of c  Greater
roots magnitude is negative.
be resolved into two linear factors is that;
 Maximum or minimum value of a
abc + 2 fgh – af2 – bg2 – ch2 = 0
quadratic expression :
a h g The quadratic expression ax2 + bx + c takes
h b f different values as x takes different values.
or = 0.
g f c For all the values of x, as x varies from – 
to + . (i.e., when x is real), the quadratic
When D  0, then the equation ax2 + bx +
expression ax2 + bx + c.
c = 0 is factorizable into two linear factors.
(i) has a minimum value if a > 0. (i.e., a is
i.e., ax2 + bx + c = 0  (x – )(x –) = 0, positive). The minimum value of the quadratic
i.e. a (x – )(x –) where and  are the (4ac  b 2 )
roots of quadratic equation. expression is and it occurs at
4a
 Formation of a Quadratic Equation b
x .
Let ,  be the two roots, then we can form (ii) 2a
has a maximum value if a < 0. (i.e., a is
a quadratic equation as follows : negative). The maximum value of the quadratic
x2 – (Sum of roots)x + (Product of roots) = 0 (4ac  b 2 )
expression is and it occurs at
i.e., x2 – (+)x + () = 0 4 a
b
or (x – (x –) = 0 x .
2a

ANCE 59
 Quadratic Equations

 Graph of a Quadratic Function ax2 + bx + c = 0, a  0

Characteristics of
the Function
When 'a' is positive Y Y Y

X X X
O (minima) O O
(minima)
i.e., a > 0 (minima)

When 'a' is negative

O O O
X X X

(Maxima)
(Maxima)
(Maxima)
i.e., a < 0 Y' Y' Y'

 The graph of a quadratic function (expression)  Either lx + m = 0 or px + q = 0

is called a parabola. The point at which its  lx = – m or px = – q
direction changes is called its turning point,
m q
commonly called the vertex of the parabola.  x=– or x=–
 The graph of the function is concave l p
upwards when a > 0 and concave  Completing the square :
downwards when a < 0.
Step 1. Consider the standard quadratic equation :
 If the graph has no points in common with the ax2 + bx + c = 0, (a  0)
x-axis, the roots of the equation are imaginary
Step 2. Transpose the constant term (c) to the other
and cannot be determined from the graph.
side (RHS).
 If the graph is tangent to the x-axis, the roots
Step 3. Make the coefficient of x2 as unity. Divide
are real and equal.
both sides by coefficient of x2 i, e., by a
 If the graph cuts the x-axis, the roots of the
Step 4. Make the L.H.S. as perfect square or
equation will be real and unequal. Their values completing the square of L.H.S. by adding
will be given by the abscissa of the points of both sides
intersection of the graph and the x-axis. 2 2
1   b 
5. 2
Solut ion of ax + bx + c = 0 by various  (coefficien t of x )   
2   2a 
methods :
Step 5. Taking square-root of both sides. Take both
 Factorization : the signs.
Let ax2 + bx + c = 0 by the given quadratic Step 6. Obtain two values of the variable (x).
equation. Assume that (ax2 + bx + c) be
expressible as the product of two linear factors Solutions of Equations Reducible to
namely (lx + m) and (px + q) where l, m, p, q Quadratic Form
are real numbers such that l  0, p  0. Then Equation which at the outset are not
2
ax + bx + c = 0  (lx + m) (px + q) = 0 quadratic equations but can be reduced to

ANCE 60
 Quadratic Equations

quadratic equations by using suitable Type 2 : Equatins of the form

algebraic transformations. Such equations a {p(x)}2 + b. p(x) + c = 0, where p(x) is an
are called equations reducible to quadratic expression in x and a, b, c are real
equations. Some of the common types are : numbers.

 ax4 + bx2 + c = 0 Algorithm to solve equations of the form

This can be reduced to a quadratic equation a {p(x)}2 + b {p(x) + c = 0, where p(x) is
by substituting x2 = y. i.e., ay2 + by + c = 0. an expression in x and a, b, c  R.

Type 1 : Equations of the Form : Step 1 : Obtain the equation. Let the equation be
ax4 + bx2 + c = 0. a {p(x)}2 + b {p(x)} + c = 0, where a, b, c  R.
Step 2 : Put p(x) = y, {p(x)}2 = y2 in the equation
Algorithm to solve equation of the form obtained in step 1 to get the quadratic ay2 +
ax4 + bx2 + c = 0 by + c = 0.
Step 1 : Obtain the given equation. Step 3 : Solve the quadratic in y obtained in step 2
Step 2 : Replace x2 by y and x4 by y2 in the given by any one of the methods of solving quadratic
equation to obtain a quadratic equation in y. equations. Let the values be y =  and y = .
Step 3 : Solve the quadratic equation in y by any Step 4 : Solve the equations p(x) =  and p(x) = 
one of the methods of solving a quadratic for x.
equation. Step 5 : The values of x obtained in step IV constitute
Step 4 : Obtain the positive values of y. Let the values the solution set of the given equation.
of y be  and .
Example :Solve : ( x 2  3x )2  ( x 2  3x )  6  0,
Step 5 : Solve the equations x2 =  and x2 = .
x  R.
Step 6 : The values of x obtained in step V constitute
Solution : Putting x2 + 3x = y, the given equation
the solution set of the given equation. reduces to y2 – y – 6 = 0
4 2
Example : Solve 2x – 5x + 3 = 0. Now,
Solution : Putting x2 = y, the given equation y2 – y – 6 = 0  y2 – 3y + 2y – 6 = 0
reduces to
 y (y – 3) + 2 (y – 3) = 0
2y2 – 5y + 3 = 0  2y2 – 2y – 3y + 3 = 0  (y – 3) (y + 2) = 0
 2y (y – 1) – 3 (y – 1) = 0  y – 3 = 0 or y + 2 = 0
 (2y – 3) (y – 1) = 0  y = 3 or y = – 2
 2y – 3 = 0 or y – 1 = 0  x + 3x = 3  x2 + 3x – 3 = 0
2

 y = 3/2 or y = 1  3  9  12  3  21
 x 
Now, y = 3/2  x2 = 3/2 2 2
2
 x   3/ 2 And, y = – 2 x + 3x = –2
2
And, y = 1  x2 = 1  x + 3x + 2 = 0
x2 + 2x + x + 2 = 0
 x = ± 1.
 x (x + 2) + 1 (x + 2) = 0
Hence, the roots of the given equation are (x + 2) (x + 1) = 0
3 3  x + 2 = 0 or x + 1 = 0
1, – 1, , .
2 2 x = – 2 or x = – 1

ANCE 61
 Quadratic Equations

Hence, the roots of the given equation are  3y – 5 = 0 or 5y – 3 = 0

 3  21  3  21  y = 5/3 or y = 3/5
– 2, – 1, and
2 2 5 x 5
Now, y =    3x  5x  5
Type 3 : Equations of the form 3 x 1 3
b  2x = – 5  x = – 5/2
a p(x )   c, where p(x) is an
P (x)
expression in x and a, b, c are real 3 x 3
And, y     5x  3x  3
numbers. 5 x 1 5
Algorithm to solve equations of the form 3
 2x = 3  x 
b 2
a p(x )   c, where p(x) is an Hence, the roots of the given equation are
P (x)
expression in x and a, b, c are real 3 5
and
numbers. 2 2

Step 1 : Obtain the given equation. Let the equation Type 4 : Equations of the form
b  1   1
be a p(x )  c. (i) a  x2  2   b x    c  0
p (x)  x   x
Step 2 : Put p (x) = y in the equation in step 1 to  1   1
obtain the quadratic a y2 – cy + b = 0. (ii) a  x2  2   b  x    c  0
 x   x
Step 3 : Solve the quadratic in step 2 by any one of
the methods discussed in previous sections. Algorithm to solve equations of the form
Let the values of y be  and .  1   1
(i) a  x 2  2   b  x    c  0 and
Step 4 : Solve the equation p(x) =  and p(x) =   x   x
for x.  1   1
Step 5 : The values of x obtained in step 4 constitute a  x2  2   b  x    c  0
 x   x
the solution set of the given eqaution.
Following examples will illustrate the above Step 1 : Obtain the equation.
algorithm. Step 2 : If the coefficient of b in the given equation
x x  1 34 1 1
Example : Solve :   contains x  , then replace x 2  2 by
x 1 x 15 x x
x x 1 1 2
1
Solution : Putting  y and  . The  1
x 1 x y  x    2 and put x  x  y. In case the
 x
given equation reduces to 1
coefficient of b is x  , then replace
1 34 y 2  1 34 x
y    2
y 15 y 15 1  1
2
x 2  2 by  x    2 and put
 15 y – 34y + 15 = 0. x  x
Now, 15 y2 – 34y + 15 = 0 1
x   y.
 15 y2 – 25y – 9y + 15 = 0 x
 5y (3y – 5) – 3 (3y – 5) = 0 Step 3 : Solve the quadratic equation in y obtained in
 (3y – 5) (5y – 3) = 0 step 2.

ANCE 62
 Quadratic Equations

Step 4 : Equate the values of y obtained in step 3 to And,

1 1
x  or x  as the case may be and 7 1 7 x2 1  7
y  x   
x x 3 x 3 x 3
obtain a quadratic equation in x. 2
3x + 3 = – 7x
Step 5 : Solve the quadratic equations obtained in 3x2 + 7x + 3 = 0
step 4. The values of x so obtained consititute
the solution set of the given equation.  7  49  36  7  13
 x  
Following examples illustrate the above 6 6
Hence, the roots of the given equation are
alogrithm.
Example : Solve : 1  7  13
3, , .
3 6
 1   1
9  x 2  2   9  x    52  0 Type 5 : Equations of the form
 x   x
(x + a) (x + b) (x + c) (x + d) + k = 0, where
1 a, b, c, d k  R such that a + b = c + d.
Solution : Let x   y. Then
x Algorithm to solve equations of the form
2
 1 2 2 1 2 (x + a) (x + b) (x + c) (x + d) + k = 0, where
x   y  x  2 2  y a, b, c, d, k  R such that a + b = c + d.
 x x
1 Step 1 : Obtain the equation (x + a) (x + b) (x + c)
 x 2  2  y2  2
x (x + d) + k = 0.
Substitution Step 2 : Re-write the given equation in the form
1 1 {(x + a) (x + b) } { (x + c) (x + d) } + k = 0.
x   y and x 2  2  y 2  2 in t he Step 3 : Put x2 + x (a + b) = x2 + x (c + d) = y
x x
given equation, it becomes. and obtain a quadratic in y i.e.
9 (y2 – 2) – 9y – 52 = 0 (y + ab) (y + cd) + k = 0.
9y2 – 9y – 70 = 0 Step 4 : Solve the quadratic obtained in step 3. Let
9y2 – 30 y + 21y – 70 = 0 the value of y be y1 and y2.
2
3y (3y – 10) + 7 (3y – 10) = 0 Step 5 : Equate x + x (a + b) to y1 and y2 to obtain
(3y – 10) (3y + 7) = 0 two quadratic equation in x. The values of x
so obtained form the solution set of the given
3y – 10 = 0 and 3y + 7 = 0
equation.
10 7 Following examples illustrate the above
 y  and y 
3 3 algorithm.
Now,
Example : (x + 1) (x + 2) (x + 3) (x + 4) = 120.
10 1 10 x 2  1 10
y  x    Solution : Since 1 + 4 = 2 + 3. So, we write the
3 x 3 x 3 given equation in the following form :
 3x2 + 3 = 10 x  3x2 – 10x + 3 = 0 {(x + 1) (x + 4)} {(x + 2) (x + 3)} = 120
 3x2 – 9x – x + 3 = 0  (x2 + 5x + 4) (x2 + 5x + 6) = 120
 3x (x – 3) – 1 (x – 3) = 0 Putting x2 + 5x = y. The above equation
 (3x – 1) (x – 3) = 0 becomes
 3x – 1 or x – 3 = 0 (y + 4) (y + 6) = 120  y2 + 10y + 24
x = 1/3 or x = 3. = 120

ANCE 63
 Quadratic Equations

 y2 + 10y – 96 = 0 Example : Solve : 2 x  9  x  13.

 y2 + 16y – 6y – 96 = 0 Solution : The given equation is
 y (y + 16) – 6 (y + 16) = 0 2 x  9  x  13  2 x  9  13  x.
 y + 16 = 0 or y – 6 = 0
Now, 2 x  9  13  x
 y = – 16 or y = 6
 2x + 9 = (13 – x)2
Now, y = – 16  x2 + 5x = – 16
[On squaring both sides]
 x2 + 5x + 16 = 0 2
 x – 28x + 160 = 0
Clearly, discriminant of this equation is
 x2 – 20x – 8x + 160 = 0
negative. So, it has no real solution.
 x (x – 20) – 8 (x – 20) = 0
And, y = 6
 (x – 20) (x – 8) = 0
 x2 + 5x = 6  x2 + 5x – 6 = 0
 x – 20 = 0 or x – 8 = 0
 x2 + 6x – x – 6 = 0
 x = 20 or x = 8
 x (x + 6) (x – 1) = 0
Clearly, we have to find those solutions for
 x + 6 = 0 or x – 1 = 0 which
 x = – 6 or x = 1 2x + 9  0 and 13 – x  0
Hence, the roots of the given equation are i.e., x ³ – 9/2 and x  13
– 6 and 1.
 – 9/2  x  13
Since x = 20 does not satisfy this condition.
Type 6 : Equations of the form ax  b  cx  d, So, it is the extraneous root.
where a, b, c, d  R. Hence, x = 8 is the only root of the given
equation.
Algorithm to solve equations of the form
ax  b  cx  d. Type 7 : Equations of the form

ax2  bx  c  dx  e ,
Step 1 : Obtain the equation. Let the equation be
where a, b, c, d, e  R.
ax  b  cx  d. Algorithm to solve equations of the form
Step 2 : Square both sides to obtain ax + b =
(cx + d)2 or c2 x2 + (2 cd – a) x + d2 – b = 0. ax 2  bx  c  dx  e .
Step 3 : Solve the quadratic equation obtained in Step 1 : Obtain the equation. Let the equation be
step 2.
ax 2  bx  c  dx  e.
Step 4 : Reject those values of x, obtained in step 3,
which do not satisfy both ax + b  0 and Step 2 : Square both sides of the equation2in step 1
to obtain the quadratic equation ax + bx + c
cx + d  0. The remaining values of x obtained
= (dx + e)2 or x2 (a – d2) + x (b – 2 de) +
in step 3 form the solution set of the given
(c – e2) = 0.
equation.
Step 3 : Solve the quadratic obtained in step 2.
NOTE : Those values of the variable which do not Step 4 : Put ax2 + bx + c  0 and dx + e  0 to obtain
satisfy the given equation but are obtained two inequations.
from the given equation are known as Step 5 : From the set of values obtained in step 3,
extraneous roots of the given equation. Such take those values only which satisfy the
a case arises when both sides of the equation inequations in step 4. Other values are
are squared. extraneous roots of the equation.

ANCE 64
 Quadratic Equations

Step 6 : The values obtained in step 5 form the solution Step 7 : These values which satisfy the inequations in
set of the equation. step 6 and the given equation determine the
Following examples illustrate the above solution set of the given equation.
algorithm. Following examples illustrate the above
algorithm.
Example : Solve : 3x 2  x  5  x  3 .
Solution : We have : 3x 2  x  5  x  3 Example : Solve : 4  x  x  9  5.
 3x2 + x + 5 = (x – 3)2 Solution : We have : 4  x  x  9  5.
2
 2x + 7x – 4 = 0  4 x  5 x 9
 2x2 + 8x – x – 4 = 0
 2x (x + 4) – (x + 4) = 0  ( 4  x ) 2  (5  x  9 ) 2
 (2x – 1) (x + 4) = 0 [On squaring both sides]
 2x – 1 = 0 or x + 4 = 0  4 – x = 25 + x + 9 – 10 x  9
 x = 1/2 or x = – 4
We have to find those solutions which satisfy  – 2x – 30 =  10 x  9
the inequations  (x + 15)2 = 25 (x + 9)
3x2 + x + 5  0 and x – 3 0.  x2 + 5x = 0
Clearly, none of these two values satisfy both
 x (x+ 5) = 0
the inequations
3x2 + x + 5  0 and x – 3 0  x = 0 or x = – 5
Hence, the given equation has no solution. We have to find those solutions for which
4 – x  0 and x + 9  0 i.e., x  4 and x  9
Type 8 : Equations of the form i.e.,
ax  b  cx  d  e or – 9  x  4.
ax  b  cx  d  e, Clearly, x = 0 and x = – 5 satisfy this condition
where a, b, c, d, e  R. and they also satisfy the given equation.
Hence, the roots of the given equation are 0
 Algorithm : and – 5.
Step 1 : Obtain the equation. Let the equation be  Finding the roots of a quadratic equation
ax  b  cx  d  e. by graphical method :
Step 2 : Transfer one of the expressions with radical Let us learn how to draw the graph of y = x2
sign to the other side. We assume certain real values for x, i.e., we
Step 3 : Square both sides and simplify in such a substitute some values for x in y = x2. We can
manner that the expression involving radical find the corresponding values of y. We
sign on one side and all other terms are on tabulate the values, as shown below.
the other side. x 5 4 3 2 1 0
Step 4 : Square both sides of the equation obtained y = x2 25 16 9 4 1 0
in step 3 and simplify it to obtain a quadratic x –1 –2 –3 –4 –5
2
in x. y = x 1 4 9 16 25
Step 5 : Solve the quadratic obtained in step 4. Plotting the points corresponding to the
Step 6 : Reject those values, obtained in step 5, which ordered pairs (5, 25), (4, 16), (3, 9), (2, 4),
do not satisfy ax + b  0 and cx + d  0. (1, 1), (0, 0), (– 1, 1), (– 2, 4), (– 3, 9),

ANCE 65
 Quadratic Equations

(– 4, 16) and (– 5, 25) on the graph paper Y

and joining them with a smooth curve we 0
obtain the graph of y = x2,. as shown below. (ii) X
We observe the following about the graph of
y = x2.
1. It is a U shaped graph and it is called a
parabola. The arms of the ‘U’ spread outwards.
2
2. For every value of x ( 0) we notice that y is y = kx , k < 0
always positive. Hence, the graph lies entirely The method of solving the quadratic equation
in the first and second quadrants. of the form px2 + qx + r = 0 whose roots are
2
3. When x = 0, y = 0  y = x passes through real is shown in the following example.
origin. Example Solve : 2x2 – x – 3 = 0
4. The graph is symmetric about the y-axis. Solution : We know that the roots 2x2 – x – 3 = 0
2
5. Using the graph of y = x , we can find the are the x coordinates of the points of
square of any real number as well as the square intersection of the parabola y = 2x2 and the
root of any non-negative real number. line y = x + 3.
Y (1) y = 2x2
2
25 y=x
x 0 1 2 –1 –2
20
15 y = 2x2 0 2 8 2 8
10
(2) y=x+3
5
X
x 0 1 2
X'
–5 –4 –3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3 4 5 y=x+3 3 4 5
x –1 –2 –3
y=x+3 2 1 0

Y' Draw the graph of y = 2x2 and y = x + 3.

Clearly, the perpendiculars drawn from the
(a) for any given x value, the corresponding y
points of intersection of parabola and the line
value on the graph is its square and
3
(b) for any given y ( 0) value, the meet the x-axis at  , 0  and (– 1, 0)
corresponding x value on the graph is its 2 
square root. The roots of the given quadratic equation
6. The graph of y = kx2, when k > 0 lies entirely 3
2x2 – x – 3 = 0 are and – 1.
in Q1 and Q2 and when k < 0 the graph lies 2
Y
entirely Q3 and Q4 y = 2x2
× ×
Y
8
6 y=x+3
4
×
2
(i) X X' X
0 –2 –1.5 –1 0 1 1.5 2 2.5
–2

y = kx2, k > 0 Y'

ANCE 66
 Quadratic Equations

Q uadratic in Equations The above concept can be summerised as

Consider the quadratic equations ax2 + bx + (i) If < x < then (x – ) (x – ) < 0
c = 0, (a  0) where a, b and c are real numbers. and vice - versa.
The quadratic inequations related to (ii) If x<  or x > < , then
ax2 + bx + c = 0 are ax2 + bx + c < 0 and (x – ) (x – ) > 0 and vice - versa.
ax2 + bx + c > 0.
Note: If a < 0 and b2 – 4ac < 0 then the
Assume that a > 0.
solution for ax2 + bx + c > 0 does not exist.
The following cases arise :
Example :
Case I Solve the inequation x2 + x – 6 < 0.
2 2
If b – 4ac > 0, then the equation ax + bx +
Solution :
c = 0 has real and unequal roots.
Given inequation is x2 + x – 6 < 0
Let  and  ( < ) be the roots.
Then,  x + 3) (x – 2) < 0
 ax2 + bx + c = a (x – ) (x – )  x + 3) < 0, (x – 2) > 0
or x + 3) > 0, (x – 2) < 0
– 
 x< –3, x > 2 (case I)
(a) If x < , then (x – ) < 0 (or) x > –3, x < 2 (case II)
and (x – ) < 0 Case I
2
 ax + bx + c > 0 x< –3, x > 2
(b) If < x < then (x – ) > 0
and (x – ) < 0
 ax2 + bx + c < 0
(c) If x >then x –  > 0 There exist no value of x so that x < – 3 and
and x –  > 0 x > 2 (as there is no overlap of the region).
 ax2 + bx + c > 0 Hence in this case no value of x satisfies the
Case II given inequation.
2 2
If b – 4ac = 0, then ax + bx + c = 0 has real
Case II
and equal roots.
Let x be the equal root. x> –3, and x < 2
 ax2 + bx + c = a (x – x) (x – x) –5 –4 –3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3 4 5
x>–3
– 
x
(a) If x < x. Then x – x < 0 x<2

 ax2 + bx + c > 0
(b) If x > x, then x – x > 0 All the points in the overlapping region, i.e.,
– 3 < x < 2, satisfy the inequation. Hence,
 ax2 + bx + c > 0
the solution of the inequation
Case III x2 + x – 6 < 0. is {x / –3 < x < 2} or ( –3, 2)
2 2
If b – 4ac < 0, then ax + bx + c = 0 has
Example :
imaginary roots.
Solve for x : x2 – 4x + 3  0.
In this case, ax2 + bx + c > 0,

ANCE 67
 Quadratic Equations

Solution : Solution :
Given inequation is x2 – 4x + 3  0. (a)  (2x – 1) (x – 3) = (x + 5) (x – 1)
 (x – 1) (x – 3)  0  2x2 – 6x – x + 3 = x2 – x + 5x – 5
 x – 1 0; x – 3  0  2x2 – 7x + 3 = x2 + 4x – 5
or x – 1 0; x – 3  0  2x2 – x2 – 7x – 4x + 3 + 5 = 0
 x  1; x  3 (Case I) (or)  x2 – 11x + 8 = 0
x  1; x 3 (Case II) It is of the form ax2 + bx + c = 0
Case I Therefore, the given equation is a quadratic
equation.
x  1 and x  3
(b) (x + 2)3 = 2x(x2 – 1)
–5 –4 –3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3 4 5
 x3 + 8 + 6x (x + 2) = 2x3 – 2x
 x3 + 8 + 6x2 + 12x = 2x3 – 2x
 x3 – 2x3 + 6x2 + 12x + 2x + 8 = 0
All the points in the overlapping region, i.e., x  –x3 + 6x2 + 14x + 8 = 0
 3, satisfy the given inequation. or x3 – 6x2 – 14x – 8 = 0
Case II It is not of the form ax2 + bx + c = 0 and it is
not quadratic.
x  1 and x  3
Example-3
–5 –4 –3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3 4 5 2
If 2 and – are the solutions of the quadratic
x<1 3
equation 3x2 = bx + c. Determine the value of
x<3 b and c.
Solution :
All the points in the overlapping region, i.e., 2
x  1, satisfy the given inequation Since 2 and – are solutions of the equation
3
Hence, the solution for the given inequation is 3x2 – bx – c = 0, then :
x  (– , 1]  [3, ) Since 2 is root of 3x2 – bx – c = 0, then :
Example-1 3 (2)2 – 2b – c = 0
Find the value of quadratic polynomial 2b + c = 12 ......(1)
p(x) = 5x2 – 6x + 3 at x = –1 and x = 3 2
Solution : – is a root of 3x2 – bx – c = 0, then :
3
p(x) = 5x2 – 6x + 3 2
 2  2
p(–1) = 5(–1)2 – 6(–1) + 3 3 –  – b – 3 – c = 0
 3  
5 + 6 + 3 = 14 3(4) – 2b – c = 0
p(3) = 5(3)2 – 6(3) + 3
 4   2b 
5 × 9 – 18 + 3 3   +   –c=0
9  3 
45 – 18 + 3 = 30
 –2b + 3c = 4 ....(2)
Example-2
Solving (1) and (2), we get
Check whether the following are quadratic
12 = 2b + c b=4
equations.
4 = –2b + 3c c=4
(a) (2x –1) (x – 3) = (x + 5) (x – 1)
Required values of b and c are 4 and 4
(b) (x + 2)3 = 2x (x2 – 1)
b=4=c

ANCE 68
 Quadratic Equations

Example - 4 –b
 × a2 = b2 – 2ac
If 4 is a root of t he equat ion a
px2 – 54x + 40 = 0, find the value of  –ab = b2 – 2ac
p and also find the other root.  2ac = b2 + ab
Solution :  2ac = b2 + ab
The given equation is px2 – 54x + 40 = 0 ..(i)
Example - 6
Since 4 is a root of the equation (1) then we
If  and  are the roots of quadratic equations
must have
px2 – qx + r = 0, form the equation whose
p(4)2 – 54(4) + 40 = 0
 
16p – 216 + 40 = 0 roots are 2 and 2
 
16p – 176 = 0
Solution :
176
16p = 176  p = = 11
1  and  are the roots of px2 – qx + r = 0.
16
(1)  f(x) = 11x2 – 54x + 40 = 0 ..... (2) q r
Then  +  = and  =
Since 4 is a root of f(x) then (x – 4) is a factor p p
of f(x).  
We want equation with roots 2 and 2 ,
2
Divide 11x – 54x + 40 by (x – 4) then we  
get :
2
  3   3
f(x) = 11x – 54x + 40 = 0 Sum of the roots ‘S’ = 2 + 2 = 2 2
  
= (x –4) (11x – 10) = 0
Either (x – 4) = 0 or 11x – 10 = 0 (  )2 – 3 (  )
=
() 2
10
x = 4 or x = as a3 + b3 = (a + b)3 – 3ab (a+b)
11
Required value of p is 11 and other root is 3
q
– 3
r q
.
q 3 3rq
10   –
p p p p3 p 2
11 = 2 =
r r2
Example - 5   p2
2  p
If the sum of the roots of ax + bx + c = 0 is
equal to the sum of the squares of the roots
q 3 – 3pqr p2 q 3 – 3pqr
then find the condition. = × 2 =
p3 r r2p
Solution :
If ,  are the roots of ax2 + bx + c = 0 then  
Product of roots p = 2 .
–b c  
+= ,.=
a a
Given that  +  =  + 2 2 1 1 p
= = =
  +  = ( + )2 – 2 .   r/p r
2 The required equation is x2 – (S)x + P = 0 or
–b  b  c b2 2c
   –  – 2 . = 2 –  q 3 – 3pqr  p
a  a a a a 2
x –  r 2p  x + = 0
  r
–b b 2 – 2ac or r px – (q – 3pqr)x + p2r = 0
2 2 3
  2
a a

ANCE 69
 Quadratic Equations

Example - 7 Example - 10
If one of the roots of the quadratic equation Find the values of k for which the given
2x2 + px + 4 = 0 is 2, find the other root. equation has real and equal roots.
Also, find the value of p.
Solution :
Solution :
2x2 – 10x + k = 0
The given equation is 2x2 + px + 4 = 0.
a = 2, b = 10, c = k
4
Here the product of the roots = = 2. Since,
2  D = b2 – 4ac = (–10)2 – 4 × 2 × k = 0
the one root of the equation = 2. The given equation will have real and equal
Therefore the other root = 2/2 = 1 ....(i) roots if
Now the sum of the roots = – p/2. 100 25
D = 0  100 – 8k = 0  k = =
 One of the roots of the equation is 2 8 2
–p –p – 4 Example - 11 Find the condition that the quadratic
 The other root = –2= ...(ii)
2 2 equations x2 + ax + b = 0 and x2 + bx + a = 0
From (i) and (ii), we have, may have a common root.
–p – 4 Solution :
= 1  –p – 4 = 2
2 Let  be a common root of the given
 –p = 2 + 4 = 6
equations.
 p = –6.
Then 2 + a + b = 0
Hence, p = –6 and the other root = 1.
and 2 + b + a = 0
Example - 8
By the method of cross-multiplication, we get
Find the discriminant and the roots of the 2  1
quadratic equation 2 2 = =
a –b b–a b–a
3x2 – 5x + 2 = 0
a – b2
2
Solution : This gives 2 = = –(a + b) and  = 1
2 b–a
In the equation 3x – 5x + 2 = 0
 (1)2 = –(a + b)  1 = –a –b
a = 3, b = –5, c = 2.
D = b2 – 4ac = 25 – 24 = 1 > 0.  a + b + 1 = 0 is the required condition.

5  1 5 1 Example - 12
Therefore, x = = i.e., x = 1 or
6 6 Using factorisation solve the quadratic
2 2 equation
x = . So, the roots are x = and 1.
3 3 (x + 5)2 = 36
Example - 9 Solution : The given quadratic equation is :
Determine the nature of the roots of the  (x + 5)2 – 36 = 0
following quadratic equation :  (x + 5)2 – (6)2 = 0
2
x – 4x + 4 = 0. [Form : a2 – b2 = (a + b) (a – b)]
Solution :  (x + 5 + 6) (x + 5 – 6) = 0
The given equation is x2 – 4x + 4 = 0
 (x + 11) (x – 1) = 0
Here, a = 1, b = –4 and c = 4
 Either x + 11 = 0 or x – 1 = 0
 D = b2 – 4ac = (–4)2 – 4 × 1 × 4 = 0
Since D = 0, therefore roots are real and  x = –11 or x = 1
equal. Roots of the given equation are 1 and –11

ANCE 70
 Quadratic Equations

Example - 13 Example - 14
Find the root of the quadratic equation (if exist) Using quadratic formula, solve the equation :
by the method of completing the square. a2b2x2 – (4b4 – 3a4)x – 12a2b2 = 0
2x2 – 7x + 3 = 0 Solution :
Solution : We have a2b2x2 – (4b4 –3a4)x – 12a2b2 = 0
2x2 – 7x + 3 = 0 Here, a = a2b2, b = –(4b4 – 3a4)
2
 2x – 7x = –3 and c = – 12a2b2
[Transpose the Constant to the other side] Now, Discriminant,
7 3 D = [–(4b4 – 3a4)]2 – 4 (a2b2) × (12a2b2)
 x2 – x = – [ D = b2 – 4ac]
2 2
[Divide both sides by 2] = 16b8 – 24a4b4 + 9a8 + 48 a4b4
= 16b8 + 24a4b4 + 9a8
7 49 49 3
 x2 – x + = – = (4b4)2 + 2 × 4b4 × 3a4 + (3a4)2
2 16 16 2
= (3a4 + 4b4)2
[Make the LHS as perfect square]
2
Since D > 0, the given equation has two real
 7 7 25 and distinct roots, as
 x2 – 2(x)   +   =
 4 4 16
–b  D
[From a2 – 2ab + b2 = (a – b)2] x=
2 2 2a
 7  5 2
 x –  =     
–  – 4b 4 – 3a 4   3a 4  4b 4 
 4  4
=
 7
2
 7
2  
2 a 2b2
 x –  =  
 4  4
 =
  
4b 4 – 3a 4  3a 4  4b 4 
[Taking square root of both sides] 2a 2b 2
7 5 12
x= + = and  =
 4b 4
 
– 3a 4 – 3a 4  4b 4 
4 4 4 2 2
2a b
x=3 8b 4
–6a 4
= 2 2 and =
 7 5 2a b 2a 2b 2
 x –  = 
 4 4 4b 2 –3a 2
  = and =
[Taking both signs separately] a2 b2
7 –5 4b 2
x– = Hence, the roots of the equation are 2
4 4 a
–3a 2
and 2
7 5 7–5 b
x= – =
4 4 4 Example - 15
7 5 Solve for y : 9y4 – 29y2 + 20 = 0
x– = Solution :
4 4
1 9y4 – 29y2 + 20 = 0
x= Put y2 = x
2
1 9x2 – 29x + 20 = 0
Required roots are 3 and  9x2 – 20x – 9x + 20 = 0
2

ANCE 71
 Quadratic Equations

 (x – 1)(9x – 20) = 0 Since the equation involves radical therefore

20  10
 x = 0 or x = substituting x = 2, 6 and in the original
9 3 10
20 equation, we find that x = - does not
3
 y2 =1 or y2 = satisfy the equation.
9
 x = 2, 6
2 5
 y = ±1 and y = ±  (i) x2a + xa + b = 0
3
(ii) xa + x–a = b
q
 px + = r.. Put xa = y to get a quadratic equation in y. i.
x
1
 px2 – rx + q = 0 e., (i) y2 + y + b = 0 (ii) y + = b
y
q
and p (x – a) + =r Example - 18
( x  b) Solve for x :3 x + 2 + 3–x = 10
 p (x – a)(x – b) – r (x – b) + q = 0 Solution:
3 x + 2 + 3–x -10 = 10
Example - 16
1
3  3x . 32 + x  10  0
Solve : 2x  =5 3
x
Solution : Let 3x = y  9 y  1  10  0
3 y
2x  =5 2
 9 y  10 y  1  0
x
 2x2 – 3 = 5x  9 y  1 y  1  0
 (2x + 1) (x – 3) = 0
1 1
 y  or y  1
 x =  or x = 3. 9
2
Example - 17 1 x 1
When y =  3  2
9 3
x 2  x  6  x  2  x 2  7x  10, x  R
 x=–2
Solution : When y = 1
x 2  x  6  x  2  x 2  7x  10  3x = 1
 x=0
(x  3)(x  2)  ( x  2)  ( x  5)(x  2)
 x  2,0
 (x  2)  (x  3  (x  2  (x  5)  Example - 19
=0 Find the whole number which when
Either x  2  0  x  2 decreased by 20 is equal to 69 times the
reciprocal of the number.
or ( x  3)  ( x  2)  x  5  0 Solution :
Let the given whole number be x where x > 0
 x 3  x 2  x 5 Condition I
Squaring on both sides 1
x2 + 12x + 36 = 4 (x2 + x - 6)  (x – 20) = 69  x   x(x–20) = 69
 
10
 x = 6, x = –  x2 – 20x – 69 = 0
3

ANCE 72
 Quadratic Equations

Condition I
–b  D 20  676
x= = Numerator x –1
2a 2  Fraction= =
a 1 Deno min ator x
...(1)
b  – 20
c  – 69 Condition II
D  b2 – 4ac Numerator  3
 400  276  New Fraction = Deno min ator  3
 D  0  Roots are real and unequal
(x –1)  3 x2
20  26 20  26 20 – 26 = = .....(2)
= = ; x 3 x 3
2 2 2 Condition III
= 23, – 3 (rejected)  x = 23
x = 23 x2 x –1 3
 = +
Required whole number is 23 x 3 x 28
Example - 20 x2 x –1 3
 – =
The difference of squares of two natural x 3 x 28
2 2
numbers is 45. The square of the smaller x  2x – x – 2x  3 3
number is four times the larger number. Find  2 =
x  3x 28
the number. 3 3
Solution :  2 =
x  3x 28
Let the larger number be x and the smaller x2 + 3x – 28 = 0

number be y
From (1) and (2), we get : –3  9  112 –3  11
Condition I 2 2
x – y = 45 .......(1)  x = =
 2 2
Condition II  y2 = 4x .......(2)  x = 4, –7 (rejected)  x = 4
x2 – 4x = 45 When x = 4 then x – 1 = 3
Putting these values of x in the equation (2)
x –1 3
we get :  x2 – 4x – 45 = 0 Required fraction = =
y2 = 4x when x = 9 x 4
Example - 22
 (x + 5) (x – 9) = 0  x = 9, –5
2
y = 4 × 9 = 36  y =  6 The length of the hypotenuse of a right triangle
exceeds the length of the base by 2 cm and
y 2  4x when x  –5
exceeds twice the length of the altitude by
y 2  4(–5)  –20
1 cm. Find the length of each side of the
y   –20 (rejected) triangle.
Required numbers are : 9, 6 or 9, –6
Solution :
Example - 21
Let the altitude (AB) of right.
The numerator of a fraction is one less than
its denominator. If 3 is added to each of the A
numerator and denominator, the fraction is (2
x+
3 1)
x cm

increased by . Find the fraction. cm

28
Solution :
Let the denominator of the required fraction B C
(2x – 1) cm
be x
Then the numerator of the fraction = x – 1  ABC be x cm. x > 0

ANCE 73
 Quadratic Equations
132
It is given that hypotenuse (AC) exceeds 132 km at speed (x + 11) km/hr =
x  11
twice
hours
the length of the altitude (AB) by 1 cm
Condition
 AC = (2x + 1) cm; AB = x cm
Also the hypotenuse (AC) exceeds the base 132 132
 – =1
(BC) by 2 cm x x  11
 BC = {(2x + 1) –2}m = (2x – 1)m 1 1 
 132  – =1
Using Pythagorean Theorem in  ABC, we  x x  11 
have 1 1  1
  x – x  11  = 132
AC2 = AB2 + BC2  (2x + 1)2
= x2 + (2x – 1)2 x  11 – x 1
 2 =
 (2x + 1)2 = x2 + (2x – 1)2 x  11x 132
2
 4x2 + 4x + 1 = x2 + 4x2 – 4x + 1  x + 11x – 1452 = 0
 x2 – 8x = 0  x(x–8) = 0  x = 8 –b  D –11  5929 –11  77
[ x > 0] x= = =
2a 2 2
Altitude = AB = x cm = 8 cm. a 1
b  11
Base = BC = (2x – 1) cm c  –1452
= (2 × 8 –1) cm = 15 cm D  b 2 – 4ac
Hypotenuse = AC = (2x +1) cm 121  5808  5929
= (2 × 8 + 1) cm = 17 cm x = 33, –44 (rejected)
The length of the sides of right  ABC are :
x = 33 [ x > 0]
8 cm, 15 cm, 17 cm
Required speed of the passenger train
Example - 23
An express train takes 1 hour less than a = 33 km/hr
passenger train to travel 131 km between Speed of the express train = (33 +11) km/hr
Mysore and Bangalore. If the average speed = 44 km/hr
of the express train is 11 km/hour more than
132
that of the passenger train, find the average Verification t1 = = 4 hours
33
speed of the two trains.
132
Solution : and t2 = = 3 hours, t1 – t2 = 1 hour
44
Let the speed of passenger train = x km/hr,
where x > 0 Example - 24
Then the speed of express train = (x + 11) 3
Two water taps together can fill a tank in 9
km/hr. 8
hours. The tap of larger diameter takes 10
t1 = Time taken by the passenger train to cover
132 hours less than the smaller one to fill the tank
132 km at speed x km/hr = hours separately. Find the time in which each up can
x
t2 = Time taken by the express train to cover separately fill the tank.

ANCE 74
 Quadratic Equations

Solution : 2. If  and  are the roots of the equation

Let the smaller tap take x hours to fill the tank, x2 – 12x + 32 = 0, then find the value of
where (x  N) 2 2
α +β
then the larger tap take (x – 10) hours to fill α+ β
the tank where x  N –8 8 –20 20
(a) (b) (c) (d)
1 3 3 3 3
Part filled by the smaller tap in one hour = 2
x 3. If the roots of the equation ax + bx + c = 0
Also the part filled by the larger tap in one are  and , then the quadratic equation
1 whose roots are – and – is
hour = (a) ax2 – bx – c = 0 (b) ax2 – bx + c = 0
x –10
But the total time taken by both the taps to fill (c) ax2 – bx – c = 0 (d) ax2 – bx + 2c = 0
3 75 4. Find the sum and the product of the roots of
the tank = 9 hours = hours. 25
8 8 the quadratic equation –x2 – x + 25 = 0
8 3
Part filled by both the taps in one hour = 25 –25
75 (a) , 25 (b) , 25
1 1 8 3 3
 + = 25 –25
x x – 10 75 (c) , –25 (d) , –25
3 3
2x –10 8
 2 = 5. For what value of k is one root of the quadratic
x –10x 75
equation 9x2 – 18x + k = 0 double the other?
 150x –750 = 8x2 – 80x
(a) 36 (b) 9 (c) 12 (d) 8
115  13225 – 6000 6. If  and  are the zero of the quadratic
 x=
8 polynomial ax2 + bx + c such that x does not
115  7225 lie between  and , then
=
8 (a) a > 0 and ax2 + bx + c < 0
115  85 200 30 15 (b) ax2 + bx + c < 0 and a < 0
x= = ; = 25, (c) a > 0 and ax2 + bx + c < 0
8 8 8 4
(rejected) (d) Both (b) and (c)
7. The condition for the sum and the product
 x = 25 ( x  N)
of the roots of the quadratic equation
Hence the smaller tap take 25 hours to fill the ax2 – bx + c = 0 to be equal, is
tank while the larger tap take (25 –10) = 15
(a) b + c = 0 (b) b – c = 0
hours to fill the tank.
(c) a + c = 0 (d) a + b + c = 0
8. Which of the following are the roots of the
equation | x |2 + | x | – 6 = 0?
1. Find the sum and the product of the roots of (i) 2 (ii) –2 (iii) 3 (iv) –3
2
the equation 3 x + 27x + 5 3 = 0. (a) Both (i) and (ii)
(b) Both (iii) and (iv)
(a) –9 3 , 5 (b) 9 3 , 5
(c) (i), (ii), (iii) and (iv)
(c) 6 3 , –5 (d) 6 3 , 5 (d) None of the above

ANCE 75
 Quadratic Equations

9. If the roots of the quadratic equation 14. If one root of x2 + px + 12 = 0 is 4, while the
ax2 + bx + c = 0 are  and , then the equation x2 + px + q = 0 has equal roots,
equation whose roots are 2 and 2 is then the value of q is–
(a) a2x2 – (b2 – 2ac)x + c2 = 0 (a) 49/4 (b) 4/49
(b) a2x2 – b2x + c2 = 0 (c) 4 (d) 1/4
(c) a2x2 + (b2 + 2ac)x + c2 = 0 2
15. One root of x + kx – 8 = 0 is square of the
(d) a2x2 – (b2 + 2ac)x + c2 = 0
other, then the value of k is:
10. If the roots of the equation
(a) 2 (b) 8 (c) – 8 (d) –2
3ax2 + 2bx + c = 0 are in the ratio 2 : 3, then
16. Given the quadratic equation x2 – (A – 3) x
(a) 8ac = 25b
– (A –2), for what value of A will the sum of
(b) 8ac = 9b2
the squares of the roots be zero
(c) 8b2 = 9ac
(a) –2 (b) 3
(d) 8b2 = 25 ac
(c) 6 (d) None of these
11. Find the roots of the equation 2 (m2 – n2) x2
+ m2 (n2 – 2)x + n2 (2 – m2) = 0. 17. If the roots, x1 and x2 of the quadratic
equation x2 – 2x + c = 0 also satisfy the

n 2 2 – m 2  equation 7x2 –4x1 = 47, then which of the
(a) 1,  2 m 2 – n 2
  following is true –
(a) c = –15
 
–m 2  2 – n 2
(b) 1, (b) x1 = – 5, x2 = 3
 m – n 
2 2 2

(c) x1 = 4.5, x2 = –2.5

–n    m 
2 2 2
(d) None of these
(c) 1,
 m – n 
2 2 2
18. If  and  are the roots of the equation
(ax2 + bx + c = 0), then what is the value of
–m    n 
2 2 2

(d) 1, (2 + 2)–

 m – n 
2 2 2
b c
I. a + b = –   II. 2ab =  
12. If a – b, b – c are the roots of ax + bx + c = 2
a a
(a – b) (b – c) (a) 1 (b) 2
0, then find the value of .
c–a (c) 3 (d) 4
b c ab ab 19. If the sum of the roots of the quadratic
(a) (b) (c) (d) equation ax2 + bx + c = 0 is equal to the sum
c b c c
13. If the roots of the equation 2x2 + 7x + 4 = 0 of the squares of their reciprocals, then c/a,
are in the ratio p : q, then find the value of a/b, b/c are in
p q (a) A.P. (b) G.P.
+ . (c) H.P. (d) None of these
q p
2
7 20. If the roots of x – bx + c = 0 are two
(a) ± (b) ± 7 2 consecutive integers, then b2 – 4c is–
2
(a) 1 (b) 2
7 2 7 2
(c) ± (d) ± (c) 3 (d) 4
16 4

ANCE 76
 Quadratic Equations

21. If  but 2 = 5 – 3 and 2 = 5 – 3, 28. The roots of the quadratic equation
then the equation whose roots are  and 2x2 + 3x + 1 = 0 are
 is- (a) Irrational
(a) 3x2 – 25 x + 3 = 0 (b) Rational
(b) x2 + 5x – 3 = 0 (c) Imaginary
(d) None of these
(c) x2 – 5x + 3 = 0
29. If root s of the given equat ion
(d) 3x2 – 19x + 3 = 0
(cos p – 1) x2 + (cos p) x + sin p = 0 are
22. Quadratic equation whose one of the roots is real , then –
4  5 is :   
(a) x2 + 8 x – 1 = 0 (a) p  (–, 0) (b) p    , 
 2 2
(b) x2 + 8 x + 18 = 0 (c) p  (0, ) (d) p  (0, 2)
(c) x2 –8 x + 1 = 0
30. If the discriminant of 3x2 –14 x + k = 0 is
(d) x2 – 8 x + 11 = 0 100, then k = ______
23. If a root of x 2 – k x + 8 = 0 is 4, (a) 8 (b) 32 (c) 16 (d) 24
then k = ______
31. The roots of x2 – x + 1 = 0 are :
(a) 7 (b) 3
(a) Real and Equal
(c) 6 (d) 8
(b) Real and not equal
24. If (x+1) is a factor of 3x2 +k x + 4,
(c) Imaginary
then k = ______
(d) Reciprocals
(a) 3 (b) 6
(c) –7 (d) 7 32. The roots of the equation (x – a)(x – b) = b2
are :
25. If x2 –2px + 8p – 15 = 0 has equal roots,
(a) Real and equal
then p = ______
(b) Real and unequal
(a) 3 or –5 (b) 3 or 5
(c) Imaginary
(c) –3 or 5 (d) –3 or –5
(d) Equal
26. Find the nature of the roots of the equation 33. The discriminant of ax2 – a(a + b)x + b = 0
4x2 – 2x – 1 = 0 is :
(a) Real and equal (a) a – b (b) a + b
(b) Rational and unequal (c) (a + b)2 (d) (a – b)2
(c) Irrational and unequal
34. The discriminant (d) of x 2  x  1 = 2 is :
(d) Imaginary
(a) –3 (b) 13
27. If the quadratic equation (a2 – b2) x2 + (c) 11 (d) 12
(b2 – c2)x + (c2 – a2) = 0 has equal roots,
then which of the following is true ? 35. The number of real roots of the equation
(a) b2 + c2 = a2 A2 B2
  1 , where A and B are real
(b) b2 + c2 = 2a2 x x 1
numbers not equal to zero simultaneously is:
(c) b2 – c2 = 2a2 (a) none (b) 1
(d) a2 = b2 + 2c2 (c) 2 (d) 1 or 2

ANCE 77
 Quadratic Equations

36. For what values of ‘k’ does the equation (a) 5, –13 (b) –5, 13
(k–2)x2 +2(2k–3)x + (5k–6) = 0 have (c) –5, –13 (d) 5, 13
2/3 1/3
equal roots? 44. The roots of x + x – 2 = 0 are :
Find the roots of the equations corresponding (a) 1 or –8 (b) 1 or –2
to those values of k? 2 1
(a) k = 1, Roots are –1, –1 (c) or (d) –2 or –8
3 3
(b) k = 1, Roots are 1, –1
45. The value of ‘x’ in the equation
k = 3, Roots are –3, –3
x 1
k = 3, Roots are 3, 3  1  x  2 is :
(c) k = –1, Roots are –1, 1 1 x 2
(a) 5/13 (b) 7/13
(d) k = 1, Roots are 1, 1
(c) 9/13 (d) None of these
k = 3, Roots are 3, –3 2
k = 3, – 3 8x 1
46. The solutions for the equation 5x  8 are
37. If both ‘a’ and ‘b’ belong to the set 4 2
{1, 2, 3, 4} then the number of equations of 3 1
(a) x = 1 or 2 (b) x  or
the form ax2 +bx+1 = 0 having real roots is : 2 2
(a) 10 (b) 7 1 2
(c) x = 0 or (d) x = or 2
(c) 6 (d) 12 2 3
38. Which of the following equations has real 50
roots? 47. Solve x2 – =7
2x 2  7
(a) 3x2 +4x + 5 = 0 (b) x2 +x + 4 = 0 (a) –7 (b) ±3
(c) (x – 1) (2x – 5) = 0 (d) 2x2 –3x + 4 = 0 (c) 7 (d)14
39. If both the roots of the quadratic equation 48. If (7+ 15 )x + (7– 15 )x = 128 then x is
x2 – 2kx + k2 + k – 5 = 0 are less than 5, then
(a) > 3 (b) Any value
k lies in the interval ________
(c) 4 (d) ±2
(a) (5,6] (b) (6,  )
(c) (–  ,4) (d) [4,5] 49. The roots of the equation 3x – 4 x – 4 = 0
40. Find the values of c for which are
x2 – 4 – 2x = c(x –4) has equal roots. 1
(a) 2, 3 (b) ,2
(a) c = 2 or 10 (b) c = 3 or 9 3
(c) c = 1 or 8 (d) c = 4 or 7 1 4
41. If equation x – (2 + m)x + 1(m2 – 4m + 4) = 0
2 (c) 4, (d) 4,
9 9
has coincident roots, then : 1
(a) m = 0 (b) m = 6 50. If y = x + then x4+x3-4x2+x+1 = 0
x
2 becomes
(c) m = 2 (d) m = (a) x2(y2+y-6) = 0 (b) x2(y2+y-2) = 0
3
42. If 3.22x+1 – 5.2x+2 + 16 = 0 and x is an integer, (c) x2(y2+y-3) = 0 (d) x2(y2+y-4) = 0
find the value of x. 51. If x  1  x  1  1  0 , then 4x equals
(a) 1 (b) 2
(a) 4  1 (b) 0
(c) 3 (d) 4
1
43. If (x + 1) (x + 3) (x + 5) (x + 7) = 5760, find (c) 5 (d) 1
4
the real values of x.

ANCE 78
 Quadratic Equations

52. The roots of 60. Solution set of 5(x + 1) + 5(2 – x) = 53 + 1 is

(a) [3, 4] (b) [2, 1]
2x  3  3x  5  5x  6 = 0 are
(c) [2, –1] (d) [ 5, 2]
7 61. 2
The graph of y = 2x is :
(a) 2 only (b) only
6 (a) a straight line (b) a circle
7
(c) 2 or (d) none (c) a parabola (d) None
6 3 2
62. The polynomial x – 3x – 9x + c = 0 can be
53. The roots of the equation 4x – 3.2x+2 + 32 = 0
written in the form (x – )2(x – ) if value
would include
of c is
(a) 1, 2 and 3 (b) 1 and 2
(a) 5 (b) –7
(c) 1 and 3 (d) 2 and 3
(c) 25 (d) 27
54. The value of x in t he equat ion 63. The value of ‘k’ for which the quadratic
2
 1  3 1 equation 5x2 + 6(a2 + 2)x + (a2 – 5a + 6) = 0,
 x     x   = 4 is possesses roots of opposite sign lies in
 x  2 x
1 (a) (–2, –3) (b) (2, 3)
(a) –2 (b) 2 1
2 (c) 5, 1 (d)  , 
(c) – 1 (d) 0 5 5
55. The value of x in t he equat ion Direction (Q.64-68) Comment upon the
values of a, b, c, D for standard Q.E. as
x 1
 1  x  2 is y = ax2 + bx + c and find the correct
1 x 2
statement
(a) 5/13 (b) 7/13
(c) 9/13 (d) None of these 64. In the given figure
56. If (x - a ) /(b + c) +(x -b) / (c + a) + (x - c) /
(a + b) = 3, then x is
(a) 0 (b) 1
(c) a + b + c (d) abc (a) a < 0 (b) b > 0
57. The product of the solution of the equation, (c) D > 0 (d) a > 0
4(22x)-33(2x)+8=0, is 65. In the given figure
(a) 2 (b) -3/4
(c) -6 (d) 1
58. Number of solutions of the equation (a) a < 0 (b) b > 0
2 (c) D > 0 (d) a > 0
(x 2  16 ) =x -4, is
66. In the given figure
(a) 0 (b) 1
(c) 2 (d) 4
2x x+2
59 Solution of 2 – 3.2 + 32 = 0 are :
(a) {3, 2} (b) {–3, 2} (a) a < 0 (b) b > 0
(c) {2, –3} (d) {–3, –2} (c) D > 0 (d) a > 0

ANCE 79
 Quadratic Equations

67. In the given figure 70. In the given figure

(a) a < 0 (b) b > 0 (–1, 0) (2, 0)

(c) D > 0 (d) a > 0 (a) a + b + c=0 (b) a - b + c=0
68. In the given figure (c) 2a+b+c=0 (d) 4a - 2b +c=0
71. In the given figure
(–3, 0)
(a) a < 0 (b) b > 0
(c) D > 0 (d) a > 0 (–1,0)
(a) 9a - 3b + c = 0
Direction (Q.69-72) Find the inter-
(b) 9a + 3b + c = 0
relationship in variables for the standard
Q.E as y = ax2 + bx + x (c) a+b+c=0
(d) None
69. In the given figure
72. In the given figure

(–1, 0) (1,0)
(0, 0)

(a) a = 0 (b) b = 0 (a) a = 0 (b) a + c = 0

(c) c = 0 (d) D > 0 (c) a - b - c = 0 (d) None

Q.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. a d b d d d b a a d
Q.No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. a b d a d d a d a a
Q.No. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans. d d c d b c b b c a
Q.No. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. c b d a c a b c c a
Q.No. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Ans. b a a a d d b d d a
Q.No. 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
Ans. c c d c d c c a a c
Q.No. 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70
Ans. c a b d b c d c c b
Q.No. 71 72
Ans. a b

ANCE 80
 Progression

Sequence Series
A systematic arrangement of numbers The sum of the terms of a sequence is called
according to a given rule is called a the series of the corresponding sequence.
sequence.
Example-2
The numbers in a sequence are called its
terms. We refer the first term of a sequence 1 + 2 + 3 + ............ + n is a finite series
as T1, second term as T2 and so on.The n th of first n natural numbers.
term of a sequence is denoted by Tn, which The sum of first n terms of series is denoted
may also be referred to as the general term by Sn.
of the sequences.
Here, Sn = T1 + T2 + ........ + T n
(a) Finite Sequence :
Here, S1 = T1
A sequence which consists of a finite
number of terms is called a finite sequence. S2 = T1 + T2
Eg. 2, 5, 8, 11, 14, 17, 20, 23 is the finite S3 = T1 + T2 + T3
sequences of 8 terms. .............................
(b) Infinite Sequence : .............................
A sequence which consists of an infinite
Sn = T1 + T2 + T3 + .......+ Tn
number of terms is called an infinite
sequence. We have,
Eg. : 3, 10, 17, 24, 31 ......... is an infinite S2 – S1 = T2
sequences. S3 – S2 = T3
Note : If a sequence is given, then we can find its Similarly,
th th
n term and if the n term of a sequence Sn – Sn–1 = Tn
is given we can find the terms of the Example-3
sequence.
In the series, Tn = 2n + 5, find S4
Example-1 Solution :
Find the first four terms of the sequences
Tn = 2n + 5
whose nth terms are given as follows :
(i) Tn = 3n + 1 T1 = 2(1) + 5 = 7
substituting n = 1 T2 = 2(2) + 5 = 9
T1 = 3(1) + 1 = 4 T3 = 2(3) + 5 = 11
Similarly, T2 = 3(2) + 1 = 7 T4 = 2(4) + 5 = 13
T3 = 3(3) + 1 = 10 S4 = T1 + T2 + T3 + T4 = 7 + 9 + 11 +
T4 = 3(4) + 1 = 13 13 = 40
(ii) Tn = 2n2 – 3
Sequences of number which follow specific
substituting n = 1
patterns are called progression. Depending
T1 = 2(1)2 – 3 = –1
on the pattern, the progressions are
Similarly, T2 = 2(2)2 – 3 = 5
classified as follows :
T3 = 2(3)2 – 3 = 15
(i) Arithmetic Progression
T4 = 2(4)2 –3 = 29
 The first four terms of the sequence are (ii) Geometic Progression
– 1, 5, 15, 29 (iii) Harmonic Progression

ANCE 81
 Progression

Arithmetic Progression (A.P.) Number Terms Common

A sequence whose terms increase or of terms difference
decrease by a fixed number is called an 3 a – d, a, a + d d
arithmetic progression. The fixed number 4 a – 3d, a – d, a + d, 2d
is called the common difference of the A.P. a + 3d
This fixed number is the difference of two 5 a – 2d, a – d, a, a + d, d
successive terms. It is called the common a + 2d
difference usually denoted by “d”. The 6 a – 5d, a – 3d, a – d, 2d
standard A.P. is defined as a, a + d, a + d, a + 3d, a + 5
a + 2d .......... a + (n – 1) d...........
(b) The sum of the first “n” terms of an
Eg. (i) 1, 3, 5, 7, 9 ........... A.P.
(ii) 5, 3, 1, –1, –3, –5, –7 ...........
n n
(i) Here 2nd term – 1st term Sn = [2a + (n – 1)d] or Sn = (a + )
2 2
= 3rd term – 2nd term
 = a + (n –1) d
= 4th term – 3rd term = constant
a  first term
Here 1, 3, 5, 7 ........ are in A.P. whose
d  common difference
first term is 1 and common difference is 2.
  last term
(ii) The series 5, 3, 1, –1, –3, –5, –7
Sn  sum of the first “n” terms
........... is in A.P. whose first term is 5 and
common difference is –2. n
NOTE 1: In the formula Sn  [ 2a  ( n  1) d],
 Algorithm to determine whether a 2
th
there are four quantities viz. Sn, a, n and d.
sequence is an A.P. or not when its n If any three of these are known, the fourth
term is given : can be determined. Sometimes two of these
Step 1 : Obtain an quantities are given, in such cases remaining
Step 2 : Replace n by n + 1 in an to get two qauntities are provided by some other
an + 1. relation.
Step 3 : Calculate an + 1 – an. NOTE 2 : If the sum Sn of n terms of a sequence
Step 4 : If an + 1 – an is independent of n, is given, then nth term an of the sequence
the given sequence is an A.P. Otherwise it can be determined by the following formula.
is not an A.P. (c) Properties of A.P.
(a) General term of an A.P. (i) If a fixed term is added or subtracted from
each term of an A.P., then the resulting
t n = a + (n – 1) d
series is also an A.P.
t n  nth term
(ii) If each term of an A.P. is multiplied or
a  first term divided by a fixed term, then the resulting
d  common difference = t n – t n–1 series is also an A.P.
If n = 1 (iii) If the terms of an A.P. are choosen at
t 1, the first term is a = a + (1 – 1) regular intervals then they form an A.P.
(iv) A sequence is in A.P. if tn = An + B, where
 Selection of terms in An A.P. A, B are constant then d = A
Sometimes we require certain number of (v) A sequence is in A.P. if Sn = An2 + Bn,
terms in A.P. The following ways of where A, B are constant then d = 2A
selecting terms are generally very (vi) Three numbers a, b, c are in A.P. iff
convenient. 2b = a + c.

ANCE 82
 Progression

(vii) In a finite A.P. the sum of the terms  a + 7d = 17

equidistant from the beginning and end is  a + 7 × 2 = 17
always same and is equal to the sum of  a= 3
first and last term i.e., ak + an – (k – 1) = a1
 The first term of the A.P., a = 3 and
+ an for all k = 1, 2, 3, ......... n – 1.
common difference d = 2
(viii) If an, an + 1 and an + 2 are three consecutive
terms of an A.P., then 2an + 1 = an + an + 2. The A.P. is 3, 5, 7 ..................
Now let us write the 25 th term by
Example-4 substituting a = 3, d = 2 and n = 25 in t n
Find the nth term and 19th term of the = a + (n – 1)d
sequence 5, 2, –1, –4, ..........
 t 25 = 3 + (25 – 1)2 = 51
Solution :
 t 25 of the A.P. is 51.
Clearly, the given sequence is an A.P. with
a = 5 and d = –3 Example-6
 t n = a + (n – 1) d = 5 + (n – 1) Find the value of ‘k’ if 2k + 7, 6k – 2,
(–3) = – 3n + 8. 8k – 4 are in A.P. Also find the sequence.
For the 19th term, putting n = 19, we get Solution :
t 19 = –3.19 + 8 = –49. Given that 2k + 7, 6k – 2 and 8k – 4 are
Example-5 in A.P. the difference between successive
th
The 8 term of an A.P. is 17, and 19 th terms in an A.P. is same.
th
term is 39. Find the A.P. and the 25 term ?  t2 – t1 = t3 – t2
Solution :  [6k – 2] – [2k + 7] = [8k – 4] – [6k – 2]
Given t 8 = 17 and t 19 = 39 7
We known t n = a + (n – 1)d  4k – 9 = 2k – 2  2k = 7  k =
2
 t 8 = a + (8 – 1) d = a + 7d = 17 Substituting the value of ‘k’ in 2k + 7,
.............(1) 6k – 2, 8k – 4 we get,
 t 19 = a + (19 – 1) d = a + 18d = 39
.............(2) 7 7 7
2× + 7, 6 × – 2, 8 × – 4 i.e.,
Equations (1) and (2) are two equations in 2 2 2
terms of the unknown variables ‘a’ and ‘d’. 14, 19, 24
Solving of (1) and (2) gives the values of  The sequence is 14, 19, 24 ...........
‘a’ and ‘d’. Example-7
The first step in solving of the equation is
Find the sum of the series
eliminating one of the unknowns.
This can be done by subtracting equation .5 + .51 + .52 + .......... to 100 terms
(1) from (2) where the variables ‘a’ is Solution :
eliminated as follows : The given series is an A.P. with first term,
(2) – (1) = (a + 18d) – (a + 7d) = 39 – 17 a = .5 and common difference,
 11d = 22 .............(3) d = .51 – .5 = .01.
From equation (3). It is an equation in single  Sum of 100 terms
variable ‘d’ and can be found out very easily.
100
 11d = 22 = [2 × .5 + (100 –1) × 0.01]
 d= 2 2
We can find the value of ‘a’ by substituting = 50 (1 + 99 × .01) = 50 (1 + .99)
the value of ‘d’ in equation (1). = 50 × 1.99 = 99.5

ANCE 83
 Progression

Example-8 For example, since 2, 4, 6 are in A.P.,

Find the sum of 20 terms of an A.P., whose therefore, 4 is the single A.M. between 2
first term is 3 and the last term is 57. and 6.
Solution :
 n-Arithmetic Mean : The number A1, A2
We have, a = 3,  = 57, n = 20
.......... An are said to be n arithmetic means
n 20 between two given numbers a and b
 Sn = (a + ),  S20 = (3 + 57)
2 2 provided a, A1, A2, ........An , b are in A.P.
= 600 For example, since 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 are
Hence, the sum of the 20 terms is 600. in A.P., therefore 4, 6, 8, 10 are the four
Example-9 arithmetic between 2 and 12.
Find the (i) first term and common (d) Properties of Arithmetic Mean
difference (ii) general term (iii) sum to ‘n’ (i) Arithmetic mean of two numbers “a” and
terms and hence sum to 10 terms of the ab
A.P., x – 2b, x + 2b, x + 6b .................. “b” is
2
Solution :
(ii) If there are “n” A.M.’s between “a”
Given the A.P., x – 2b, x + 2b, x + 6b ........
(i) The first term = t 1 = a = x – 2b ba
and “b” then d =
Common difference = d = t 2 – t 1 n 1
= x + 2b – (x – 2b) = 4b (iii) Arithmetic Mean of a1 ................... an
(ii) The general term of the A.P. a1  a 2  a 3.......a n
t n = a + (n – 1) d is
n
Substituting ‘a’ and ‘d’ in tn (iv) The sum of n Arithmetic Means
 t n = [x – 2b] + [n – 1] 4b
= x – 6b + 4nb n
between a and b is Sn = (a + b )
(iii) Sum to ‘n’ terms of an A.P. 2
Example-10
n
= Sn = [2a + (n –1)d] If A is the A.M. between a and b, find
2
A  2a A  2b
Substituting a and d in Sn +
Ab Aa
n Solution :
 Sn = [2 (x – 2b) + (n – 1) 4b]
2 ab
We know that A =
= n [x – 2b + (n – 1) 2b] 2
= n [x + 2nb – 4b] ............(1) A  2a A  2b
Therefore +
Substituting n = 10 in (1) we get Ab Aa
S10 = 10x + 160b
ab ab
 2a  2b
Arithmetic Mean (A.M.) = 2 + 2
ab ab
 Single Arithmetic Mean : A number of b a
2 2
‘A’ is said to be the single A.M. between a  b  4a a  b  4b
two given numbers a and b provided a, A, = +
a  b  2b a  b  2a
b are in A.P.

ANCE 84
 Progression

5a  b 5b  a 7 th mean ts
= + Now th = t
a b ba (m – 1) mean m

5a  b 5b  a
=  1  7d
ab ab 5
= =
1  ( m  1)d 9
5a  b  5b  a
=
ab 4
 d= ...........(2)
4( a  b ) 5m  68
=
ab 30 4
= 4 as desired By (1) and (2) =
m 1 5m  68
Example-11
150m – 2040 = 4m + 4
If the A.M. of the roots of a quadratic
146m = 2044
8
equation is and A.M. of their reciprocals
5 2044
m=
8 146
is , then the equation is given by :
7 m = 14
Solution :
Say  are the roots of the equation  Tricks for Problem Solving :
• A sequence t 1, t 2, t 3, t 4, ........... will be in
1 1
 A.P. if t2 – t1 = t3 – t2 = t4 – t3 = .............
  8   8
= and  i.e. t n – t n–1 = constant for n > 2.
2 5 2 7
• Three numbers a, b, c are in A.P. if and
16
+= .........(1) only if b – a = c – b, i.e., if and only
5
a + c = 2b
7
and  = ..........(2) • If an A.P. has n terms, then the nth term is
5
called the last term of A.P. and it is denoted
 Required equation is given by
by l. Therefore, l = a + (n – 1)d.
5x2 – 16x + 7 = 0
Example-12 • If a is the first term and d the common
Between the numbers 1 and 31, m means difference of an A.P. having m terms, then
are inserted so that the ratio of mth mean nth from the end is (m – n + 1)th term
and the (m–1)th mean is 5 : 9, then the from the beginning.
value of m is :  nth term from the end = a + (m – n)d
Solution :
Let x1, x2, x3........xm are m means • If common difference d, number of terms n
1, x1, x2, ..........xm, 31  A.P. and the last term l, are given then
t m+2 = 31 = 1 + (m + 1)d n
Sn = [2 – (n – 1) d]
30 2
d= ..........(1)
m 1 • t n = Sn – Sn–1

ANCE 85
 Progression

 Important Formulae : 1 1
(iii), (iv) and (v) are –2, , , and x
(i) Sum of the first “n” natural numbers 3 6
respectively. The ratio of any term of a G.P.
n (n  1) to the preceding term is called the common
= 1 + 2 + 3 + ......... + n =  n 
2 ratio of the G.P. Thus, in the above examples,
(ii) Sum of the squares of the “n” natural 1 1
the common ratios are 2, –2, , and x
numbers 3 6
respectively.
= 12 + 22 + 32 + .............. + n2
(a) General term of a G.P.
n ( n  1) ( 2n  1) tn = a (r)n–1
=  n2 
6 tn  nth term
(iii) Sum of the cubes of the “n” natural numbers a  first term
= 13 + 23 + 33 + ............ + n3 t
r  common ratio = n
t n1
3 n 2 (n  1) 2
= n  = [ n]2  Selection of terms in G.P.
4
Sometimes it is required to select a finite
(iv)  2n = 2 + 4 + 6 + .......... + 2n number of terms in G.P. It is always
= n(n + 1) convenient if we select the terms in the
(v) n3 = (n)2 , If n n3 = (n2)2 then n = 1 following manner.
(vi) n – 1) = 1 + 3 + 5 ........... (2n – 1) Number of terms Terms Common ratio
= n2 a
3 , a , ar r
r
Geometric Progression (G.P.) a a
4 3
, , ar , ar 3 r2
G.P. is a series in which the ratio of each r r
term (except the first) to the preceding term a a
5 2
, , a , ar , ar 2 r
is constant. This constant is called the r r
common ratio (r). The standard G.P. is (b) Sum of the first “n” terms of a G.P.
defined as a, ar, ar2 .............
a (r n  1)
Example : Sn = , if r > 1
r 1
The sequence given below :
a (1  r n )
(i) 2, 4, 8, 16, 32 ................ = , if r < 1
1 r
(ii) 3, –6, 12, –24, 48 ................ Sn  sum of “n” terms
1 1 1 1 1 a  first term
(iii) , , , , , .............
4 12 36 108 324
r  common ratio
1 1 1 1 1
(iv) , , , , ,................ (c) Sum of the Infinite Geometric
5 30 180 1080 6480
(v) x, x2, x3, x4, x5 ...........(where x is any fixed Progression
real number) are all geometric progressions. If |r| < 1, then
The ratio of any term in (i) to the preceeding a
Sum of infinite terms of the G.P. (S) =
term is 2. The corresponding ratios in (ii), 1 r

ANCE 86
 Progression

(d) Properties of G.P.  n 

x  y 
(i) If every term of a G.P. is multiplied or divided
  2   1
y x
by a fixed term, then the resulting series is   
also a G.P.  S =
n  y 
(ii) If every term of a G.P. is raised to the same  2  1
x 
power, the resulting series is also a G.P. Example-14
(iii) The reciprocals of a G.P. is also a G.P. The 6th and 13th terms of a G.P. are
(iv) If the terms of given G.P. are choosen at 3
respectively equal to 24 and . Find the
regular intervals then the new sequence so 16
formed also forms an G.P. G.P. and the 20th term.
(v) In a finite G.P. the product of the terms Solution :
equidistant from the beginning and the end 3
Given, t6 = 24 and t13 =
is always same and is equal to the product 16
n–1
of first and the last term. We Know t6 = ar
i.e., akan–k+1  t6 = ar6–1 = ar5 = 24 ............(1)
k–1 n–k 2 n–1
= a1 r . a . r = a r 3
 t13 = ar13–1 = ar12 = ............(2)
= a1 an k = 2, 3 ........ (n –1) 16
(vii) Three non-zero numbers a, b, c are an G.P. Equation (1) and (2) are two equations in
2
iff b = ac. terms of the unknown variables ‘a’ and ‘r’.
Example-13 Solving of (1) and (2) gives us the values of
Find the (i) first term (ii) common ratio (iii) ‘a’ and ‘r’.
General term (iv) Sum to ‘n’ terms of the (2) ar12 3 / 16
= 5 =
x 1 y (1) ar 24
G.P. , , ........ 3 1 3
y x x3  r7 =  =
16 24 16  3  8
Solution : 1 1
= 4 3 7
x 1 y 2 2 2
Given G.P. , , ............... 7
y x x3 1 1
x  r7 =    r =
(i) The first term = t1 = a = 2 2
y
t 1/ x y We can find the value of ‘a’ by substituting
(ii) Common ratio, r = 2 = = 2 the value of ‘r’ in the equation (1);
t1 x/y x
n–1
(iii) General term of the G.P. = tn = ar 1
5

Substituting ‘a’ and ‘r’ in tn ar = 24  a   = 24  a = 24 × 25

5
2
n 1
x y y n 2 = 24 × 32 = 768
 tn =  2  = 2 n 3
y x  x Thus first term of the G.P. = a = 768 and
a[r n  1]
(iv) Sum to ‘n’ terms of a G.P. = Sn = 1
r 1 common ratio r =
Substituting ‘a’ and ‘r’ in Sn 2

ANCE 87
 Progression

The G.P. is 768, 384, 192, 96 ..............  tn = arn–1 = (–6) (–3)n–1 = (–1)n . 6 . 3n–1
For the 12th term, putting n = 12,
Now let us write the 20th term by substiuting
we get, t12 = (–1)12 . 6. 311 = 2.312
1
a = 768, r = and n = 20 in tn = arn–1 Example-17
2
19 Find the sum of 8 terms and n terms of the
20–1
1 3
sequence 9, –3, 1, –1/3, ...........
 t20 = ar = 768   = 11
2 2 Solution :
3 The given sequence is a G.P. with a = 9 and
 The 20th term of G.P. is 11
2 r = –1/3.
Example-15 We know that,
Which t erm of t he G.P. 1  (1 / 3)8 1  1 / 38
S8 = 9 = 9
2 , 6 , 3 2 , 3 6 .... is 243 2 ? Find 1  (1 / 3) 4/3
the sum of these terms. 27  1
= 1  8 
Solution : 4  3 
In the given G.P. the first term = a = 2 27 38  1 1 6561 1 6560
= = 5 =
and 4 3 8
4 3 4  243
6 1640
The common ratio = r = = 3 =
2 243
1  (1 / 3)n 1  (1)n / 3n
Let the nth term of the G.P. to 243 2 Also, Sn = 9 =9
1  (1 / 3) 4/3
 tn = a(r)n – 1 = 243 2
27 3n  (1) n 3n  (1) n
 [ 2 ] [ 3 ]n 1 = 243 2 = =
4 3n 4.3n 3
 [ 3 ]n 1 = 243  [ 3 ]n 1 = [ 3 ]10 Example-18
 n – 1 = 10  n = 11 Find the sum of the infinite sequence 7, –1,
 The 11th term of the G.P. is 243 2 1 1
,  , .........
Substituting a = 2 , r = 3 and n = 11 in 7 49
the formula. Solution :
The given sequence is a G.P. with a = 7 and
a (r n  1) 1
Sn = we get the sum of the 111 1
r 1 r =  , so |r| =  = < 1.
terms 7 7
7 7 49
3 (( 3 )11  1) 2[35 3  1] S= = =
1  (1 / 7) 8/7 8
 S11 = =
3 1 3 1  a 
 S  
2[243 3  1]  1 r 

3 1
Geometric Mean (G.M.)
Example-16
Find the nth term and 12th term of the  Single geometric Mean : A number G is
sequence –6, 18, –54 ................ said to be the single geometric mean between
Solution : two given numbers a and b if a, G, b are in
The given sequence is a G.P. with a = –6 G.P.
and r = –3 G = ab

ANCE 88
 Progression

For example, since 2, 4,8 are in G.P. Example-20

therefore 4 is the G.M. between 2 and 8. If g1 and g2 are two geometric means
 n-Geometric Means : The numbers G1,G2 g12 g 22
between a and b, then find  .
.........Gn are said to be the n geometric g 2 g1
means between two given positive numbers Solution :
a and b if a, G1, G2 ........Gn, b are in G.P. As g1, g2 are two geometric means between
For example, since 1, 2, 4, 8, 16 are in G.P. a and b, therefore, a, g1, g2, b are in G.P.
therefore, 2, 4, 8 are three geometric means g1 g b
between 1 and 16.  = 2 =
a g1 g2
 Properties of Geometric Mean : g1 g2 g2 b
 = and = g
(i) Geometric mean of two numbers “a” and a g1 g1 2
2 2
“b” is ab g1 g2
 = a and =b
(ii) If there are “n” G.M.’s between “a” and “b” g2 g1
1
 b  n1 g12 g 22
then r =     =a+b
a  g 2 g1
(iii) Product of n Geometric Mean between a
and b is (ab)n/2  Tricks for problem solving :
(iv) Geometric Mean of a, b, c is (abc)1/3 • If a is the first term and r the common ratio
a  r of a finite G.P. consisting of m terms, then
(v) If l be the last term then Sn = when the nth term from the end is given by arm–n
1 r
|r| < 1 • The nth term from the end of a G.P. with the
r – a last term  and common ratio r is /rn–1
when |r| > 1
r –1 • Three numbers a, b, c are in G.P. if and only
Example-19 if b/a = c/b i.e. if and only if b2 = ac.
Find the G.M. between the numbers 0.027
and 7.5 Harmonic Progression (H.P.)
Solution :
A progression is said to be Harmonic
We know that,
Progression, if the reciprocals of these
G.M. between the numbers a and b are ab terms form an arithmetic progression.
 G.M. between the numbers 0.027 and St andard H.P. is defined as
7.5 1 1 1 1
, , ........
= 0.027  7.5 a a  d a  2d a  (n  1)d
27 75 where a  0
=  1 1 1 1
1000 10 Eg. , , , ...... is a harmonic Progression
3 5 7 8
2025 since their reciprocals 3, 5, 7, 9......... are
=
10000 in A.P.
45 (a) General term of an H.P.
=
100 1
tn =
= 0.45 a  (n  1)d

ANCE 89
 Progression

where t n  nth term Example-23

1 If a, b, c are in H.P., then find the value of
 first term
a 1 1 1 1 1 1
      
(b) Properties of H.P. b c a c a b
1 1 1 Solution :
(i) If a, b, c are in H.P. then , , are in
a b c 1 1 1
As a, b, c are in H.P., , , are in A.P..
A.P. a b c
2ac 1 1 1 1 2 1 1
(ii) If a, b, c are in H.P. then b =     or   ...(i)
a c b a c b b a c
Example-21  1 1 1  1 1 1 
       
4 3 12  b c a  c a b 
Find the nth term of H.P. , , ...........
3 2 7  1 1 1 2 1 1 1
=        
Solution : b c c b c b c
4 3 12 [using (i)]
, , ........... are in H.P..
3 2 7 2 1 1 2 1
3 2 7 =     =  2
 c b   b  bc b
 , , ........... are in H.P..
4 3 12  1 1 1  1 1 1 
3 2 3 1 Lastly,        
a= , d=  =  b c a  c a b 
4 3 4 12
 1 2 1 1  1 1 1 
We have, =        
 b b a a  b a a 
1 1 3 21 3 2
tn =
a  (n  1)d 3
= =    = 2
 1  b a  b b ab
 (n  1)  
4  12  Example-24
12 Find the 100th term of the sequence 1,
=
10  n
Example-22 1 1 1
, , ,.........
2 2 2 3 5 7
If a, b, c are in H.P. and a + c > kb ,
a, b, c being distinct +ve reals, then k = 1 1 1
Solution : The sequence 1, , , ,......... is an H.P..
3 5 7
Given a, b, c are in H.P.  b = H.M. Corresponding A.P. is 1, 3, 5, 7 ,........
between a and c
Now, for the corresponding A.P., first term
Also, ac = G.M. between a and c
a = 1, d = 2
Since G > H  ac > b  ac > b 2  100th term of the corresponding
A.P.
Now, (a – c)2 > 0  a2 + c2 – 2ac > 0
= a + (100 – 1) d
       a2 + c2 > 2ac = 1 + (100 – 1) 2 = 199
but by (1), ac > b2  2ac > 2b2 Hence, the 100th term of the given
Hence a2 + c2 > 2b2 1
sequence =
 k= 2 199

ANCE 90
 Progression

(b) In a H.P. Tp = qr, Tq = pr. Then Tr = pq.

Harmonic Mean (H.M.)
 Single Harmonic Mean : A number H is a n 1  b n 1
(c) is H.M. between a and b if
said to be the single harmonic mean a n  bn
between two given numbers a and b if a, a n = –1
H, b are in H.P. • Reciprocals of term of H.P. are in A.P. and
2ab then properties of A.P. can be used.
H=
ab
Note :
1 1 1
For example, since , , are in H.P.,
2 3 4 • No terms of H.P can be zero.
1 1 1 • There is no general formula for finding the
therefore is the H.M. between and .
3 2 4 sum to n terms of H.P.
 n-harmonic means : The numbers H1, Example-25
H 2 ,............H n are said to be the n 2 2
harmonic means between two given Insert 6 H.M.’s between and .
numbers a and b if a, H1, H2, ....... Hn, b 3 31
Solution :
1 1 1 Let the harmonic progression be
are in H.P. that is, 1 , , , ....... ,
a H1 H 2 Hn 1 1 1
1 , , .........
are in A.P.. a a  d a  2d
b Equating the first and last terms.
 Properties of Harmonic Mean :
1 2 3
(i) Harmonic mean between “a” and “b” is   a=
a 3 2
2ab 1 1 2
or 1 1 t8 = 
ab  a  7d 31
a b 31
2 a + 7d =
2
(ii) Harmonic Mean among a, b, c is 31 3
1 7d =   14
. 2 2
1 1 1 d=2
 
a b c 3 7
a+d= +2=
3 2 2
3 11
(iii) If ‘H’ is H.M. between a and b then a + 2d = + 2(2) =
(a) (H – 2a) (H – 2b) = H2 2 2
3 15
1 1 1 1 a + 3d = + 3(2) =
(b)    2 2
Ha Hb a b 3 19
Ha Hb a + 4d = + 4(2) =
 2 2 2
(c)
Ha Hb 3 23
a + 5d = + 5(2) =
(iv) (a) If the mth term of H.P. = n and nth term 2 2
mn 3 27
= m, then Tm+n = , Tmn = 1 a + 6d = + 6(2) =
mn 2 2
 The harmonic means are :
mn 2 2 2 2 2 2
Tp = , , , , ,
p 7 11 15 19 23 27

ANCE 91
 Progression

Example-26 2[(n  1) dab  abd ]

If the harmonic mean between P and Q be =
abd
1 1  = 2n
H, then find H   
P Q  Important :
Solution : If nth term of a sequence is
2PQ PQ Tn = an3 + bn2 + cn + d
H= (or) H  2
PQ  PQ  then the sum of n terms is given by
1 1  Sn = Tn = an3 + bn2 + cn + d,
i.e., H     2 which can be evaluated using the above
P Q
Example-27 results.
If H1, H2, ........Hn are n harmonic means Example-28
between a and b (a) then find the value Find 22 + 42 + 62 + ........... + (2n)2
H1  a Hn  b Solution :
of H  a + H  b is equal to : nth term of the given series is (2n)2. Then,
1 n
Solution : Tn = 4n2
As a H1, H2,..........Hn, b are in H.P. 4n ( n  1) (2n  1)
 Sn = 4 n2 =
1 1 1 1 1 6
, , ,......., , are in A.P.. 2n ( n  1) (2n  1)
a H1 H 2 Hn b  Sn =
Let d be the common difference of this 3
A.P., then Example-29
1 1 Sum of series 12 + (12 + 22) +
= + (n + 1)d (12 + 22 + 32) + .......... to n terms.
b a
1 a b Solution :
d= . Here, (12 + 22 + 32 + ........... n2)
n 1 ab
1 1 1 1 2
n ( n  1) ( 2n  1)
Thus, H = + d and H = –d = n =
a b 6
1 n 2
n (2n  3n  1)
a b =
 H = 1 + ad and H = 1 – bd 6
1 n
1 3 1 2 1
Now, = n  n  n
a b 3 2 6
1 1
H1  a Hn  b H1 Hn 1 3 1 2 1 
H1  a + Hn  b = a + b  Sn =  n  n  n 
1 1 3 2 6 
H1 Hn
1 3 1 2 1
1  1  ad 1  1  bd = n  n  n
= + 3 2 6
1  1  ad 1  1  bd
2  ad 2  bd 1 n 2 (n  1)2 1 n ( n  1) ( 2n  1)
= + = +
 ad bd 3 4 2 6
2a  abd  2b  abd 1 n ( n  1)
= +
abd 6 2
2[(a  b)  abd ] n ( n  1)
= = [n (n + 1) + 2n + 1 + 1]
abd 12

ANCE 92
 Progression

n ( n  1) 2ab 24
= (n2 + 3n + 2) H.M. between a and b = 
12 ab 5
n ( n  1) 2.36 24
= (n +1) (n + 2)   [From (1)]
12 ab 5
n Now (a – b)2 = (a + b)2 – 4ab
= (n + 1)2 (n + 2) = (15)2 – 4.36
12
= 225 – 144
Relation betwewen three Progressions = 81
If A, G, H are the arithmetic mean, geometric a–b=9 ...................(3)
mean and harmonic mean of two positive Adding (2) and (3), 2a =
numbers “a” and “b”, then  a = 12
(i) G2 = A. H. (2) – (1)  2b = 6
ab 2ab b=3
(ii) A= , G = ab , H = Hence the numbers are 12, 3.
2 ab
Example-31
(iii) A >G>H
If a, b, c are in A.P. p, q, r are in H.P. and
(iv) A = G = H if a = b
P r
(v) If A and G are respectively Arithmetic and ap, bq, cr are in G.P. then find 
Geometric Mean between two positive r p
numbers A and B then Solution :
Since a, b, c are in A.P.
(a) A>G
ac
(b) The Quadratic Equation having a and b as b= .......(1)
its roots is x2 – 2Ax + G2 = 0 2
Since p, q, r are in H.P. ,
(c) a:b
2pr

= A  A2  G 2 : A  A2  G2  q=
pr
.......(2)
(d) If A.M. and G.M. between two numbers Since ap, bq, cr are in G.P.
are in the ratio m : n, then the numbers are (bq)2 = (ap) (cr)
in the ratio m + m 2  n 2 : m – m 2  n 2 i.e., b2 q2 = acpr .......(3)
a n  bn Putting the values of b and q in (3), we get
(vi) is AM, GM and HM between 2 2
a n 1  b n1 ac  2pr 
a and b for n = 1, ½, 0 respectively.     = ac pr
 2  pr
(vii) a, b, c are in A.P., G.P. of H.P. are, as
a b a a a (a  c)2 pr
 , or   ac
bc a b c (p  r) 2
Example-30 (a  c ) 2 ( p  r ) 2
 
Find the numbers whose geometric mean is ac pr
24 a 2  c 2  2ac p 2  r 2  2pr
6 and harmonic mean is  
5 ac pr
Solution :
a c p r
Let the two numbers be a and b (a > b)   2 =  2
c a r p
G.M. between a and b = ab  6 p r a c
 ab = 36 .............(1) Hence,  = 
r p c a

ANCE 93
 Progression

Example-32 Practice Problems # 1

1 1
If the two numbers between and
16 6 1. Which term of the A.P. is 7, 10 , 13 ..........
such that the first three may be in G.P. and is 34?
the last three in H.P., then find the numbers. (a) 9 (b) 10 (c) 8 (d) 11
Solution : 2. The 20th term from the last term of the A.P.
Let a and b be the required numbers between 3, 8, 13, ........ 253:
1 1 (a) 168 (b) 178 (c) 158 (d) 187
and 3. If the 10 term of an A.P. is twice the 4th
th
16 6
term, and the 23rd term is ‘k’ times the 8th
1 term, then the value of ‘k’ is
Now , a, b are in G.P.. (given)
16 (a) 2.5 (b) 3 (c) 3.5 (d) 4
th
1 4. The 6 term and the 8th term of an A.P.
 a2 = b  16a2 = b ......(1) are 12 and 22 respectively. The value of rth
16
term is
1 (a) cannot be determine (b) 5r–8
And a, b, are in H.P.. ......(2)
6 (c) 2r – 3 (d) 5r – 18
1 5. If the last term of an A.P. is 119 and the 8th
2(a ). 
 6   b  2a term from the end is 91 then the common
b= 1 ......(3) difference of the A.P. is:
a 6a  1
6 (a) 4 (b) 5 (c) – 4 (d) 3
From (1) and (2), 6. The value of (1 + 2 + 33 + ..... 153) –
3 3

(1 + 2 + 3 + ....... 15) is:

2a 1 (a) 14280 (b) 14400
16a2 =  8a =
6a  1 6a  1 (c) 12280 (d) 13280
[ a  0] 7. The pth term of an A.P. is q and qth term
is p then common difference (d) is:
 48a2 + 8a = 1
(a) 1 (b) (p + q – 1)
 48a2 + 8a – 1 = 0 (c) –1 (d) p – q + 1
 48a2 + 12a – 4a – 1 = 0 8. If 3, 4 + p, 6-p are in AP, then p must be
 12a(4a + 1) – 1(4a + 1) = 0 equal to
 (12a – 1) (4a + 1) = 0 2 1 1
(a) 0 (b) (c) (d) –
 a = 1/12, a = –1/4 3 3 3
9. The nth term in the series –3 + 6 – 12 + 24
1  1  – 48 + ........
When a = , then from (1), b = 16  
12  144  (a) (–1)n–1.3.2 n–1 (b) (–1)n.3.2n–1
1 (c) 3.2 n–1
(d) 2.3n–1
=
9 10. What is the common difference of four terms
1 in AP such that the ratio of the product of
Rejecting a = , since a lies between two
4 the first fourth term to that of the second
positive quantities. and third terms is 2 : 3 and the sum of all
1 1 four terms is 20 –
 The numbers are , (a) 3 (b) 1 (c) 4 (d) 2
12 9

ANCE 94
 Progression
1
11. If the mth term of an AP is and its nth 18. If the first, second and last terms of an A.P.
n be a, b, 2a respectively, then its sum will be
1
term be , then its (mn)th term, is ab ab
m (a) (b)
a  b 2(b  a)
1 3ab 3ab
(a) 0 (b) 1 (c) (d) none (c) (d)
mn 2(b  a) 4(b  a)
12. A ball rolling up an incline covers 36 meters 19. The ratio of the sum of n terms of two
during the first second, 32 metres during the A.P.'s is (3n – 13) : (5n + 21) then the
second, 28 metres during the next and so ratio of 24th term is
on. How much distance will it travel during 1 1
the 8th second? (a) 2 (b) (c) (d) None
3 2
(a) 8 metres (b) 6 metres 20. A student read common difference of an
(c) 7 metres (d) 9 metres A.P. as –2 instead of 2 and got the sum
13. In an A.P., the p term is q and the (p + q)th
th of first five terms as –5, the actual sum of
term is 0. Then the qth term is the first five terms is
(a) p – q (b) p (c) – p (d) p – q (a) 15 (b) 30 (c) 35 (d) 40
14. If the sum of ‘n’ terms of an arithmetic 21. In an A.P., Sp = q and Sr denotes the sum
sequence is given by Sn= n (5n – 3), then of the first r terms. Then Sp+q is equal to
the pth term is (a) pq (b) p – q
(a) p(5p – 3) (b) 5p – 3 (c) p + q (d) – (p + q)
(c) 2 (5p – 4) (d) 5p – 7 22. If the first and the last terms of an A. P. are
15. The first term of the A.P. is 12. The number –4 and 146 and the sum of the A.P. is 7171,
of terms is 15 and their sum is 390. The then the number of the terms in the A. P.
common difference (d) is: and the common difference is –
(a) 1010 and 2 (b) 98 and 3/2
1 3 5
(a) (b) (c) 2 (d) (c) 101 and 3/2 (d) None of these
2 2 2
16. The series of natural numbers is divided into 23. The AM between (a – b)2 and (a + b)2 is
groups 1 ; 2, 3, 4; 5, 6, 7, 8, 9; .... and so a4
(a) ab (b) a2 + b2 (c) (d) None
on., Then the sum of the numbers in the nth b2
group is: 24. If there are 11 arithmetic means between 20
(a) (2n + 1) (n2 – n + 1) and 80, the value of the fourth mean is
(b) n3 – 3n2 + 3n – 1 (a) 40 (b) 45 (c) 60 (d) 32
(c) n3 + (n – 1)3 25. If the arithmetic mean between p and qth
th

(d) n3 + (n + 1)3 terms of an A.P. be equal to the arithmetic

17. The sum upto nth term of the series 12, mean between 2nd and 7th terms of the A.P.
(12 + 22), (12 + 22 + 32), .... is then (p + q) is
n(n  1) (a) zero (b) 6 (c) 7 (d) 9
(a) n (b) 26. If k + 9, k – 6 and 4 form the three
2
consecutive terms of a G.P. Then the value
n 2 (n  1) 2 n(n  1)(2n  1)
(c) (d) of ‘k’ is
4 6
(a) 16 (b) 4 (c) – 4 (d) 8

ANCE 95
 Progression
1 1 35. The 5th, 8th and 11th terms of a G.P. are p,
27. Which term of the G.P. series ,– ,1
4 2 q and s respectively, then
....... is – 128?
(a) q2 = ps (b) q3 = ps
(a) None (b) 64 (c) 32 (d) 10
4
(c) q = ps (d) q5 = ps
28. If the fifth term of a G.P. is 3 and the second
36. If (1 – 2 )n, 1, (1 + 2 )n are in geometric
term is 3(2)3 then the first term is:
progression, then the value of ‘n’ is
(a) 23 (b) 32 (c) 4 3 (d) 24
(a) 0 (b) 3
29. The second, first and third term of an
arithmetic progression form a geometric (c) Any even integer (d) 1
progression in that order. Which of the 37. Let f(x) = 2x + 1. Then the number of real
following can be the common ratio of the values of x for which the three unequal
geometric progression? numbers f(x), f(2x), f(4x) are in G..P. is
(a) (b) 3 (c) 2 (d) –2 (a) 0 (b) 2
2
(c) 4 (d) 6
30. If a,b,c d and p are distinct real
38. If a, b, c are in G.P. and a, p, q are in
numbers such that
A.P. such that 2a, b + p, c + q are in G.P.
(a 2 + b 2 + c 2 )p 2 – 2p(ab+bc+cd) +
then the common difference of the A.P. is
(b2 + c2 + d2)  0 then a,b,c,d are in
(a) ( 2 + 1) (a – b)
(a) A.P.
(b) G.P. (b) ( 2 –1) (b –a)
(c) H.P. (c) 1 and 2
(d) None of these (d) None
31. The 3rd term of a G.P. is the square of the 39. Three positive numbers form a G.P. If the
first term. If the second term is 8, determine middle number is increased by 8, the three
the 6th term. numbers form an A.P. If the last number is
(a) 136 (b) 132 also increased by 64 along with the
(c) 128 (d) 124 previous increase in the middle number,
32. If p, q, r s  N and they are four the resulting numbers form a G.P. again.
consecutive terms of an A.P. then the pth, Then
qth, rth, sth terms of a G.P. are in (a) first number = 4
(a) A.P. (b) G.P. (b) common ratio = 3
(c) H.P. (d) A.G.P
x x x
(c) 1 and 2
33. If 1 , 5 and 7 are in A.P. and also in G.P.
(c) None
then the value of ‘x’ is
40. logxa,ax/2 and logb x are in G.P., then x
(a) 0 (b) 1 (c) 2 (d) 4
equals:
34. The sum of ‘n’ terms of a progression is
(a) logx(logcb) – loga(logca)
3n – 2. If it is in G.P. then the common
ratio is (b) –loga(logca)
1 (c) –loga(logba)
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) (d) 3 (d) None
3

ANCE 96
 Progression
1 1 (a) zero (b) infinity
41. The consecutive numbers , ,
1 n 1 n
1 A0
(c) (d) A
of a series are in 2
1 n
48. The first term of an A.P. and a G.P. series is
(a) A.G.P. (b) A.P.
1 and the nineth term of both sequence are
(c) H.P. (d) G.P.
same. If the sum of 9 terms of A.P. series is
42. Sum of infinite terms of series
1 1 369, then the seventh term of G.P. series is
3 + 5 , + 7 2 + .........is – (a) 27 (b) 41
4 4
(a) 33/4 (b) 11/4 (c) –27 (d) 27 3
(c) 44/9 (d) 44/8
49. If the first term and the common ratio of a
43. The least value of ‘n’ satisfying 1 + 2 + 22
geometric progression are G 1 and ‘r’
+ ........ + 2n–1  300 is
respectively, then the value of
(a) 8 (b) 9
(c) 10 (d) 6 sum of 2n term
is
44. Sum the series to infinity sum of 'n' terms
(a) 2 : 1 (b) 2r : 1
3 5 3 5 3 5
 2  3  4  5  +..... (c) r 2n–1
:r n–1
(d) (rn +1) : 1
4 4 4 4 4 45
50. A person has two parents (father and
8 7 mother), four grandparents, eight great
(a) (b) grandparents and so on. Find the number of
15 17
ancestors the person has up to the 10th
7 8 generation.
(c) (d)
15 17 (a) 1028 (b) 1024
45. The sum to infinity of the G.P., (c) 1030 (d) 1026
20 80 51. Find the 9th term of the H.P. 6, 4, 3, .....
5, , ,..... is (a) 7/5 (b) 6/5
7 49
(c) 5/6 (d) None of these
(a) 3 (b) 35
52. The third term of an H.P. is 3 and the 9th
3 35 6
(c) (d) term is , find its 20th term.
35 3 5
46. If S1 , S2 , S3 are respectively the sum 3 2
(a) (b)
of n, 2n, 3n terms of a G.P., then 7 7
S12 + S22 = 5 4
(c) (d)
(a) S2 (S2 + S3 ) 7 7
(b) S1 (S2 + S3 ) 4 3 12
53. The 7th term of the H.P. , , ...
(c) S2 + S3 3 2 7
3
(d) S3 (S2 + S3 ) (a) (b) 4
5
1 1 1 46
47. The value of A 2 .A 4 .A 8 ...... to infinity is (c) 6 (d)
21

ANCE 97
 Progression

1 1 1 1 59. If a,b,c,d are in H.P. then which of the

54. If + = + , then a, b, c following statements is true –
ba bc a c
form a/an: (a) ad < bc
(a) Arithmetic progression (b) a + c > b + d
(b) Geometric progression (c) an + cn > 2bn
(c) Harmonic progression (d) None
(d) None of these 60. If a, b, c are in G.P. then a + b , 2b,
55. If p, q, r and s are in Harmonic Progression b + c are in
and p > s, then:
(a) A.P. (b) G.P.
1 1 (c) H.P. (d) None
(a) <
ps qr 2 2 2
61. If 4a + 9b + 16c = 2 (3ab + 6bc + 4ca),
(b) q + r = p + s
where a, b, c are non-zero numbers; then a,
1 1 1 1 b, c, d are in
(c)   
q p r s (a) A.P. (b) G.P.
(d) None of these
(c) H.P. (d) None
56. If a, b, c are in H.P. then the value of
 15 5 3 
1 1 1 1 1 1 62. If x2 + 9y2 + 25z2 = xyz     then
        is:  x y z
b c a c a b
x, y, z are in
2 1
(a)  (a) A.P. (b) H.P.
bc b 2
(c) G.P. (d) None
1 3 2 1 
(b)  2   2  63. If a, b, c are in A.P. and a2, b2, c2 are in
4  c ca a 
H.P., then
 2
(c) 2  ac
b ab (a) b2 =
(d) None of these 8
(b) a = b = c
57. If first and (2n – 1)th terms of an A.P., G.P.
and H.P. are equal and their nth terms are a, (c) 2b = 3a + c
b, c respectively, then _________ (d) None
(a) a = b = c 64. Three consecutive terms of a progression
(b) a + c = b are 30, 24, 20. The next term of the
(c) a < b > c progression is
(d) ac – b2 = 0 1
(a) 16 (b) 16
58. If three unequal numbers p, q, r are in HP 6
and their squares are in AP, then the ratio 1
(c) 17 (d) 17
p : q : r is : 7
(a) 1 – 3 : –2 : 1 + 3 65. If three numbers are in G.P. then the numbers
obtained by adding the middle number to
(b) 1 : 2 : – 3
each of the three numbers are in
(c) 1 : – 2: 3 (a) A.P. (b) G..P.
(d) 1 – 3 : –2 : 1 – 3 (c) H.P. (d) None of these

ANCE 98
 Progression

2
66. The first two terms of an H.P. be and 72. If log(a + c), log(a – c), log(a – 2b + c)
5
are in A.P.; then a, b, c are in
12
then the largest positive term of the (a) G.P. (b) H.P.
23
progression is the (c) A.P. (d) A.G.P.
(a) 8th term 1 1
73. If a, b, c are in H.P. then  is
(b) 7th term ba bc
equal to
(c) 6th term
1 1 2
(d) 5th term (a)  (b)
a c ac
67. If x > 1, y > 1, z > 1 are three numbers in
ac
1 1 1 (c) (d) None
G.P. then , , 3
1  log x 1  log y 1  log z
are in 74. Find the two numbers whose A.M. is 25
and G.M. is 20.
(a) G.P. (b) H.P.
(c) A.P. (d) A.G.P. (a) 30, 20
(b) 35,15
68. If a > 0, b > 0, c > 0 are in G.P. then logax,
(c) 25, 25
logbx, logcx are in
(d) None of these
(a) A.P. (b) G.P.
75. If H.M. : G.M. = 4 : 5 for two +ve numbers
(c) H.P. (d) A.G.P.
x y z t
the ratio of the numbers is
69. a = b = c = d and a, b, c, d are in G.P.,
(a) 4 : 3 (b) 5 : 4
then x,y, z, t are in
(c) 1 : 4 (d) 4 : 1
(a) H.P (b) G.P.
76. The difference between the arithmetic mean
(c) A.P. (d) None of these and the geometric mean of 4, 16, 28 and
70. If log ( a + c), log (c – a), 343 is
log (a – 2b + c) are in A.P., then (a) 67.75 (b) 69
(a) a, b,c are in H.P. (c) 62.25 (d) 69.75
(b) a2, b2, c2 are in A.P. 77. Three numbers a, X, c are in A.P. If x = 25,
(c) a, b, c are in A.P. and a, Y, c are in G.P. If Y = 7. So, a, Z,
(d) a, b, c are in G.P. c are in H.P. If Z is
71. If a, b, c are in A.P., p, q, r are in H.P. and 49
(a) (b) 35
p r 25
ap, bq, cr are in G.P., then  equals 2  25  7 24
r p
(c) (d)
b q 25  7 25
(a)  78. If A, G, H are arithmetic, geometric, and
q b
b q harmonic means of two positive real numbers
(b)  ‘a’ and ‘b’ and if A = pH, then
q b
a c p
(c)  (a) A = p2G (b) A =
c a G
2
a c p
(d)  (c) A2 = pG2 (d)
c a G

ANCE 99
 Progression

79. If the arithmetic mean and the geometric (a) 9, 18

mean between two numbers ‘a’ and ‘b’ are (b) 6, 21
‘A’ and ‘G’ respectively such that A = 2G, (c) 24, 3
then a : b is equal to (d) 6, 3
1 2 82. If A1, A2 be two A.M.’s and G1, G2 be two
(a) (b)
4 1 GM’s between two numbers a and b, then
2 A1  A 2
A 2 3
(c)
4G 2
(d)
2 3 G1G 2 is equal to :
80. If two numbers x and y are such that their ab 2ab
(a) (b)
arithmetic mean exceed their geometric mean 2ab ab
3 ab ab
by and the geometric mean exceed their (c) (d)
2 ab ab
6 83. If the A.M. of two positive numbers be
harmonic mean by , then the value of
5 three times their geometric mean then the
(x, y) is ratio of the numbers is
(a) 3, 12 (b) 4, 8
(c) 6,9 (d) 9, 12 (a) 3 + 2
81. The harmonic mean of two numbers is 4, (b) 17 + 12 2
their arithmetic mean is, A and the geometric
(c) (3 – 2 2 )–2
mean, G satisfy the relation 2A + G2 = 27.
Find the numbers (d) 2 and 3

Practice Problems # 1

Q.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. b c a d a a c c b d
Q.No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. b a b c c c d c c c
Q.No. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans. d c b a d a d d d b
Q.No. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. c b c d a c a c c c
Q.No. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Ans. d c b c d b d a d c
Q.No. 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
Ans. b d b c a a d a b c
Q.No. 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70
Ans. c b b c c d b c a a
Q.No. 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
Ans. c b a d d d a c d a
Q.No. 81 82 83
Ans. d c d

ANCE 100
ONANCE

Trigonometry degrees (°).

Trignometry is derived from Greek word Degree : When the initial ray is rotated
th
“Tri” = Three, “Gonia” = Angle,  1 
“Metry” = Measure. Trigonometry through   of one revolution, we say
 360 
means the science which deals with the that an angle of one degree (1°) is formed
measurement of Right triangles. at the initial point. A degree is divided into
60 equal parts and each part is called one
 Angle :
minute (11). Further, a minute is divided
A measure formed between two rays into 60 equal parts called seconds (’’).
having a common initial point is called So, 1 right angle = 90°
an angle. The two rays are called the 1° = 60’ (minutes) and
arms or sides of the angle and the 1’ = 60’’ (seconds)
common initial point is called the vertex
2. Centesimal System (French System) :
of the angle.
In this system, the angle is measured in
B
grades.
Grade : When the initial ray is rotated
th
  1 
O A through   of one revolution, an
In the above figure OA is said to be the  400 
initial side and the other ray OB is said to angle of one grade is said to be formed at
be the terminal side of the angle.  is angle. the initial point. It is written as 1g.
The angle is taken positive when measured Further, one grade is divided into 100 equal
parts called minutes and one minute is
in anti-clockwise direction and is taken
further divided into 100 equal parts called
negative when measured in clockwise
seconds.
direction.
So, 1 right angle = 100g
B
Terminal side 1g = 100’ (minutes) and
1’ = 100’’ (seconds)
3. Circular System :

O A The angle subtended at the centre of a circle
Initial side
by an arc whose length is equal to the
Initial side A radius. In this system an angle is measured
O
(– ) in radians.
Let AB be an arc of a circle of radius ‘r’
Terminal side such that length of arc AB = r, then AOB
B = 1 radian.
 Systems of measurement of angle : Since, the whole circle subtends an angle
of 360° (= 4 right angles) at the centre and
We have the following systems of the
the angles at the centre of a circle are in
measurement of angle.
the ratio of subtending arcs, therefore
1. Sexagesimal System (British System) :
AOB arc AB r
In this system, the angle is measured in = =
4 right angles circumference 2 πr

ANCE 101
ONANCE
r D R
 AOB = × 4 right angles We have, 
2πr 90  / 2
D /3
B So, 
90  / 2
r
2
  D= × 90 = 60º
O r A 3
c
Hence, the sexagesimal measure of is
3
60º.
2
 1 radian = right angles
π Example 3
Also we have  2 
c

 radians = 2 right angles = 180° = 200g Express in degrees : (a)   (b) (2)c.
 15 
From here, we get
Solution :
180 c c
1 radian = degree  2    2 180 
π (a)   = 
 15   15  
180×7 630°
= =  180 
o

22 11 (b) (2) =  2 
c 
   
 3 3
=  57 +  = 57° + × 60’  180  
o
6
o

 11  11 =   7  ( 2)   114 
'  22   11
 4 4
= 57° +  16 +  = 57° + 16’ + × 60” '
 11  11 6 o 
= 114   60 
= 57° 16’ 22” nearly  11 
Example 1
8
'
o 
Convert 150g into sexagesimal measure = 114  32 
Solution :  11 
Given G = 150g ''
o8 
= 114 32 '   60 
D G  11 
We have, 
90 100
= 114o 32'44''.
D 150
So, 
90 100 Example-4
3 The angles in one regular polygon is to that
 D= × 90= 135
2 in another as 3 : 2, also the number of sides
Hence sexagesimal measure of 150g is 135º. in the first is twice that in the second; how
Example 2 many sides do the polygons have ?
What is the sexagesimal measure of angle Solution
c Suppose the second regular polygon has
measuring ?
3 number of side = x.
Solution :  The first regular polygon will have
c number of side = 2x.
Given R =
3  Each angle of the first polygon

ANCE 102
ONANCE
4x  4 opposite side BC
= right angle  sin = =
2x hypotenuse AC
And each angle of the second polygon
2x  4 adjacent side AB
= right angle cos = =
2x hypotenuse AC
4x  4 2 x  4
 :  3:2 opposite side BC
2x x tan = =
adjacent side AB
or 4x  4  6x  12
or 2x = 8
hypotenuse AC
 The number of sides in the first and cosec = =
opposite side BC
second polygons are 8 and 4 respectively.
Example-5 hypotenuse AC
Prove that sin 420ocos 390o + cos ( 300o) sec = =
adjacent side AB
sin ( 300o)
Solution : adjacent side AB
sin (360o + 60o) cos (360o + 30o)  cos cot = =
(270o + 30o) sin (270o + 30o)
opposite side BC
= sin 60o cos 30o + sin 30o cos 60o
 Sin, cos, tan, cosec, sec and cot
3 3 1 1 3 1 are called circular functions. cosec, sec
=     
2 2 2 2 4 4 and cot are
= 1. reciprocals to sin, cos and tan
Example-6 respectively.
tan 225o cot 405o + tan 765o cot 675o = 0.
Solution : sin θ cos θ
 tan = , cot =
tan 225o cot 405o + tan 765o cot 675o cos θ sin θ
tan (180o + 45o) cot (360o + 45o) + tan  sin lies between –1 and +1
(720o + 45o) cot (630o + 45o)
tan 45o cot 45o + tan 45o ( tan 45o) i.e., –1  sin   1 (or) | sinθ |  1
= 1 1 cos lies between –1 and +1
= 0.
i.e., –1  cos   1 (or) | cosθ |  1
 Trigonometric Ratios of An acute angle tan lies between –  and + 
of a right angle triangle :
i.e., –  < tan  < + 
Let ABC be a right triangle with ABC
as 90º. Let BAC be . Notice that cot lies between –  and +  ,
0º <  < 90º i.e., i.e., –  < cot  < + 
C
    is an acute angle. sec never lie between –1 and +1
e i.e., sec   –1 (or) sec   1 (or)
Opposite side

nus
te  sec    1
ypo
H cosec never lie between –1 and +1
i.e. cosec   –1 (or) cosec   1 (or)

A Adjacent side B  cosec    1

ANCE 103
ONANCE
 Quadrants : Function Domain Range
Y sin  R [–1, 1]
cos  R [–1, 1]
Q2 (SILVER) Q1 (ALL) tan  R – {x|x = (2n + 1) R

sin, cosec are positive All T-ratios are positive π

, n  Z}
(90° + ), (180°–) (90° –), (360° + ) 2
90° <  < 180° 0° <  < 90° cot  R – {x|x = n, n  Z} R
X' X
sec  R – {x|x = (2n + 1) R – (–1, 1)
tan, cot are positive cos, sec are positive
(180° + ), (270° –) (270° + ), (360° – ) π
180° <  < 270° 270° <  < 360° ,nZ}
2
Q3 (TEA) Q4 (CUPS) cosec  R – {x|x = n, n  Z} R – (–1, 1)
 Values of Trigonometric Ratios
Y'
Degree 0° 30° 45° 60° 90°
 Quadrants I II III IV π π π π
sin, cosec + + – – Ratio 0
6 4 3 2
cos, sec + – – +
tan, cot + – + – 1 1 3
sin 0 1
 If the angles are expressed in degrees then 2 2 2
(i) In case of allied angles –, 180° – , 180° 3 1 1
+ , 360° – , 360° +  remains the same. cos 1 0
2 2 2
(ii) In case of allied angles 90° – , 90° + ,
270° – , 270° +  then trigonometric ratios 1
changed as sin   cos , tan   cot, tan 0
3
1 3 
sec   cosec.
2
 Trigonometric Ratios of Allied Angles : cosec  2 2 1
3
Two angles are said to allied when their
sum or difference is either zero or a multiple 2
of 90 o. If  is any angle, then sec 1
3 2 2 
 , 90  ,180  ,270  ,360   et c.
1
are called allied angles. cot  3 1 0
3
 Period of Some Functions :
 sin (ax + b), cos (ax + b)
sec (ax + b), cosec (ax + b)
2
a
 tan (ax + b), cot (ax + b)

a

ANCE 104
ONANCE
 |sin (ax +b)|, |cos (ax + b)| Maximum value
|sec (ax + b)|, |cosec (ax + b)|

=1 + 1+ (2 2)2 = 1 – 1+ 8
a =1+3=4
 |tan (ax + b)|, |cot (ax + b)| Range = [–2, 4]
  Minimum value of
2a
 x – [x] = 1 a 2 sin 2 x + b 2 cosec 2 x 

 If sin  + cosec  = 2 then a 2 cos 2 x + b 2 sec 2 x  is 2ab
sinn  + cosecn  = 2 (n  N) 
a 2 tan 2 x + b 2 cot 2 x 
If sin  + cosec  = 2 then
sin100  + cosec100  = 2 Range = [2ab,  ]
If cos  + sec  = 2  cosn  + secn  Range of 16 sin2x + 9 cos2x is [2.4.3,  ]
=2 (n  N) = [24,  ]
If tan  + cot  = 2 tann  + cot n   Minimum value of a2 sec2 x + b2 cosec2 x
is (a + b)2.
=2 (n  N)
E.g. : Minimum value of 9 sec2 x + 25
I f sin 1 + sin  + sin  + .......+ sin n = n
cosec2 x is (3 + 5)2 = 64
sin  = sin = .........= sin n = 1  If f(x) = a sin2 x + b sin x cos x + c cos2x
If cos 1 + cos 2 + .........+ cos n = n then
cos  = cos = .........= cos n = 0
 sin  + sin ( + ) + sin(2 + 2) + ........
a +c b 2 + (a – c)2
Minimum value = – ,
+ sin (n + ) = 0 (if n is odd) 2 2
= sin  (if n is even) Maximum value
 Minimum value of a sec x + b cosec x is a +c b 2 + (a – c)2
= +
  2 2
(a 2 / 3  b 2 / 3 )3/ 2 when x   0, 
 2 E.g. : If f(x) = 4 sin2  + 5  cos + 2
cos2  then
 Maximum and Minimum Values of Minimum value
Trigonometric Functions :
The maximum value of sin  is +1, 4+2 5 + (4 – 2)2 3 3
= – =3– =
minimum is –1. 2 2 2 2
The minimum value of cos  is –1, 3 9
maximum is +1. Maximum value = 3 + =
2 2
 If f(x) = a cos x + b sin x + c then 3 9
Range =  , 
Minimum value = c – a 2 + b2 ,  2 2
 If a and b are positive and a > b then
Maximum value = c + a 2 + b2 Maximum value of a cos2  + b sin2  is a.
Range :  c – a + b , c + a + b  Minimum value of a cos2  + b sin2  is b
2 2 2 2

and Minimum value of a sec  – b tan  is

E.g. : Range of f(x) = cos + 2 2 sin + 1 a2 – b2
Minimum value = 1 – 1+ (2 2)2 Eg. : Maximum value of 4 cos2  + 3 sin2  is 4,
Minimum value of 5 sec  – 3 tan  is
= 1 – 1+ 8 = 1 – 3 = – 2
25 – 9 = 4

ANCE 105
ONANCE
 Graphs of Trigonometric Functions : (v) y = cosec x, x  R  n, n  I; y
(i) y = sin x x  R; y  [1,1]  ( ,1]  [1, )

(vi) y = sec x, x  R  (2n  1)  / 2,

n  I; y  ( ,1]  [1, )

(ii) y = cos x x  R; y  [1,1]

 Trigonometric Identities :
An equation involving trignometric functions
which is true for all those angles for
which the functions are definded is called
trignometric identity.
 sin × cosec = 1, cos × sec = 1
tan  × cot  = 1
 sin2 + cos2 = 1, sec2 – tan2 = 1
2 2
(iii) y = tan x, cosec  – cot  = 1,
x  R  (2n + 1)  / 2, n  I ; y  R cos2 = 1 – sin2 sec2 = 1 + tan2
cosec2 = 1 + cot 2
sin2 = 1 – cos2 tan2 = sec2 – 1,
2 2
cot  = cosec  – 1
 Trigonometric Functions of Sum or
Difference of two angles :
 sin (A + B) = sin A cos B + cos A sin B
 sin (A – B) = sin A cos B – cos A sin B
(iv) y = cot x, x  R  n, n  I; y  R  cos (A + B) = cos A cos B –sin A sin B
 cos (A – B) = cos A cos B + sin A sin B
tan A  tan B
 tan (A + B) =  1  tan A. tan B
tan A  tan B
 tan (A – B) = 1  tan A. tan B
2 tan A
 sin 2A = 2 sin A cos A 
1  tan 2 A

ANCE 106
ONANCE
 cos 2A = 2 cos2A – 1 = 1 – 2sin2 A  sin 3A = 3 sin A – 4 sin3 A
1  tan 2 A cos 3A = 4 cos3 A – 3 cos A
= cos A – sin A 
2 2
3tanA – tan 3A
1  tan 2 A tan 3A =
2 tan A 1– 3tan 2A
 tan 2A 
1  tan 2 A  cot A + tan A = 2 cosec 2A
 sin (A + B) sin (A – B) = sin2A – sin2 B cot A – tan A = 2 cot 2A
= cos2 B – cos2 A  π A
cos (A + B) cos (A – B) sec A + tan A = tan  + 
4 2
= cos2A – sin2 B = cos2 B – sin2 A
 π A
sec A – tan A = tan  – 
  4 2
 tan   A  = tan (45º + A)
4   sin (A + B) + sin (A – B) = 2 sin A cos B
= cot (45º – A) sin (A + B) – sin (A – B) = 2 cos A sin B
1  tan A cos (A + B) + cos (A – B) = 2 cos A cos B
cos A  sin A
= 1  tan A = cos (A – B) – cos (A + B) = 2 sin A sin B
cos A  sin A
   sin (A + B + C)
 tan   A  = tan (45º – A) = cot (45º + A) = (sin A cos B cos C) – sin A sin B sin C
4 
1  tan A  cos (A + B + C)
cos A  sin A
= 1  tan A = = cos A cos B cos C – sin A sin B cos C
cos A  sin A
 sin A = 2 sin (A/2) cos (A/2)  tan (A + B + C)
 tan A  tan A tan B tan C
2 tan(A / 2) =
= 1   tan A tan B
1  tan 2 (A / 2)
 A + B + C = 90º
cos A = cos2 (A/2) – sin2 (A/2)
 tan A tan B + tan B tan C + tan C tan A = 1
= 2 cos2 (A/2) – 1
 cot A + cot B + cot C = cot A cot B cot C
1  tan 2 (A / 2)
= 1 – sin2 (A/2)   A + B + C = 180º
1  tan 2 (A / 2)
2 tan(A / 2)  tan A + tan B + tan C = tan A tan B tan C
tan A =  cot A cot B + cot B cot C + cot C cot A = 1
1  tan 2 (A / 2)
 If A = B + C then tan A – tan B – tan C
 Trigonometric Formulae :
= tan A tan B tan C.
 tan A + tan B = sin (A + B) 1
cos A cos B  sin3A = [3 sinA – sin 3A]
4
sin (A – B)
tan A – tan B = 1
cos A cos B cos3 A = [3 cos A + cos 3A]
4
 1 + cos A = 2 cos2 (A/2) 1
1 – cos A = 2 sin2 (A/2)  sin4 A = [3 – 4 cos 2A + cos 4A]
8
1 – cos A 1
= tan2 (A/2) cos4 A = [3 + 4 cos 2A + cos 4A]
1+ cos A 8

ANCE 107
ONANCE
 sin C + sin D Heights and Distances
 C+D C–D One of the important applications of
= 2 sin   cos  
 2   2  trigonometry is in finding the heights and
sin C – sin D distances of the points which are not directly
 C+D  C–D measurable. This is done with the help of
= 2 cos   sin   trigonometric ratios. The angle of elevation
 2   2 
cos C + cos D or depression is the angle between the line
 C+D C–D of observation and the horizontal line
= 2 cos   cos   according as the object is at a higher or
 2   2 
cos C – cos D lower level than the observer. The angle of
elevation or depression is always measured
 C+D  C–D
= – 2 sin   sin   from horizontal line through the point of
 2   2  observation.
 Some Important Values are :  Angle of elevation : Let O and P be two
5 1 points where P is at a higher level than O.
sin 18º = cos 72º = Let O be at the position of the observer
4
and P the position of the object. Draw a
10  2 5 horizontal line OM through the point O.
sin 36º = cos 54º =
4 OP is called the line of observation or line
5 1 of sight. Then POM =  is called the
sin 54º = cos 36º =
4 angle of elevation of p as observed from O.
P
10  2 5 n
sin 72º = cos 18º = tio
4 erva
bs
cosec 18º = sec 72º = ofo
5 1 e
Lin
10  2 5  Angle of elevation
O M
cosec 36º = sec 54º = Horizontal Line
5
 Angle of depression : In the above
cosec 54º = sec 36º = 5 1
example, if P be at a lower level than O,
10  2 5 then MOP =  is called the angle of
cosec 72º = sec 18º =
5 depression.
Horizontal Line
2 1 O M
 Angle of elevation
sin 22½º = cos 67½º =
2 2 Lin
eo
tan 22½º = cot 67½º = fo
2 1 bs
er
va
tio
sec 22½º = cosec 67½º = 2 2 ( 2  1) n
P
 Formulae :
2 1
cos 22½º = sin 67½º =  The angle of elevation measured from the
2 2
points A, B on a horizontal line from the
cot 22½º = tan 67½º = 2 1 floor of the tower are ‘’ and ‘’ if
cosec 22½º = sec 67½º = 2 2 ( 2  1) AB = d then the height of the tower ‘h’ is

ANCE 108
ONANCE
D d sin  • cos 
h= (or)
sin(  a )
h d cotα
h=
cotα – cotβ
   The angle of elevation cloud from a height
A B C
d ‘d’ metres above the level of water in a
d sin  • sin  lake is ‘’ and the angle of depression of
 h = tan   tan  (or)
its image in the lake is . The height of the
d sin  • sin 
h= (or) cloud from the water level in metres is :
sin(   )
d dsin (β + α)
h= h= (or)
cosα – cotβ sin (β – α)
 The angle of elevation measured from the d (tanβ + tanα)
h= (or)
points A, B on a horizontal line either side tanβ – tanα
to the floor of the tower are ‘’ and ‘’ if  cotα + cotβ 
AB = d. Then the height of the tower ‘h’ h=d  
is  cotα – cotβ 
C T

h Q  S h

  P R
A D B

d sin  • sin   A balloon is observed simultaneously from

 sin(   ) (or) the three points P, Q, R on a straight road
d directly beneath it. The angular elevation at
h= (or)
cotα + cotβ Q is twice that at P and the angular elevation
d tan  • tan 
h= at ‘R’ is thrice that at P. If PQ = a and QR
tan   tan 
 The angle of elevation of the top of a tower = b then the height of the balloon ‘h’ in
from the bottom and top of a building of terms of a and b is,
height ‘d’ metres are  and  respectively. a
The height of the tower is h= (3b – a) (a + b)
P
2b
T
8
h
 T h
S
d d
 20 S P
R Q
Q R b a

ANCE 109
ONANCE
 A flag staff stands on the top of a tower of 5. 
I f 7 sin2  + 3 cos2  = 4 and 0 <  < ,
height h metres. If the tower and flag staff 2
subtended equal angles at distance ‘d’ then the value of tan  is :
metres from the foot of the tower, then the 1 1
(a) (b)
height of the flag staff in metres is 3 7
 d2 + h 2 
h =  d2 – h 2  2 3
  (c) (d)
7 7
R
6. tan 5º tan 25º tan 30º tan 65º tan 85º = ?
(a) 1 (b) 3
h T
1
(c) (d) None of these
Q 3
d
7. If a1 tan + b1 sec= c1 and a2 tan– b2
sec= c2, which one is true :
Practice Problems # 1 2 2
 c1a 2  c 2a1   c1b 2  c 2 b1 
(a)  a b  a b    a b  a b  = 1
1. If the circular measure of two angles of a  1 2 2 1  1 2 2 1

1 1 (b) a1 + b1 + c1 = a2 – b2 + c2
triangle are respectively and , then the 2 2
2 3  c1a 2  c 2a1   c1b 2  c 2 b1 
number of degrees in the third angle is : (c)  a b a b    a b a b  = 1
 1 2 2 1  1 2 2 1
(a) 131º (b) 130º.6’
(c) 132º 15.6’ (d) 132º 15’ 12.6” a1b1  a 2b 2 
(d) c   c 
2. The no. of sides in two regular polygons are 2  2 
as 5 : 4 and the difference between their 8. Find the value of tan (–945º) =
interior angles is 90 then the number of sides (a) –1 (b) –2
in the two polygons are respectively : (c) 1 (d) 0
(a) 8, 10 (b) 9, 5
7
(c) 10, 8 (d) 14, 6 9. If sin  = and  lies in the second
25
3. If s and t respectively denote the number of
quadrant, find the value of sec + tan =
sexagesimal and centesimal seconds in any
angle then : (a) –4/3 (b) –3/4
(c) –2/3 (d) –1/3
(a) 50s = 27t (b) 250s = t
(c) 75s = t (d) 250s = 81t 10. If (1) sinx secx = cos x cosec x

2 1 sin x cos x
4. If cosec A = , and A is acute, then tan (2) =
3 cos x 1  sin x
A=? (3) (cos 4x – sin 4x) (cos 4x + sin 4x) = 1
1 (4) sin2 x + cos2 x = 1, then the combination,
3
(a) (b) which is correct is :
3 2
(a) 1 and 2 (b) 2 and 3
(c) 3 (d) 2 (c) 2 and 4 (d) 4 only

ANCE 110
ONANCE

11. As x increased from 0 to , the value of 18. If sin 2A = 2sinAcosA and sin 20º = K,
2 then the value of cos20º cos40º cos80º
cos x =
cos160º =
(a) increases
(b) decreases (a) K (b)  1 K 2
(c) remains constant
1  K2 1 K2
(d) increases, then decreases (c) (d) 
8 8
12. The sum of two angles is 1º and their
19. sec2 + cosec2  =
difference 1º. The angles are :
g g sec 2 
 100 5   100 5  (a) (b) sec2  – cosec2 
(a)    and    cos ec 2
  9   9
g g
  5   5 cos2 
(b)    and    (c) (d) sec2  . cosec2 
 100 9   100 9  sin 2 
g g
 100 15   100 15  tan 2 A sec  A
(c)    and  –  20.  = _________
  9   9 cos2 B cot 2 B
g g
      (a) cot2 A – cot2 B (b) tan2 A – tan2 B
(d)   5  and   5
 100   100  tan 2 A
(c) (d) None
13. sin 2A = 2 sin A is true when A = sec 2 A
(a) 0º (b) 30º 21. If sin  + sin2  = 1 then cos2  + cos4  =
(c) 45º (d) 60º sin 
(a) 1 (b)
14. The value of cos2 
cos (270º + ) cos (90º – ) – cos2 
(c) (d) one
sin (270º – ) cos  is : sin 
(a) 0 (b) –1 22. The value of cos2 17º – sin2 73º =
(c) 1/2 (d) 1 (a) 1 (b) 0
15. If in a triangle ABC, A and B are (c) –1 (d) None
complementary, then tan C is : 3
23. If  is an acute angle such that cos  = ,
(a)  (b) 0 5
(c) 1 (d) 3 sin  tan   1
then =
2 tan 2 
16. If sin4  – cos4  = K4 then sin2  – cos2  16 1
is : (a) (b)
625 36
(a) K4 (b)  3 160
(c)  (d) K (c) (d)
160 3
17. The length of the side (in cm) of an equilateral 8
24. If  is an acute angle such that tan2  = ,
triangle inscribed in a circle of radius 8 cm 7
is : (1  sin ) (1  sin )
then the value of (1  cos ) (1  cos ) is :
(a) 16 3 (b) 12 3
7 8 7 64
(c) 8 3 (d) 10 3 (a) (b) (c) (d)
8 7 4 49

ANCE 111
ONANCE
25. The three angles of a quadrilateral are 60º, 32. If O is the point inside the triangle ABC
5 such that OBC = A/2, OCA = B/2,
60g and . Then the fourth angle is :
6 AOB = C/2, then
(a) 88º (b) 96º  C  A  B
(c) 100º (d) 114º sin  A   sin  B   sin  C  
 2  2  2
26. C is an obtuse angle in ABC. If sin A / 2 . sin B / 2 . sin C / 2
3 1 equals :
sin (A + B) = and cos (A – B) = ,
2 2 (a) 1
then A = A B C
(b) cos cos cos
1 1 2 2 2
(a) 7 (b) 52
2 2 (c) sin A sin B sin C
(c) 90° (d) 45º (d) None
27. tan 70° = 2b
33. If tanx = ,ac
(a) 2 tan 20º + tan 50° a c
(b) 2 (tan 20º + tan 50°) y= a cos2 x + 2b sin x cos x + c sin2 x
(c) tan 20º + tan 50° z = a sin2 x – 2b sin x cos x + c cos2 x, then
(d) tan 20º + 2 tan 50° (a) y – z = (a – c)2 + 4b2
28. If x2 = 1– tan2 , (b) y – z = a – c
then tan3  cosec  + sec  = (c) y – z = a + c
(a) (2 – x2)5/2 (d) y = z
(b) (2 – x2)3/2 34. Maximum value of sin8 + cos16 =
(c) (x2 – 2) 3 3
(a) (b)
(d) (2 – x2)1/2 2 4
(c) 1 (d) 2
29. If |tan A| < 1 and | A | is acute, then
35. If sin + sin2 = 1, then cos8 + 2cos6 +
1  sin 2A  1  sin 2A cos4 = .......
is equal to :
1  sin 2A  1  sin 2A (a) 0 (b) 1
(a) tan A (c) 2 (d) –1
(b) cot A 36. A + C = B implies tan A tan B tan C =
(c) – cot A (a) tan B – tan A – tan C
(d) – tan A (b) –(tan A + tan B + tan C)
30. If sinx + sin2 x + sin3 x = 1, then (c) tan A + tan B – tan C
cos6 x – 4 cos4 x + 8 cos2 x equals : (d) tan A + tan B + tan C
(a) 1 (b) 2  5
(c) 3 (d) 4 37. If tan , x and tan are in A.P. and
9 18
31. If cos  = a cos  and sin  = b sin , then  7
tan , y and tan are also in A.P., then
(a2 – b2) sin2  = 9 18
(a) a2 (b) 1 (a) x > y (b) x < y
2
(c) a +_1 (d) a2 – 1 (c) 2x = y (d) x = y

ANCE 112
ONANCE
38. A 10 metre ladder is leaned up against a 42. There is a small island in the river which is
vertical wall in such a way that the mid point 100 m wide and a tall tree stands on the
of the ladder is twice as far from the ground island. P and Q are points directly opposite
as it is from the wall. How high up on the each other on the two banks and in line with
wall does the ladder reach –
the tree. If the angles of elevation of the top
(a) 6 2 m of the tree from P and Q are respectively
(b) 5 3 m are 30º and 45º, find the height of the tree
(in metres)
(c) 4 5 m
(a) 50 ( 3 – 1)
(d) 3 7 m
39. A straight highway leads to the foot of a (b) 50 ( 3 + 1)
tower of height 50 m. From the top of the (c) 100 ( 3 + 1)
tower, the angles of depression of two cars
standing on the highway are 30º and 60º. (d) 100 ( 3 – 1)
What is the distance between the two
43. A circus artist climbs from the ground along
cars ? (in metres)
a rope which is stretched from the top of a
100 vertical pole and tied at the ground at a
(a)
3 certain distance from the foot of the pole.
(b) 50 3 The height of the pole is 12 m and the angle
made by the rope with the ground is 30º.
50 Calculate the distance covered by the artist
(c)
3 in reaching the top of the pole.
(d) 100 3 (a) 24 m (b) 6 m
40. The angle of elevation of the top of a hill at (c) 12 m (d) None of these
the foot of a tower is 60º and the angle of 44. The top of a broken tree has its top end
elevation of the top of the tower from the touching the ground at a distance 15 m from
foot of the hill is 30º. If the tower is 50 m the bottom, the angle made by the broken
high, what is the height of the hill ? end with the ground is 30º. Then length of
(a) 180 m (b) 150 m broken part =
(c) 100 m (d) 120 m (a) 10 m
41. The angles of depression of the top and the
bottom of a 7 m tall building from the top of (b) 3 m
a tower are 45º and 60º respectively. Find (c) 5 3 m
the height of the tower in metres.
(d) 10 3 m
(a) 7 (3 + 3 )
45. The angle of depression of an object from
7
(b) (3 – 3 ) the tower of height 150 m is 30º. Then the
2
distance of object from tower is :
7
(c) (3 + 3 ) (a) 50 3 m (b) 100 3 m
2
(d) 7(3 – 3 ) (c) 150 3 m (d) None

ANCE 113
ONANCE
46. A ladder of 20 m long touches the wall at (c) 20 ( 3  1)
height of 10 m. The angle made by it by (d) None
horizontal is –––––––––– 49. An aeroplane at an altitude of 300 m
(a) 30º observes the angles of depression of
(b) 60º opposite points on the two banks of a river
(c) 45º to be 45º and 60º. The width of the river is
(d) None –––––––
(a) (300 – 100 3 ) m
47. The length of shadow of a tower is 3
(b) (300 + 100 3 ) m
times that of its length. The angle of elevation
(c) (300 3 + 100) m
of the sun is ____________
(d) (300 3 – 100) m
(a) 45º
50. From the top of a light house 60 m high with
(b) 30º
its base at sea level, the angle of depression
(c) 60º
of a boat is 15º. The distance of the boat
(d) None
from the foot of the light house is (in metres)
48. A person walking 20 m towards a chimney
3 1
in a horizontal line through its base observes (a)
3 1
that its angle of elevation changes from 30º
3 1
to 45º. The height of chimney is –––––––– (b) • 60
3 1
20
(a) 3 1
3 1 (c) • 60
20 3 1
(b) (d) None
3 1

Practice Problems # 1

Q.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. d c d c a c a a a c
Q.No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. b a a d a a c b d b
Q.No. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans. a b c a d b d b b d
Q.No. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. d a b c b d c d b b
Q.No. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Ans. c a a b c d c a c b

ANCE 114
 Statistics

 Observation :
Introduction
Each numerical figure in a data is called
Extraction of meaningful information by an observation.
collection of data, organising, summarising,
presenting and analysing the data is a Frequency
branch of mathematics called statistics.
The number of times a particular
The word ‘Statistics’ is derived from the
observation occurs is called its frequency.
Latin word ‘Status’ which means
Political State.  Frequency Distribution :
Limitations The tabular arrangement of data showing
1. Statistics is not suited to the study of the frequency of each item is called a
qualitative phenomenon, as beauty, frequency ditribution.
honesty, poverty.
Types of Frequency Distribution
2. Statistics does not study individuals but
it deals with group. (i) Inclusive Form (Discontinuous form) :
3. Statistics laws are not exact. But they A frequency distribution in which each
are true on averages only. upper limit of each class is also included.
4. Statistics is liable to be misused. Data (ii) Exclusive from (Continuous form) : A
collected for certain purpose, may not frequency distribution in which each upper
be suitable for another purpose. limit of each class is excluded and lower
limit is included.
 Primary Collection :
If the data is collected by the investigator  Frequency Distribution of an
herself/himself for the specific purpose, Undgrouped Data :
then such data is called the primary Tally method. A bar (|) called tally mark
collection. is put against the number when it occurs.
 Secondary Collection : When o ccured 4 t imes, t he fift h
If the data collected by someone else occurrence is represented by putting
other than investigator are known as diagonally a cross tally (/) on the first
secondary collection. four tallies. This technique facilitates the
counting of the tally marks at the end.
Data
The word data means information in the  Frequency Distribution of an Grouped
form of numerical figures or a set of given Data :
facts. Sometimes the data is so large that it is
inconvenient to lise every marks in
 Types of Data : frqeuency distribution table. Then we
The data is classified into two types group the marks into convenient classes
(i) Raw data : Data obtained from direct are groups.
observation is called raw data.
 Range :
(ii) Grouped data : To present the data in a
more meaningful way, we condense the Determine the difference between the
data into convenient number of classes minimum and maximum marks. This is
or groups is called grouped data. called range of the data.

ANCE 115
 Statistics
Range = Maximum mark – Minimum mark  Cumulative Frequency :
Range The cumulative frequency corresponding
 No. of classes = class size to a class is the sum of all the frequencies
upto and that class.
 Class Size : The difference between Types of Cumulative Frequency
upper and lower class limit is called Class
There are two types of cumulative
size.
frequencies.
 Maximum Value and Minimum Value : (i) Less Than Cumulative Frequency :
The Minimum value of the variate should For Less Than Cumulative Frequencies
be included in the first class. The maximum we add up the frequencies from the
value of the variate should be included in above.
the last class interval. (ii) Greater Than Cumulative Frequency :
For Greater Than Cumulative Frequencies
 Class Limits or Class Boundaries : we add up the frequencies from the below
The lowest and highest marks which are  Graphical Representation of Statistical
included in a class are called lower class Data :
limit and upper class limit of the class. Graphical representation of statistical data
Here, marks obtained by all of the is very useful in comparison of statistical
students are divided into seven classes data. The pictorial representations are
namely, 25–35, 35–45 and so on. In class eye-catching and leave a deeper and
25–35, 25 is called Lower class limit and more lasting impression on the mind of
35 is called Upper class limit. the observer.
Here, class size is
35 – 25 = 45 – 35 = 10.
(i) Bar Graph
 Class Marks : Class mark is the mid
(ii) Histogram
value of a particular class i.e., the average
(iii) Frequency polygon
of it s class limit s mark is t he
representative of its class. (iv) Ogive (cumulative frequency curve)
Class Mark (or Mid-Value of the class) (i) Bar Graph :
Upper class limit  lower class limit Bars of uniform width are drawn with

2 equal spacing between them on x-axis
depicting the variable. The values of the
 Class Interval : variables are shown on y-axis and the
The group in which the raw data is height of the bars will be proportional to
condensed is called a class interval. Each values of the variables.
class is bounded by two figures. (ii) Histogram :
A histogram is a graphical representation
 Class Mark or Mid-Value : of a frequency distribution. While drawing
Class mark a histogram, we
Upper limit + lower limit (i) represent the class boundaries along the
= x-axis.
2

ANCE 116
 Statistics
(ii) represent the class frequencies along the Class mark
y-axis.
Upper limit  Lower lim it
(iii) construct a rectangle with bases along the 
x-axis and heights along the y-axis (see 2
the following remark).
 Pie Chart of Pie Graph :
(iii) Frequency Polygon : Statistical data also can be presented in
Frequency polygon of a frequency the form of pie graph. In the pie graph, a
distribution is obtained from the histogram circle is divided into various sectors, in
of the frequency distribution by joining proportion with the various component
the mid-points of respective tops of the parts of the total.
rectangles in a histogram. To complete
the polygon, the mid-points at each end Degree of any component
are joined to the immediately lower or Component value
higher mid-points (as the case may be) at =  360
zero frequency. Total value
It is a line graph of class frequency
plotted against class mark. It can be
obtained by two methods :
(i) By using Histogram
(ii) Without using Histogram

Steps of Drawing Frequency  Steps :

Polygon (By using Histogram) 1. Draw a circle with convenient radius.
It can be obtained by connecting mid- 2. Convert each component of the data into
points of the top of reactangles of degrees.
histogram. 3. Mark the angles at the centre of the circle
and draw the sectors.
Step1: Draw the histogram from the given data.
Step2: Obtain the mid-points of the upper 4. To distinguish different sectors from one
horizontal sides of each rectangle. another, different shades can be used.
Step3: Join these mid-points of the adjacent
 Cumulative Frequency Curve or
rectangles by dotted lines.
Ogive :
Step4: Obtain the mid-point of two class intervals
of zero frequency, one adjacent to the Cumulative frequency curve or an ogive
first on its left and one adjacent to the is the graphical representation of a
last, on its right. cumulative frequency distribution.
Step5: Complete the polygon by joining the mid- There are two methods of constructing
points of first and last class intervals to an ogive.
the mid-point of the imagined class
intervals adjacent to them. (i) Less than method
(ii) More than method.
(iv) Frequency Polygon (Without using
Histograms) :
Measures of Central Tendency
Calculate the class marks (mid points of
class intervals x1, x2, ....., xn of the given The commonly used measure of central
class intervals. tendency (or averages) are :

ANCE 117
 Statistics
(i) Arithmetic Mean (A.M.) or Simple Mean f1x1  f 2 x 2  ...  f n x n
(ii) Median Mean = f1  f 2  f3  ....f n
(iii) Mode
Mean =
 fi x i
(i) Arithmetic Mean : f i

Arithmetic mean of a set of observations

or =
f x i i
or  fx
is equal to their sum divided by the total
number of observations. f i f
Mean of raw data : If x1, x2, x3........... xn Example-1
are the n values (or observations) then, Find the missing value of P for the following
A.M. (Arithmetic mean) is distribution whose mean is 12.58
n
x y
x  x 2  ........x n  xi
x 1 =
i 1 5 2
n n
8 5
n
xi 10 8
nx = Sum of observations = 
i1
12 22
i.e., product of mean and number of items
P 7
gives sum of observation.
20 4
 Mean : 25 2
Sum of all observations Solution :
Mean = Number of observations
Given x = 12.58
If x1, x2, x3,......., xn are the values of n Calculation of Mean :
observations, then the arithmetic mean of
xi fi xifi
these observations is given by
x1  x 2  x 3  ...  x n 5 2 10
n 8 5 40
EXAMPLE : 10 8 80
Find the arithmetic mean of 20, 22, 34, 12 22 264
54, 27, 28.
A . M . P 7 7P
20 4 80
x i 
x 20  22  34  54  27  28
n 6 25 2 50
85 fi = 50 fixi = 524 + 7P
=
6
5 f i x i
 30 x
6 f i
 Mean of Frequency Distribution : 524  7P
12.58 =
If x1, x2, x3.......,xn are n values of variable 50
with corresponding frequencies f1, f2, 629 = 524 + 7P
f3,......fn respectively, then the arithmetic 7P = 105
mean of these values is defined as
P = 15

ANCE 118
 Statistics
Example-2 Given 30 + f1 + f2 = 50
The mean of the following frequency f1 + f2 = 20 ........(1)
distribution is 62.8 and the sum of all
frequencies is 50. Compute the missing  f u 
x  A i i  h 
frequency f1 and f2.  f i 

Class 0-20 20-40 40-60 60-80 80-100 100-120  58  2f 2 

62.8 = 30 =   20 
Frequency 5 f1 10 f2 7 8  50 

Solution : 2
62.8 = (58 + 2f2) ×
Let A = 30, h = 20 5
ui = xi – 32.8 × 5 = 116 + 4f2
Class xi fi xifi
A/h 164 = 116 + 4f2
0-20 10 5 –1 –5
4f2 = 164 – 116
20-40 30 f1 0 0 4f2 = 48
40-60 50 10 +1 10 f2 = 12
Now, f1 + f2 = 20
60-80 70 f2 +2 2f2
f1 + 12 = 20
80-100 90 7 +3 21
f1 = 8
100-120 110 8 +4 32
So, the missing frequencies are f1 = 8 and
fi = 30 + f2 = 12
 fiui = 58 + 2f2
f1 + f2

Example-3
Find the mean of the following distribution.

Class 4—8 8—12 12—16 16—20 20—24 24—28 28—32 32—36

Number of Students 2 12 15 25 18 12 13 3
Solution:
Class Number of Students Mid-value Pr oduct = f i × xi
(fi) (xi)
48
4— 8 2 6 2 × 6 = 012
2
8  12
8 — 12 12  10 12 ×10 = 120
2
12  16
12 — 16 15  14 15 × 14 = 210
2
16  20
16 — 20 25  18 25 × 18 = 450
2

ANCE 119
 Statistics

Class Number of Students Mid-value Product = fi × xi

20  24
20 — 24 18  22 18 × 22 = 396
2

24  28
24 — 28 12  26 12 × 26 = 312
2

28  32
28 — 32 13  30 13 × 30 = 390
2

32  36
32 — 36 3  34 3 × 34 = 102
2

8
Total n = 100  f i x i  1992
i1

1 8 8
Mean = M =  fi x i where  fi x i = 1992 and n = 100
n i1 i1

1992
M= = 19.92
100
Mean of the required distribution = M = 19.92 (Answer)

Example-4  Correct mean

The mean of marks scored by 200 students Correct value of  x i 15976
= = = 79.85
was found to be 80. Later on it was n 200
discovered that a score of 53 was misread So, the correct mean is 79.85
as 83. Find the correct mean. Example-5
Solution : The arithmetic mean of the following
frequency distribution is 52.5. Find the
n = 200, x  80 value of p.
1 Classes Frequency
x  x i 
n
0—20 15
1
 80 =  xi  20—40 22
200
40—60 37
 Incorrect value of  x i = 16000
60—80 p
Now, Correct value of
80—100 21
 x i = 16000 – 83 + 53 = 15970

ANCE 120
 Statistics
Solution :
Classes Frequency Mid-value Product = Freq. × M.Value
(fi) (xi) f i × xi
0 — 20 15 10 15 × 10 = 150
20 — 40 22 30 22 × 30 = 660
40 — 60 37 50 37 × 50 = 1850
60 — 80 p 70 p × 70 = 70 p
80 — 100 21 90 21 × 90 = 1890
5
Total n = 95 + p  fi x i  4550  70 p
i1

M = Mean of the distribution = 52.5

1 5
  fi x i = 52.5
n i1
1
  (4550  70 p) = 525
95  p 10
 700 p – 525 p = 49875 – 45500 = 4375
 175 p = 4375  p = 25
Hence, the value of p is 25.
Example-6
Calculate the mean diameter per bush from the following frequency distribution.

Diame te r (in mm) 20— 29 30— 39 40— 49 50— 59 60— 69 70— 79

N o. of Bushe s 5 11 18 22 16 8

Solution :
Here, the arithmetic mean (mean diameter per bush) of the bush can be found out by using the
assumed mean method from the following table.
Mid- Deviation (d)
Diameter Frequency (f) fd
values x = x – 54.5
20–29 24.5 –30 5 –150
30–39 34.5 –20 11 –220
40–49 44.5 –10 18 –180
50–59 54.5 = A 0 22 0
60–69 64.5 10 16 160
70–79 74.5 20 8 160
fd = –550 + 320
f = 80 = N
= –230

ANCE 121
 Statistics
Using the formula,  230
Mean = 54.4 +
fd 80
Mean = A + (This is to
N
= 54.5 – 2.88
avoid the lengthy calculation of fx when
values of f and x are not small integers) = 51.62 mm
where A = Assumed mean = 54.5 Hence, the mean diameter per bush is
(arbitrarily chosen near the middle of the
class interval) 51.62 mm

Example-7
Calculate the average height of each student in a class from the following frequency distribution.

Height (in cm) 140—150 150—160 160—170 170—180 180—190 190—200

No. of Students 5 10 20 9 6 2
Solution :
Here, the class interval (i.e. height interval) is same (= 10) and mid-values of it will be of very
large values ranging from 145 to 195. So, to avoid lengthy calculation. So deviation method
is used to find the mean.

Height in cm Mid-values Step Deviation No. of fds

(i) (x) xA students = f
ds =
i

140–150 145 –2 5 –10

150–160 155 –1 10 –10

160–170 165=A 0 20 0

170–180 175 1 9 9

180–190 185 2 6 12

190–200 195 3 2 6

f = 52 = N fds = –20 + 27
=7

Here, A = assumed mean = 165 (arbitrarily chosen near middle of the given class intervals)
Using the formula,

fd s  7 
Mean = A +  i = 165 +   × 10 = 166.3 cm.
N  52 
Hence the average height of each student of the class is 166.3 cm.

ANCE 122
 Statistics
1200, 8500, 9200, 7400, 11300, 12700,
7800, 11500, 10320, 8100.
Median is the middle value of the
Find the median salary.
distribution. It is the value of variable such
that the number of observations above it Sol. Arranging the given data is ascending
is equal to the number of observations order, we have 7400, 7800, 8100, 8500,
below it. 9200, 10320, 11300, 11500, 12000,
12700.
 Median of Raw Data : Here n = 10 which is even.
(i) Arrange the data in ascending or  Median
descending order.
(ii) Count the no. of observation (let there 1  n  n  
= Value of    item    1 th item 
be ‘n’ observations) 2  2  2  
th
 n 1 1  10   10  
(A) Median = value of   observations. = Value of   item    1 th item 
 2  2  2   2  
(If ‘n’ is odd)
1
(B) Median = = Value of[5th item + 6th item]
2
1  1  n   1 19520
value of  th item    1 th item . = (9200 + 10320)   Rs. 9760
2  2  2   2 2
(If ‘n’ is even )
 Median of Class - Interval data
EXAMPLE : (Grouped) :
N
The marks secured by 15 students are 70, C
55, 95, 62, 82, 65, 60, 68, 75, 58, 64, Median =   2
f
85, 80, 90, 51. Find the median marks.
 = lower limit of median class,
Sol. Arranging the marks in ascending order, N = total no. of observation
we have 51, 55, 58, 60, 62, 64, 65, 68, C = cumulative frequency of the class
70, 75, 80, 82, 85, 90, 95. preceeding the median class
Here n = 15 which is odd. h = size of the median class
 n 1 f = frequency of the median class
 Median = value of   th item Example-8
 2 
Following are the lives in hours of 15 pieces
 15  1  of the components of air craft engine.
= value of   th item
 2  Find the median :
= value of 8th item = 68 705, 750, 710, 644, 696, 712, 715, 716,
Hence Median = 68 719, 724, 725, 728, 729, 734, 745
Solution :
EXAMPLE : Arranging the data in ascending order
The monthly salaries (in Rs) of 10 644, 696, 705, 710, 712, 715, 716, 719,
employees of a factory are given below : 724, 725, 728, 729, 734, 745, 750

ANCE 123
 Statistics
N = 15
50 th observation  51th observation
th Median =
 N 1  2
So, median =   observation
 2  135  140
th
=
 15  1  2
=   observation = 137.50
 2 
 Median wage of a workers in the
= 719 factory is Rs. 137.50
Example-9 Example-10
The daily wages (in rupees) of 100
Find the median of the following distribution
workers in a factory are given below :
Solution : Marks Frequency
0—100 2
Daily wages (in Rs.) No. of workers
100—200 5
125 6
130 20 200—300 9
135 24 300—400 12
140 28 400—500 17
145 15 500—600 20
150 4 600—700 15
160 2 700—800 9
180 1
800—900 7
Find the median wage of a worker for the
900—1000 4
above date.
Solution :
Daily wages No. of cumulative
Let us construct the cumulative frequency
(in Rs.) workers frequency
table which is given below :
125 6 6
Frequency Cumulative
130 20 26 Marks
(fi) Frequency cf
135 24 50 0-100 2 2
140 28 78 100-200 5 7
145 15 93 200-300 9 16
150 4 97 300-400 12 28
160 2 99 400-500 17 cf = 45
180 1 100
500-600 f = 20 65 Median Class
N = 100 (even)
600-700 15 80
 Median
th th
 N N  700-800 9 89
  observation    1 observation
= 2 2  800-900 7 96
2 900-1000 4 100

ANCE 124
 Statistics

Here, n = total frequency = 100, calculate Solution :

We prepare the cumulative frequency table
n 100
= = 50 as under :
2 2
Cumulative frequency just greater than 50 Class Frequency
Cumulative Frequency
is 65, the span of the group corresponding Interval (fi)
to 65 is 500—600. Therefore, 500—600
is the median class. 0—10 7 7
l = the lower limit of the median class 10—20 8 15
= 500
20—30 x cf = 15 + x
cf = the cumulative frequency of the class
preceeding the median class = 45 30—40 f = 10 25 + x Median Class
f = the frequency of the median class
40—50 12 37 + x
(500 – 600) = 20
h = the width of the median class = 100 50—60 6 43 + x
Using the formula Median 60—70 4 47 + x
n  Total n = 52
  cf 
 2  h
=  f  It is given that the median 36 lies in the
  interval 30 — 40
 50  45  l = lower limit of the median class = 30
= 500     100 cf = cumulative frequency of the median
 20 
just before the median class = 15 + x
 5 
= 500    100  = 500 +25 = 525 h = the width of the class interval = 10
 20 
Hence, the median of the given distribution f = frequency of the median class = 10
is 525 marks. n = total frequency = 52
Example-11 n 
Find the missing frequency in the following   cf 
distribution table if n = 52 and median Median =    2  h
 f 
= 36  
Class interval Frequency n  52
0—10 7   30

10—20 8 cf  15  x
f  10
20—30 x
h  10
30—40 10
 26  (15  x ) 
40—50 12 Median = 30 +   × 10
 10 
50—60 6 = (30 + 26) – (15 + x)
60—70 4 36 = 56 – (15 + x)
[Q Median = 36 ........(given)]

ANCE 125
 Statistics
15 + x = 56 – 36 = 20  15 + x = 20 Median is 20.75 which lies in the interval
 x = 20 – 15 = 5 20 – 25. So the median class is 20 – 25
Missing frequency = x = 5 (Answer) l = lower limit of the median class = 20
Example-12 f = frequency of the median class
The median of the following data is 20.75. = 37 – x
Find the missing frequencies x and y. If cf = cumulative frequency of the class
the total frequency is 100. preceeding the median class = 30 +x
h = width of the median class = 5
Class Frequency
Using median formula we get :
0—5 7
5—10 10 n 
  cf 
10—15 x Median =    2  h
 f 
15—20 13  
20—25 y
[ Median = 20.75]
25—30 10
 50  (30  x ) 
30—35 14 20.75 = 20 +  × 5
 37  x 
35—40 9
5(50  30  x )
Solution : = 20 +
37  x
Let x and y be the frequencies of class 5( 20  x ) 3
intervals 10 –15 and 20 – 25 respectivey. 0.75 =  (37 – x)
37  x 4
Then total frequency = 100 = 5 (20 – x)
 63 + x + y = 100  y = 37 – x.  111 – 3x = 400 – 20x
Prepare the cumulative frequency table, as  17 x = 289  x = 17
given below : when x = 17, then y = 37 – x = 37 – 17
= 20
Cumulative Hence, the missing frequencies are x = 17
Class Interval Frequency
Frequency (cf) and y = 20
0—5 7 7 Example-13
Calculate the median for the following
5—10 10 17
data :
10—15 x 17 + x
Marks Below No. of Students
15—20 13 cf = 30 + x 10 6
20—25 f = 37 – x 67 20 15
30 29
25—30 10 77
40 41
30—35 14 91
50 60
35—40 9 100 60 70

ANCE 126
 Statistics
Solution : EXAMPLE :
The table having frequency and cumulative Find out the value of the mode from the
frequency is given below : following data:
50, 70, 50, 70, 80, 70, 70, 80, 70, 50.
Cumulative
Marks Frequency (fi) Sol. : The value 70 is repeating maximum number
Frequency (cf) of times i.e. 5. Therefore mode of the
0—10 6 6 given series is 70.
10—20 15 – 6 = 9 15 GROUPED DATA:
20—30 29 – 15 = 14 cf = 29 In a grouped frequency distribution, it is
not possible to determine the mode by
41 Median looking at the frequencies. Here we can
30—40 f = 41 – 29 = 12
class only locate a class with the maximum
40—50 60 – 41 = 19 60 frequency, called the modal class. The
mode is a value inside the modal class,
50—60 70 – 60 = 10 70 and is given by the formula :
 f  f1 
Total frequency = x = 70, Mode = l +  2f  (f  f )  × h or
n 70  1 2 
calculate = = 35  1 
2 2
The cumulative frequency just greater than = l +    ) × h
 1 2 
35 and 41 and the corresponding class is where, l = lower limit of the modal class
30–40. Thus the median class is 30–40. h = size of the class interval
(assuming all class size to be equal)
n 
  cf  f = frequency of the modal class
Median =   2  h f1 = frequency of t he class
 f  preceeding the modal class
  f2 = frequency of t he class
l  30 succeeding the modal class
f  12 Let us consider the following examples to
cf  29 illustrate the use of this formula.
h  10 Example-14
n The following table shows the marks
 35
2 obtained by 100 students of class X in a
school during a particular academic session.
35  29 6 Find the mode of this distribution.
= 30 + × 10 = 30 + × 10
12 12 Marks less than Number of students
= 30 + 5 = 35 10 7
Hence the required median = 35 20 21
30 34
Mode 40 46
Mode is the value of that variate for 50 66
which the frequency is the maximum. The 60 77
item which occurs most frequently in a 70 92
data is called mode. 80 100

ANCE 127
 Statistics
Solution :  Empirical Relationship between Mean,
Since the given distribution is cumulative Median and Mode :
frequency distribution, we first convert it Following the relation :
into simple frequency distribution. Mode = 3 Median – 2 Mean
Marks less 2
Number of students
than Median = Mode + (Mean – Mode)
3
0—10 7 – 0 = 07
3
10—20 21 – 7 = 14 Mean = Mode + (Median – Mode)
2
20—30 34 – 21 = 13 Symmetric Distribution : A distribution is
30—40 f0 = 46 – 34 = 12 said to be symmetric if
f1 = 66 – 46 = 20 Mean = Median = Mode
40—50 Example-15
"modal class"
Find the mean, median and mode of the
50—60 f2 = 77 – 66 = 11 following data :
60—70 92 – 77 = 15 Classes Frequency
70—80 100 – 92 = 08 0—50 2
Here the maximum frequency is 20, 50—100 3
and the class corresponding to this 100—150 5
frequency is 40 – 50. So the modal class
is 40 –50. 150—200 6
h = class size or width of the interval = 10 200—250 5
l = lower limit of the modal class = 40 250—300 3
f 1 = frequency of the modal class = 20
300—350 1
f0 = frequency of the class preceeding the
modal class = 12 Solution :
f2 = frequency of the class succeeding the Mean :
modal class = 11
Frequency Mid - value Product
Using the formula, Classes
(fi) (xi) fi × xi
 f1  f0  0-50 2 25 2 × 25 = 050
Mode = l +  2f  f  f  × h
 1 0 2
50-100 3 75 3 × 75 = 225
 20  12 
Mode = 40 +   × 10 100-150 5 125 5 × 125 = 625
 2  20  12  11 
150-200 6 175 6 × 175 = 1050
 8 
= 40 +   × 10
 40  23  200-250 5 225 5 × 225 = 1125

80 250-300 3 275 3 × 275 = 825

Modal class = 40 +
17
300-350 1 325 1 × 325 = 325
= 40 + 4.71 = 44.71
Hence, the mode of the distribution is fixi = 4225
44.71 marks.

ANCE 128
 Statistics
f i x i 4225 Cumulative
Mg = = Classes Frequency
n 25 Frequency
169  25 0—50 2 2
= = 169
25
50—100 3 5
Mode : The maximum frequency in the data
is 6. The span of the group corresponding 100—150 5 cf = 10
to 6 is 150–200. Therefore 150–200 is
the modal class. 150—200 f=6 16 median class
200—250 5 21
Classes
Frequency 250—300 3 24
(fi)
0—50 2 300—350 1 25
50—100 3 n 
  cf 
100—150 f0 = 5   h
Median = l +  2 
 f
 
150—200 f1 = 6 modal class
 25 
  10 
   50
200—250 f2 = 5 = 150 +  2
 6 
 
250—300
5 1
300—350 = 150 +    × 50
2 6
I  150 125 5 5
f0  5 = 150 + = 150 + 20 = 170
6 6 6
f1  6
Mode
Quartiles
f2  5
h  50 Quartiles are those values of the variate
which divided the total set of data in four
 f1  f 0  equal parts.
Mode = I   2f  f  f   h (i) Lower quartile : When the lower half
 1 0 2
before the median, is divided into two equal
 65  parts, the value of the dividing variate is
= 150 +   × 50 called lower quartile and is denoted by
 26  5  5 
Q 1.
1 th
= 150 + × 50 n
2 lower quart er Q 1 =   t erm or
= 150 + 25 = 175 4
th
n 25  n 1
Median : Let us find = = 12.5.   term, depending whether n is
2 2  4 
Therefore frequency just greater than 12.5 even or odd.
is 16 and t he span of t he group For finding quartiles, the given terms (data)
corresponding to 16 is 150-200. Therefore are always arranged in ascending order of
150–200 is the median class : their magnitudes.

ANCE 129
 Statistics
(ii) Upper Quartile : When the upper half, after N
 F1
the median, is divided into two equal parts, Q1 = l1 + 4 × W1
the value of the dividing variate is called f1
upper quartile and is denoted by Q3. where, l1 = lower limit of the Q1 class
(Q2 being the median).
N
 3n 
th (i.e. where cumulative frequency falls)
4
Therefore, upper quartile Q3 =   term
 4 
th
F1 = cumulative frequency up to the class
 3n  1  preceeding the Q1 class
or   term, depending whether
 4  f1 = frequency of the Q1 class
n is even or odd.
W1 = width of the Q1 class
Inter quartile range :
Example-16
The difference between the upper quartile
(Q3) and lower quartile (Q1) is called inter Find the median, lower quartile and upper
quartile range. i.e. Inter quartile range quartile from the following date :
= Q3 – Q1; which is always positive as 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17.
Q3 > Q1. Solution :
Q  Q1 The date is already is ascending order.
and semi inter quartile range = 3 ;
2 Since, n = 7 (odd)
which is also always positive. th
 n 1
Grouped Frequency Distribution : Median =   term = 4th term = 11.
 2 
The cumulative frequency (“less than” type) th
 n 1
are first calculated. Lower quartile (Q1) =   term
 2 
Using the same formula of median and
= 2nd term = 7
N th
putting the respective part in place of ,  3n  1 
2 Upper quartile (Q3) =   term
for example, the first quadratic (Q1) can  4 
be given by : = 6th term = 15

Example-17
Given below the age-wise distribution of 420 employees in a factory. Find the maximum age
of the 315 employees.

Age Below 20-25 25-30 30-35 35-40 40-45 45-50 Above

(years) 20 55

No. of 13 29 46 60 112 94 45 21
employees

ANCE 130
 Statistics
Solution :
315 3
Since = , so third quartile (= Q3) is to be found out by making the following table
420 4

Age Upto 20-25 25-30 30-35 35-40 40-45 45-50 Above

(years) 20 55

Frequency 13 29 46 60 112 94 45 21

Cumulative 13 42 88 148 260 354 399 420

frequency

Q3

3
Third quartile = Q3= ; Nth item = 315th item which lies in 40–45
4
Using the formula,
3N
 F3
Q3 = l1 + 4 ×w
f3
315  260
= 40 + ×5
94
= 42.9
Hence, 315 employees of the factory are aged below 42.9 years i.e. their maximum age will
be 42.9 years.

Mean Deviation
Mode x1 – A = x1 – A, if x1 – A > 0
The dispersion of the observations from = – (x1 – A) or A – x, if x1 – A < 0.
the mean is called dispersion, i.e. dispersion
denotes the spread of the observation. Particular cases :
Mean deviation is a simple measure to find (i) Mean deviation from A.M. ( x ) :
the amount of dispersion.
Definition : The A.M. of absolute values
x  x 1 x
, Here A  x
of deviations of all terms from any standard n
mean is called deviation and it is denoted
by . (ii) Mean deviation from median (M) :
x  Ax 2  A........ x n A
Thus,A = 1 x 1 M
n M  , Here A  M
n
=
 x1  A
n (iii) Mean deviation from mode (z) :
NOTE : Here x1– A means the absolute value of
the deviation of x1 from A which is always
z  x 1 z
, Here A  z
positive and defined as follow : n

ANCE 131
 Statistics
Mean Deviation from Frequency Similarly mean deviation from median,
Distribution :
Let value of a variable x are x1, x2, mode or any origin point can be calculated
……….. xn with frequencies f1, f2, ……..fn by taking M or A respectively in place of
respectively, then mean deviation from
mean. x . In such cases.

    f x  x
1 1 M 
f x 1 1 M
x
f 1
N
or
A 
f x 1 1 A
 x   1  f1x1  x,where N  f1 And
N
N

Example-18
For the following distribution, find mean deviation from the origin 20 and from the mode.
x 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
f 5 8 21 24 18 15 7 2

Solution :
Calculation table from mean deviation.
x1 f1 x1  20 f1 x1  20 x1  16 f1 x1  16

10 5 10 50 6 30
12 8 8 64 4 32
14 21 6 126 2 42
16 24 4 96 0 0
18 18 2 36 2 36
20 15 0 0 4 60
22 7 2 14 6 42
24 2 4 8 8 16
N   f1  100  f1 x1  20  394  f1 x1  16  258

Here, mode i.e. value of maximum frequency = 16

Therefore mean deviation from value 20  20  

f x 1 1  20

394
 3.94
N 100
and mean deviation from mode (z) 16

 20    f x
f1 x 1  z 1 1  16 258
   2.58
N N 100

ANCE 132
 Statistics

Vital Statistics
Mode
Vital statistics is the numerical records of marriages, births, diseases, deaths etc. The health and
population grown etc.

Parameters of vital statistics :

(i) Crude Birth Rate (CBR) :
The number of child births per 1000 of the population in a particular year is called crude birth
rate for that year.
Number of child birth during a given year  1000
Crude Birth Rate (CBR) = Mid year population during the year
(ii) Crude Death Rate (CDR) :
The number of deaths per 1000 population in a specified year called Crude Death Rate for that
year.
Number of deaths during a given year
Crude Death Rate (CDR) =  1000
Mid year population during the year
(iii) Specific Death Rate (SDR):
The number of death per 1000 population in a specified class in a given year is called Specified
Death Rate for the year.
Number of deaths in the age group in the given year
Age Specific Death Rate = 1000
Mid year population in the age group in the year
(iv) Infant Mortality Rate (IMR) :
This is a specific death rate. The number of infant under one year of age dying in a year per
1000 live births of the same year is called infant Mortality Rate (IMR).
Infant Mortality Rate (IMR) =
Number of deaths of infants under the age of 1 year in a given year
 1000
Number of live births during the year
(v) Standard Death Rate (STDR):
The death rates of two regions or communities are to be compared this can be done only by
removing heterogeneity factors and standardising the population.
Standard Death Rate (STDR) :

ST DR   
Sx D x
S x

Where, Sx = Standardized population for group x

Dx = Specified death rate for group x

ANCE 133
 Statistics
Example-19
Find the Crude and Standard Death Rate for the following date.

A ge Pop ulation N o. of deaths Standardized

(in years) (S) (N ) P opulation
(S x )
U nder 1 5 3000 60 104
15 – 55 8500 68 206
O ver 55 500 20 50

Solution :

Age group Population No. of Age specified Standard SxDx

(in years) (S) deaths Death Rate Population
(N) (SDR) (Sx)
Under 15 3000 60 60
 1000  20
104 2080
3000
15 – 55 8500 68 68
 1000  8
205 1648
8500
Over 55 500 20 20
 1000  40
50 2000
500
Total 12000 148 360 5728

Crude Death Rate (CDR) = N  1000  148  1000 = 12.3%

S 12000

S D x x

5728
 15.9%
Standard Death Rate (STDR) =
S x 360

“Before we can seek an adequate solution,

we must be able to define the problem clearly”

ANCE 134
 Statistics

Practice Problems # 1
1. Using direct method to find the mean of 4. The data below gives the weekly earnings
the following data : of 100 workers in a flour mill.
Class Frequency Weekly earnings in
No. of workers
25—29 14 (Rs.)
30—34 22 500—520 14
35—39 16 520—540 9
40—44 6 540—560 5
45—49 5 560—580 4
50—54 3
580—600 3
55—59 4
600—620 3
(a) 36.36 (b) 35.36
(a) 542.5 (b) 530.5
(c) 36.32 (d) 35.34
(c) 540.5 (d) 555.5
2. Calculate the mean (using direct method) 5. The mean of the following frequency is
of the following data : 114. Evaluate the missing frequency (x) :
Class Frequency Class interval Frequency
50—70 18 20—40 9
70—90 12 40—60 11
90—110 13 60—80 14
80—100 6
110—130 27
100—120 8
130—150 8 120—140 x
150—170 22 140—160 10
50—70 4 160—180 20
50—70 40 180—200 7
(a) x = 15 (b) x = 20
(a) 110.2 (b) 112.5 (c) x = 17 (d) x = 25
(c) 112.2 (d) 110.5 6. The following table shows the age
3. Using direct method to find the mean of distribution of cases of a certain diseases
the following data : reported during a year in a particular city.

Class Frequency Age (in years) Frequency

5–14 6
0—20 15
15–24 11
20—40 18 25–34 21
40—60 21 35–44 23
60—80 29 45–54 14
55–64 5
80—100 17
Total 80
(a) 50 (b) 54 (a) 32.87 (b) 34.87
(c) 51 (d) 53 (c) 30.87 (d) 40.87

ANCE 135
 Statistics

7. Calculate the mean of the following : 10. Find the mean by Short-Cut method

Marks No. of Students Marks No. of Students

Below 10 1 30–39 1
Below 20 9 40–49 3
Below 30 19 50–59 11
60–69 21
Marks No. of Students 70–79 43
Below 40 24 80–89 32
Below 50 28 90–99 9
Below 60 30 (a) 70 marks (b) 72 marks
(c) 74 marks (d) 71 marks
(a) 50 (b) 30 11. Find the mean of the following data
(c) 27 (d) 28 Marks No. of Students
8. Calculate the mean of the following :
Below 10 7
Marks No. of Students
Above 60 0 Below 20 17
Above 55 5 Below 30 40
Above 50 11
Above 45 20 Marks No. of Students
Below 40 91
Marks No. of Students
Above 35 60 Below 50 97
Above 30 70 Below 60 100
Above 25 85
(a) 29.8 marks (b) 27.8 marks
Above 20 90 (c) 26.8 marks (d) 28.8 marks
(a) 38.67 (b) 34.87 12. Find the average marks of a student from
the following distribution
(c) 30.87 (d) 40.87
9. Find the mean, by ‘Step-deviation’ Marks less than No. of Students
method : 10 15
20 35
Marks No. of Students
30 60
10–20 6
40 84
20–30 8 50 96
30–40 12
60 127
40–50 15
70 198
50–60 10
60–70 9 80 250
(a) 40 marks (b) 41 marks (a) 51.4 marks (b) 50.4 marks
(c) 30 marks (d) 42 marks (c) 52.4 marks (d) 49.4 marks

ANCE 136
 Statistics
13. In the following frequency distribution, the 16. The mean of the following frequency table
frequency of the class interval (40—50) is is 53. But the frequencies f1 and f2 in the
missing. It is known that the mean of the clases 20–40 and 60–80 are missing. Find
distribution is 52. Find the missing the missing frequencies.
frequency. Age (in years) Number of people
Wages (in Rs.) Numbers of Workers 0–20 15
10–20 5 20–40 f1
20–30 3 40–60 21
30–40 4 f2
60–80
40–50 x
80–100 17
50–60 2
Total 100
60–70 6
70–80 13 (a) f1 = 18 and f2 = 20
(b) f1 = 18 and f2 = 25
(a) x = 5 (b) x = 6 (c) f1 = 18 and f2 = 29
(c) x = 7 (d) x = 10 (d) f1 = 20 and f2 = 29
14. The mean of the following distribution is 17. Find the mode from the following data :
50. Find the missing frequencies p and q.
Expenditure (in Rs.) Frequency
Class interval Frequency 0—100 80
0–20 17
100—200 140
20–40 p
200—300 250
40–60 32
300—400 180
60–80 q
400—500 250
80–100 19
500—600 100
Total 120
600—700 50
(a) p =28, q = 20
(a) Rs. 355 (b) Rs. 450
(b) p =20, q = 24
(c) Rs. 350 (d) Rs. 320
(c) p =28, q = 30
18. Find the mode from the following
(d) p =28, q = 24 distribution :
15. Determine the missing frequency () if the
mean of the distribution is 428. Class Frequency
100—200 40
Class interval Frequency
200—300 160
100–200 3
300—400 560
200–300 6
400—500 970
300–400 10
500—600 1240
400–500 x
500–600 10 600—700 1370
600–700 5 700—800 1460
800—900 50
(a) x = 15 (b) x = 16
(c) x = 14 (d) x = 12 (a) 706 (b) 707 (c) 710 (d) 760

ANCE 137
 Statistics
19. Calculate the mode from the following 22. Find the mode from the following data :
frequency table : Marks above No. of Student
Variable (x) Frequency (f) 0 80
30.5—39.5 5 10 77
40.5—49.5 22 20 72
30 65
50.5—59.5 63
40 55
60.5—69.5 74 50 43
70.5—79.5 30 60 28
80.5—89.5 6 70 16
80 10
(a) 61 (b) 62
(c) 60 (d) 50 90 8
20. Find the value of the following data : 100 0
Marks less than No. of students (a) 52 marks (b) 55 marks
10 5 (c) 50 marks (d) 40 marks
23. The mode of the following distribution is
20 9
55. Find the values of x and y.
30 17
Class interval Frequency
40 29 0—15 6
50 45 15—30 7
60 60 30—45 y
70 70 45—60 15
60—75 10
80 78
75—90 x
90 83 Total 51
100 85
(a) x = 8, y = 4 (b) x = 8, y = 3
(a) 40 (b) 48 (c) x = 8, y =5 (d) x = 8, y = 2
(c) 45 (d) 40 24. Find the value of p and q if the mode of
21. Determine the unknown frequency p of the the distribution given below is 52.
following data if its mode is 54
Class Frequency
Class Frequency
10—25 2
20—30 3
25—40 p
30—40 5
40—55 7
40—50 10 55—70 6
50—60 20 70—85 q
60—70 x 85—100 6
70—80 2 Total 30
(a) x = 5 (b) x = 3 (a) p= 3, q = 6 (b) p= 3, q = 5
(c) x = 2 (d) x = 1 (c) p= 2, q = 3 (d) p= 2, q = 4

ANCE 138
 Statistics
25. Find t he median of the following 28. Calculate the median of the following
distribution : distribution :

Wages (in Rs.) No.of labourers Marks No. of students

200—300 3 40—49 5
50—59 10
300—400 5
60—69 20
400—500 20
70—79 30
500—600 10
80—89 20
600—700 6
90—99 15
(a) Rs. 450 (b) Rs. 470 (a) 74.5 cm (b) 70.5 cm
(c) Rs. 440 (d) Rs. 430 (c) 80.5 cm (d) 71.5 cm
26. Find t he median of the following 29. Find t he median of the following
distribution :
distribution :
Monthly consumption of Numbers of Class Frequency
electricity consumers 130—134 5
65–85 4
135—139 15
85—105 5
140—144 28
105—125 13
125—145 20 145—149 24

145—165 14 150—154 17
165—185 7 155—159 10
185—205 4 159—164 1
(a) Rs. 135 (b) Rs. 137 (a) 144.92 (b) 140.92
(c) Rs. 130 (d) Rs. 120 (c) 144.80 (d) 140.80
27. Find the median for the following frequency 30. Calculate the median from the following
distribution : frequency table :

Height (in cm) Frequency Variable (x) Frequency (f)

159.5—162.5 15 30.5—39.5 5
162.5—165.5 117 40.5—49.5 22
50.5—59.5 63
165.5—168.5 136
60.5—69.5 74
168.5—171.5 118
70.5—79.5 30
171.5—174.5 14 80.5—89.5 6
(a) 157 cm (b) 187 cm (a) 60.35 (b) 61.35
(c) 167 cm (d) 180 cm (c) 62.30 (d) 61.00

ANCE 139
 Statistics

31. Find the median from the following data : Class Interval Frequency
Age (in years) Frequency 0—10 5
5—14 6 10—20 x
15—24 11 20—30 20
30—40 15
25—34 8
40—50 y
35—44 20
50—60 5
45—54 25
Total 60
55—64 10
(a) x = 8 and y = 7
(a) 40 years (b) 42 years (b) x = 8 and y = 5
(c) 41 years (d) 30 years (c) x = 5 and y = 7
(d) x = 5 and y = 5
32. Calculate the median marks of the following
35. Find the missing frequencies x and y from
data : the following data if n = 230 and the median
Marks No. of Marks No. of is 46.
Obtained Students Obtained Students Class Frequency
Above 70 7 Above 40 42 10—20 12
20—30 30
Above 60 18 Above 30 63
30—40 x
Above 50 40 Above 20 65 40—50 65
(a) 52.41 (b) 53.30 50—60 y
(c) 53.41 (d) 50.41 60—70 25
70—80 18
33. Find the missing frequency (x) from the
following data if n = 95 and the median is (a) x = 30, y = 18
37.25 (b) x = 34, y = 16
(c) x = 34, y = 10
Class Frequency (d) x = 30, y = 16
10—19.5 10 36. Find the x and y from the given data if
median = 32.5
20—29.5 x
Class interval Frequency
30—39.5 30
0—10 x
40—49.5 20
10—20 5
50—59.5 10 20—30 9
60—69.5 5 30—40 12
70—79.5 5 40—50 y
50—60 3
(a) x = 12 (b) x = 13 60—70 2
(c) x = 10 (d) x = 15 Total 40
34. If the median of the distribution given below (a) x = 2, y = 6 (b) x = 3, y = 3
is 28.5, find the values of x and y. (c) x = 3, y = 6 (d) x = 1, y = 1

ANCE 140
 Statistics
37. The runs scored by 8 cricket players in an 40. The Lower quartile of the above data is :
inning are as follows : (a) 38
42, 47, 52, 47, 37, 60, 55, 55, 38. (b) 39
Find mean deviation (c) 41
(a) 6.31 (d) 42
(b) 2.31 41. The Lower quartile of the above data is :
(c) 3.31 (a) 35
(d) 4.41 (b) 40
38. Fill up the blanks in the following table (c) 45
and find the Crude Death Rate. (d) 48
Age group Population No of 42. The interquartile- range of the above
(in year) deaths data is :
(a) 2
0 – 10 25000 300
(b) 3
10 – 20 35000 150
(c) 4
20 – 40 ………. 100 (d) 5
40 – 70 15000 ………. 43. Marks of four students are 25, 35, 45 and
Over 70 25000 300 55 their mean deviation is :
(a) 10
Total 125000 1000
(b) 1
(a) 4% (c) 0
(b) 3% (d) 40
(c) 8 % 44. The weight (in kg) of five students are 38,
(d) 1% 45, 62, 55, 50. Their mean deviation is :
(a) 50
Direction (Q. 39 to 42)
(b) 10
Solve the questions given below using the
(c) 6.8
following frequency distributing data.
(d) 0
The weights of 60 boys are given in the
45. The Crude Death Rate (per thousand) of
following distribution table.
the following date is :
Weight (kg) 37 38 39 40 41 Age group Population No. of
(in years) deaths
No. of boys 10 14 18 12 6 0 – 15 3500 200
15 – 30 2500 110
39. The Median of the above data is : 30 – 40 1500 80
(a) 29 40 – 60 2700 120
Over 60 1800 90
(b) 31
(c) 39 (A) 50 (b) 55
(d) 47 (c) 60 (d) 62

ANCE 141
 Statistics
46. Find the age Specific Death Rate of group 48. The population of a city in any year was
40 – 60 for the following date : 250000 and number of deaths in that year
was 2800. The Crude Death Rate of the
A ge grou p P opulation N o. of city will be :
(in years) (in th ousand) death
(a) 89.2
20 – 40 2600 9500 (B) 11.2
40 – 60 3200 16500 (c) 112
(d) 1.12
O ver 60 700 14000
49. The population of a village in any year
(a) 5.1 was 1025 and number of deaths in
that year was 41. The Crude Death Rate
(b) 6.2
will be.
(c) 4.3 (a) 40
(d) 7.1 (b) 25
47. The population in a town of age group (c) 41
0 – 15 is 3500 and the number of deaths (d) 0.4
is 200 in the year 2000, then Crude Death 50. If mean deviat ion is 13 and
Rate of the city will be :  f1x1  x  650 then find the value of
(a) 5.71  f1 =
(b) 6 (a) 40
(b) 45
(c) 0.6
(c) 50
(d) 57.1 (d) 35

Practice Problems # 1

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. a c d c a b d a d c
Ques. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. a b c d b c c a b b
Ques. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans. a b c a b b c a a b
Ques. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. b c d a b c a c c a
Ques. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Ans. b a a c a a a b a c

ANCE 142
 Mensuration

Area 1
= × circumference × radius
2
The area of any figure is the amount of
surface enclosed within its bounding lines. Area
(c) Radius of circle =
Area is always expressed in square units. 
Units of Measuring Area : Perimeter or circumfere nce
=
100 sq millimetres = 1 sq. centimetre 2
100 sq. centimetres = 1 sq. decimetre (d) Ratio of the areas of the two circles is :
100 sq. decimetres = 1sq. metre Area of circle circumscri bing the square 2
100 sq. metres = 1 sq. decametre or arc = =
Area of circle inscribed in the square 1
10000 sq. metres = 1 hectare
1000000 sq.m metres = 100 hectares
= 1 sq. kilometre
Perimeter : R
The perimeter of a geometrical figure is
the total length of the sides enclosing the
figure.
(e) Ratio of the area of the two squares is
Area of Circle, Triangle and Polygon
Area of square circumscri bing the circle 2
Circle = =
Area of square inscribed in the circle 1
A circle is the path travelled by a point
which moves in such a way that its
distance from a fixed point remains
constant. The fixed point is called centre and
fixed distance is called radius. 2a
(a) circumference or perimeter of circle

r Sector
O
A Sector is a figure enclosed by 2 radii
and arc lying between them.
= 2  r =  d,
For sector AOB,
where r is radius and d is diameter of
circle. 2  r
Arc AB =
(b) Area of circle 360
=  r2, r is radius where r = radius and AOB = 
d 2
= , d is diameter
4 O
2
c  A  B
= , c is circumference
4
C

ANCE 143
 Mensuration

Area of sector ACBO Triangle

1
= × (arc AB) × radius A triangle is a close figure bounded by
2
3 sides
 (radius)2 
= Area of a Triangle (A)
360
Segment 1 1
(a) A= (base × height) = ah
2 2
A segment of a circle is a figure enclosed
by a chord and an arc which it cuts off. (b) A= s(s  a ) (s  b) (s  c)
Area of segment ACB 1
= area of sector ACBO – area of OAB where s = (a + b + c) or semi-
2
and perimeter of the triangle
area of segment ADB A
= area of circle – area of segment ACB
D
c h b
O
B a Base C
A B
C This formula is known as Heron’s Formula
Example - 1
Perimeter (P) = a + b + c = 2s
Find the length of a rope by which a
buffalo must be tethered in order that she Right Angled Triangle
may be able to graze an area of 9856 sq
m. A triangle having one of its angles is 90°
Solution : is called right angled triangle and sides
The required length of rope opposite to the right angle is called the
Area 9856 7 hypotenuse.
= r =  = 22 In a right angled triangle
= 3136 = 56 m. (Hypotenuse)2 = sum of squares of sides
Example - 2 i.e. h2 = a2 + b2
Find the area of sector of a circle whose 1
radius is 14 cm and the angle at the Area (A) = (product of the sides
2
centre is 60°. containing the right angle)
Solution :
(radius)2 
Area of sector =
360 h
a
22  14  14  60
=
7  360 90º
22  2  14
= Base
6
2 1
= 102 sq cm i.e. A= ab
3 2

ANCE 144
 Mensuration

Equilateral Triangle Isosceles Right - angled Triangle

A triangle whose all the sides are equal is An Isosceles Right angled triangle has two
called equilateral triangle sides equal with equal sides making 90°
Area (A) of an equilateral triangle to each other.
Hypotenuse (h) = 2 a
a a 1
Area (A) = a2
2
Perimeter (P) = 2a  2a
a/2 a/2
a = 2a ( 2  1)
3 3 2
= (side)2 = a = h ( 2  1)
4 4
Perimeter (P) of an equilateral triangle If the perimeter of an isosceles triangle is
= 3 × (side) = 3a P and the base is b, then the length of the
Altitude (h) of an equilateral triangle (P  b)
equal sides is . if the perimeter of
3 3 2
= × (side) = a an isosceles triangle is P and the length of
2 2
equal sides is a, then base is (P – 2a)
In a equilateral triangle
A = B = C = 60º Example - 3
Area (A) of an equilateral triangle What is area of triangle having sides 3m,
4m and 5m?
(altitude) 2 h2
= = Solution :
3 3
Let a = 3m, b = 4m, c = 5m
Isosceles Triangle abc 345
Then, s = = = 6 m
A triangle whose two sides are equal is 2 2
called Isosceles triangle  Area = s(s – a ) (s – b) (s – c)
Area (A) of an isosceles triangle
= 6(6 – 3) (6 – 4) (6 – 5)
b
= 4a 2  b 2 = 6  3  2 1 = 36
4
= 6 sq m
a Example - 4
a
Find the area of triangle whose base is
4.6m and height is 67 cm.
b Solution :
Perimeter (P) of an isosceles triangle
1
= (2a + b) Area of triangle = (base × height)
2
Height (h) of an isosceles triangle 1
= (4.6 × 100 × 67)
1 2
= 4a 2  b 2 = 15410 sq cm.
2

ANCE 145
 Mensuration

Example - 5 and, a = length of each side

n2
Length of the side of an equilateral triangle Each interior angle = 
4 n
is cm. Find its height. 2
3 Each exterior angle =
n
Solution :
1 1
Height of the equilateral triangle Area = × P× r = × n × a × r,,
2 2
3 where r is radius of the circle drawn
= × (side)
2 inside the polygon touching its sides
3 4
= × = 2 cm.
2 3
Example - 6
If the base of an isosceles triangle is 10
cm and the length of equal sides is 13
cm, find its area. 2
1 2 a
Solution : = × n × a × R  
2 2
Area of the isosceles triangle
where R is radius of the circle drawn
b outside the polygon touching its sides.
= 2 2
4 4a – b na 2 
10 = cot  
= 4 (13) 2 – (10) 2 4 n
4 Area of a regular hexagon
10 10 3 3
= 676 – 100 = 4 ×24 = (side)2
4 2
= 60 sq cm. Area of a regular octagon
Polygon = 2( 2  1) (side)2

A polygon is a plane figure which is Cyclic Quadrilateral

enclosed and bounded by line segments. A quadrilateral whose vertices lie on the
circumference of the circle is called Cyclic
Regular Polygon Quadrilateral.
If all the sides of the polygon are equal it For a cyclic quadrilateral.
is called regular polygon. Area = s(s  a ) (s  b) (s  c) (s  d) ,
All the interior angles of a regular polygon where
are equal.
For a regular polygon : D c C
Sum of exterior angles = 2
d b
Sum of interior angles = (n – 2) 
n ( n  3) A a B
No. of diagonals in a polygon =
2
Perimeter (P) = n × a, a bcd
s =
where n = number of sides 2

ANCE 146
 Mensuration

 A + B + C + D = 2  where a and b are adjacent sides, d is the

length of the diagonal connecting the ends
 A + C = B + D =  a bd
of the two sides and s =
2
Quadrilateral b
A closed figure bounded by four sides is
a
called Quadrilateral. d
It has four angles and some of these
angles is 360°.
In a parallelogram, the sum of the squares
Area (A) of a quadrilateral of the diagonals = 2 (the sum of the
1 squares of the two adjacent sides),
= × one diagonal × (sum of
2 i.e.
perpendiculars to it from opposite
vertices) d12  d 22 = 2(a 2 + b2)
1 Perimeter (P) of a parallelogram
= d (p1 + p2) = 2 (a + b),
2
where a and b are adjacent sides of the
Note : If the lengths off our sides and one of its parallelogram.
diagonals are known, then
Rectangle
A = Area of ADC + Area of ABC
Rectangle is a quadrilateral with opposite
D C sides equal and all the four angles equal
p1 to 90°. The diagonals of a rectangle bisect
p2
each other and are equal.
A B (a) Area (A) of rectangle = length ×breadth
= l × b
Parallelogram
OR
A quadrilateral in which opposite sides are
equal and parallel is called parallelogram. D C
Area (A) of a parallelogram d
D C

A B
height (h)

Area of rectangle = (  d   )
2 2

A Base (b) B
If one side (l) and diagonal (d) are given
= base × altitude corresponding to
OR
the base
= b × h  p2 d 2 
Area of rectangle =  8  2  ,
Area (A) of a parallelogram  
If perimeter (P) and diagonal (d) are
= 2 s(s  a ) (s  b) (s  d ) given.

ANCE 147
 Mensuration

(b) Perimeter (P) of rectangle P2 (perimeter ) 2

= 2(length + breadth) = , i.e.
16 16
= 2 (l + b) (b) Perimeter (P) of a square
OR = 4a, i.e. 4 × side
Perimeter of rectangle
= 16  area = 2 2 d ,
= 2 (  d   ) ,
2 2

i.e. 2 2 × diagonal
If one side (l) and diagonal (d) are given
(c) Length (d) of the diagonal of a square
(c) Diagonal of a rectangle
= 2 a , i.e. 2  side
= (length ) 2  ( breadth ) 2
P
= 2  area = 2 2 ,
= 2  b 2
Perimeter
(d) If area (A) and perimeter (P) of a i.e.
2 2
rectangle are given, then length of the
rectangle Rhombus
 P2 P  A rhombus is a quadrilateral whose all
  A 
=  16 4  sides are equal. The diagonals of a
 rhombus bisect each other at 90°.
and, breadth of the rectangle (a) Area (A) of a rhombus
= a × h, i.e. base × height
P 2 
  P A
= 4 16  1 1
  = d1 × d2, i.e. × product
2 2
 Square of its diagonals
A square is a quadrilateral with all sides 2
equal and all the four angles equal to 90°. d 
2
= d1 × a  1 
The diagonals of a square are equal and 2
bisect each other at 90°. a
d2
(a) Area (A) of a square a h d1 a
a
D C a
 2  d1  2 
a d a
since d = a    
2
2
4
  2  
2 2
 Perimeter   d1 
A a B = d1×     ,
 4  2
= a2 i.e. (side)2  Perimeter  2  d1 2 
since d 22 = 4     
d2 (diagonal )2  4   2  
= , i.e.
2 2

ANCE 148
 Mensuration

(b) Perimeter (P) of a rhombus Example - 7

= 4a i.e. 4 × side = 2 d12  d 22 , In a parallelogram, the lengths of adjacent
sides are 11 cm and 13 cm, respectively.
where d1 and d2 are two diagonals If the length of one diagonal is 20 cm,
1 find the length of the other diagonal.
(c) Side (a) of a rhombus = d12  d 22 Solution :
2
We have,
Trapezium (Trapezoid)
A trapezium is a quadrilateral whose any d12 + d 22 = 2(a2 + b2)
two opposite sides are parallel. Distance
 (20)2 + d 22 = 2(11
12 + 132)
between parallel sides of a trapezium is
its height.  d 22 = 2(121 + 169) – 400 = 180
(a) Area (A) of a trapezium
 d2 = 180 = 13.4m (approx.)
1
= × (sum of parallel sides) ×
2
perpendicular distance between Example - 8
the parallel sides Find the area of a parallelogram whose
1 two adjacent sides are 130m and 140m
i.e., × (a + b) × h and one of the diagonals is 150m long.
2
ab Solution :
= s(s  ) (s  c) (s  d )
 Here, a = 130, b = 140 and d = 150.
a a bd 130  140  150
 s = =
h 2 2

b 420
= = 210
2
where, l = b – a If b > a
 Area of the parallelogram
= a – b if a > b
cd = 2 s(s – a ) (s – b) (s – a )
and, s =
2
(b) Height (h) of the trapezium = 2 210(210 – 130) (210 – 140) (210 – 150)
2 = 2 210  80  70  60 = 2 × 8400 sq m.
= s(s  ) (s  c) (s  d )
 Example - 9
 2A Calculate the area of a rectangular field
=  
a b whose one side is 16 cm and the diagonal
is 20 cm.
Walls of a Room Solution :
Area of four walls of a room Area of the rectangular field
= 2 (length + breadth) × height = ( × d 2 – 2 )

ANCE 149
 Mensuration

Solution :
= (16 × 202 – 162 ) = 16 × 12
Sum of interior angles = (n–2) × 
= 192 sq cm.
= (10–2) ×  = 8
Example - 10
Also, value of each interior angle
Perimeter of square field is 16 2 cm.
n –2
Find the length of its diagonal. =   × 
 n 
Solution :
We have,  10 – 2 
=  
Perimeter of square field  10 
= 2 2 × diagonal 4
=
 16 2 = 2 2 × diagonal 5
Some Useful Short-cut Methods :
16 2
 Length of the diagonal = 8 cm  If the length and the breadth of a
2 2
Example - 11 rectangle are increased by x% and y%
Find the side of a rhombus, one of whose respectively, then the area of rectangle will
diagonals measure 4 m and the other 3m.  xy 
increase by  x  y  %
Solution :  100 
Side of the rhombus  If the length of a rectangle is increased by
1 x%, then its breadth will have to be
= × d12  d 22
2  100 x 
1 decreased by   % in order to
= × ( 4) 2  (3) 2  100  x 
2
maintain the same area of rectangle.
1
= × 25, i.e. 12.5 m.  If each of the defining dimensions or sides
2
Example - 12 of any two-dimensional figure (triangle,
rectangle, square, circle, quadrilateral,
The two parallel sides of a trapezium of
area 180 sq. cm measure 28 cm and 12 pentagon, hexagon, etc.) is changed by
cm.What is the height of the trapezium?  x 
x%, its area changes by x  2   %.
Solution :  100 
Height of the trapezium  If all the sides of a quadrilateral are
increased (or decreased) by x%, its
 2A   2  180  360
=   =   = diagonals also increase (or decrease) by
 a  b   28  12  40 x%.
= 9 cm.  If each of the defining dimensions or
Example - 13 sides of any two-dimensional figures are
Find the sum of interior angles of a regular increased (or decreased) by x%, its
polygon. Also, find the value of each perimeter also increases (or decreases) by
interior angle.
x%.

ANCE 150
 Mensuration

 If the ratio of the areas of two squares  If the diagonal of a square increases by
be a : b, then the ratio of their sides, ratio x times, then the area of the square
of their perimeters and the ratio of their becomes x2 times.
diagonals, each will be in the ratio  Standard properties of Diagonals of
a: b Quadrilaterals :

Quadrilateral Meet Bisect Equal to Bisect

at right each other each other angle
angles at vertex
Square    
Rectangle ×   ×
Parallelogram ×  × ×
Rhombus   × 
Trapezium × × may or ×
may not be

Carpeting the floor of a Room

II w
If the length and breadth of a room l and
b
b, respectively, and a carpet of width w
is used to cover the floor, then the III IV
required length of the carpet
l
lb I
=
w
(b) A rectangular garden l m long and b m
 Number of square Tiles required for broad is surrounded by a path w m wide
Flooring. If the length and breadth of a constructed inside it along its boundary.
room and l and b respectively, then the The area of the path is given by
least number of square tiles required to = 2w (l + b – 2w) sq. m.
cover the floor
II
b
= H.C.F. (, b) w

Also, the size of the largest tile so that the III IV b

tiles exactly fit
= H.C.F. (l, b) I
 Path around a Rectangular Space l
(a) A rectangular garden l m long and b m (c) A rectangular park is l m long and b m
broad. Two paths w m wide each are
broad is surrounded by a path w m wide.
perpendicular to each other inside the
the area of the path is given by
park. The area of the pat hs
= 2 w (l + b + 2w) sq. m = w (l + b – w) sq. m

ANCE 151
 Mensuration

Also, area of the park minus the paths  (a) A circular ground of radius r has
= (l – w) (b – w) sq m. a pathway of width w around it
on its outside. The area of circular
II pathway is given by :
I = w (2r + w)
w b
(b) a circular ground of radius r has
a pathway of width w around it
 on its inside. The area of the
Notes : circular pathway is given by
1. Clearly, from the figure, the area of the =  w (2r – w)
paths does not change on shifting their  If the area of a square is a sq cm, then
locations as long as they are perpendicular the area of the circle formed by the same
to each other.
 4a 
2. For a square park, take l = b in all the perimeter is   sq. cm.
results derived above.  
 Square room surrounded by a Verandah  The area of the largest circle that can be
(a) A square room of side a is surrounded by a2
inscribed in a square of side a is .
a verandah of width w on the outside of 4
the square room. If the area of the  Area of a square inscribed in a circle of
verandah is A, then the asrea of the room radius r is 2r2 and the side of the square
is given by :
is 2 r .
2
 A  4w 2   The area of largest triangle inscribed in a
 
 4w  semi-circle of radius r is r2.
 The number of revolutions made by a
circular wheel of radius r in travelling
distance d is given by
w
 d 
a =  2 r 
 
a+2w Example - 14
(b) A square room of side a is surrounded by The length of a rectangle is increased by
a verandah of width w on its inside. If the 25%. By what per cent should its breadth
area of the verandah is A, then the area be decreased so as to maintain the same
of the room is given by area ?
2 Solution :
 A  4w 2 
  The breadth must be decreased by
 4w 
 100x   100  25 
=  % =   %,
 100  x   100  25 
i.e. 20%.
w

(a+2w) Example - 15
How many metres of a carpet 12cm wide
will be required to cover the floor of a

ANCE 152
 Mensuration

room which is 600 cm long and 420 cm Example - 18

broad? Also, calculate the amount A square room has a verandah of area 24
required in carpeting the floor if the cost
of carpet is Rs. 15 per metre. sq mand width 1m all round it on its
Solution : inside. Find the area of the room.
Length of the carpet Solution :
b Area of the room
=
w  A  4w 2 
2

600 420 =  
=  4w 
12 2
= 21000 cm, i.e. 210m.  24  4  12 
=  
The amount required for carpeting the floor  4 1 
= 15 × 210 = Rs. 3150 = 49 sq m.
Example - 16 Example - 19
A hall of length 24 cm and breadth 20 m A circular park of radius 22 m has a path
is to be paved with equal square tiles.
of width 1.4m around it on its inside. Find
What will be the size of the largest tile so
that the tiles exactly firt and also find the the area of the path.
number of tiles required. Solution :
Solution : The area of the circular path
Size of the largest possible square tile = w (2r –w)
= H.C.F. (, b) 22
= H.C.F. (24, 20) = 4m. = × 1.4 × (2 × 22 – 1.4)
7
Number of tiles required = 4.4 × (4.4–1.4)
b = 187.45 sq m.
= H.F.F. (, b)
Example - 20
24  20
= = 120 tiles The diameter of a wheel is 2cm. If it rolls
4
forward covering 10 revolutions, find the
Example - 17
distance travelled by it.
A park is square in shape with side 18m.
Find the area of the pavement 3m wide Solution :
to be laid all around it on its inside. Radius of the wheel = 1 cm.
Solution : The distance travelled by the wheel in 10
Area of the pavement revolutions
= 2w ( + b – 2w)
= 10 × 2r
= 2 × 3 (18 + 18 – 2 × 3)
22
(Here,  = b = 18) = 10 × 2 × × 1
7
= 180 sq m. = 62.8 cm.

ANCE 153
 Mensuration

Volume & Surface area of Cubes, Solution :

Cuboid, Cone & Sphere Volume to the box =
area of base  area of one face  area of the other face
Cuboid
= 60  120  72
If l, b and h denote the length, breadth
and height of the cuboid and d denotes = 518400 = 720 cm3
the body diagonal (AF or BE or DG Cube
or CH), then
If a be the edge of a cube, then
h
b a
l a
(i) Volume = l × b × h a
(i) volume of the cube = (edge)3 = a3
= A1  A 2  A 3 , (ii) Total surface area of the cube
Where, A1 = area of base or top = 6 (edge)2 = 6a2
A2 = area of one side face, and (iii) Diagonal of the cube = 3 a (edge) = 3a
A3 = area of other side face (iv) Volume of the cube
(ii) Total Surface Area = 2 (lb + bh + lh) 3 3
 diagonal   d 
= (l + b + h)2–d2 =   =  
 3   3
(iii) Diagonal of cuboid= l 2  b2  h2 l  Surface area 
3

Note : =  

 6 
1. For painting the surface area of a box or (v) Total surface area of the cube
to know how much tin sheet is required = 2(diagonal)2 = 2d2
for making a box, we use formula (ii)
(vi) For two cubes
2. To find how much a box contains or how (a) Ratio of volumes = (ratio of sides)3
much space a box shall occupy, we use
(b) Ratio of surface areas = (ratio of sides)2
formula
(c) (Ratio of surface areas)3 = (ratio of
(i) to find the length of the longest pole to
volumes)2
be placed of in a room, we use formula (iii)
Example - 21
3. The rise or fall of liquid level in a
container The diagonal of a cube is 8 3 cm. Find
its total surface area and volume.
Total volume of objects submerged or taken out
= Solution :
Cross-sectional area of container
We have,
Example - 9
The area of side of a box is 120 sq cm. Diagonal of cube = 3 (edge)
The area of the other side of the box is 27 Diagonal of cube
 Edge of cube =
sq. cm. If the area of the upper surface 3
of the box is 60 sq cm, then find the 8 3
volume of the box. = = 8 cm.
3

ANCE 154
 Mensuration

Total suface area = 6(edge)2 = 6(8)2 When curved surface areas are equal
= 384 sq cm. (a) Ratio of radii = Inverse ratio of heights
Volume of cube = (edge)3 = (8)3 = 512 cm3. (b) Ratio of volumes = Inverse ratio of heights
(c) Ratio of volume = Ratio of radii
Right Circular Cylinder r
(v) For a cylinder
If r is the radius of base
h (a) Ratio of radii = (Ratio of curved surfaces)
and h is the height of the
× (Inverse ratio heights)
cylinder, then
(b) Ratio of heights = (Ratio of curved
(i) Volume of cylinder surfaces) × (Inverse ratio of radii)
= Area of the base × height (c) Ratio of curved surfaces = (Ratio of
=  r2 × h =  r2 h cubic units radii) × (Ratio of heights)
(ii) Area of the curved surface (vi) If the ratio of heights and the ratio of
= Circumference of the base × height radii of two right circular cylinders are
= 2  r × h = 2  rh sq units given, then Ratio of curved surface
areas = (ratio of radii) (ratio of
(iii) Area of the total surface
heights)
= Area of the curved surface
(vii) If the ratio of heights and the ratio of
+ Area of the two circular ends curved surface areas of two right
= 2  rh + 2  r2 circular cylinders are given, then
= 2  r (h + r) sq units Ratio of radii = (ratio of curved
(iv) For two cylinders surface areas) (Inverse ratio of
When radii are equal heights)
(a) Ratio of volumes = Ratio of heights (viii) If the ratio of radii and the ratio of
(b) Ratio of volumes = Ratio of curved curved surface areas of two right
circular cylinders are given, then
surface areas
Ratio of heights = (ratio of curved
(c) Radii of curved surface areas = Ratio of surface areas) (Inverse ratio of radii)
heights
Example - 22
When heights are equal
A rectangular piece of paper is 71 cm
(a) Ratio of volumes = (Ratio of radii)2 long and 10 cm wide. A cylinder is
(b) Ratio of volumes = (Ratio of curved formed by rolling the paper along its
surface areas)2 breadth. Find the volume of the cylinder.
(c) Ratio of curved surface areas = Ratio of  355 
 Take   113 
radii  
When volumes are equal Solution :
(a) Ratio of radii Circumference of the paper = Breadth of
the paper
= Inverse ratio of heights
 2r = 10
(b) Ratio of curved surface areas
10 10  113 113
= Inverse ratio of radii  r= = = cm.
2 2  355 71
(c) Ratio of curved surface areas
As the length of the paper becomes the
= Ratio of heights height of the cylinder.

ANCE 155
 Mensuration

 Volume of the cylinder (c) When heights are equal then Ratio of volumes
= r 
2 = (ratio of radii)2
355 113 113 (d) When curved surface areas are equal then
= × × × 71 = 565 cm3
113 71 71 Ratio of radii = Inverse ratio of slant
Example - 23 heights.
The radii of two right circular cylinders are (v) If the ratio of volumes and the ratio of
in the rato of 3 : 4 and their curved heights of two right circular cones (or
surface areas are in the ratio of 5 : 6. cylinders) are given, then = Ratio of radii
Find the ratio of their heights. = (ratio of volumes) (inverse ratio of heights)
Solution :
= (3 : 2) (8 : 3) = 4 :1 = 2 : 1
Ratio of heights = (ratio of curved surface
areas) (inverse ratio of radii) (vi) If the ratio of heights and the ratio of
diameters (or radii) of two right circular
1 1
= (5 : 6)  :  cones (or cylinders) are given, then
3 4
= (5 : 6) (4 : 3) = 10 : 9 Ratio of volumes
= (ratio of radii)2 × (ratio of heights)
Right Circular Cone (vii) If the ratio of radii (or diameter) and the
ratio of volumes of two right circular cones
If r = radius of base,
are given, then
h= height
l Ratio of heights = (inverse ratio of radii)2
l = slant height h
(ratio of volumes)
= h 2  r 2 , then r Example - 24
1 Two right circular cones of equal curved
(i) Volume of cone = × area of the surface areas have their slant heights in the
3
1 ratio of 3 : 5. Find the ratio of their radii.
base × height = ×  r2 h cubic units
3 Solution :
(ii) Area of curved surface =  r l Ratio of radii = inverse of slant heights
1 1
=  r h 2  r 2 sq. units = : = 5 : 3
3 5
(iii) Total surface area of cone Example - 25
= Area of the base + area of the The volumes of two cones are in the ratio
curved surface of 1 : 4 and their diameters are in the
=  r2 +  r l =  r (r + l) sq units ratio of 4 : 5. Find the ratio of their
(iv) For two cones : heights.
(a) When volumes are equal then Ratio of radii Solution
= Inverse ratio of heights Ratio of heights

(b) When radii are equal then Ratio of volumes = (inverse ratio of diameters)2 ×
= Ratio of heights (ratio of volumes)

ANCE 156
 Mensuration

1 1
2
 Area of the curved surface
=  :  (1 : 4)
 4 5 =  (R + r) 
= (5 : 4)2 (1 : 4)
22
25 1 = (4 + 2) 40
= × = 25 : 64. 7
16 4
= 18.8 × 6.3
Frustum of a Right Circular Cone
= 118.4 m
If R = Radius of the base of frustum
Total surface area
r = radius of the top of the frustum
=  [(R2 + r2) +  (R + r)]
h = height of the frustum
l = slant height of the frustum, 22
= [(42 + 22 ) + 40 (4 + 2)]
7
22
l = (20 + 6 40
h 7
= 181.6 sq m)
r
Volume of the frustum
h
R = (R2 + r2 + Rr)
3
then
22 6
(a) Slant height = h 2  (R  r) 2 units = × (42 + 22 + 4 × 2 )
7 3
(b) Area of the curved surface 44
=  (R + r) l sq. units = (20 + 4 + 8) = 176 m3.
7
(c) Total surface area of the frustum
Sphere
=  [(R2 + r2) + l (R + r)] sq units
(d) Volume of the frustum If r = radius of the sphere, then
h 4 3
= (R2 + r2 + Rr) cu. units (i) Volume of sphere =  r sq. units
3 3
Example - 26 (ii) Surface area = 4  r2 sq. units
A reservoir is in the shape of a frustum of a
(iii) Volume of hemisphere
right circular cone. It is 8m across at the
top and 4m across the bottom. It is 6m 2
=  r 2 cubic units
deep. Find the area of its curved surface, 3
total surface area and also its volume.
Solution :
Here, R = 4, r = 2 and h = 6 P

 Slant height () (iv) Area of curved surface

= 2  r2sq. units of hemisphere
= h 2  (R – r) 2
(v) Total surface area of hemisphere
= (6) 2  (4 – 2) 2
= 3  r2 sq. units
= 40 . (vi) For two spheres

ANCE 157
 Mensuration

(a) (Ratio of radii)2 = Ratio of surface areas Number of vertices = 2n

(b) (Ratio of radii)3 = Ratio of volumes and Number of faces = n + 2
(c) (Ratio of surface areas)3 = (Ratio of Volume of the prism = area of base × height
volumes)2 Lateral surface area = perimeter of base × height
Example - 27
Total surface area = 2 × Base area + L.S.A.
Diameter of a sphere is 28 cm. Find its
surface area and volume. (Where L.S.A. = Lateral surface area)
Solution : Example - 29
28 Find the volume and the total surface area
Radius of the sphere (r) = = 14 cm of a triangular prism whose height is 30m
2
22 and the sides of whose base are 21m,
Surface area = 4r2 = 4 × × 14 × 14 20m and 13m, respectively.
7
= 2464 sq cm. Solution :
4 Perimeter of base = 21 + 20 + 13 = 54m
Volume of sphere = r3
3 height = 30 m
4 22 Area of base
= × × 14 × 14 × 14
3 7
= 11498.6 cm3. = s(s – a) (s – b) (s  c)
Example - 28
= 27(27 – 21) (27 – 20) (27 –13)
The radii of two spheres are in the ratio
of 2 : 45. Find the ratio of their volumes. = 27  6  7  14 = 126 sq. m.
Solution :
Ratio of volumes = (Ratio of radii)3  Volume of the prims
= (2 : 5)3 = 8 : 125. = area of base × height
In a prism with a base of n sides, = 126 × 54 = 6804 m3.
Number of vertices = 2n Also, surface area of the prism
and Number of faces = n + 2. = 2 × Base area + lateral
Volume of the prism surface area
= area of base × height
= 2 Base area + perimet er
Lateral surface area of base × height
= perimeter of base × height
= 2 × 126 + 54 × 30
Total surface area
= 1872 sq. m.
= 2 × Base area + Lateral
Surface area. Pyramid
Prism & Pyramid 1
Volume = × base area × height
Prism 3
1
A solid having top and bottom faces Lateral surface area = × perimeter of
identical and side faces rectangular is a 2
the base × slant height
prism. In a prism with a base of n sides

ANCE 158
 Mensuration

Solids inscribed / Circumscribing

other Solids
 If a largest possible sphere is
circumscribed by a cube of edge ‘a’ cm,
a
then the radius of the sphere = .
Total surface area = lateral surface area 2
+ base area  If a largest possible cube is inscribed in
a sphere of a radius ‘a’ cm, then the edge
2a
of the cube = .
3
 If a largest possible sphere is inscribed in
a cylinder of radius ‘a’cm and height ‘h’
cm, then
a for h  a

Radius of the sphere =  h for a  h
 2
 If a largest possible sphere is inscribed in
a cone of radius ‘a’ cm and slant height
Example - 30 equal to the diameter of the base, then
If the base of the right rectangular prism a
remains constant and the measures of the radius of the sphere = .
3
lateral edges are halved, then its volume
will be reduced by.  If a largest possible cone is inscribed in
Solution : a cylinder of radius ‘a’ cm and height ‘h’
Volume of prism = base area × height cm, then radius of the cone = a and height
Since base area is constant and height is =h
being halved therefore volume will also be
 If a largest possible cube is inscribed in
halved. Hence, its volume will be reduced
by 50%. a hemisphere of radius ‘a’ cm, then the
2
Example - 31 edge of the cube = a
3
The volume of pyramid of base area  Some Useful Short-Cut Methods :
25cm2 and height 12cm is :
 If all three measuring dimensions of a
Solution : sphere, cuboid, cube, cylinder or cone are
1 increased or decreased by x%, y% and
Volume of pyramid = × base area × height z% respectively, then the volume of the
3
figure will increase or decrease by
1
= × 25 × 12  xy  yz  zx xyz 
3 x  y  z  %
 100 100 
= 100 cm2

ANCE 159
 Mensuration

For cuboid, the t hree measuring Example - 32

dimensions are length, breadth and height.
Find the length of the diagonal of largest
For cube, all three measuring dimensions
are equal, i.e., x = y = z possible cube inscribed in a hemiphere of
For sphere also, (or diameter) all three radius 4 2 cm.
measuring dimensions are equal and is
given by radius i.e., x = y = z = r. Solution :
For cylinder or a cone two measuring 2 2
dimensions are equal to radius and third Edge of the cube = a =4 2 ×
3 3
measuring dimension is height
i.e., x = y = r and z = h  Diagonal of the cube = 3 (edge)
 If the two measuring dimensions which 8
are included in the surface area of a = 3 × = 8 cm.
sphere, cuboid, cube, cylinder or cone are 3
increased or decreased by x% and y%, Example - 33
then the surface area of the figure will The diameter of a sphere is increased by
increase or decrease by
20%. What is percentage increase in its
 xy 
x  y  % volume ?
 100 
Solution :
 If a sphere of radius R is melted to form
smaller spheres each of radius r, then Percentage increase in volume
The number of smaller spheres  3x 2 x3 
3 =  3x   2
%
Volume of the bigger sphere R  100 (100) 
= =  
Volume of the smaller sphere  r  [Here, x = y = z]
 If by melting n spheres, each of radius r,
a big sphere is made, then  3(20) 2 (20)3 
3
= 3  20  100  (100) 2  %
Radius of the big sphere = r. n  
 If a cylinder is melted to form smaller = (60 + 12 + 0.8)% = 72.8%
spheres each of radius r, then Example - 34
The number of small spheres
A solid cone of copper of height 3 cm is
Volume of cylinder melted and a solid sphere of radius 3cm
=
Volume of sphere is made. What is the diameter of the base
 If a sphere of radius r is melted and a of the cone ?
cone of height h is made, then
Solution :
r3
Radius of the cone = 2 × Radius of the base of the cone
h
OR
r3 33
If a cone of height h is melted and a = 2 × = 2× = 6.
sphere of radius r is made, then h 3

r3  Diameter of the base of the cone

Radius of the cone = 2 ×
h = 2 × 6 = 12 cm

ANCE 160
 Mensuration

1. A circular park has sum of its area and (a) 20% (b) 24%
perimeter equal to 8. The diagonal of the (c) 36% (d) 44%
park equals : 6. The area of a rhombus is 2016 cm2 and
(a) 4 (b) 8 its side is 65 cm. The lengths of the
(c) 2 (d)  diagonals (in cm) respectively are :
2. In the given figure AE : EB = 3 : 2, AF (a) 125, 35 (b) 126,32
: FC = 1 : 5 and BD : DC = 4 : 3. (c) 132, 26 (d) 135, 25
Find the ratio of areas of the quadrilateral 7. A person wishes to make a 100 m2
EFCD and the triangle ABC. rectangular garden. Since he has only 30
A m barbed wire for fencing, he fences only
three sides letting the house wall act as the
F
fourth side. The width of the garden is :
E (a) 10 m (b) 5 m
(c) 50 m (d) 100 m
8. A wire is looped in the form of a circle
B D C
of radius 28 cm. It is re-bent into a
23 37 47 39 square form. Determine the length of the
(a) (b) (c) (d) side of the square.
70 68 70 65
3. Find the area of the unshaded region given (a) 44 cm (b) 45 cm
that the unknown side of the triangle is the (c) 46 cm (d) 48 cm
diameter of the given circle ( = 3.14) 9. What is the radius of the largest circular
disc that can be cut from a strip of metal
15” × 21” ?
(a) 7” (b) 7.5”
(c) 15” (d) 15.5”
16 10. A wheel makes 1000 revolutions in
12 covering a distance of 88 km. The
diameter of the wheel is :
(a) 410 square units (b) 400 square units (a) 24 m (b) 40 m
(c) 218 square units (d) 200 square units (c) 28 m (d) 14 m
4. Around a circular garden a circular road 11. The perimeter of a square whose arc is
is to be repaired which costs Rs. 22,176 equal to that of a circle with perimeter
at the rate of Rs. 1 per m2. If the inner 2x is :
radius is 112 m, find the width of the (a) 2x (b) x
circular road.
(c) 4  (d) 4  x
(a) 18 m (b) 28 m
(c) 14 m (d) None of these 3x
12. The length of a rectangle is +1 and its
5. If the length and width of a rectangular 4
garden plot were each increased by 20 2x
breadth is  1 . The perimeter of this
percent, then what would be the percent 3
increase in the area of the plot ? rectangle is :

ANCE 161
 Mensuration

3x 4 x 4 x 3x 19. There are 4 horizontal lines H1 to H4

(a)  2 (b)  2
2 3 2 3 parallel to each other and 4 vertical lines
3x 4 x V1 to V4 parallel to the each other. The
(c)  (d) None of these spacing between any 2 successive lines is
2 3
1 cm. The sum of the area of all
13. There is an acute - angled triangle, the
parallelogram that can be formed using
lengths of whose sides, expressed in
these lines is :
integers, form an A.P., and whose
(a) 28 cm2 (b) 36 cm2
perimeter is 15. Find its area :
(c) 50 cm2 (d) 100 cm2
15 7 20. A square whose sides are each 10 cm
(a) (b) 15
4 and a right triangle with sides of 20, 21
(c) 5 27 (d) 24 and 29 cm overlap, so that the vertex of
14. From a circular sheet of paper with a the right angle of the triangle is at the
radius 20 cm, four circles of radius 5 cm center of the square. What is the area of
each are cut out. What is the ratio of the the overlap ?
uncut to the cut portion ? (a) 100 cm2 (b) 50 cm2
2
(c) 25 cm (d) 200 cm2
(a) 1 : 3 (b) 4 : 1
(c) 3 : 1 (d) 4 : 3 21. If the area of a triangle with base x is
equal to the area of a square with side x,
15. One side of a right angled triangle is twice
then the altitude of the triangle is :
the other, and the hypotenuse is 10 cm.
The area of the triangle in square x
(a) (b) x (c) 2x (d) 3x
centimetres is : 2
100 22. The perimeter of an isosceles triangle is
(a) 40 (b) 50 (c) (d) 20 5
3 306 m and each of the equal side is of
16. The perimeter of a rectangular field is 480 8
m and the ratio between the length and the base. Find the area :
the breadth 5 : 3. The area is : (a) 3648 cm (b) 3468 sq. m
(a) 15500 m2 (b) 13500 m2 (c) 3846 cm (d) None of these
(c) 1550 m 2
(d) 1350 m2 23. A cow is tied by a rope at the corner of
17. A circular grassy plot of land, 42 m in a rectangular field. If the length of the
diameter, has a path 3.5 m wide running rope is 14 m, the area of the field which
around it on the outside. The cost of the cow could graze is :
gravelling the path at Rs. 4 per square (a) 77 sq m (b) 308 sq m
metre is : (c) 23 sq m (d) 154 sq m
(a) Rs. 1002 (b) Rs. 3002 24. The area of a sector of a circle of radius
(c) Rs. 2002 (d) Rs. 1802 5 cm. formed by an arc of length 3.5
18. There is a regular polygon of 12 sides. cms, is:
Find the sum of interior angles and the (a) 35 cm2 (b) 17.5 cm2
value of each interior angle. (c) 8.75 cm2 (d) 55 cm2
5 8 25. If the circumference of a circle to the
(a) 10,  (b) 12,  perimeter of a square. What is the ratio of
6 9
5 the area of the circle to the area of the
(c) 6,  (d) Data inadequate square ?
6

ANCE 162
 Mensuration

(a) 22 : 7 (b) 14 : 11 33. From a circular paper a man makes two

(c) 11 : 7 (d) 4 : 1 conical caps. The surface area of the two
4 are in the ratio 2 : 1. He then covers the
26. The length of a rectangular hall is of its face of the caps with other circular pieces
3
width. If the area of the hall is 300 m2. of paper. The ratio of the area of these
What is the difference between the length pieces is :
and breadth ? (a) 1 : 2 (b) 4 : 1
(a) 15 m (b) 20 m (c) 3 m (d) 5 m (c) 1 : 1 (d) 2 : 1
27. If the radius of a circle is reduced by 34. The volume of a rectangular cylinder with
40%, its circumference is reduced by : circular base which is full of oil is 88 r
(a) 60% (b) 40% (c) 35% (d) 45% cm3. If the radius of the cylinder is r cm,
28. ABCD is a trapezium in which AB || CD then t he height in terms of r is
and AB = 2CD. If its diagonals intersect approximately equal to :
each other at O, the ratio of area of the
triangle AOB and COD is : (a) 2 7 / r (b) 20 2r
(a) 1: 2 (b) 2 : 1 (c) 2 7 r (d) 28/r
(c) 1 : 4 (d) 4 : 1 35. What is the radius of a largest sphere that
29. The sides of a triangle are in the ratio can be kept inside a cuboid with square
1 1 1 base, of height 7 cm and volume 126 cm?
: : . If the perimeter of the triangle
2 3 4 3 2
is 52 cm, the length of the smallest side (a) cm (b) cm
is : 2 3
(a) 24 cm (b) 18 cm (c) 3 2 cm (d) 3 3 cm
(c) 12 cm (d) 9 cm
36. A large cube is formed from the material
30. The perimeter of a square is 48 cm. The
area of rectangle is 4 cm2 less than the area obtained by melting three smaller cubes of
of the square. If the length of the rectangle 3, 4 and 5 cm side. What is the ratio of
is 14 cm, then its perimeter is : the total surface areas of the smaller cubes
(a) 24 cm (b) 48 cm and the large cube ?
(c) 50 cm (d) 54 cm (a) 2 : 1 (b) 3 : 2
31. The perimeter of a rhombus is 40 cm. If (c) 25 : 18 (d) 27 : 20
the length of one of its diagonals be 12 37. How many bricks, each measuring 24 cm
cm, the length of the other diagonal is : × 11.5 cm × 8 cm, will be needed to
(a) 14 cm (b) 15 cm construct a wall 8 m long, 6 m high and
(c) 16 cm (d) 12 cm 23 cm wide, while 5% of the total will
32. In a right circular cone of vertical angle of contains mortar ?
60º and height of 6 cm, a sphere of (a) 5000 (b) 5250
maximum volume is inserted. If the radius (c) 4750 (d) 4250
of this sphere is 2.33 cm, find the volume
38. How many metres of cloth 2.5 m wide will
of the cone.
be needed to make a conical tent with
(a) 18 
base radius 7 m and height 24 m ?
(b) 15 
(a) 120 m (b) 180 m
(c) 24 
(d) Cannot be determined (c) 220 cm (d) 550 cm

ANCE 163
 Mensuration

39. The length of the longest rod that can be 2 3 3

placed in a room which is 12 m long, 9 (a) 2 (b) (c) (d)
  
m broad and 8 m high is : 47. The volumes of two cylinders are as a :
(a) 27 m (b) 19 m b and their heights are as c : d. Find the
(c) 17 m (d) 13 m ratio of their diameters :
40. The sum of length, breadth and height of ad ad 2
a room is 19 m. The length of the (a) (b)
bc ac2
diagonal is 11 m. The cost of painting the
total surface area of the room at the rate ad a c
(c) (d) 
of Rs 10 per square metre is : bc b d
(a) Rs. 240 (b) Rs. 2400 48. The diameter of hollow cone is equal to
(c) Rs. 420 (d) Rs. 4200 the diameter of a spherical ball. If the ball
is placed at the base of the cone,
41. Five equal cubes, each of side 5 cm, are
what portion of the ball will be outside the
placed adjacent to each other. The volume
cone ?
of the new solid formed will be :
(a) 50% (b) less than 50%
(a) 15525 cm3 (b) 625 cm3
(c) more than 50% (d) 100%
(c) 125 cm3 (d) None of these
49. A tank 30 m long 20 m wide and 12 m
42. The area of four walls of a room is 120 deep is dug in a field 500 m long and 30
square metre. The length is twice the m wide. By how much will the level of
breadth. If the height of the room is 4 m, the field rise if the earth dug out of the
find the area of the floor. tank is evenly spread over the field ?
(a) 48 m2 (b) 49 m2 (a) 0.33 m (b) 0.5 m
(c) 50 m2 (d) 52 m2 (c) 0.25 m (d) 0.4 m
43. A cone, a hemisphere and a cylinder have 50. A cylindrical vessel of radius 4 cm
equal bases and same heights. Their contains water. A solid sphere of radius 3
cm is lowered into the water until it is
volumes will be in the ratio :
completely immersed. The water level in
(a) 1 : 2 : 3 (b) 3 : 4 : 1 the vessel will rise by :
(c) 3 : 2 : 1 (d) None of these 9 9
44. The curved surface of a right circular (a) cm (b) cm
2 4
cone of height 15 cm and base diameter 4 2
16 cm is : (c) cm (d) cm
9 9
(a) 120  cm2 (b) 60  cm2 51. A solid cylinder and a solid cone have
(c) 136  cm2 (d) 68  cm2 equal base and equal height. If the radius
45. If the weight of a spherical shell is 7/8th and the height be in the ratio of 4 : 3, the
ratio of the total surface area of the
of what it would be if it were a solid
cylinder to that of the cone is in the ratio
shell. The ratio of inner to outer radii of
of :
the shell is : (a) 10 : 9 (b) 11 : 9
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 3 (c) 12 : 9 (d) 14 : 9
(c) 2 : 3 (d) 3 :4 52. The area of the four walls of a room is
46. The radius of the biggest ball that can fit 120 m2. The length is twice its breadth.
inside a 5 cm tall cylinder with a volume If the height of the room is 4 m, then the
of 45 cm3 is : area of the floor is :

ANCE 164
 Mensuration

(a) 30 m2 (b) 50 m2 (a) 16000 cm3 (b) 1600 cm3

(c) 40 m2 (d) 60 m2 16000 5 3
53. The length of a room is double the (c) cm3 (d) cm
3 4
breadth. The cost of colouring the selling 60. The base of a right prism is an equilateral
at Rs. 25 per square metre is Rs. 5000 triangle of edge 12 m. If the volume of
and the cost of painting the four walls at
Rs. 240 per square metre is Rs. 64800. the prism is 288 3 m3, then its height is
Find the height of the room : (a) 6 m (b) 8 m
(a) 4.5 m (b) 4 m (c) 10 m (d) 12 m
(c) 3.5 m (d) 5 m 61. The area of the base of a right equilateral
54. The length, breadth and height of a
triangular prism is 16 3 cm2. If the height
cubical block of wood are decreased by
25%, 40% and 50% respectively. What of the prism is 12 cm, then the lateral
is the ratio of the volume of new block surface area and the total surface area of
formed to the older block ? the prism respectively are
(a) 9 : 35 (b) 6 : 34 (a) 288 cm2, (288 + 32 3 ) cm2
(c) 5 : 28 (d) 9 : 40
(b) 388 cm2, (388 + 32 3 ) cm2
55. A metallic cylindrical pipe has inner radius
3 cm, outer radius 4 cm and length 6 cm. (c) 288 cm2, (288 + 24 3 ) cm2
Find the volume of the metal.
(a) 132 cm3 (b) 142 cm3 (d) 388 cm2, (388 + 24 3 ) cm2
(c) 120 cm3 (d) 264 cm3 62. The base of a right prism is a square of
56. The diagonal of a cubical box is 300 perimeter 20 cm and its height is 30 cm.
cm. Find the surface area. What is the volume of the prism?
(a) 600 3 cm2 (b) 600 cm2 (a) 700 cm3 (b) 750 cm3
(c) 1200 cm2 (d) 900 3 cm2 (c) 800 cm3 (d) 850 cm3
57. Find the smallest side of a prism of 63. The volume of a right prism, whose base
volume 3,600 units. If its edges are in the is an equilateral triangle, is 1500 3 cm3
ratio 5:12:13 :15. and the height of the prism is 125 cm.
(a) 10 (b) 24 Find the side of the base of the prism.
(c) 7.5 (d) None of these (a) 8 3 cm (b) 4 3 cm
58. The volumes of two similar pyramids are (c) 16 3 cm (d) 24 3 cm
in the ratio 8 : 27. What is the ratio of 64. Each of height and side of the base of a
their surface areas ?
regular hexagonal pyramid is equal to
(a) 4 : 9 (b) 2 : 3 x cm. Find its lateral surface area in terms
(c) 8 : 27 (d) 4 : 7 of x (in cm2).
59. The base of a right pyramid is an
9 7 2 7 7 2
equilateral triangle of perimeter 8 dm and (a) x (b) x
2 2
the height of the pyramid is 30 3 cm. 5 7 2 3 7 2
(c) x (d) x
Find the volume of the pyramid. 2 2

ANCE 165
 Mensuration

65. A prism has a square base of side 9 cm. (a) 1312.5 cu.cm, 1140 sq.cm
Find the total surface area of the prism if (b) 1260 cu.cm, 1008 sq.cm
its height is 24 cm. (in sq.cm).
(c) 4500 cu.cm, 1440 sq.cm
(a) 614 (b) 512
(d) 2520 cu.cm, 633 sq.cm
(c) 1024 (d) 1026
69. Find the total surface area of an isosceles
66. A prism has a square base of side 15 cm.
Find the total surface area of the prism if triangular prism whose equal sides of the
its height is 12 cm. (in sq.cm) base are 15 cm and the unequal side is
(a) 1620 (b) 2700 18 cm, and the height of the prism is 12
(c) 1170 (d) 945 cm (in sq.cm).
67. A prism has its base in the shape of a (a) 846 (b) 828
trapezium with the lengths of the parallel
(c) 792 (d) 882
sides as 5 cm and 9 cm the perpendicular
70. Find the total surface area of an isosceles
distance between the parallel sides as 10
cm. What is the volume of the prism (in trapezium prism of height 12 cm, the
cu.cm) if the height of the prism is 6 cm? lengths of the parallel sides of the base
(a) 420 (b) 840 being 6 cm and 14 cm respectively and
(c) 1350 (d) 2700 the perpendicular distance between the
68. Find the volume and total surface area of parallel sides being 3 cm. (in sq.cm)
a right angled triangular prism whose base
(a) 600 (b) 390
is of dimensions 7 cm, 24 cm and 25 cm
(c) 420 (d) 480
and height 15 cm.

Q.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. b c d b b b b a b c
Q.No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. d c a c d b c a d c
Q.No. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans. c b d c b d b d c b
Q.No. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. c c b d a c c d c b
Q.No. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Ans. b c a c a c c c b b
Q.No. 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
Ans. d b a d a b a a c b
Q.No. 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70
Ans. a b b d d c a b c c

ANCE 166
 Co-ordinate Geometry

Consider two lines, one vertical and the Q(x2 .y2)

(0,y2)
other horizontal in a plane. Let the horizontal y2 – y1
line be named as x-axis and the vertical line (x1,y1) P
(0,y1)
be named as y-axis. We take the point of x2 – x1 R
intersection of the axes as origin (O). O (x1,0) (x2,0)

xy > 0 represent I and III quadrants Example - 1

xy < 0, represent II and IV quadrants The distance between two points (0, 0) and
(x, 3) is 5. Find x.
5
B(–3, 4) 4 Quadrant 1 Solution :
Quadrant 2 3 x > 0, y > 0 By using distance formula, we have the
x < 0, y > 0 A (1,2)
2 distance between (0, 0) and (x, 3) is
1
(x – 0) 2  (3 – 0) 2
O
–5 –4 –3 –2 –1 –1 1 2 3 4 5
It is given that (x – 0) 2  (3 – 0) 2 = 5 or
Quadrant 3 –2
Quadrant 4
x < 0, y < 0 –3 x > 0, y < 0 x 2  32 = 5
C(–5, –3) –4
D(3, –5) Squaring both sides, x2 + 9 = 25 or x2 = 16
–5
or x = ±4
Hence, x = +4 or x = –4
Any point P in the plane that is formed by
Example - 2
the x-axis and y-axis can be located by
Find a if the distance between the points
using an ordered pair of real numbers. If
P (11, –2) and Q (a, 1) is 5 units
(x, y) is the ordered pair representing as
Solution :
point P, then x, the distance of the point
from y-axis is called the x-coordinate of P Given, PQ = 5
and y, the distance of the point from x-axis  (a – 1) 2  (1 – (–2)) 2 = 5
is called the y-coordinate of P. The x- Taking square on both sides, we get
coordinate of a point is also known as (a – 11)2 = 25 – 9 = 16
abscissa, while the y-coordinate is also
a – 11 = 16
known as ordinate.
a – 11 = ± 4
 Distance Formula : a = 15 or 7
The distance between two points P (x1, y1)
and Q (x2, y2) is given by  Applications of distance formula :
1. Collinearity of three points :
PQ  ( x 2  x1 ) 2  ( y 2  y1 ) 2 i.e.,
Let A, B and C be three given points. The
PQ distances AB, BC and CA can be calculated
= (Diff. of abscissas) 2  (Diff . of ordinates) 2 using distance formula. If the sum of any
two of these distance is found to be equal
The distance of a point P(x1, y1) from the to the third distance, then the points A, B
origin is given by OP = x12  y12 and C will be collinear.

ANCE 167
 Co-ordinate Geometry

Note :  The required circumcentre of ABC is

1. If AB + BC = AC, then the points A, B (11, 2).
and C are collinear.
Circumradius = SA = (11 – 1) 2  (2 – 2) 2
A B C = 10 units.
2. IF AC + CB = AB, then the points A, C Example - 4
and B are collinear. Find the area of the circle whose centre is
B (–3, 2) and (2, 5) is a point on the circle.
A C
Solution :
3. BA + AC = BC, then the points B, A and Let the centre of the circle be A (–3, 2)
C are collinear.
and the point of circumference be B(2, 5)
B A C Radius of the circle =
By Note (1), (2) and (3), we can find the AB = (2  3) 2  (5 – 2) 2 = 25  9
position of points in collinearity.
r= 34 units.
Example - 3
The vertices of a ABC are A (1, 2),  The area of circle = r2.
B (3, –4) and C(5, –6). Find its B(2, 5)
circumcenter and circumradius.
Solution : A(–3, 2)
Let S (x, y) be the circumcenter of ABC
 SA2 = SB2 = SC2
= ( 34 )2 = 34 sq. units.
Consider
SA2 = SB2
 (x–1)2 + (y–2)2 = (x–3)2 + (y + 4)2
The coordinates of a point P which divides
x2 – 2x + 1 + y2 – 4y + 4
the join of two points A(x1, y1) and
= x2 – 6x + 9 + y2 + 8y + 16 –2x – 4y
B (x2, y2) can be found using section
+1+4
formulae. The division is said to be a case
= –6x + 9 + 8y + 16
of internal division if the point P lies on the
4x – 12y – 20 = 0 line segment AB and a case of external
A (1,2) division if the point P lies on the extension
of the line segment AB.
The coordinates of a point P(x, y) dividing
the join of the points A(x1, y1) and
S (x,y) B (x2, y2).
(i) Internally in the ratio m : n is given by
B (3,-4) C (5,-6)  mx 2  nx1 my 2  ny1 
(x, y) =  , 
SB2 = SC2  mn mn 
 (x–3)2 + (y + 4)2 = (x–5)2 + (y + 6)2 (ii) Externally in the ratio m : n is given by
x – y = 9 .........................(2)
 mx 2  nx1 my 2  ny1 
Solving (1) and (2), we have (x, y) =  , 
x = 11 and y = 2  mn mn 

ANCE 168
 Co-ordinate Geometry

Note : x6
 We can write, 2 = and
1. The coordinates of any point P lying on the 2
line segment joining (x1, y1) and (x2, y2) y5
3=
which divides the line segment in the ratio 2
K : 1 are of form : or 4 = x + 6 or 6 = y + 5
 Kx  x1 Ky 2  y1  or x = –2 or y=1
P(x, y) =  2 ,   A(–2, 1) be the co-ordinates of the
 K 1 K 1 
Point of intersection divides the line segment other end point.
in the ratio 1 : 2 or 2 : 1
2. In case of the point P (x, y) being the mid
A(x1, y1), B(x2, y2) and C(x3, y3) are vertices
point of the line segment joining (x1, y1)
of any triangles ABC, then
and (x2, y2) the value of K : 1 = 1 : 1 and
1. Centroid
hence the coordinates of the mid point P
The centroid is the point of intersection of
 x1  y1 y1  y 2 
are P(x, y) =  ,  the medians (Line joining the mid point of
 2 2 
sides and opposite vertices) Centroid
Example :
divides the median in the ratio of 2 : 1
Find the co-ordinates of a point which
Co-ordinates of centroid G
divides the line segment joining each of the
following points in the given ratio :  x1  x 2  x 3 y1  y 2  y3 
 , 
(a) (2, 3) and (7, 8) in the ratio 2 : 3  3 3 
A
internally (b) (–1, 4) and (0, –3) in the ratio
1 : 4 internally.
Solution : F 2 E
G
(a) Let A (2, 3) and B (7, 8) be the given 1
B C
points. D
Let P (x, y) divide AB in the ratio 2 : 3 2. Incentre :
internally. The incentre is the point of intersection of
Using section formula, we have, internal bisector of the angle. Also it is
2  7  3 2 20 centre of circle touching all the sides of a
x= = = 4 and
23 5 triangle.
2  8  3 3 25 Co-ordinates of incentre I
y= = =5
23 5  ax1  bx 2  cx 3 ay1  by 2  cy 3 
 , 
Example :  a bc a bc 
The co-ordinates of the mid-point of a line A
segment are (2, 3). If co-ordinates of one
of the end points of the line segment are F 1 E
(6, 5), find the co-ordinates of the other
end point. 1
Solution : B C
D
Let the other end point be A(x, y) Where a, b, c are the sides of triangle
It is given that C (2, 3) is the mid point ABC

ANCE 169
 Co-ordinate Geometry

(i) Angle bisector divides the opposite (ii) Ortho centre, centroid and circumcentre
sides in the ratio of remaining sides are always collinear and centroid
BD AB c divides the line joining orthocentre and
Ex. = = circumcentre in the ratio 2 : 1.
DC AC b
(ii) Incentre divides the angle between A (x1, y1)
in the ratio (b + c) : a, (c + a ) : b and
(a + b) : c D o
3. Excentre :
Point of intersection of one internal angle
bisector and other two external angle (x2, y2) B E C (x3, y3)
bisector is called as excentre. There are (iii) In an isosceles triangle centroid,
three excentre in a triangle. orthocentre, incentre, circumcentre
Co-ordinate of each can be obtained by lies on the same line.
changing the sign of a, b, c respectively in Example - 5
the formula of Incentre. Find the coordinates of (i) centroid
4. Circumcentre : (ii) in-centre of the triangle whose vertices
are (0, 6), (8, 12) and (8, 0).
It is the point of intersection of perpendicular
Solution :
bisectors of the sides of a triangle.
(i) We know that the coordinates of the
It is also the centre of a circle passing centroid of a triangle whose angular points
vertices of the triangle. are (x1,y1), (x2,y2), (x3,y3) are
If O is the circumcentre of any triangle
 x 1  x 2  x 3 y1  y 2  y 3 
ABC, then OA2, OB2, OC2  , .
 3 3 
So the coordinates of the centroid of
a triangle whose vertices are (0, 6) (8, 12)
 0  8  8 6  12  0 
and (8, 0) are  ,  or
 3 3 
 16 
 ,6 .
 3 
(ii) Let A (0, 6), B (8, 12) and C (8, 0) be the
vertices of triangle ABC.
If a triangle is right angle, then its
circumcent re is t he mid point of Then c = AB = (0  8) 2  (6  12) 2 = 10,
hypotenuse.
b = CA = (0  8) 2  (6  0) 2  10
5. Orthocentre :
It is the point of intersect ion of And a = BC (8  8) 2  (12  0) 2  12,
perpendicular drawn from vertices on The coordinates of the in-centre are
opposite sides (called altitudes) of a
 ax1  bx 2  cx 3 ay1  by 2  cy 3 
triangle and can be obtained by solving  , 
the equation of any two altitudes.  abc abc 
or
If a triangle is right angles triangle, then
ortho centre is the point where right angle  12  0 10 810 8 12  6 1012 10 0
 , 
is formed.  12 10 10 12 10 10 
(i) If t he t riangle is equilat eral, t he
 160 192 
cent roid, incentre, ort hocentre, or  ,  or (5,6).
circumcentre, coincides. 32 32 

ANCE 170
 Co-ordinate Geometry

The value of tan is called as the slope of

the line and is denoted by m. Hence, the
A straight line is a curve such that every
slope of a line L joining the points
point on the line segment joining any two
points on it lies on it .
P(x1, y1) and Q(x2, y2) is given by :
(a) Slope (Gradient) of a Line : y 2  y1 Diff. in ordinates
The trigonometrical tangent of the angle that m = tan  = x  x =
2 1 Diff. in abcissa
a line makes with the positive direction of
the x-axis in anticlockwise sense is called Lines sloping upward towards the right
the slope or gradient of the line. have positive slopes.
Note : (i) The slope of a vertical line, i.e.,
a line parallel to y-axis is , as
 = 90º
(ii) The slope of a horizontal line i.e.,
a line parallel to x-axis is 0, as
 = 0º
The angle () between two lines L1 and L2
with slope as m1 and m2 respectively can
The slope of a line is generally denoted by be computed using
m. Thus, m = tan  .
m 2  m1
Since a line parallel to x-axis makes an tan  = 1  m m
1 2
angle of 0o with x-axis, therefore its slope
is tan 0o = 0. A line parallel to y-axis i.e., Points A, B and C are collinear if mAB = mBC
perpendicular to x-axis makes an angle of If the lines are parallel,  = 0 i.e. m1 = m2
 If the lines are perpendicular,  = 90º i.e.,
90o with x-axis, so its slope is tan  .
2 m1m2 = –1
Also the slope of a line with the positive
(c) Condition of Parallelism of Lines :
direction of x-axis in anticlockwise sense
It two lines a1x + b1y + c1 = 0 and a2x + b2y
always lies between 0o and 180o.
+ c2 = 0 of slopes m1 and m2 are parallel
(b) Slope of the line in term of then the angle  between them is of 0o.
co-ordinates of any two points
 tan  = tan 0o = 0 
The angle () which a line makes with the
m2  m1
positive direction of x-axis in anticlockwise  0  m 2  m1
1  m1 m2
sense is called as the inclination of the
Thus when two lines are parallel, their slopes
line.
y are equal.
a1 b1 c1
  
Q(x2, y2) a 2 b 2 c2
Rise=y2–y1
(d) Condition of Perpendicularity of Two
Lines :
P(x1, y1 )  It two lines a1x + b1y + c1 = 0 and
Run=x2–x1
a2x + b2y + c2 = 0 of slopes m1 and m2 are

O
x perpendicular, then the angle  between
them is of 90o.

ANCE 171
 Co-ordinate Geometry

Example - 8
1  m1 m 2
 cot  = 0  = 0 If A (2, 1), B (2, 3) and C (2, 4) are
m 2  m1
 m1m2 = 1 three points find the angle between BA and
BC.
Thus when two lines are perpendicular, the
product of their slopes is 1, If m is the Solution :
slope of a line, then the slope of a line Let m1 and m2 be the slope of BA and BC
perpendicular to it is (1/m). respectively. Then,
a1 a 31 2 1 4  3 7
    2  1  a1a2 + b1b2 = 0. m1 =   and m = 
b1 b2 2  ( 2 ) 4 2 2
2  2 4
Example - 6 Let  be the angle between BA and BC.
A line passing through the points (a, 2a) Then,
and (2, 3) is perpendicular to the line 7 1
4x + 3y + 5 = 0, find the value of ‘a’. 
m2  m1 4 2
Solution : tan   
1  m1m 2 1  7  1
Let m1 be slope of the line joining A (a, 2a)
4 2
2a  3
and B (2, 3). Then m1 = . 2 2
a2      tan 1   .
Let m2 be slope of the line 4x + 3y + 5 = 0. 3 3
4
Then, m2 =  .  Equation of a Line :
3 A mathematical formula which is applicable
Since the two lines are perpendicular, then
to every point on the line is referred to as
m1, m2 = 1.
the equation of a line, For instance, each
2a  3 4 18 point on the x-axis has its y-coordinate as
    1 8a  12  3a  6  a 
a2 3 5 zero, hence the equation of x-axis is given
by y = 0.
Example - 7
What is the slope of a line whose inclination  Equation of a line in general form :
with the positive direction of X-axis is : An equation of the form, ax + by + c = 0
(where |a| + |b|  0 i.e., a and b are not
(i) 0o (ii) 90o (iii) 120o (iv) 150o
simultaneously equal to zero), which is
Solution : satisfied by every point on a line and not
(i) Here  = 0o by any point outside the line, is called the
Slope = tan  = tan 0o = 0. equation of a line.
[line is parallel to x-axis]
 Equations of some standard lines :
(ii) Here  = 90o
1. Equation of X-axis :
Slope = tan  = tan 90o =  .
We know that the y-coordinate of every
 The slope of line is not defined . point on X-axis is zero so, if P(x, y) is any
[line is parallel to y-axis] point on X-axis, then y = 0.
(iii) Here  = 120o Hence, the equation of X-axis is y = 0.
 Slope = tan  = tan 120o
= tan (180o  60o) =  tan 60o =  3
2. Equation of Y-axis :
(iv) Here  = 150o We know that the x-coordinate of every
 Slope = tan  = tan 150o point on Y-axis is zero. So, if P(x, y) is
1 any point on Y-axis, then x = 0, hence, the
= tan (180o  30o) =  tan 30o = 
3 equation of Y-axis is x = 0.

ANCE 172
 Co-ordinate Geometry

3. Equation of a line parallel of X-axis :

Let L be line parallel to x-axis and at a
distance of k units away from x-axis.
Then, the Y-coordinate of every point on
the line L in k.
Y

L
k
O
X  Some Standard Forms of the Equation
of a Line :
(1) The equation of the x-axis is y = 0 and that
So, if P(x, y) is any point on the line L, then of y-axis is x = 0
y = k. (2) The equation of a line parallel to x-axis is
Hence, the equation of a line parallel to of the form y = b and that of a line parallel
X-axis at a distance of k units from it is to y-axis is of the form x = a(a and b are
y=k some constants)
Note : For the lines lying below X-axis, k (3) Point Slope Form : The equation of a non-
is taken as negative. vertical line of slope m and passing through
the point (x1, y1) is :
4. Equation of a line parallel to Y-axis : (y – y1) = m (x – x1)
Let L1 be a line parallel to Y-axis and at a (4) Two-point Form : The equation of a non-
distance of k units away from it. vertical line passing through P(x1, y1) and
Then the x-coordinate of every point on Q(x2,y2) is :
the line L1 is k.
 y 2  y1 
So, it P(x, y) is any point on the line L1, (y – y1) =  x  x  (x – x1)
and x = k  2 1
1
The area of triangle formed by the line
Y L ax + by + c = 0, with coordinate axes is
k
1 c2

2 | ab |
X (5) General Form :
O
The equation of a line L is said to be in
general form when it is writt en
Hence, the equation of a line parallel to as ax + by + c = 0, where a, b and c are
Y-axis and at a distance of k units from it is real numbers with either a  0 or b  0
x=k (6) Intercept Form : The equation of Line L
Note : For the lines lying towards the left x y
side of y-axis, k is taken as negative. in intercept form is written as   1
y a b
5. Perpendicular/Normal form :
x cos  + y sin  = p (where p > 0, (0, b)

0    2  ) is the equation of the straight

y-intercept

L
line where the length of the perpendicular
from the origin O on the line is p and this
perpendicular makes an angle  with (a,0) x
O
positive x-axis. x-intercept

ANCE 173
 Co-ordinate Geometry

(7) Slope intercept Form : The equation of a  The Two-Point Form of a Line:
line with slope m and y-intercept b is :
y = mx + b
 Some More Results :
1. The equation of a line parallel to a
line ax + by + c = 0 is given by
ax + by + k = 0, the value of the constant The equation of a line passing through two
k can be found by the conditions provided points
in the problem. (x1, y1) and (x2, y2) is yy1
2. The equation of a line perpendicular  y2  y1 
to a line ax + by +c = 0 is given by =  x  x  (x  x1).
 2 1
bx – ay + k = 0, the value of the constant
k can be found by the conditions provided Example - 10
in the problem. Find x-intercept & y-intercept of the line
2x  3y + 5 = 0.
3. Distance (d) between two parallel lines
Solution :
ax + by + c1 = 0 and ax + by + c2 = 0 is
Here, a = 2, b = 3, c = 5
given by
c 5
c 2  c1 x-intercept =  =  and y-intercept
d= a 2
a 2  b2 5
4. The perpendicular distance (d) of a point = .
3
P(x1, y1) from a line ax + by + c = 0 is Example - 11
given by Find the equation of the line through the
ax1  by1  c point A(2,3) and making an angle of 45o
d= with the x-axis. Also determine the length
a 2  b2 of intercept on it between A and the line
Two lines a1x + b1y + c1 =0 and x + y + 1 = 0.
a2x + b2x + c2 = 0 are parallel if Solution :
a1/a2 = b1/b2 and perpendicular The equation of a line through A and making
if a1a2 + b1b2 = 0 an angle of 45o with the x-axis is
x2 y3 x2 y3
Example - 9  or 
o
cos 45 sin 45 o
1 1
Find the equation of a line passing through
2 2
(2, 3) and inclined at an angle of 135o
or x  y + 1 = 0
with the positive direction of x-axis.
Suppose this line meets the line
Solution : x + y + 1 = 0 at P such that AP = r.
Here, m = slope of the line = tan 135o Then the coordinates of P are given by
= tan (90o + 45o) =  cot 45o = 1, x2 y3
x1 = 2, y1 = 3. o
 r
cos 45 sin 45o
So, the equation of the line is yy1 = m(xx1)  x = 2 + r cos 45o, y = 3 + r sin 45o
i.e. y  () = 1 (x2) or y + 3 r r
= x + 2 or x + y + 1 = 0.  x=2+ =, y = 3 +
2 2

ANCE 174
 Co-ordinate Geometry

Thus, t he coordinat es of P are A (x1, y1)

 r r 
2  ,3  
 2 2
Since P lies on x + y + 1 = 0.
r r
so 2 + +3+ +1 = 0
2 2 (x2, y2) (x3, y3)
 2r =  6  r=3 2 1
i.e., = | (x1 – x2) (y2 – y3)
2
 length AP = r = 3 2 .
= (y1 – y2) (x2 – x3) |
Example - 12
Note :
Find the distance between the line (i) While computing the area of a triangle, the
12x  5y + 9 = 0 and the point (2, 1). absolute value need to be considered as
Solution : area cannot take a negative value.
The required distance (ii) The area of a triangle whose vertices are
(0,0), (x1, y1) and (x2, y2) is given by
12  2  5  1  9 24  5  9 28
= = = . 1
2
12  ( 5) 2
13 13   | x1 y 2  x 2 y1 |
2
(iii) Test for collinearity : If the area of triangle
formed by a set of three points of zero,
Given three distinct points on a plane then the points are collinear (lie on the
A(x1, y1), B(x2, y2) and C(x3, y3) there same line)
exist two possibilities. Example - 13
(i) AB + BC = CA or AC + CB = AB The area of a triangle is 5. Two of its
or AB + AC = BC. In this case we vertices are (2, 1) and (3, –2). The third
say that the points are lying on the vertex lies on y = x + 3. Find the third
vertex.
same straight line rather the points
Solution :
are collinear.
Let the third vertex be (x3, y3), area of
(ii) AB + BC > CA and AC + CB > AB and triangle
AB + AC > BC i.e., the sum of any two
1
lengths is greater than the third length. In = |[x1 (y2 – y3) + x2 (y3 – y1) +
this case we say that points are the vertices 2
x3(y1–y2)]|
of a triangle.
As x1 = 2, y1 = 1, x2 = 3, y2 = 2,
In the discussion to follow we list out some
Area of  = 5
standard results regarding triangles.
1
 Area of a Triangle :  5 = |2(–2 – y1) + 3(y3 – 1) +
2
The area of a triangle () whose vertices x3 (1 + 2)|
are A(x1, y1), B(x2,y2) and C(x3, y3) is 10 = |3x3 + y3 – 7 |  3x3 + y3 = ±19
1 x1  x 2 y1  y 2 Taking positive sign,
given by,  = 3x3 + y3 – 7 = 10  3x3 + y3 = 17
2 x 2  x 3 y 2  y3
...........(1)

ANCE 175
 Co-ordinate Geometry

Taking negative sign (a) (3, –6) (b) (–5, 12)

3x3 + y3 – 7 = –10  3x3 + y3 = –3 (c) (1, –4) (d) None
............(2) 7. The points on X-axis which are at a distance
Give that (x3, –y3) lies on y = x + 3 of 13 units from (–2,3) is ______
So, –x3 + y3 = 3 ............(3) (a) (0,0) (–2, –3) (b) (0, 0) (–4,0)
7 13 (c) (0,0) (2, 3) (d) None of these
Solving eq. (1) and (3), x3 = , y3 =
2 2 8. If A(4, 7), B(2, 5), C(1, 3) and D(–1, 1)
–3 are the four points, then the lines AC and
Solving eq. (2) and (3), x3 = , BD are ____
2
3 (a) perpendicular to each other
y3 = . (b) parallel to each other
2
(c) neither parallel nor perpendicular to each
 7 13 
So t he t hi rd v er t ex ar e  ,  or other
2 2  (d) None of these
 –3 3  9. If ABC is a right angled triangle in which
 , .
 2 2 A(3, 0) and B(0, 5) then the coordinates of
C can be :
(a) (5, 3) (b) (3, 5)
(c) (0, 0) (d) both (b) and (c)
1. If the distance between the points (a, 2)
and (3, 4) be 8, then a = 10. The point of intersection of X and Y axes
is called :
(a) 2 + 3 15 (b) 2 – 3 15 (a) origin (b) null point
(c) 2 + 3 15 (d) 3 + 2 15 (c) common point (d) None
2. If P(1, 2), Q(4, 6), R(5, 7) and S(a, b) 11. The point (–3,2) belongs to Quadrant
are the vertices of a parallelogram PQRS, __________
then : (a) Q1 (b) Q2 (c) Q3 (d) Q4
(a) a = 2, b = 4 (b) a = 3, b = 4 12. The point (–2, –3) belongs to Quadrant
(c) a = 2, b = 3 (d) a = 3, b = 5 ________
3. The three vertices of a parallelogram are (a) Q1 (b) Q2 (c) Q3 (d) Q4
A(–3, 4), B(–2, 1) and C(–6, 5). Which of 13. The point (3, 0) lies on
the following cannot be the fourth one : (a) +ve X-axis (b) +ve Y-axis
(a) (–1, 0) (b) (7, –8) (c) –ve X-axis (d) –ve Y-axis
(c) (1, –5) (d) All of these 14. The distance of the point (–2, –2) from the
4. The number of points on x-axis which are origin is :
at a distance c(c < 3) from the point (a) 8 units (b) 2 2 units
(2, 3) is :
(c) both a & b (d) 2 units
(a) 2 (b) 1
(c) Infinite (d) None of these 15. The points (1,–3), (13, 9),(10, 12)
and (–2,0) taken in order form the
5. The points (–5,12) (9, 10) and (6, 5) taken
vertices of ______
in order form (–2, –3)
(a) square (b) rectangle
(a) a square (b) a parallelogram
(c) rhombus (d) None
(c) a trapezium (d) a straight line
6. The mid points of the sides of a triangle are 16. The points (2, –1), (3,4), (–2, 3) and
(–1, 3), (–2, 4) and (2, –5). The vertex of (–3, –2) taken in the order from the vertices
the triangle opposite to (–1, 3) is : of ________

ANCE 176
 Co-ordinate Geometry

(a) square (b) rectangle 25. The coordinates of the points on X-axis which
(c) rhombus (d) None are equidistant from the points (–3, 4) and
17. The point on X-axis equidistant from (5,4) (2,5) are :
and (–2,3) is ______ (a) (20, 0) (b) (–23, 0)
(a) (3,0) (b) (2,0)
(c) (4,0) (d) None 4 
(c)  , 0  (d) None of these
5 
18. If (0,0) and (3, 3 ) are two vertices of
an equilateral triangle then the third 26. If A(5, 3), B(11, –5) and P(12, y) are the
vertex is ______ vertices of a right triangle right angled at P,
then y =
(a) (0, 2 3 ) or (3,  3 )
(a) –2, 4 (b) –2, 4
(b) (0,  2 3 ) or (3,  3 ) (c) 2, –4 (d) 2, 4
(c) (0, 2 3 ) or (3, 3 ) 27. The distance between the point (a cos ,
(d) (0, 2 3 ) or ( 3,  3 ) 0) and (0, a sin ) is :
19. The points (–5,6), (3,0) and (9,8) form the (a) a (b) |a| (c) |2a| (d) 2a
vertices of : 28. If the distance between the points (k, 2)
(a) equilateral triangle and (3, 4) is 8, then k =
(b) isosceles triangle (a) 2 (b) 3
(c) isosceles right angled triangle (c) (d) 3  60
60
(d) right angled triangle
20. One end of diameter of a circle is (2,3) and 29. If the distance between the points
the centre is (–2, 5). The coordinates of (a cos 48º, 0) and (0, a cos 12º) is d, then
the other end is ______ d2 – a2 =
(a) (–6,7) (b) (6, –7) a 2 ( 5  1) a 2 ( 5  1)
(c) (6, 7) (d) None (a) (b)
8 8
21. The distance between the points a ( 5  1) a ( 5  1)
(cos , sin ) and (sin , –cos ) is : (c) (d)
4 4
(a) 3 (b) 2 (c) 2 (d) 1 30. The distance between (p, –q), (q, –p) is :
22. If x is a positive integer such that the (a) 2 | p  q | (b) 2
distance between points P(x, 2) and (c) p – q (d) 2p
Q(3, –6) is 10 units, then x =
31. The mid-points of the line segment joining
(a) 3 (b) –3 (c) 9 (d) –9
the points (–2, 4) and (6, 10) is :
23. The distance between the points
(a) (2, 5) (b) (2, 7)
(a cos  + b sin , 0) and (0, a sin  – b
(c) (3, 7) (d) (3, 8)
cos ) is :
32. C is the mid-point of PQ, if P is (4, x), C is
(a) a2 + b2 (b) a + b
(y, –1) and Q is (–2, 4), then x and y
2 2
(c) a – b (d) a 2  b 2 respectively are :
24. The perimeter of the triangle formed by the (a) –6 and 1 (b) –6 and 2
points (0,0) (1,0) and (0, 1) is : (c) 6 and –1 (d) 6 and –2
(a) 1 2 (b) 2 1 33. Find the ratio in which the point (2, y) divides
the join of (–4, 3) and (6,3) and hence find
(c) 3 (d) 2  2 the value of y :

ANCE 177
 Co-ordinate Geometry

(a) 2 : 3, y= 3 (b) 3 : 2, y = 4 41. If A(2, 2), B(6, 3) and C(4, 11) are
(c) 3 : 2, y =3 (d) 3 : 2, y = 2 vertices of a triangle ABC and D, E are
34. The points of trisection of line joining the t he mid point s of BC and CA
points A(2, 1) and B(5, 3) are : respectively, then the length of DE is :
 5  7 2 17
(a)  3,  ,  4,  (a) 17 (b) (c) (d) 2
 3  3 17 2
42. Length of median from A to BC in
 3  3 ABC where A = (1, –1), B = (–1, 3),
(b)  3,  ,  4,  C = (5, 1) is :
 5  7
(a) 10 (b) 15 (c) 21 (d) 3 2
 5  7
(c)   3,  ,  4,   43. The centre of the circle passing through the
 3  3
points (4, 6), (0, 4) and (6, 2) is :
 5  3 (a) (2, 3) (b) (3, 3)
(d)  3,   ,  4,  (c) (3, –2) (d) (–3, 2)
 3  7
44. If the centroid of the triangle formed by the
35. The ratio in which the x-axis divides the points (a, 1), (b, c2), (–1, 4) lies on the
line segment joining the points (3, 6) and Y-axis, then :
(12, –3) is : (a) c2 + 1 = 0 (b) a – b = 2
(a) 2 : 1 (b) 1 : 2 (c) a + b = 1 (d) c2 + a = 0
(c) –2 : 1 (d) –1 : 2 45. If the centroid of the triangle formed by
36. Find the equation of a line which divides (p, q),(q, 1), (1, p) is the origin, then
the line segment joining the points (1,1) p3 + q3 + 1 =
and (2, 3) in the ratio 2 : 3 perpendicularly. (a) 3pq (b) 2pq (c) pq (d) 0
(a) 5x – 5y + 2 = 0 (b) 5x + 5y + 2 = 0 46. The orthocentre of the triangle with vertices
(c) x + 2y – 5 = 0 (d) x + 2y + 7 = 0 (0, 0), (1, 2), (2, 5) is :
37. The ratio by which P(4,6) divides the join (a) (24, 8) (b) (3, 2)
of A(–2,3) and B(6,7) is ______ (c) (6, 4) (d) (36, –12)
3 1 2 47. The circum centre of the triangle formed by
(a) (b) (c) (d) None the vertices (–2, 2), (2, –1) and (4, 0) is :
1 3 3
38. In what ratio is the segment joining 3 
(a)  , 5  (b) (2,3)
the points (4,6) and (–7,–1) divided by 4 
X-axis ? 3 5
(c) (5, 3) (d)  , 
(a) 1 : 6 (b) 6 : 2  2 2
(c) 2 : 6 (d) 6 : 1 48. If ‘O’ is the origin and A = (x1, y1) and
39. Two vertices of triangle are (–1,4) and (5,2) B = (x2, y2), then the circumradius of
and medians intersect at (0,–3). Then the OAB is :
third vertex is : OA.OB.AB 2OA.OB.AB
(a) (4, 15) (b) (–4, –15) (a) 2 | x y  x y | (b) | x y  x y |
1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1
(c) (–4, 15) (d) (4, –15)
OA.OB.AB
40. The ratio in which (4, 5) divides the join (c) | x y  x y | (d) None
1 2 2 1
of (2, 3) and (7, 8) is :
(a) –2 : 3 (b) –3 : 2 49. The incentre of the triangle with vertices
(c) 3 : 2 (d) 2 : 3 (0, 0), (1, 0), (0, 1) is :

ANCE 178
 Co-ordinate Geometry

1 1 57. Find the equation of a line which divides

(a)  ,  the line segment joining the ponts (1, –2)
2 2
and (3, –1) in t he rat io 3 : 1
 2 2 2 2 
perpendicularly.
(b)  2 , 2 
  (a) x – 2y – 5 = 0
2 2 2 2  (b) 6x + 4y – 5 = 0
(c)  2 , 2  (c) 3x + 2y – 5 = 0
 
(d) None (d) 8x + 4y – 15 = 0
58. If ax + 4y + 3 = 0, bx + 5y + 3 = 0 and
50. The vertices of a triangle are (0, 0), ( 3 , 3)
cx + 6y + 3 = 0 are concurrent lines,
and ( 3, 3) then the incentre is : then a + c =
(a) (2, 0) (b) (0, 2) (a) 3b (b) 2b (c) b (d) 4b
(c) (1, 1) (d) (1, 2) 59. The harmonic conjugate of (–9, 27)
51. If centroid and orthocentre of a triangle are with respect to the points (1, 7) and
(1, 2) and (9, –6) then circumcentre is : (6, –3) is :
(a) (7, 8) (b) (3, 6) (a) (2, 2) (b) (3, 3)
(c) (6, 3) (d) (–3, 6) (c) (–3, 2) (d) (2, –3)
52. If (4, –8) and (–9, 7) are two vertices of 60. The equation of the locus of the point
a triangle whose centroid is (1, 4), then the whose distance from the X-axis is twice
area of the triangle is (in square units) that of from the Y-axis is :
(a) 166.5 (b) 167.5 (a) y2 = 4x2 (b) 4x = y
(c) 168.5 (d) 169.5 (c) 2y2 = 4 (d) None
53. In a right angled triangle, the mid point of 61. The locus of a point whose distance from
hypotenuse is : the Y-axis is half, its distance from the
(a) circumcentre (b) incentre origin is :
(c) orthocentre (d) centroid (a) 2x2 – y2 = 0 (b) 2x2 – 3y = 0
2 2
(c) x – 3y = 0 (d) 3x2 – y2 = 0
54. The value of  such that the straight line
62. The number of points in the locus of
2x + 3y + 4 +  (6x – y + 12) = 0 is
x2 + y2 = 0 is :
parallel to Y-axis is :
(a) 0 (b) 1
(a) 2 (b) 3 (c) 4 (d) 5
(c) 2 (d) infinite
55. The line Y – x + K = 0 divides the line
63. P, Q, R are three collinear points. The
segment joining the points (3, –1) and (8, 9) coordinates of P nand R are (3,4) and
in the ratio 2 : 3. Then K is equal to : (11, 10) respectively, and PQ is equal to
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 4 2.5 units. Coordinates of Q are:
56. The equation of the line parallel to (a) (5, 11/2) (b) (11, 5/2)
3x – 2y + 7 = 0 and making an intercept (c) (5, –11/2) (d) (–5, 11/2)
– 4 on X-axis is : 64. For which value of k given below the
(a) 3x – 2y + 12 = 0 point A(–1, 4), B(2, 5) and C(3, k) are
(b) 3x – 2y – 12 = 0 collinear :
(c) 3x + 2y – 12 = 0 (a) 16/3 (b) 16
(d) 3x + 2y + 12 = 0 (c) 5 (d) –1

ANCE 179
 Co-ordinate Geometry

65. The three vertices of a triangle are given 68. The area of a Quadrilateral with Vertices
as (0, 1), (0, –5) and (4, –) ‘–’ denotes at (2, –1) (4, 3) (–1,2) (3, –2) is :
an integer which has been erased. Which (a) 18 (b) 36
of the following can be the area of the (c) 58 (d) None of these
triangle (in sq. units) 69. Find the area of the triangle formed by the
(a) 12 line 5x – 3y + 15 = 0 with coordinate
(b) 14 axes.
(a) 15 cm2
(c) 16
(b) 5 cm2
(d) Cannot be determined
(c) 8 cm2
66. The coordinates of the circumcentre of the
15 2
triangle having vertices (–2, –3), (–1, 0) (d) cm
and (7, –6) are : 2
70. Find the value of k if the area of triangle
(a) (–3, 3) formed by (1,k), (4, –3) and (–9, 7) is 15
(b) (3,3) sq. units.
(c) (3, –3) 21
(d) (–3, –3) (a) or –3
13
67. The midpoints of the sides of a triangle 21
(b)  or 3
are (6, 1) (3, 5) (–1, –2). The Area of the 13
triangle is : 21
(c) or 3
37 37 13
(a) sq units (b) sq units
2 8 21
(c) 74 sq. units (d) None of these (d)  or –3
13

Q.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. d c d d b c b b d a
Q.No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. b c a c b c b a c a
Q.No. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans. b c d d d c b d b a
Q.No. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. b a c a a c a d b d
Q.No. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Ans. c a b c a d d a c b
Q.No. 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
Ans. d a d b b a d b b a
Q.No. 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70
Ans. d b a a a c c a d a

ANCE 180
 Geometry

Introduction  Collinear Points : All points which lie

The word ‘geometry’ originally came from on the same line are said to be Colinear
the Greek word ‘geo’ meaning ‘earth’ Points.
and ‘metron’ meaning ‘measurement’.
Therefore, the word geometry means  Intersecting Lines : Two lines l and m
‘measurement of earth’ or it the science
are called intersecting lines if they have a
of properties and relations of figures.
common poiunt P. The common point
Shapes and geometrical figures and their
measurement have become an essential point P is called the point of intersection.
part of our day-to-day routine. m l
The scope of plane geometry, as a branch
of mathematics, has broadened the study
about plane figures-line, angles, triangles, P
quadrilaterals etc.

Plane
The basic idea of a plane is that is a flat  Parallel lines : Two lines in a plane are
surface which extends indefinitely in all
parallel if they do not intersect each other
directions.
however far they are produced in either
direction.
Surface
m
l
A sheet of paper

Points
It is a location in space, on a surface, or
in a cordinate system. A point has no
dimensions and defined only by its
position.

Line Ray Line segment

(i) A line AB is a represent by A ray AB is represent as A line segment AB is represented by
A B
A B A B
(ii) A line has no end point A ray has one end point A line segment has two end points.
(iii) A line does not have a A ray does not have a definite A line segment has a definite length.
definite length. length.
(iv) We can simply represent a We can simply represent a ray A line segment of a given length can
line i.e. a line can not be drawn i.e. a ray can not be drawn on a be drawn on a paper.
on a paper paper

ANCE 181
 Geometry

Concurrent Lines 9. Vertically opposite angles : If two

straight line AB and CD intersect at a
Three or more lines in a plane are said to point, 1 and 3 and 2 and 4 are
be concurrent if they all pass through the vertically opposite angles.
same point. The point O is called the
A D
point of concurrency.
2
n 1 3
m O
4
C B
O l
Transversal
The line which intersect two parallel line
is called transversal.
 Angle : It is the spatial relationship
between two straight lines. 2 1
P 3 4
vertex
side 6
O angle 5
side 7 8
R

Various Types of Angles Interior angles : In the diagram 3,

1. Acute angle : It is an angle which is less 4,5 and 6 are interior angles.
than 90° i.e., less then /2 radians.
Exterior angles : 1,2 ,7 and 8
2. Right angle : It is an angle which is equal are exterior angles.
to 90° i.e., equal to radians.
Corresponding angles : 1 and 5;
3. Obtuse angle : It is an angle which is 4 and 8; 2 and 6; 3 and 7 are
more than 90° but less than 180°. pairs of corresponding angles.
Pairs of corresponding angles are equal.
4. Straight angle : It is an angle which is
equal to 180° i.e., equal to radians. 1 = 5; 4 = 8; 2 = 6;
3 = 7
5. Reflex angle : It is an angle which is
greater then 180° but less than 360°. Alternate angles : 3 and 5; 4 and
6 are pairs of alternate angles.
6. Complementary angles : Two angles
Pairs of alternate angles are equal.
are said to be complementary if their sum
is 90°. 3 = 5; 4 = 6 (alternate
interior angles)
7. Supplementary angles : Two angles are
1 = 7; 2 = 8 (alternate
said to be supplementary if their sum is
180°. exterior angles)
Sum of consecutive interior angles in the
8. Adjacent angles : These are the angles same side of transversal is 180°
which have one arm is common and non
3 + 6 = 180°
common arms are on the opposite side
of the common arm. 4 + 5 = 180°

ANCE 182
 Geometry
The ratio of intersects made by three Number Name of the Sum of
parallel lines on a transversal is equal to of sides Polygon interior angles
3 Triangles 180 º
ratio of corresponding intercept made by (3 ­ 2) × 180º
same parallel lines to other transversal. = 180º
s t

A l
P
4 Quadrilaterals 2 × 180º
m (4 – 2) × 180 º
B Q
= 360 º
n
C R
5 5 sided 3 × 180º
s and t are transveral intersecting three Polygons (5 – 2) × 180 º
parallel lines, l, m and n at A, B, C and = 540 º
AB PQ
P, Q, R respectively.  
BC QR 6 6 sided 4 × 180º
Polygons (6 – 2) × 180 º
Recognising and Naming Polygons = 720 º

A polygon is a closed figure n a plane

that has three or more straight lines as its …..n n – gon (n ­2) × 180º
sides.
Nam e of F ig u res Note : The sum of interior angles of a polygon
Number of

Number of

Number of
diagonals

p o ly g o n
vertices
sides

of n equal sides is (2n – 4) right angles.

Each interior angle of a regular polygon
3 T rian g le 3 0
of n equal sides is equal to [(2n – 4) ×
90]  n degrees.
The sum of exterior angles of a polygon
4 Q u ad rilateral 4 2 of n sides = 4 right angles.
Each exterior angle of regular polygon
of n sides is equal to 360/n degrees.
5 P en tag o n 5 5

6 H ex a g o n 6 9 A simple close figure bonded by three

line segments is called a triangle.
7 H ep tag o n 7 14
A

8 O ctag o n 8 20
C
B

9 N o n ag o n 9 27
 Parts of a Triangle :
A triangle has six parts or elements,
namely;
10 D eca g o n 10 35

(i) Three sides : AB, BC and CA.

ANCE 183
 Geometry
(ii) Three angles : BAC, ABC and
Properties of Triangles
BCA , writt en for t he sake of
convenience as A, B and C 1. Sum of three sides of a triangles of a
respectively denoting the interior angles triangle is 180.
of the triangle. 2. Sum of lengths of any two sides of a
triangle is greater than the third side.
3. The difference of lengths of any two sides
of a triagle is less than the third side.
4. The exterior angle of a triangle of a
triangle is Sum of the opposite two
interior angles.
5. The side opposite to the greater angle of
a triangle is greater.
6. The side opposite to the smaller angle of
a triangle is smaller.

Similarity of Triangles
1. An gle - An gle - An gle ( AAA)
Similarity : Two triangles are similar if
the coprresponding angles are equal.
2. Side - Side - Side (SSS) Similarity :
Two t riangles are similar if the
coprresponding sides are propotional.
Name of triangles Geometric properties 3. Side - Angle - Side (SAS) Similarity :
Acute angled traingle All interior angels are If one angle of a triangle is equal to one
acute angles (less than
90°). angle of the other and the sides includ-
p
q
p, q and r are less than ing this equal angle are proportional, then
r
90°.
the triangles are similar.

Median of a Triangle
Obtuse angled triangle One of the interior angles
is an obtuse angle The line segment joining a vertex of a
(greater than 180°).
p
triangle to the mid point of the opposite
q r
side is called a median of the triangle.
AD, BE and CF are medians
(i) Intersecting point of the medians of a
Right angled triangle triangle is called the centroid.O is certroid.
One of the interior angle
is a right angle. (ii) Centroid divide the median in the ratio
p (equal to 90°) 2 : 1. OA : OD = 2 : 1
q r
(iii) Median bisects the opposite side.
BD = CD

ANCE 184
 Geometry
A D C

F 2 E

0 A B
1 Thus, ABCD is a trapezium.
B D C
 Parallelogram :
Quadrilateral
A quadrilateral is a parallelogram if and
A closed figure with four sides is called only if a pair of its opposite sides is
quadrilateral. parallel and of equal length.
Quadrilateral ABCD has :
D C Properties of Parallelogram
Opposite sides of a parallelogram are
equal.
Opposite angles of a parallelogram are
A equal.
B Diagonals of a parallelogram bisect each
(i) Four sides : AB, BC, CD and DA. other.
(ii) Four vertices : A, B, C and D. Adjacent angles of a prallelogram are
(iii) Four angles : A, B, C and D supplimentary.
(iv) Two diagonals : AC and BD. D C

Properties of Quadrilateral A
quadrilateral is convex, if for any side of O
the quadrilateral, the lines containing it has
the remaining vertices on the same side A B
of it. ABCD is parallelogram, then
The sum of the angles of a quadrilateral (i) AB || DC, AD||BC
is 360°. (ii) AB = CD, AD = BC
If the sides of a quadrilateral are (iii) OA = OC, OB = OD
produced, in order, the sum of the four
exterior angles so formed is 360°.  Rhombus :
A parallelogram is a rhombus if and only
Types of Quadrilateral if its diagonals are perpendicular and
bisect each other.
 Trapezium :
A quadrilateral in which one pair of Properties of Rhombus
opposite sides are parallel is called All the sides of a rhombus are equal.
trapezium.
ABCD is rhombus
In quadrilateral (ABCD), AB||DC  AB = BC = CD = AD

ANCE 185
 Geometry
D The diagonals of a square are of equal
length.
The diagonals of a square bisect each
2 other at right angle.
1
A C D C
3 4

B
O
OA = OC
OB = OD A B
1 = 2 = 3 = 4 = 90° ABCD is a square
Diagonals AC = BD
 Rectangle : Diagonals AC and BD bisect each other
A parallelogram is a rectangle if and only at 90°.
if is diagonals have equal length. Reactangle, Rhombus and Square : At a glance
D C
Properties of Rectangle Parallelogram

All the angles of a rectangle are right A B

angles.
D C D C
Diagonals of a rectangle are equal and
Rectangle Rhombus
bisect each other.
A B A B
ABCD is a rectangle  Ð1 = Ð2 = Ð3 A = B = C = D = 90° AB = BC = CD = DA
= Ð4 = 90°
D C
AB = CD and AB || DC Square
AB = BC = CD = DA
A = B = C = D = 90°
AD = BC and AD || BC A B
D C
4 3
A circle is a simple closed curve, all the
points of which are at the same distance
1 2 from a given fixed point. They remain
constant.
A B
Diagonals AC and BD bisect each other. For example : Wheels, the sun, the moon,
one-rupee coin,
 Square :
A parallelogram is a square if and only if P
its digonals are equal and perpendicular
Radius

and bisect each other.

Properties of Square O B
A
Diameter
All the ratio of sides of a square are equal Ch
ord
Each of the angles is a right angle in
square. R

ANCE 186
 Geometry
 Centre : The fixed point in the plane (iii) Angle in the minor segment is Obtuse.
which is equidistant from every point on (iv) Angle in the major segment is Acute.
the boundary of the circle is called centre.
In the adjoining figure. O is the centre of  Secant of a circle : The line which
the circle. intersects the circle at two points is
known as Secant of a circle.
 Radius : The fixed distance between the
centre and any point of the circle is called  Tangent of a circle : The line which
radius. In figure OP is radius. intersects the circle at one point is known
as Tangent of a circle.
 Chord : A line segment joining any two
points on a circle is called a chord of the  Common Tangents to Two Circles : A
circle. In figure. AR is a chord. line which touches two given circles is
called a common tangents to the circles.
 Diameter : A chord that passes through
the centre of a circle is called diameter
 Concentric Circles : Circles with one
common center are known as concentric
of the circle. In figure, AB is a diameter..
circles.
The length of a diameter = 2 × radius. In
a circle, diameter is the longest chord.  Congruent Circles : Circles of same
radii are called congruent circles.
 Circumference : The distance around a
circle is called the circumference.  Concyclic Points : Points are said to
Circumference of a circle is the perimeter be concylic, if these lie on one circle.
of that circle.
 Cyclic Quadrilateral : It is a
 Arc : A part of a circumference is called quadrilateral whose all the four vertices
and arc. In the above figure, the curve lie on a circle.
line AR is an arc of the circle. It is written
as AR.  Congruent Arcs : Two acrs of a circle
are congruent if and only if the angles
 Sector of a circle : It is the area of the subtended by them at the center are
circle enclosed by two radii OA and OB equal. Also if the arcs are congruent, then
and by an arc AB of the circle. In the their corresponding chords are equal and
diagram, sector is the indicated portion. vice-versa.

 Incircle and Incentre : The circle which

O
touches all the sides of a triangle is called
Sector
A B the incircle of the triangle. Incentre is the
point of concurrence of three angles
 Segments of Circle : A chord divides
bisectors of the triangle.
the circle into two parts. Each part is a
segment of the circle.  Circumcircle and Circumcentre : The
(i) Smaller region is known as minor circle which passes through all the
segment. vertices of a triangle is called the
(ii) Larger region is known as major circumcircle of the triangle and its centre
segment. is called the circumcentre of the triangle.

ANCE 187
 Geometry
Circumcentre is the point of concurrence C
of right bisectors of three sides of the M
triangle. D
O
 Centroid : It is the point common to all
B
the medians of a triangle and it divides an L
median in the ratio 2 : 1. Centroid is also A
called the Centre of Gravity of the
triangle. 5. Equal chords of a circle subtend equal
angles at the centre.
 Orthocentre : It is t he point of
Chords of a circle which subtend equal
concurrence of three altitudes i.e.,
angles at the centre are equal.
perpendiculars from vertices to their
opposite sides of a triangle.
D
Properties of a Circle
C
1. One and only circle can passes through
three non-collinear ponts. O
A
2. In a circle perpendicular drawn from the
centre to a chord bisects the chord. B

3. In a circle; if a line joining mid point of a

If AB = CD  AOB = COD
chord to the centre is perpendicular to
the chord. If AOB = COD  AB = CD
6. The angle subtended by an arc of a circle
at the centre is twice the angle subtended
by the arc at any other point on the
O remaining part of
the circle.
AOB = 2ACB
A M B C

If M is the mid point of

O
AB  OM  AB.
If OM  AB AM = AB. A

4. Equal chords of a circle are equidistant B

from the centre. X
Chords equidistant from the centre are 7. A quadrilateral is called cyclic if all the
equal in length. four vertices lie on a circle. And the four
If AB = CD  OL = OM vertices are called the concyclic points.
If OL = OM  AB = CD

ANCE 188
 Geometry
8. Sum of opposite internal angles of a cyclic 11. The tangent line of any point of a cirlce
quadrilateral is 180°. is perpendicular to the radius through the
ABCD is a cyclic quadrilateral point of contact.
 A + C = 180° and
           B + D = 180°.
D
C

12. The lengths of the two tangents from an

external point to a circle are equal.
A B
B
If in a quadrilateral sum of opposite O
angles is 180° then the quadrilateral is a
cyclic quadrilateral.
A
OA = OB
9. An angle in a semi-circle is a right angle.
Common Tangents to Circles
AB is the diameter.
C When two circles are drawn on the same
plane with radii r1 and r2, with their
centres d units apart, then we have the
following possibilities.
A O B 1. The two circles are concentric, then
d = 0. The points C1 and C2 coincide.

r2
 ACB is angle of semicircle.
 ACB = 90° r1
10. Angles in the same segment of a circle
are equal.
Arc AB subtends ACB and ADB is
the same segment 2. The two circles are such that one lies in
side the other, then | r1 – r2 | > d.
D C r2

C1 d C2 r1

A B
X
 ACB = ADB

ANCE 189
 Geometry
3. The two circles may touch each other In figure (i), we observe that both the
internally, then d = | r1– r2 | circles lie on the same side of PQ. In this
case, PQ is a direct common tangent and
in figure
C1 C2 Direct common tangent
d r1
P Q

r2
C1 C2
4. The two circles intersect at two points, in
which case, | r1– r2 | < d < r1 + r2 and d.
(ii), we notice that the two circles lie on
either side of PQ. Here PQ is a tranverse
r1 r2
common tangent.
C1 C2
d

P
Transverse common
tangent
5. The two circle may touch each other
externally, then d = r1 + r2

Q
r1 r2
C1 C2
1. The number of common tangents to the
circles one lying inside the other is zero.
6. The two circles do not meet each other,
then d > r1 + r2
d
C1

r1 r2
C1 C2 C2

2. The number of common tangents to two

Common tangent: circles touching internally is one.
If the same line is tangent to two circles
drawn on the same plane, then the line is
called a common tangent to the circles.
The distance between the point of C2
contacts is called the length of the
common tangent.
In the figure, PQ is a common tangent to
the circles, C1 and C2 . The length of PQ C1
is the length of the common tangent.

ANCE 190
 Geometry
3. The number of common tangents to two X
intersecting circles is two, i.e., two direct
common tangents.
P
C2 C1
C1 C2

Y
4. The number of common tangents to two
circles touching externally is three, i.e.,  C1 C2 is perpendicular to X Y
two direct tangents and one transverse Case (ii)
tangent. The given two circles with centres C 1
and C2 touch each other externally at P.
C 1 PC2 is the line joining the centres of
the circles and XY is the common tangent
to the two circles drawn at P.
C1 X
C2

P
C1 C2
5. The number of common tangents to non-
intersecting circles is four, i.e.2 direct
tangents and 2 transverse tangents

Y
 C 1 C 2 is perpendicular to XY..
C2
C1 2. The direct common tangents to two
circles of equal radii are parallel to each
other.
P Q

r r

C1 C2

Properties of Common Tangents

1. When two circles touch each other
R S
internally or externally, then the line joining
the centres is perpendicular to the tangent Let two circles of equal radii ‘r’ have
drawn at the point of contact of the two centres C 1 and C 2 and PQ and RS be
circles. the direct common tangents drawn to the
circles. Then PQ is parallel to RS.
Case (i)
Two circles with centres C1 and C2 touch  Pythagoras theorem :
each other internally at P. C1 C2 P is the In a right angled triangle, the square of
line drawn through the centres and XY is the hypotenuse is equal to the sum of
the common tangent drawn at P which is the squares of the other two sides.
common tangent to both the circles. To prove : AC2 = AB2 + BC2

ANCE 191
 Geometry
Construction : Draw BP perpendicular to Construction: Draw AE perpendicular
AC. to BC.
A
Case (i) If  ADB =  ADC = 90°
According to Pythagoras theorem,
P
In  ABD, AB2 = BD2 + AD2 .........(1)
In  ADC, AC2 = CD2 + AD2 ........(2)
B C
Adding (1) & (2), AB2 +AC2
Proof : In triangles APB and ABC,
= BD2 + CD2 + 2AD2 = 2BD2 + 2AD2
 APB =  ABC (right angles)
 A =  A (common) [CD  BD] or 2[CD 2  AD 2 ]
 Triangle APB is similar to triangle ABC. Case (ii) If  ADC is acute and  ADB
AP AB is obtuse.
 
AB AC In triangle ADB,
 AB2  (AP) (AC) AB2 = AD2 + BD2 + 2 × BD × DE
In triangle ADE,
Similarly, BC 2  (PC) (AC)
AC2 = AD2 + DC2 – 2 × CD × DE
AB2  BC 2  (AP) (AC)  (PC) (AC) But BD = CD
AB2  BC 2  (AC) (AP  PC)  AB2 + AC2 = 2AD2 + 2BD2 or
2 2
2 (AD + CD )
AB2  BC2  (AC) (AC)
Hence proved.
 AC 2  AB2  BC 2
 Basic proportionality theorem:
Hence proved.
The results in an obtuse triangle and an In a triangle, if a line is drawn parallel to
acute triangle are as follows: one side of a triangle, then it divides the
In  ABC,  ABC is obtuse and AD is other two sides in the same ratio.
A
drawn perpendicular to BC, then
A C 2 = AB2 + BC2 + 2BC . BD
 Appolonius theorem :
D E
In a triangle, the sum of the squares of
two sides of a triangle is equal to twice
the sum of the square of the median which
bisects the third side and the square of B C
half the third side. Given: in ABC, DE || BC
Given: n  ABC, AD is the median. AD AE
(i) RTP: 
RTP: AB2 + AC2 = 2 (AD2 + DC2) or DB EC
2 (AD2 + BD2) A
A
P F

D E

B C C
D E B

ANCE 192
 Geometry
Construction: Draw EP  AB amd BD AB
R.T.P: 
DF  AC . Join DC and BE . DC AC P
Proof:
1
 AD  PE A
Area of triangle ADE 2 AD
  x x
Area of triangle BDE 1  BD  PE BD
2
B D C
1
Area of triangle ADE 2  AE  DF AE Construction: Draw CP parallel to AD
and   to meet BA produced at P.
Area of triangleCDE 1  EC  DF EC
2 Proof :

But area so of triangles BDE and CDE DAC  ACP (alternate angles and AD || CP )
are equal. (Two triangles lying on the BAD  APC (corresponding angles)
same base and between the same parallel
But BAD  DAC (given)
lines are equal in area).
AD AE  ACP  APC
 
DB EC In triangle APC,
AC = AP (sides opposite to equal angles
NOTE : From the above result we can prove that
are equal)
AB AC AB AC
 and  . In triangle BCP,
AD AE BD CE
BD BA
 (by basic proportionality
 Converse of basic proportionality DC AP
theorem: theorem)
If a line divides two sides of a triangle in BD BA
the same ratio then that line is parallel to  
DC AC
the third side.
A Hence proved.
 Converse of vertical angle bisector
theorem:
D E If a line that passes through a vertex of a
triangle, divides the base in the ratio of
the other two sides, then it bisects the
B C angle. A
In the figure given,
AD AE
  DE | | BC.
DB EC
 Vertical angle bisector theorem: B D C
The bisector of the vertical angle of a In the adjacent figure, AD divides BC in
triangle divides the base in the ratio of
the other two sides. BD BD BA
the ratio and if  , then AD
Given: In  ABC, AD is the bisector DC DC AC
of A . is the bisector of A .

ANCE 193
 Geometry

 Alternate segment theorem: Formulae

If a line touches the circle at a point and
1. Area of a triangle = (1/2) × base × altitude.
if a chord is drawn from the point of
contact then the angles formed between 2. Area of an equilat eral triangle
the chord and the tangent are equal to
3 2 h2
the angles in the alternate segments.  a or . Where ‘a’ is length of the
P 2 3
base and ‘h’ is altitude.
C B
3. Area of a scalene triangle

O = s (s  a ) (s  b) (s  c) where

D
s  a  b  c where ‘a’, ‘b’ and ‘c’ are
2
sides of a triangle.
X A Y
4. Length of median from vertex ‘C’ of
Given:
2a 2  2b 2  c 2
XY is a tangent to the given circle with triangle ABC is
centre O at the point A, which lies in 2
between X and Y. AB is a chord. C and 5. Length of altitude from the vertex ‘C’ of
D are points on the circle either side of triangle ABC is
line AB. (a  b  c) (b  c  a ) (c  a  b) (a  b  c)
RTP: BAY  ACBand 2c
BAX  ADB. 6. Area of parallelogram = Base × height
Construction: 7. Perimeter of a rectangle = 2 (l + b), Area
Draw the diameter AOP and join PB. of rectangle = l × b.
Proof: 8. Perimeter of a square = 4 × side, Area of
ACB  APB (Angles in the same a square = side × side.
segment) 9. Perimeter of a Rhombus = 4 × side.
APB  90 (Angles in a semi-circle)
10. Area of Rhombus = (1/2) d1d2. Where d1
In the triangle ABP, and d2 are the diagonals.
APB  BAP  90 ..............(1)
h
PAY  90 (the radius makes a right 11. Area of a trapezium = ( a  b). ‘a’, ‘b’
angle with the tangent at the point of 2
are lengths of parallel sides.
tangency).
 BAP  BAY  90 ..........(2) 1
12. Area of a quadrilateral = (h1  h 2 ) d.
2
From the equations (1) and (2), Where d is the diagonals and h1, h2 are
APB  BAY t he perpendiculars drawn t o t he
 ACB  BAY.(APB  ACB) diagonal.
Similarly, it can be proved that 13. Area of circle = r2 where ‘r’ is the radius
BAX  ADB of the circle.

ANCE 194
 Geometry
14. Area of sector OAB = (1/2)/r where 21. Cone (r = radius of the base, l = slant
l = length of the arc, r = radius of the height, h = height of the cone)
circle. (i) lateral surface area = rl
AOB (ii) total surface area = rl + r2
  Area of the circle.
360 (iii) volume = (1/3) r2h
1 2 22. Cylinder (h = height of the cylinder,
 r  where  is sector angle. r = radius of the base of cylinder)
2
(i) Lateral surface area = 2rh
15. Circumference of a circle = 2r where ‘r’
is radius of the circle. (ii) Total surface area = 2rh + 2r2
(iii) volume = r2h
16. Length of direct common tangent
23. Sphere (‘r’ is the radius of the sphere)
 d 2  (R  r )2 (i) Lateral surface area = 4r2
17. Length of transverse common tangent (ii) Total surface area = 4r2
(iii) volume = (4/3)r3
 d 2  (R  r) 2
24. In triangle ABC, AB = c, BC = a, CA =b
(where ‘R’, ‘r’ are radii of different circles are sides of triangle then
‘d’ is distance between the circles.) a b c
(i) Sine rule :    2R.
18. A, B are centres of two circles, r1, r2 are sin A sin B sin c
(Where R is circum radius)
radii of two different circles.
(ii) Cosine rule a2 = b2+ c2 – 2bc cos A,.......
AB = Distance between the centres.
D.C = Direct common tangent 25. If ‘r’ is radius of incircle of the triangle ABC
and  is area of the triangle then  = rs
T.C = Transverse common tangent
Nature of circles Condition Number of Number of 26.  = (bc sinA)/2 = (ca sinB)/2 = (ab sinC)/2
D.C T.C
Externally touch Theorem Statements
AB = r1 + r2 2 1
each other 1. For any three points A, B, C the distance
Internally touch AB is not less than the difference of the
AB = |r1 + r2| 1 0
each other distances AC and BC.
Intersecting AB < r1 + r2 2 0
2. If transversal cuts the two parallel lines,
Non-intersecting AB > r1 + r2 2 2
then two
19. Cube. (i) corresponding angles are equal.
(i) lateral surface area = 4x2 (where ‘x’ is side (ii) alternate angles are equal.
of circle) (iii) the interior angles on the same side of the
(ii) total surface area = 6x2 transversal are together equal to two right
(iii) volume = x3 where ‘x’ is the side of a angles.
cube. 3. Any two sides of a triangle are together
greater than the third side.
20. Cuboid
4. The difference between any two sides of
(i) lateral surface area = 2(lh + bh) a triangle is less than the thrid side.
(ii) total surface area = 2(lh + bh + lb)
(iii) volume = lbh (where l, b, h are length, 5. If three sides of one triangle are
respectively equal to three sides of another
breadth and height of the circle)
triangle, then such triangles are congruent.

ANCE 195
 Geometry
6. If a side and two adjacent angles of one 19. The areas of two similar triangles are in
triangle are respectively equal to a side t he ratio of t he squares of t he
and two adjacent angles of another triangle, corresponding angle bisector segments.
then such triangles are congruent.
20. If two sides and a median bisecting one of
7. If two sides and the included angle of one these sides of a triangle are respectively
triangle are respectively equal to two sides proportional to the two sides and the
and the included angle of another triangle, corresponding median of another triangle,
then such triangles are congruent. then the triangles are similar.
8. The sum of any three angles in any triangle 21. If two triangles are equiangular, then the
is equal to 180°. ratio of the corresponding sides is the same
as the ratio of corresponding meadians.
9. An exterior angle is equal to the sum of
the non adjacent interior angles. 22. If two triangles are equiangular, then the
ratio of the corresponding sides is the same
10. If two sides of a triangle are unequal then as the ratio of corresponding angle bisector
the greater side has the greater angle segments.
opposite to it.
23. The internal bisector of an angle of a
11. If one angle of a triangle is greater than triangle divides the opposite side internally
other then the side opposite to the Greater in the ratio of the sides containing angle.
angle is greater than the side opposite to
the lesser angle. 24. The bisector of the exterior angle of A of
a triangle ABC intersects the side BC
12. Basic proportionality theorem (Thales AB BD
theorem) : In a triangle a line drawn produced in D then  .
parallel to one side, to intersect the AC CD
25. If a perpenducular is drawn from the
othersides in distinct points divides the two vertex containing the right angle of a right
sides in the same ration triangle to the hypotenuse, then the
13. Converse of basic proportionality triangles on each side of the perpendicular
theorem : If a line divides any two sides are similar to each other and to the original
of a triangle in the same ratio, the line must triangle and also the square of the
be parallel to the third side. perpendicular is equal to the product of
the lengths of the two parts of the
14. The straight line joining the midpoints of hypotenuse.
any two sides of a triangle is parallel to
the third and half of it. 26.(a) Pythagoras theorem: In a right triangle,
the square of the hypotenuse is equal to
15. The ratio of the areas of two similar the sum of the squares on the other two
triangles is equal to the ratio of the squares sides.
of any two corresponding sides.
(b) Converse of Pythogoras theorem: If
16. The areas of two similar triangles are in the square of the side of a triangle is equal
t he ratio of t he squares of t he to the sum of the square on the sides,
corresponding altitudes. then these two sides contain a right angle.
17. The areas of two similar triangles are in (c) In ABC, B  90, if AD  BC ; then
t he ratio of t he squares of t he b2 = a2 + c2 –2ax = BD.
correspoinding altitudes. (d) ABC in which AE is a median on BC
18. The areas of two similar triangles are in and AD  BC , then
t he ratio of t he squares of t he AB2 + AC2 = 2AE2 + 2BE2. This is
correspoinding medians. called Appolonius theorem.

ANCE 196
 Geometry
27. If two arcs of a circle are congruent then 44. A line drawn parallel to one side of a
the corresponding chords are equal. triangle divides the other two sides forming
28. If two chords of a circle are equal, then another triangle. Such a triangle is
their corresponding arcs are congruent. congruent to the given triangle.
29. The perpendicular from the centre of a 45. If two chords of a circle intersect at a
circle to a chord bisects the chord. point inside the circle, then the rectangle
30. The line joining the centre of a circle to contained by the segment of chord is equal
the midpoint of a chord is perpendicular to the rectangle contained by the segment
to the chord. of the other chord.
31. Equal chords of a circle are equidistant 46. If PAB is a secant to a circle intersecting
from the centre. the circle at A and B and PT is tangent
segment then PA.PB = PT2
32. Chords of a circle, which are equidistant
from the centre. 47. If a chord is drawn through the point of
33. Any two angles in the same segment of a contact of a tangent to the circle, then the
circle are equal. angles which this chord makes with the
given tangent are equal respectively to the
34. An angle in a semicircle is a right angle. angles formed in the corresponding
35. The arc of a circle subtending a right angle alternate segments.
at any point of the circle in alternate
48. If a line is drawn through and end point of
segment is a semi circle.
a chord of a circle so that the angle formed
36. If a line segment joining two points with the chord is equal to the angle
subtends equal angles at two other points subtended by the chord in the alternate
lying on the same side of the line segment then the line is tangent to the
containing the same segment, the four circle.
points are concyclic.
49. If two circle touch each other the point of
37. Equal chords of a circle subtend equal contact lies on the line passing through the
angles at the centre. centers.
38. If the angles subtended by two chords of 50. Diagonals of trapezium divide each other
a circle at the centre are equal, the chords proportionally.
are equal.
51. If diagonals of a quadrilateral divide each
39. The sum of either pair of opposite angles other proportionally then it is trapezium.
of a cyclic quadrilateral is 180°
52 Tolmeys thorem: If a quadrilateral is
40. A tangent to a circle is perpendicular to inscribed in a circle, the sum of the
the radius through the point of contact. products of the two pairs of opposite side
41. A line drawn through end point of a radius is equal to the diagonals.
and perpendicular to its tangent to the
circle. 53. Cevas theorem: The three cevians AD,
BE and CF of triangle are concurrent if
42. If two chords of a circle intersect inside or AF BD CE
outside of the circle when produced, the and only if . . 1
rectangle formed by the two segments of FB DC EA
the other. 54. Stewarts Formulae: The length of a cevian
43. Parallelograms and rectangles on the same ‘x’ and the sides of triangle are related by
base and between the same parallels are the following formulae
equal in area. Also their altitudes are equal. c2n + b2m = x2a + mna.

ANCE 197
 Geometry

1. In the triangle PQR, AB is parallel to QR. 5. In triangle ABC, sides AB and AC are
The ratio of the areas of two similar extended to D and E respectively, such
triangles PAB and PQR is 1 : 2. Then that AB = BD and AC = CE. Find DE, if
PQ : AQ = BC = 6 cm.
P (A) 3 cm (B) 6 cm
(C) 9 cm (D) 12 cm
A B 6. A man travels on a bicycle, 10 km east
from the starting point A to reach point B,
Q R
then he cycles 15 km south to reach point
C. Find the shortest distance between A
(A) 2 :1 (B) 1 : 2  1 and C.
(A) 25 km (B) 5 km
(C) 1 : ( 2  1) (D) 2 : 2 1
(C) 25 13 km (D) 5 13 km
2. In the figure given below, equilateral triangle
ECB surmounts square ABCD. Find the 7. In the following figure, O is the centre of
angle BED represented by x. the circle. If BAC  60, then OBC 
E A
x
O
B C
B C

(A) 120° (B) 30° (C) 40° (D) 60°

A D
(A) 15° (B) 30° (C) 45° (D) 60° 8. In the figure above (not to scale),
AB = CD and AB and CD are produced
3. In t wo t riangles ABC and DEF,
to meet at the point P. If BAC  70,
A  D. The sum of the angles A and
then find P
B is equal to the sum of the angles D and
A B
E. If BC = 6 cm and EF = 8 cm, find the
P
ratio of the areas of the triangles, ABC
and DEF. A D
C
(A) 30° (B) 40° (C) 45° (D) 50°
P Q
9. PT and PS are the tangents to the
B C circle with centre O. If TPS  65, then
(A) 3 : 4 (B) 4 : 3 OTS 
T
(C) 9 : 16 (D) 16 : 9
4. In the above figure, PQ is parallel to BC
O P
and PQ : BC = 1 : 3. If the area of the
triangle ABC is 144 cm2, then what is the
area of the triangle APQ ? S
(A) 48 cm2 (B) 36 cm2 1 1
(C) 16 cm2 (D) 9 cm2 (A) 32° (B) 45° (C) 57  (D) 32 
2 2

ANCE 198
 Geometry
10. In the following figure X, Y and Z are the B
points at which the incircle touches the
sides of the triangle as shown below.
Q M
If PX = 4 cm, QZ = 7 cm and O P
YR = 9 cm, then the perimeter of triangle
PQR is - A
P
(A) 30° (B) 45° (C) 70° (D) 60°

X 15. If ABCD is a square inscribed in a circle

Y
and PA is a tangent, then the angle between
the lines P1A and P1B is -
Q Z R C
(A) 20 cm (B) 46 cm
(C) 40 cm (D) 80 cm B
D
11. The locus of the point P which is at a
constant distance of 2 units from the origin
and which lies in the first or the second P A P1
quadrants is - (A) 30° (B) 20° (C) 40° (D) 45°
2 2
(A) y   4  x (B) y  4  x 16. In the diagram above, if l and m are two
tangents and AB is a chord making an
(C) x  4  y 2 (D) x   4  y 2 angle of 60° with the tangent l, then the
12. If PAB is a triangle in which B  90 and angle between l and m is -
m
A (1, 1) and B (0, 1), then the locus of P
is ________.
C B
(A) y = 0 (B) xy = 0
(C) x = y (D) x = 0
13. In the above diagram, if the angle between 60°
two chords AB and AC is 65°, then the l A P
between two tangents which are drawn at (A) 45° (B) 30° (C) 60° (D) 90°
B and AC is ____________.
A 17. Find the length of a transverse common
tangent of the two circles whose radii are
3.5 cm, 4.5 cm and the distance between
O C their centres is 10 cm.
B (A) 36 cm (B) 6 cm
(C) 64 cm (D) 8 cm
P 18. If ABCD is a trapezium, AC and BD are
the diagonals intersecting each other at
(A) 50° (B) 30° (C) 60° (D) 40° point O. Then AC : BD =
14. In the above diagram, O is the centre of (A) AB : CD
the circle and AMB  120, find the (B) AB + AD : DC + BC
angle between the two tangents AP and (C) AO2 : OB2
BP. (D) AO – OC : OB – OD

ANCE 199
 Geometry
19. In the above figure (not to scale), PA (A) Both (i) and (ii)
and PB are equal chords and ABCD is (B) Both (ii) and (iii)
a cyclic quadrilateral. If DCE  80,
(C) Both (i) and (iii)
DAP  30 then find APB
D (D) All the three
A
P 23. In the above diagram, O is the centre of
the circle and if OAB = 30°, then the
80°
F B C E acute angle between AB and the tangent
(A) 40° (B) 80° (C) 90° (D) 160° PQ at B is -
A
20. In trapezium KLMN, KL and MN are
parallel sides. A line is drawn, from the
Q
point A on KN, parallel to MN meeting
O
LM at B.KN : LM is equal to -
(A) KL : NM C B
(B) (KL + KA) : (NM + BM)
(C) (KA – AN) : (LB – BM)
P
(D) KL2 : MN2 (A) 30° (B) 60° (C) 45° (D) 90°
21. In the following figure, ABCD is a square
24. In the above figure, AB = OB and CT is
and AED is an equilateral triangle. Find
the value of a. the tangent to the circle at O. If COA =
A D 125°, then OAB is -
A
a
F
E B

B C
(A) 30° (B) 45° (C) 60° (D) 75° C O T
(A) 55° (B) 27½°
22. A circle with centre O is inscribed in a
(C) 82½° (D) 45°
quadrilateral ABCD as shown in the figure.
Which of the following statements is/are 25. AR and BS are the tangents to the circle,
true ? with centre O, touching at P and Q
(i) AOD + BOC = 180° respectively and PQ is the chord. If
(ii) AOB and COD are complementary OQP = 25°, then RPQ =
(iii) OA, OB, OC and OD are the angle A B
bisectors of A, B, C and D
respectively
D P Q
A
O

O
R S
B
(A) 100° (B) 115° (C) 150° (D) 90°
C

ANCE 200
 Geometry

1. In the diagram above, if 4. The tangent AB touches a circle, with

centre O, at the point P. If the radius of
BCP1  ABQ  60 , then the triangle the circle is 5 cm, OB = 10 cm and
ABC is ____ . OB = AB, then find AP.
Q
(A) 5 5 cm (B) 10 5 cm

A  5 
B (C) (10  5 3 ) cm (D) 10   cm
 3

Q1 5. In the diagram above, O is the centre of

the circle and O, E and F are mid points
P C 1 of AB, BO and OA respectively. If
P
(A) scalene (B) equilateral DEF  30 , then find ACB.
C
(C) right angled (D) acute angled
2. In the following figure, AQ is a tangent to
the circle at A. If ACB  60 , then O
BAQ = F E
E
A D B
C B (A) 30° (B) 60° (C) 90° (D) 120°
6. In the figure given below, ABC is an
equilateral triangle and PQRS is a square
of side 6 cm. By how many sq. cm is the
P A area of the triangle more than that of the
Q
square ?
(A) 30° (B) 60° (C) 120° (D) 45° A
3. In the above diagram, two circles X and
Y with centres A and B respectively
intersect at C and D. The radii AC and P Q
AD of circle X are tangents to the circle
Y. Radii BC and BD of circle Y are
B S R C
tangents to the circle X. Find AEC.
C 21
X Y (A) (B) 21 (C) 21 3 (D) 63
3
A B 7. In the given figure, DE || AC . Find the
E
value of x.
A
D 3x
D
(A) 45° 2x + 10
(B) 60°
(C) 90° B E C
x+7 2x
(D) cannot be determined
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4

ANCE 201
 Geometry
8. In the above figure (not to scale) ABCD
(A) 5 2 (B) 6 3
is a rectangle, BC=24 cm, DP=10 cm and
CD = 15 cm. Then AQ and CQ
respectively are (C) 4 5 (D) 4 10
Q
12. In the figure, find AD,
P A 3 cm B
D C
1.8 cm

D E
A B
2.2 cm
(A) 39 cm, 13 cm (B) 13 cm, 12 cm
(C) 25 cm, 13 cm (D) 39 cm, 12 cm C
9. At a particular time, the shadow cast by a (A) 1.8 cm (B) 2.25 cm
tower is 6 m long. If the distance from top (C) 2.2 cm (D) 1.85 cm
of the tower to the end of the shadow is
10 m long, determine the height of the 13. In the above diagram, AB is a diameter,
tower.
(A) 4 m (B) 8 m O is the centre of the circle and
(C) 16 m (D) 12 m OCB  50 , then find DBC.
10. In t he figure above, ABC  90 ,
AD = 15 and DC = 20. If BD is the
bisector of ABC , what is the perimeter
of the triangle ABC ?
A

D
(A) 80° (B) 100°
(C) 120° (D) 140°
B C
(A) 74 (B) 84 (C) 91 (D) 105 14. In the above diagram, O is the centre of
the circle and AD is the diameter. If
11. In the above triangle ABC, ABC or
ACB  135 , then find DOB .
B  90 . AB : BD : DC = 3 : 1 : 3. If
AC = 20 cm, then what is the length of D
AD (in cm) ?
A O

A B
C
(A) 135° (B) 60°
C (C) 90° (D) 45°
B D

ANCE 202
 Geometry
15. In the above diagram, O is the centre of P
the circle, AC is the diameter and if
APB  120 , then find BQC .

C
Q D R
O
Q (A) QD : DR (B) QD : DR
A (C) QD2 : RD2 (D) None of these
B
P 19. Two circle intersect at two points P and
(A) 30° (B) 150° S. QR is a tangent to the two circles at Q
(C) 90° (D) 120° and R.
16. In the trapezium PQRS, PQ is parallel to S
RS and the ratio of the areas of the triangle
POQ to triangle ROS is 225 : 900. P
Then SR = ? R
P Q
Q
O (A) 84° (B) 96°
(C) 102° (D) 108°
S R 20. In the above figure, O is the centre of the
(A) 30 PQ (B) 25 PQ circle and AD is a tangent to the circle
(C) 2 PQ (D) PQ at A. If CAD  55 and ADC  25 ,
17. In the following figure, ABCD is a then ABO 
parallelogram, CB is extended to F and A
55°
the line joining D and F intersect AB at E.
Then, O
F
E 25°
B D
C
A E
B (A) 10° (B) 15°
(C) 20° (D) 25°
D C 21. In the above diagram, O is the centre of
the circle and OPA  30 . Find ACB
AD BF AD CF
(A)  (B)  and ADB respectively..
AE BE AE CD
A
BF CF
(C)  (D) all of them C
BE CD
O P
18. PQR is right triangle, where P  90 . D
PD is perpendicular to QR.PQ : PR 
B

ANCE 203
 Geometry

(A) 120°, 60° 24. In the figure above (not to scale), STM
(B) 60°, 120° and MQ are tangents to the circle at T a
(C) 75°, 105° nd Q respectively. SRQ is a straight
(D) 35°, 145° line. SR = TR and TSR  25 . Find
22. Side of a square PQRS is 4 cm long. PR QMT .
is produced to the point M such that
PR = 2RM. Find SM.
(A) 10 cm R
Q S
(B) 5 cm
(C) 2 5 cm T
(D) 2 10 cm M
23. ABC is an equilateral triangle of side (A) 55° (B) 60°
6 cm. If a circle of radius 1cm is moving (C) 75° (D) 80°
inside and along the sides of the triangle,
then locus of the centre of the circle is an 25. PQ is the direct common tangent of two
equilateral triangle of side _______ . circle (S, 9 cm) and (R, 4 cm) which touch
(A) 5 cm each other externally. Find the area of the
(B) 4 cm quadrilateral PQRS. (in cm2)
(C) (6 – 2 3 ) cm (A) 72 (B) 65
(D) (3  3 ) cm (C) 78 (D) 69

Q.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. b b c c b c a d b b
Q.No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. b b b c b c d b d a
Q.No. 21 22 23 24 25
Ans. b d c d c

Q.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. b b c c b c a d b b
Q.No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. b b b c b c d b d a
Q.No. 21 22 23 24 25
Ans. b d c d c

ANCE 204
 Permutations & Combinations

Definition In the illustration given above, the F.P.C.

We shall discuss the problem of arranging has been made use of in finding the total
and grouping of certain things, taking number (6 = 3 × 2) of ways of going in and
particular number of things at a time. ab coming out of the hall.
and ba are two different arrangements of The F.P.C. can also be generalised, for
a and b, but represent same group. In even more than 2 operations, as follows :
arrangements, the order of things is also If operations can be performed in m1, m2,
taken into consideration. ......, mn ways, then all then n operations in
succession can be performed in exactly
Suppose there are three entrances to a
m1m2 .......... mn ways.
hall and two exists to come out of that
hall. Therefore, there will be exactly six  Working rules for solving problems :
ways of going in and coming out of that Step-1: Identify the independent operations
hall. This is explained in the adjoining involved in the given problem.
diagram.
Step-2: Find the number of ways of performing
each operation.
Step-3: Multiply these number of get the total
number of ways of performing all the
operations.

 Meaning of n! : Let n  N. The

continued product of first n natural
numbers (begining with 1 and ending
with n) is called fractional n and is denoted
by n!.
e.g.1 (1) Evaluate :
9!
(i)
In mathematical terminology, the acts like 8!
‘going in’ and ‘coming out’ are called 16.15.14.13.12!
operations. Thus, we can say that there (ii)
15!
are three ways of performing first 11!
operation and two ways of performing (iii) 7!4!
second operation. The required number of
ways can also be obtained as 3 × 2 = 6. 1 1 1
(iv)  
5! 6 ! 7 !
Fundamental Principle of Counting (F.P.C.)
9! 9  8!
Sol. (i)  9
 Statement of Fundamental Principle of 8! 8!
Couting :
16  15  14  13  12!
This principle states that if an operation can (ii)
15!
be performed in ‘m’ different ways and if
16 (15  14  13 12!)
for each such choice, another operation 
can be performed in ‘n’ different ways, 15!
then both operations in succession can be 16 (15!)
  16
performed in exactly ‘mn’ different ways. 15!

ANCE 205
 Permutations & Combinations

5! 5  4  3  2 1
11! 11 10  9  8  7 !
 Sol. (i) 5 P3  
(iii) (5  3)! 2 1
7 ! 4! 7!( 4  3  2  1)
11 10  9  8  n! 
  330  5  4  3  60  n Pr  
43 2  (n  r )! 
1 1 1 7 6 7 1 Alternatively, 5P3 = 5 × 4 × 3 = 60
(iv) 5!  6!  7 !  7  6  5!  7  6!  7 !
(nPr = n(n – 1) .......... r factors)
42 7 1 50
   
7 ! 7! 7 ! 7! (ii) 7 P2  7  6  42
18
 Permutations : The arrangement of num- (iii) P3  18  17  16  4896
ber of things taking some or all of them at 6! 6!
a time are called permutations. The total (iv) 6 P6  
( 6  6) ! 0 !
number of permutations of n distinct things
taking r(1  r  n) at a time is denoted by 6  5  4  3  2 1
n
Pr or by P (n, r).   720
1
 Corollary I : 2 n 1
e.g. Find n, if Pn : 2 n 1Pn 1  22 : 7
n!
Show that n Pr  , 1  r  n.
(n  r )! Sol. We have 2 n 1
Pn : 2 n 1Pn 1  22 : 7
Proof :
2 n 1
We have nPr = n(n – 1) ........ r factors Pn 22
i.e., 2 n 1

= n(n – 1)..... [n – (r – 1)] Pn 1 7
= n(n – 1) .... (n – r + 1) (2n  1)!
n (n  1).....(n  r  1) (n  r ) (n  r  1).... 3.2.1 [(2n  1)  n ]! 22
  
(n  r ) (n  r  1) ...... 3.2.1 (2n  1)! 7
n! [(2n  1)  n ]!

(n  r )!
(2n  1)! (n  2)! 22
n!  
 n Pr  (n  1)! (2n  1)! 7
(n  r )!
(2n  1)! (n  2) (n  1) . n . (n  1)! 22
 Corollary II :  
(n  1)! (2n  1) 2n. (2n  1)! 7
Show that n Pn  n !
(n  2) (n  1) 22
Proof :  
n
(2n  1) 2 7
Pn = n(n – 1) (n – 2) ..... f factors
 n ( n  1) ( n  2) ........( n  ( n  1))  7 (n 2  3n  2)  44 (2n  1)
= n(n – 1) (n – 2) ..... 1 = n!  7 n 2  67 n  30  0
 The number of permutations of n things
taking all at a time is equal to n!.  n  10,  3 / 7

e.g.1 Evaluate 3
n  10 ( n  is not possible )
(i) 5P3 (ii) 7P2 18
(iii) P3 (iv) P66 7

ANCE 206
 Permutations & Combinations

36! x 1 1
1. The value of  6. If   then x 
34! 10! 8! 9!
(a) 42840 (b) 360 (c) 1998 (d) 1260 (a) 60 (b) 40 (c) 20 (d) 100
36! 36  35  34! x 1 1
Sol.   36  35  1260 Sol.  
34! 34! 10! 8! 9!
2. 4! + 3! = x 10  9 10
  
(a) 43 (b) 34 (c) 30 (d) 14 10! 10  9  8! 10  9!
Sol. 4! + 3! = 4 × 3 × 2 × 1 + 3 × 2 × 1 x 90 10
  
= 24 + 6 10! 10! 10!
= 30  x  90  10
(n  3)!  x  100
3. 
n!
7. H.C.F. of 5!, 6! and 7! is -
(a) n 3  6n 2  11n  6 (a) 5! (b) 6! (c) 7! (d) None
(b) n 2  4n  3 Sol. Since, 5! divides both 6! and 7!, therefore,
3 2
(c) n  6n  11n  16 H.C.F. of 5!, 6! and 7! is 5!.
(d) None
8. L.C.M. of 5!, 6! and 7! is -
( n  3) ! ( n  3) (n  2) ( n  1) n !
Sol.  (a) 5! (b) 6! (c) 7! (d) None
n! n!
Sol. 5! divides 6! divides 7!, therefore L.C.M.
= n 3  6n 2  11n  6
is 7!.
4. 2.4.6.8.10.12 =
9. If (n + 2)! = 2550 n! then =
(a) 12! (b) 26 × 6!
(a) 44 (b) 49 (c) 45 (d) 50
(c) 2 × 6! (d) None
Sol. (n + 2)! = 2550 n!
Sol. 2.4.6.8.10.12
= 2. (2 × 2) (2 × 3) . (2 × 4) . (2 × 5) . (2 × 6)  ( n  2) ( n  1) n!  2550 n!
= 26 (1.2.3.4.5.6)  n 2  3n  2  2550  0
= 26 × 6!  n 2  3n  2548  0
5. Which of the following are true?  ( n  49) ( n  52)  0
(a) 3 × 4! = (3 × 4)!  n  49 ( or)  52
(b) (3 + 4)! = 3! + 4!  n = 49 ( n cannot be negative).
(c) (3 × 4)! = 3! × 4! 10. If (n + 1)! = 12 (n – 1)! then n =
(d) None (a) 4 (b) 5 (c) 3 (d) 12
Sol. (a) 3 × 4! = 3 × 24 = 72 Sol. (n + 1)! = 12 (n – 1)!
(3 × 4)! = 12!  72  ( n  1) ( n ) ( n  1) ! 12 ( n  1) !
(b) (3 + 4)! = 7! = 5040
 n 2  n  12  0
3! + 4! = 6 + 24 = 30  5040
 ( n  3) ( n  4)  0
(c) (3 × 4)! = 12!
 n  3 (or )  4
 None one is true
 None is the answer.  n  3 ( n cannot be negative).

ANCE 207
 Permutations & Combinations

n 5 11( n  1) n  3 9. In how many ways 7 men and 7 women

1. If Pn 1   Pn , then value of
2 can be seated around a round table such
n is - that no 2 women can sit together?
(a) 2 or 6 (b) 2 or 11 (a) (7!) 2 (b) 7! × 6!
(c) 7 or 11 (d) 6 or 7 (c) (6!) 2
(d) 7!
2. If n 1 C 6  n 1C 7  n C6 , then - 10. The number of all possible words that can
(a) n > 4 (b) n > 12 be formed using the letters of the word
(c) n  13 (d) n > 13 MATHEMATICS is -
11!
3. The expression (a) 2! 2! 2! (b) 11!
n
Cr  4. nCr 1 6 n Cr  2  4.n Cr  3  n Cr  4
(c) 11C1 (d) None
is equal to -
n4 11. A lady gives a dinner party to six guests.
(a) Cr (b) 2.n  4 Cr 1
The no. of ways in which they may
(c) 4. nC r (d) 11. n Cr be selected from among ten friends, if two
of the friends will not attend the party
4. If 56 Pr  6 : 54 Pr  3  30800 : 1 then the value together is -
of r is - (a) 112 (b) 140
(a) 40 (b) 41 (c) 164 (d) None
(c) 42 (d) None
12. Ten different letters of an English alphabet
m n
5. If n  C 2 , then the value of C2 is given are given. Words with five letters are formed
by - from there given letters. Then the no. of
(a) m 1 C 4 (b) m 1 C 4 words which have at least one letter
m2 repeated is -
(c) C4 (d) None
(a) 69760 (b) 30240
6. The number of diagonals that can be formed (c) 99784 (d) None
by a polygon of 100 sides is -
(a) 4,950 (b) 4,850 13. If 8C r  7 C3  7 C 2 , then the value of r is -
(c) 5,000 (d) 10,000 (a) 2 or 6 (b) 3 or 5
(c) 3 or 4 (d) 4 or 5
7. If out of p + q + r things p are alike, q are
alike, then the number of arrangements 14. The number of ways in which a team of 11
equals - players can be selected from 22 players,
(a) ( p  q  r )!/ p! q! including two fo them and excluding four of
(b) ( p  1) (q  1) r  1 them is -
(c) 2p  q  2r  1 (a) 22
C11 2 (b) 16
C9
(d) ( p  q  r ) ( r  1)  1 (c) 20
C8 (d) 16
C11
8. If n Cr 1  36, nCr  84, n Cr 1  126, then 15. If C (2n, 3) : C(n, 2) = 12 : 1, then n is -
(a) n = 9, r = 6 (b) n = 9, r = 3 (a) 4 (b) 5
(c) n = 6, n = 3 (d) n = 6, r = 2 (c) 6 (d) 8

ANCE 208
 Permutations & Combinations
16. The no. of diagonals of a polygon of m 21. 12 persons are to be arranged on a round
sides is - table. If two particular persons among them
m ( m  1) m ( m  2) are not to sit side by side, the no. of ar-
(a) (b) rangements is -
2! 2!
(a) 9(10!) (b) 2(10!)
m ( m  3) m ( m  5)
(c) (d) (c) 45(8!) (d) 10!
2! 2!
22. The sum of the digits at the tens place of all
17. Everybody in a room shakes hands with
the numbers formed with the help of 3, 4,
everybody else. The total no. of hand
5, 6 taken all at a time is -
shakes is 66. The total no. of persons in
the room is - (a) 432 (b) 108
(a) 11 (b) 12 (c) 36 (d) 18
(c) 13 (d) 14 23. A fruit basket contains 4 oranges, 5 apples
and 6 mangoes. The no. of ways a person
18. Given 5 line segments of lengths 2, 3, 4, 5,
make selection of fruits from among the
6 units. Then the no. of triangles that can
be formed by joining these lines is - fruits in the basket is -
(a) 210 (b) 209
(a) 5 C3 (b) 5 C3  3 (c) 208 (d) None
(c) 5 C3  2 (d) 5 C3  1 24. A box contains 2 white balls, 3 black balls
and 4 red balls. The no. of ways in which
19. All the letters of the words EAMCET are
three balls can be drawn from the box so
arranged in all possible ways. The no. of
that at least of the balls is black is -
such arrangements in which no two vowels
are adjacent to each other is - (a) 74 (b) 84
(a) 360 (b) 144 (c) 64 (d) 20
(c) 72 (d) 54 25. The letters of the word RANDOM are
n
written in all possible orders and these
20. If Cr 1  36, n Cr  84 and n Cr 1  126, words are written out as in dictionary. Then
then r is equal to - the rank of the word RANDOM is -
(a) 1 (b) 2 (a) 614 (b) 615
(c) 3 (d) None (c) 613 (d) 616

Q.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans . d d a b d b a b b a
Q.No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans . b a b b b c b b c c
Q.No. 21 22 23 24 25
Ans . a b b c a

ANCE 209
 Geometry

LIMITS, DIFFERENTIATION AND INTEGRATION

Introduction  Meaning of 0 < |x – c| <  

Calculus that part of mathematics which  0  | x  c |   c    x  c  , x  c
mainly deals with the study of change in
 x  (c  , c  ), x  c
the value of function as the value of the
variable in the domain change. Calculus  x  (c  , c)  (c, c  )
has a very wide range of uses in Sciences,  x  deleted nbd of c
Engineering, Economics and in many other
walks of life. It is extensively used in Note : | x  c |    x  nbd of c i.e.,
graphical work, including the calculation
x  (c  , c  )
of the slope of tangent of a curve at a
point.  Meaning of x  c :
x  c means x takes value very close to
Limits
c but x is never equal to c (or) x  c
 Neighbourhood (nbd) : An open interval means x deleted nbd of c
(a, b) containing c  R is called i.e., 0 < |x – c| < 
neighbourhood of c. x can tend to c by taking values less than
e.g. (1, 2) is neighbourhood of 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, c and in this case we write x  c– and we
..... 1.9 etc. say x tends of c from left.
 Deleted neighbourhood of c : x can tend of c by taking values greater
Let a < c < b where a, b, c  R, then than c but never c and in this case we
(a, c)  (c, b) is called delet ed write x  c+ and we say x tends to c from
neighbourhood of c. Interval (a, c] is called right.
left nbd of c. Interval [c, d) is called right
 Definition of limit :
nbd of c. Interval (a, c) is called left
deleted nbd of c. Interval (c, b) is called Let f be a function defined for all x close
right deleted nbd of c. Interval (c – , to c exept possibility at c. Then l is said to
c + ) is called symmetric nbd of c or be limit of f(x) as x  c. If the difference
 – nbd of c. Interval (c – , c + ) between f(x) and l can be made as small
excluding ‘c’ is symmetric deleted nbd as we like by taking x very close to c but
of c. not c. Symbolically we write
(1) (c – , c] denotes left nbd of c. Lt f (x )  l
x c
(2) (c – , c) denotes left deleted nbd
of c.  Let hand limit (LHL) : The left hand
 (3) [c, c + ) denotes right nbd of c. limit of f(x) as x approaches x0 (or the
 (4) (c, c + ) denotes right deleted limit of f(x) as x approaches x0 from the
left or x approaches x0 through value of x
nbd of c.
less than x0) is equal to L1 if we can make
 (5) (a, b) is nbd of each of its points.
the values of f(x) arbitrarily close to L1 by
e.g. (1, 2) is nbd of each point namely 1.01, taking sufficiently close to x0 and x less
1.02, ........... 1.1, ........ 1.4, ... 1.999 than x0.

ANCE 210
 Geometry
 Some Useful Infinitesimal Functions :
 Lt f ( x )  Lt f (c  h )
x  c h 0
1. sin  ( x ) ~ ( x )
 Right hand limit (RHL) : We write 2. tan  [ x ] ~ ( x )
lim f ( x )  L2 and say that the right hand [( x )]2
x  x 0
3. 1  cos  [ x ] ~
limit of f(x) as x approaches x0 (or the 2
limit of f(x) as approaches x0 from the right, 4. arc sin  [ x ] ~  ( x )
or x approaches x0 through values of x 5. arc tan  [ x ] ~ [ x ]
greater than x0) is equal to L2 if we can
make the value of f(x) arbitrarily close to 6. log [1   ( x )] ~ a ( x )
L2 by taking x sufficiently close to x0 and
4a  3x  x  6a
x greater than x0. E.g. lim
x a 2a  5x  3a  4 x
 Lt f (x )  Lt f (c  h )
x c  h 0
( 4a  3x  x  6a )
Sol. lim 
x a ( 2a  5x  3a  4x )
Limits at Infinity
Let f(x) be a function of x defined for all ( 4a  3x  x  6a ) ( 2a  5a  3a  4x )
x > x0 where x0 is a positive number. Then ( 2a  5x  3a  4 x ) ( 4a  3x  x  6a )
we say that lim f ( x )  L, where L is finite (2 x  2a ) ( 2a  5x  3a  4 x )
x   lim
x a ( x  a ) ( 4a  3x  x  6a )
number, if f(x) comes closer and closer to
L as x is made larger and larger through x3  1
E.g. lim
x a x 2  1
positive values.
Sol. If f(x) = x3 – 1 and g(x) = x2 – 1, then
Let f(x) be a function of x defined for all f(1) = g(1) = 0. Therefore x – 1 is a
factor of x3 – 1 and x2 – 1, hence
x < x0 where x0 is a negative number.
x3 1 ( x  1) (x 2  x  1)
Then, we say that lim f (x )  L, where L lim  lim
x   x 1 x 2  1 x 1 ( x  1) ( x  1)
is a finite number, if f(x) comes closer and
x2  x  1 1 1 1 3
 lim  
closer to L as x is made smaller and smaller x 1 x 1 11 2
through negative values.
E.g. lim
a sin x
1 
Infinitesimal Limits
x 1 x cos x

A quantity inverse to an infinite quantity is

Sol.  lim
a sin x
1

1 
 log a.1.1  log a
called an infinitesimal : x 1 x sin x cos x
(i) The sum and the product of any definite
number of infinitesimal function as x  a  Standard limits :
are also infinitesimal as x  a.
(ii) The product of an infinitesimal function by xn  an
1. Lt  na n 1
a bound function is an infinitesimal. x a x a

ANCE 211
 Geometry

x m  am m m n Derivatives
2. Lt  a
x a xn  an n  Derivative at a given point :
sin  The concept of the derivative of a real
3. Lt  Lt cos 
0  0 valued function at a point is intimately
tan  connected with that of the slope of the
 Lt  1 ( must be in radians) tangent of the curve (graph of the function)
0 
at the given point on it.
ex  1 log (1  x ) Let y = f(x) be a function which is defined
4. Lt  Lt 1
x 0 x x  0 x in some -neighbourhood of c where 
eax  1 log (1  ax) is a small positive real number and f
5. Lt  Lt a is continuous * at x = c i.e. at the point
x 0 x x  0 x
P (c, f (c)). Let Q (c + h, f(c + g)) be any
a x 1 a x  1 other point on the graph of f (shown
6. Lt  log a  Lt
x 0 x x 0 x in figure) where c + h lies in the
=  log a neighbourhood of c i.e. h is very small,
1 x h  0, it may be case when h > 0.
x  1
7. Lt (1  x )  e, Lt 1    e
x 0 x   x
1
 
8. Lt (1  x )  e , Lt 1    e
x
x 0 x 
 x
1
n a if 0  b  a
n n
9. Lt (a  b )  
x 
b if 0  a  b
1
n n n
10. Lt (4  5 )  5
x 

1
 a x  bx  x Slope of the line
11. Lt    ab
x 0
 2  f (c  h )  f (c) f (c  h )  f (c)
PQ = 
(c  h )  c h
1k  2k  3k  .......  n k 1
12. Lt 
x  n k  1
k 1 Now, if we hold the point P fixed and let
Q approach P closer and closer, the value
1 1
13. Lt   ...... of the slope varies. The line PQ rotates
x  a ( a  d ) ( a  d ) ( a  2d )
about the point P till it reaches its limiting
1 1 position when Q ultimately coincides with
 
[a  (n  1) d ] (a  nd ) ad P. In this position, the line PQ becomes a
tangent to the curve (graph of f) at P. The
sin  tan  limiting value of the slope when Q  P
14. Lt  , Lt 
0  0 

ANCE 212
 Geometry
From the above definitions, it follows that
f ( c  h )  f (c ) the derivative of a function f at x = c exists
i.e., Lt (if it exists) is
h0 h iff both the left and right derivatives exist
called the derivative of f at the point separately at that point and are equal.
x = c, it is denoted by f (c) (read as A function f is said to be differentiable at
f-dash c). a point c iff the derivative of f at c exists.
The process of finding the derivative of a
The indicated limit may exist at some
function is called differentiation.
points and may fail to exist at some other
points. Moreover, we can approach P  Differentiation : Let f be a function
either from left or from right. This leads defined on a neighbourhood of a real
of the following definitions of the number a.
derivative at a given point : f ( x )  f (a )
If Lt exists , then f is said to
A function f is said to have a left x 0 x a
derivative at x = c iff f is defined in some be differentiable at x = a and the value of
(undeleted) left neighbourhood of c and the limit is called the derivative of f at
f ( c  h )  f ( c) x = a and is denoted by f (a).
Lt  exists ( finitely ) .
h0 h f (x  h)  f (x)
 f '  Lt
The value of this limit is called the left h 0 h
derivative at x = c and is denoted by
 Some important derivatives :
  f ( c  h )  f ( c)
f (c) i.e. f (c)  Lt 
  d
h 0 h 1. (constant)  0
dx
A function f is said to have a right
derivative at x = c iff f is defined in some d n
2. (x )  nx n 1
(undeleted) right neithbourhood of c and dx
f ( c  h )  f (c ) d 1
Lt  exists (finitely). 3. ( x) 
h 0 h dx 2 x
The value of this limit is called the right
d x
derivative at x = c and is denoted by f ' (c) 4. (e )  e x
dx
f ( c  h )  f ( c)
or R f (c) i.e. f  (c)  Lt  d x
h 0 h 5. (a )  a x log e a
dx
A function f is said to have a derivative at
d 1
x = c iff f is defined in some (undeleted) 6. (log x) 
neighbourhood of c and dx x
d
f ( c  h )  f (c ) 7. (sin x)  cos x
Lt exists (finitely). dx
h0 h
The value of this limit is called the d
8. (cos x)   sin x
derivative at x = c and is denoted by f (c). dx

f ( c  h )  f ( c) d
i.e., f ' ( c)  Lt 9. (tan x)  sec 2 x
h 0 h dx

ANCE 213
 Geometry

10.
d
(cot x)   cosec2 x
6.  cos x dx  sin x  c
dx
7.  sin x dx   cos x  c
d
11. (sec x)  sec x tan x 2
dx 8.  sec x dx  tan x  c
2
d 9.  cosec x dx   cot x  c
12. (cosec x)   cosec x cot x
dx

d dv du
10.  sec x tan x dx  sec x  c
13. (uv)  u 
dx dx dx 11.  cosec x cot x dx   cosec x  c
du dv 1
v u 12.  dx  2 x  c
d u dx dx x
14.   2
dx  v  v
f ' (x)
13.  dx  2 f ( x )  c
Integration f (x )
 Integration : It is the inverse process f ' (x)
d
14.  f ( x) dx  log f ( x)  c
of differentiation. If [ F( x )]  f ( x ),
dx
then F(x) is called primitive or anti-
derivative or integral of f(x) and we Limits
write  f ( x ) dx  F( x ).
x 2  5x  6
Thus 1. Lt
x  2 2 x 2  3x

d (a) 3 (b) 10
[ F( x )]  f ( x )   f ( x ) dx  F( x )  c
dx (c) 9 (d) 100
where c is a constant called constant of
x 2  5x  6 22  5.2  6
integration. Sol. Lt 
x  2 2x 2  3x 2(2) 2  3(2)
 Some Standard Elementary Integrals :
4  10  6 20
   10
1.  1. dx  x  c 86 2
x n 1
2.
n
 x dx  n 1
c 2.
x 2

Lt log10 x 6  x 2  1292  
(a) 3 (b) 4
1
3.  x dx  log | x |  c (c) 1292 (d) 2

4. e
x x
dx  e  c Sol. x 2

Lt log10 x 6  x 2  1292 
ax  log10 [ 26  22  1292 ]
x
5.  a dx  log a  c  log10 (64  4  1292 )

ANCE 214
 Geometry

x 1 x 1
 log10 (64  1296 ) Sol. Lt 2
 Lt
x 1 2x  7 x  5 x 1 ( x  1) (2x  5)
 log10 (64  36)
1 1 1
 log10 100  Lt  
x 1 2x  5 2(1)  5 3
 log10 102
x2  x
 2 log10 10 5. Lt 
x 1 x 1
 2 1
(a) 5 (b) 2 1
=2
(c) 3 (d) 3
3. Let
3
4  7x
f (x)  , Lt f ( x )  l , Lt f ( x )  m, 2
x  x 2
x ( x  1)
3x  4 x  2 x 0
Sol. Lt  Lt
then the quadratic equation whose roots x 1 x  1 x 1 x 1
are l and m is - 3 3
2
(a) x  1  0 x 2  12
 Lt x . Lt 1 1
x 1 x 1
2 2 2
(b) x  1  0 x 1
(c) x 2  x  1  0 3 3
x 2  12
(d) x 2  x  1  0  1. Lt 1 1
x 1

4  7x 40 x 2  12
Sol. l  Lt f ( x )  Lt 
x2 x  2 3x  4 3(2)  4 3
3 1
  xm  am m m  n 
 10  2 (1) 2 2  Lt n  a 
  1 1  x a x  a
n
n 
10
2
4  7x 4  0 =3×1
m  Lt f ( x )  Lt  1
x 0 x  0 3x  4 04 =3
Quadratic equation is
2
x9  3x8  x 6  9x 4  4x 2  16x  84
x  (  ) x    0 6. Lt 
x 2 x 5  3x 4  4x  12
2
x  (1  1)x  (1) (1)  0
9 2  30 8 2  31
x 2  0.x  1  0  x 2  1  0 (a) (b)
3 2 2 3

x 1 3 3 1
4. Lt 2
 (c) (d)
x 1 2x  7 x  5 2 1 2 3
1 x9  3x8  x 6  9x 4  4x 2  16x  84
(a) (b) – 1 Sol. Lt 
7 x 2 x 5  3x 4  4x  12
1 1 (x2  2) (x7  3x6  2x5  5x4  4x3 19x2  8x  42)
(c) (d) = Lt
3 4 x 2 (x2  2) (x3  3x2  2x  6)

ANCE 215
 Geometry

( 2)7  3( 2)6  2( 2 )5  2( 2 )4  4( 2)3 19( 2)2  8( 2)  42 x

 8. Lt 
(( 2 )3  3( 2)2  2 2  6 x 
x x x
8 2  24  8 2  20  8 2  38  8 2  42
 1
2 2 62 2 6 (a) 2 (b)
2
8 2  31 (c) 0 (d) 1

2 3
x
Sol. Lt
x 
3
1 x  3 1 x x x x
7. Lt =
x 0 x
x
3 2
(a) (b)  Lt x (Divide by x )
4 3 x 
x x x
 2

1 3 x x x4
(c) (d)
2 2
1 1
1 1  Lt  1
3 3
(1  x )  (1  x ) x 
1 1 1 0  0
Sol. Lt 1 
x 0 x x x3
1 1
e kx  1
3 3
[(1  x )  1]  (1  x )  1 9. Lt  5 , then k =
 Lt x 0 x
x 0 x
(a) 7 (b) 5
1 1
(c) 5 (d) e5
(1  x ) 3  1 (1  x ) 3  1
 Lt  Lt
x 0 x x 0 x e kx  1
Sol. Lt 5
[Put 1 + x = y, then x  0 y  1 and x 0 x
1 – x = z, x  0  z  1]
 e kx  1 
1 1  Lt   k  5
(1  x ) 3  1 (1  x ) 3  1
x 0
 kx 
 Lt  Lt
x 0 x x 0 x 1×k=5
 k= 5
1 1
1 1 1 1
 (1) 3  (1) 3
3 3  1  cos x 
10. Lt  2 
x 0
 sin x 
1 1
  (a) 0 (b) – 1
3 3
1 1
2 (c) (d)
 2 4
3

ANCE 216
 Geometry
1
1 d d
 1  cos x  Sol. y  ( y)  (x 2 )
Sol. Lt  2  x dx dx
x 0
 sin x 
1 3
(1  cos x ) dy  1 2 1 dy  1 2
 Lt   x   x
x  0 (1  cos x ) (1  cos x )
dx 2 dx 2
dy  1
1 1  3
 Lt  dx
x  0 1  cos x 1  cos x 2x 2
1 1 dy 1
   
11 2 dx 2 x x

Differentiation dy
4. If y = cos (3x + 1), then 
dx
1. If f(x) = 2x2 + 3x + 1, then f (x) =
(a) 3 sin (3x + 1)
(a) 4x + 3
(b) 3 cos (3x + 1)
(b) 4x – 3
(c) – 3 cos (3x + 1)
(c) 2x + 3
(d) – 3 sin (3x + 1)
(d) 2x – 3
Sol. f(x) = 2x2 + 3x + 1 dy d
Sol. y  cos (3x  1)   (cos 3x  1)
dx dx
d d d d
[f ( x )]  2 ( x 2 )  3 ( x )  (1) dy d
dx dx dx dx    sin (3x  1) (3x  1)
 f (x) = 4x + 3 dx dx
dy
dy   3 sin (3x  1)
2. If y  3 , then  dx
dx
5. If f(x) = tan 2x, then f (x) =
3
2
(a) sec2 x (b) sec2 2x
x
(a) x (b) (c) 2 sec2 x (d) 2 sec2 2x
2
d
Sol. f ( x )  tan 2x  f ' ( x )  [tan 2 x ]
1 1 dx
(c) (d)
2 x x x
d
 f ' ( x )  sec 2 2x (2 x )
d d dy 1 dx
Sol. y x  ( y)  ( x )  
dx dx dx 2 x  f ' ( x )  2 sec 2 2 x

1 dy dy
3. If y  , then  6. If y  4  x , then 
x dx dx
1 1 1 4
(a) (b) (a) (b)
2 x 2 x 2 4x 2 4x
1 1 2 1
(c) (d) (c) (d)
2x x 2x x 2 4x 2 4x

ANCE 217
 Geometry
dy d 9. If f ( x )  log sin x , then f ' ( x ) 
Sol. y  4x   ( 4  x)
dx dx
1
dy 1 d (a) cot x (b) cot x
 (4  x ) 2
dx 2 4  x dx 1
(c) cot x (d) cot x
dy 1 2

dx 2 4  x d
Sol. f ( x )  log sin x  f ' ( x )  log sin x
7. If f(x) = sec(2x + 3), then f (x) = dx
(a) sec (2x + 3) tan (2x + 3) 1 d
f (x)  ( sin x )
(b) tan2 (2x + 3) sin x dx
(c) cos2 (2x + 3)
1 1 d
(d) 2 sec (2x + 3) tan (2x + 3) f (x)  (sin x )
sin x 2 sin x dx
d
Sol. f (x)  sec(2x  3)  f ' (x)  [sec(2x  3)] 1 1
dx f (x)  cos x  f ' ( x )  cot x
2 sin x 2
d
f ' (x )  sec (2x  3) tan (2x  3) (2x  3) 10. If f ( x )  x 4  a x  e 2 x , then f ' ( x ) is -
dx
f ' ( x )  2 sec ( 2x  3) tan ( 2x  3) (a) 4x 3  a x  2e 2 x
(b) 4x 3  a x log a  2e 2 x
1
8. If f ( x )  x  , then f ' (x )  (c) 4x 3  a x log a  e 2 x
x
(d) None
1  1 Sol. f ( x)  x 4  a x  e2 x
(a) 1
2 x  x 
d 4 d d
 f ' (x )  ( x )  (a x )  ( e)
1  1 dx dx dx
(b) x  
2 x x  f ' (x )  4 x 3  a x log a  2e 2 x
1  1 Integration
(c) 1  
2 x x
9
1. dx 
1  1 x
(d) 1  
x  x x8 x9
(a) c (b) c
8 9
1
Sol. f (x)  x 
x x10 x11
(c) c (d) c
10 11
d d  1 
 f ' (x)  ( x)   x n 1
dx dx  x  Sol. We know that  x n dx  c
n 1
1 1
 f ' (x)   x 9 1
2 x 2x x   x 9 dx  c
9 1
1  1 x10
f ' (x)  1  c
2 x  x  10

ANCE 218
 Geometry

9 3
2.  (3  2 x ) dx  2
 (ax  b) 2  c
3a
1
(a)
8 (3  2 x )8 1
4. 3 dx 
1 x
(b) c
16 (3  2 x ) 7
(a) 1 x  c (b) x c
2
1
(c) c
16 (3  2 x )8 3 2
(c) x c (d) x c
2 3
(d) None
1 1 1
(3  2x ) 9 1 3 dx 
3 x
9 Sol. dx
Sol.  ( 3  2 x ) dx 
(2) (9  1)
c x
1 1
 dx

(3  2 x )  8
c 3  12
(2) (8) x
1
1 1 
 c   x 2 dx
(16) (3  2 x )8 3
1
1
2
3. ax  b dx  1 x
   c
3 1  1
3
2 2
(a) (ax  b) 2  c
3 1
2
3
3 1 x
(ax  b)  c 2   c
(b) 3 1
2a
2
3
3
(c) (ax  b) 2  c 2
2   x c
3
3
2
(d) (ax  b) 2  c x x
3a 5. 2 . e dx 
1
Sol. ax  b dx   (ax  b) 2 dx 2x 2x
 (a)
log e
c (b)
log 2e
c
1
1
2
(ax  b) (2e) x
 c c
1  (c) (d) None
  1 . a log 2e
2 
x x
3 Sol. 2 . e dx   ( 2e) x dx
2
(ax  b)
 c (2e)x
3  c
.a
2 log 2e

ANCE 219
 Geometry

 1 x3 x
6.   x  x  dx  (a) c (b)  c
3 2
x2 x2
x2 (c) c (d)  c
(a)  log | x |  c 2 2
2

x2
Sol.  | x | dx    x dx
(b)  log | x |  c
2 x11
 c
11
x
(c) x c x2
2  c
(d) None 2
2
 1 1 9.
Sol.   x  x  dx   x dx   x dx  (x 3  1) dx 
5 5
3 3
x 1 1
(a) x 3  c (b) x 3  x  c
  log | x |  c 5 5
11 3
3 5
2 (c) x xc (d) None
x 5
  log | x |  c
2 2 2
Sol. 3 3
 1) dx   x dx  1dx
3 5
 (x
7.  (4 x  4 x ) dx  2
1
3
x
1  xc
2
(a) x  2  c 2
x 1
3
5
1 4 3
(b) x  4  c x
x   x c
5
1 3
(c) x  c 5
x 3
 .x 3  x  c
(d) None 5
Sol.  (4 x
3
 4 x 5 ) dx   4 x 3 dx   4 x 5 dx (a x  b x ) 2
10.  a x bx dx when a = b is -
4 4
x x
 4.  4. c (a) 3x + c (b) 4x + c
4 4
(c) 5x + c (d) 6x + c
 x 4  x 4  c Sol. If a = b then
1 (a x  b x ) 2 ( 2 a x )3
 x4  c  a x bx dx   a x . a x dx
x4
  4 dx
8.  | x | dx 
= 4x + c

ANCE 220
 Geometry

4 15
9 5
ax  b (a) a 15 (b) a 4
1. Lt  5 9
x  0 cx  d
4
b a a b 3
(a) (b) (c) (d) (c) a 15 (d) None
c c d d 5

x4  4 x 5  32
2. Lt  9. Lt 
x  2 x 2  3x 2  8
x 2 x 2  4

8 3 5 9 (a) 6 (b) 32 (c) 8 (d) 20

(a) (b) (c) (d)
5 8 8 2
x5  a5
x 9 4 10. If Lt  450, then a =
Lt  x a x  a
3. 2
x  3 x  4 3x  15
(a) 3 (b) – 3
(a) 3 (b) 4 (c) 7 (d) 2
(c) ± 3 (d) 0
2 2
 1  1  11. The +ve integer n such that
4. Lt  3x     2 x    
x 0
 x  x  
x n  3n
(a) 8 (b) 9 (c) 10 (d) 11 Lt  108 is -
x 3 x  3

xh  x (a) 9 (b) 10 (c) 4 (d) 3

5. Lt 
h0 h
1 x3  a 3 x 4 1
1 12. If Lt  Lt , then a =
(a) (b) x a x  a x 1 x  1
x 2 x
2 2  3
(c) (d) None (a) (b)
x 3 2
1  x  1  x2 3
6. Lt 
x 0 x (c) (d) None
2
1 1 1 1
(a) (b) (c) (d) 13  23  33  .......  n 3
3 4 2 5 13. Lt 
n  n4
3 5 x
7. Lt 
x 4 1  5  x 1 1 1 1
(a) (b) (c) (d)
2 3 4 100
2 2 1
(a) (b) (c) (d) 2
3 3 2 3 5x  6
14. Lt 
3 3
x 
4x 2  9
5 5
x a
8. Lt 1 1
 6 7 5 5
x a
x a3 3 (a) (b) (c) (d)
9 3 4 2

ANCE 221
 Geometry
d
(3x  1)30 (2x  1)30 2. ( 2x  3 ) 
15. Lt  dx
x  (2x  4)60
1 2x
30 30 (a) (b)
3 3 2 2x  3 2x  3
(a)   (b)  
7 2 1
(c) (d) None
3 2x  3
(c) (d) 330
2 d
3. ( x log x ) 
dx
3x  1  2y  5 
16. If Lt  l , Lt    m, then (a) log x (b) x + log x
2x  3
x  y  
 4  3y 
(c) 1+ x log x (d) 1 + log x
quadratic equation whose roots 2l,
2m is - d
4. ( x sin x ) 
2 dx
(a) 3x  5x  12  0 (a) x cos x
(b) 3x 2  5 x  12  0 (b) sin x
(c) 3x 2  5x  12  0 (c) x cos x + sin x
(d) None (d) none
5. If f(x) = (x3 + 6x2 + 12x – 13)100, then
x sin 5x
17. Lt  f (x) =
x  0 sin 2 4 x

(a) 100 ( x 3  6 x 2  12x  13)99

5 5 7 9
(a) (b) (c) (d) (b) 300 ( x  2)2 ( x 3  6x 2  12 x  13)99
4 16 8 7
3 (c) 100x99
 sin ax  8
18. If Lt    , then a = (d) None
x  0  sin bx  27
d 2 x
2 3 2 6. (x e ) 
(a) (b) b (c) b (d) None dx
3 2 3
(a) x 2 e x (b) x 2 e x  2 x
sin x  x 
19. Lt   x  radians  (c) e x  2 x (d) e x (x 2  2x )
x 0 x  180 
  3x 2 4x dy
(a) (b) (c) 1 (d) 1° 7. If y  , then 
180 2 2x 3 dx
sin 5x  sin 3x (a) x2 (b) 2x
20. Lt  (c) 9x2 (d) 8x2
x 0 x
(a) 5 (b) 2 (c) 8 (d) 0 d
8. ( x e x sin x ) 
dx
Differentiation
(a) e x ( x cos x  x sin x  sin x )
d 2
1. ( x  4)  (b) e x ( x cos x  sin x )
dx
(a) 2x2 (b) 2x (c) e x ( x sin x  cos x )
(c) 0 (d) 2x + 4 (d) None

ANCE 222
 Geometry

d  dy 
9. [(1  x 2 ) e x ]  17. If y = sin 2x, then   
dx  dx  x  
(a) (x  1) 2 e x (b) (x  1)3 e x 1
(a) – 2 (b) 2 (c) (d) 1
2 2 x 2
(c) ( x  1) e (d) None
18. If y = tan x, then dy
d 1 1 
10. If ( x)  , then k  dx
dx k x
1 (a) sec2 x (b) sec x
(a) 3 (b) 1 (c) (d) 2 (c) tan x (d) none
2
d
d 3 19. ( 1  sin 2x ) 
11. ( x  3x 2  3x  1)00  dx
dx
(a) cos x (b) cos x + sin x
(a) 30 (x – 1)29 (b) 300 (x – 1)99
(c) cos x – sin x (d) sin x
(c) 300 (x – 1)299 (d) 100 (x – 1)99
d d  1  cos 2x 
20.  
12. If y = ex + 3 log x, then  dx  1  cos 2 x 
dx 
(a) e x  3 log x
x 2
(b) e . x ( x  3) (a) tan x (b) sec2 x
(c) tan2 x (d) none
e x  3log x
(c) (d) None
x Integration
dy 4
13. If y = 2ax and  log 256 at x  1, then 1.  5x dx 
dx
a= (a) x 4  c (b) x 5  c
(a) 0 (b) 3 (c) 1 (d) 2
(c) x 6  c (d) x 8  c
dy  x 4  x 2  1  3x  3
14. If    ax  b, 2. a dx , (a  1) 
dx  x 2  x  1 
then (a – b)2 = 3 a 3x 3 ax
(a) a  c (b) a  c
(a) 5 (b) 4 (c) 8 (d) 9 3 log e a log e a

dy 10 ax
15. ( x  10x ) at x = 1 is - (c) a  c (d) none
dx log e a
(a) 10 (b) 10 (1 + log 10) 5
(c) 100 (1 + log 10) (d) 20
3.  3x  7 dx 
5
dy   e x  (a) log | 3x  7 |  c
16. log    3
dx   x 5 
3
(b) log | 5x  7 |  c
5 5 5
(a) 1 (b) 1
x x2 5
(c) log | 3x  7 |  c
5 3
(c) x  (d) None
x (d) none

ANCE 223
 Geometry
2
3x  7 x  11  1 1 
4.  dx  8. 2
x3   x  x   x   dx 
x2 

(a) 3 log e | x |  7  112  c x4 x 2 1

x 2x (a)   log | x |  2  c
4 2 2x
7 11
(b) 3 log e | x |   c x4 x2 1
x 2x 2 (b)   log | x |  2  c
4 2 2x
(c) 3 log e | x |  7  112  c
x 2x x4 x2 1
(c)   log | x |  2  c
7 11 4 2 2x
(d) 3 log e | x |   c
x 2x 2 x4 x 1
(d)   log | x |  2  c
x 2 1 4 2 2x
5.  x 2  1 dx  1 1 
9. If f (x) =  2
and f (1)  , then
(a) x  2 tan 1 x  c x 1 x 4
f(x) =
(b) x  2 tan 1 x  c
(a) log | x |  tan 1 x
(c) 2 tan 1 x  c
(d) tan 1 x  c (b) log | x |  tan 1 x  c
3 (c) log | x |  tan x  c
6.  ( 3x  4) dx 
(d) none
(3x  4)4
(a) c 1  x2
12 10.  1  x 4 dx 
(3x  4)4
(b) c
12  1
1  
( x  4) 4 1 1  x
(c) c (a) tan c
12 2 2
 1
( x  4) 4 1  
(d) c 1 1  x
12 (b) tan c
2 2
7. ( x 2  1) 2
 x 3 dx   1
1  
1 1  x
(c) tan c
x2 1 2 2
(a)   log e x  c
2 x2 (d) none
x 1 dx x a
(b)   2 log e x  c 11. If   log  c, then
2 2x 2
x  3x  42 xb
x2 1 a+ b=
(c)  2  2 log e x  c
2 2x (a) 11 (b) 12
(d) none (c) 13 (d) 14

ANCE 224
 Geometry
1
 e5 log x  e 4 log x  (a) log | 3  5x |  c
12.   e3log x  e2log x  dx  5
1
(b) log | 3  5x |  c
x x2 5
(a) c (b) c
3 2 2
(c) log | 3  5x |  c
x3 x4 5
(c) c (d) c 2
3 4 (d) log | 3  5x |  c
5
13. 1  x dx 
 15. x x  a dx 
 2
2 2
3 3 2
5
2a
3
(a) (1  x )  c (b) (1  x )  c (x  a ) 2  ( x  a ) 2  c
3 2 (a)
5 3
2 2 3
2 2 2 2
(c) (1  x ) 3  c (d) (1  x )  c (b) (x  a ) 5  ( x  a ) 2  c
3 3 5 3
5 3
dx 2 2a
 (c) (x  a ) 2  (x  a ) 2  c
14.  3  5x 5 3
(d) none

Q.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. b a d c b c b c d c
Q.No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. c a c d b c b c a b

Differentiation

Q.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. b c d c b d b a a d
Q.No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. c b d d b b b c c b

Integration

Q.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans . b a c b b a c c a b
Q.No. 11 12 13 14 15
Ans . c c a b a

ANCE 225
 Probability

Introduction  Mutually Exclusive Events :

The word ‘probability’ is commonly used in Two events are said to be mutually exclusive,
our day-to-day conversation and we if two events do not have common elements.
generally use this word even without going  Exhaustive Events :
into the details of its actual meaning. We Two events are said to be exhaustive events,
generally use the terms : possible, probable,
chance, likely etc. All these terms convey if (A  B) = S i.e., (A  B)’ = 
the same sense that the event is not certain  Complementary event :
to take place or, in other words, there is Complementary event of A is denoted by
uncertaintity about the occurrence (or A’.
happening) of the event in question.
 Sample Space :
In the theory of probability we deal with
events which outcomes of an experiment. The set of total number of possible outcomes
The word ‘experiment’ means an operation is called as smple space.
which can produce some well defined  Event :
outcomes (s). Any subset of the sample space is called
 Permutation : event of the experiment. It is denoted by
If n objects are given and we have to the letter A, B, C, D, .................
arrange r (r  n ) out of them and order is  Probability of Event :
important such an arrangement is called as
The ratio of number of events and number
permutation of n objects taken r at a time.
of sample points is called as probability of
 Combination :
event.
If n objects are given and we have to choose
r (r  n) out of them and order is not  Fundamental Principle of Counting :
important such a choice is called as Suppose one thing A can be done in m
combination of n objects taken r at a time. different ways and another thing B can be
 Factorial Notation : done in n different ways. Then, the total
The product of one to n is called as factorial number of different ways in which
of n and denoted as n! unbiased coins are (i) A and B can be done is (m . n).
tossed. Find the probability of getting
(i) A or B can be done is (m + n)
 Random Experiment :
An action which gives one or more results  Coin Tossing :
is called as random experiment. One coin is tossed n times or n coins are
 Union of Events : tossed once.
A and B are two events of sample space S, n (S) = 2n
then A  B is the event either A or B or A coin is tossed,
both take place. S {H,T}, n (S) = 2
 Intersectionm of events : Two coins are tosed,
Two events A and B of the sample space S,
S {HH, HT, TH, TT}, n (S) = 4
then A  B is the event both A and B take
place. A and A’ are mutually exclusive events Three coins are tossed,
as well as exhaustive events as a A’ = { } S = {HHT, HHT, HTT; THH, THT, HTH,
and A  A’ = S. TTT}, n (S) = 8

ANCE 226
 Probability

 Dice thrown : possible outcomes in a random experiment.

The diceis thrown n times or n dice are The probability that an outcome will occur
shown once, then n (S) = 6n is a measure of the change of the occurence
Dice is thrown n (S) = 6 of the outcome.
S = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} The set of the possible outcomes is called
Sample space S = the sample space, usually denoted by S.A.
{(1,1) (1,2) (1,3) (1,4) (1,5) (1,6), set of some of the possible outcomes is called
(2,1) (2,2) (2,3) (2,4) (2,5) (2,6), an event, usually denoted by E. In other
(3,1) (3,2) (3,3) (3,4) (3,5) (3,6) words, an event E is a subset of the sample
(4,1) (4,2) (4,3) (4,4) (4,5) (4,6) space S.
(5,1) (5,2) (5,3) (5,4) (5,5) (5,6) For a finite sample space with equally likely
(6,1) (6,2) (6,3) (6,4) (6,5) (6,6) outcomes, the probability of an event E,
denoted by P(E), is given by
P(E) =
Number of outcomes favourable to the event E
Total number of possible outcomes

n(E)
i.e., P(E) 
n(S)
A summary of the basic properties of
The card jack queen king are called face probability is given below.
cards. There are 12 face cards. Card 1. 0  P(E)  1 for any event E.
bearing a number A called ace card.
2. P (certain event) = 1, P (sample space) = 1.
Permutation and combination:
3. P (impossible event) = 0.
n n! n!
Pr  ; n Cr  4. P(E) = 1 – P(E)
(n  r)! r!(n  r)!
n! = (n –1) (n –2) ....... 1 In this chapter, we will learn how to solve
n! = n (n –1)! more complicated probability problems. In
n(n  1) order to help us visualize the sample space
n
C2  and the events in such problems, we usually
2!
n n draw a diagram called a possibility diagram
Cr = Cn–r
n or a tree diagram.
Pn = n!
n
P1= n A. Possibility Diagram :
n
P2 = n (n – 1) When a random experiment involves two
n
C1 = n stages, we can use a rectangular grid, called
Probability of Sample Combined Events a possibility diagram, to represent the sample
sample space S space.
× × event E
× × × Ex. An unbiased coin is tossed and a letter is
× × outcome x
×
× selected at random from the word
A random experiment is a process involving “SMART”. Find the probability of getting a
chance that generates a result called an head on the tossed coin and letter “M” from
outcome. In general, there are two or more the word.

ANCE 227
 Probability

Sol. Here, the tossing of a coin is a stage; and The above diagram is a tree diagram
the selection of a letter is another stage. This showing the outcomes of tossing three coins.
experiment involves two stages. The In a tree diagram, the result of each stage is
outcomes can be represented by the crosses shown at the end of a branch for that stage.
in the diagram below. This diagram is called By reading along the branches, we get the
outcomes of the experiment.
a possibility diagram.
In this case the outcome HHH means the
T × × × × × first coin shows a head, the second coin
Coin shows a head and the third coin shows a
H × × × × × head (as indicated by the branches),
The 8 outcomes are equally likely.
S M A R T  P (3 heads) = P (HHH)f
Letter
1
The sample space S = {HS, HM, HA, HR, =
HT, TS, TM, TA, TR, TT}, where the first 8
(b) Let E = {outcomes showing 2 heads and
letter stands for the result of tossing the coin 1 tail}
(H for Head and T for Tail), and the second = {HHT, HTH, THH}
letter stands for the letter selected for the 3
word “SMART”.  P (2 heads and 1 tail) =
8
The favourable outcome of getting a head
Mutually Exclusive Events
and the letter “M” is HM.
For any two events, A and B, we denote
 P (getting a head and the letter “M”) probability that both events A and B will
1 occur as P(A and B);
= .
10 probability that either event A or event B
B. Tree Diagram : will occur, or both will occur as P (A or B).
If a random experiment consists of two or In a sample space, two events as mutually
more stages, we can use a tree diagram to exclusive if they cannot occur at the same
time.
represent the process. Let us study some
For example, in rolling a die,
examples. event A = {1, 3, 5} and event B = {2, 4}
Ex. Three unbiased coins are tossed. Find the are mutually exlusive. This is because when
probability of getting the die shows 1, 3 or 5, it definitely cannot
show 2 or 4. Note that A  B = .
(a) 3 heads, (b) 2 heads and 1 tail. That means, two events, A and B, are
Sol. (a) Here, the tossing of each coin is a stage. mutually exclusive if A  B = .
1st Coin 2nd Coin 3rd Coin Outcome S A B
H HHH
H
T HHT
H
H HTH Let us investigate the relationships between
T P(A), P(B), P(A and B) and P(A or B) for
T HTT two mutually exclusive events, A and B.
H THH
H If A and B are two mutually exclusive events,
T T THT then the probability of A or B occuring is
S A B
H TTH
T
T TTT

ANCE 228
 Probability

Independent Events events A and B occuring if they are not

independent?
Let us study another type of combination of
events. Intuitively, two events are said to be We can also use a tree diagram to do this.
In the tree diagram, the probabilities
independent events if the occurrence or non-
indicating the second stage branches will
occurrence of one event does not affect the
depend on the results of the first stage.
probability of occurrence of the other event.
1st ball 2 ball Outcome Probability
For example, in tossing a fair coin twice, the
2 3 4
event A that the first toss shows a head and R RR P(RR) = ×
7 8 7
the event B that the second toss shows a R
head are independent. That is, event A does 3
5 3 5
not affect how likely event B will occur, and 8 G RG P(RG) = ×
7
8 7
vice versa.
3 5 3
If A and B are independent events, the 5 R GR P(GR) = ×
7 8 7
probability of both events A and B occuring 8
G
is the product of their individual probabilities. 4 5 4
G GG P(GG) = ×
i.e., P (A and B) = P(A) × P(B) 7 8 7
R = red ball
Further Probabilities G = green bal
Consider drawing two balls at random from
a bag containing 3 red balls and 5 green Here P the first ball drawn is red and the
balls. Suppose the balls are drawn one by second ball drawn in green
one without replacement. = P (GR)
Let A be the event that the first ball drawn 3 5
 
is red, 8 7
B be the event that the second ball drawn In general, when the occurrence of the
is green. second event depends on the occurrence of
the first event, we may use a tree diagram
At first, there are 8 balls in the bag. After
to help us compute the probabilities.
drawing the first ball, there will be 7 balls
left in the bag. Algebra of Events
1. If event A happens (i.e., the first ball drawn Some standard methods of constructing new
is red), the remaining balls are 2 red ones events in terms of some given events
and 5 green ones. associated with a random experiment.
5 Verbal Description of event Equivalent set theoretic
Hence, P(B)  . notation
7
2. If event A does not happen (i.e., that first Not A A
ball drawn is not red), the remaining balls A or B AB
A and B AB
are 3 red ones and 4 green ones.
A but not B AB
4 Neither A nor B A  B  (A  B)
Hence P(B)  .
7 At least one of A, B or C (A  B)  C
That means, the probability of event B Exactly one of A and B (A  B)  (A  B)
depends on whetehr event A will occur or All three of A, B and C ABC
not. Exactly two of A, B and C (A  B  C)  (A  B  C)
Thus, A and B are NOT independent events.
( A  B  C)
How do we calculate the probability of both

ANCE 229
 Probability

Addition Theorems on Probability Sol.2 There are 52 different possible outcomes.

i. Addition theorem for two events Four of these outcomes are successful : king
of spades, king of hearts, king of clubs, king
If A and B are two events associated with of diamonds.
a random experiment, then Therefore, the probability in favour of
P (A  B) = P(A) + P(B) – P(A  B) 4
obtaining a king is .
Note : 52
If A and B are mutually exclusive events, 4 1
P(K)   .
then P (A  B) = 0. 52 13
 P (A  B) = P(A) + P(B) Ex.3 Find the probability of obtaining 7 on a single
toss of one die.
ii. Addition theorem for three events Sol.3 There are six different possible outcomes
If A, B, C are three events associated with and none of these out comes would produce
a random experiment, then a 7. That is, zero of these outcomes would
P (A  B  C) = P(A) + P(B) + P(c) – be successful. The probability in favour of
P(A  B) – P(B  C) – P(A  C) + obtaining a 7 on a single toss of one die is
0
P(A  B  C) , or 0 :
6
Note : 0
P(7)   0.
If A, B, C are mutually exclusive events, 6
then When an event cannot possibly succeed, we
P(A  B) = P(B  C) = P(A  C) = P(A say it is an impossible event. The probability
of an impossible event is zero.
 B  C) = 0
 P (A  B C) = P(A) + P(B) + P(c) 0
P (impossible event)   0 (T  0)
T
iii. P (A  B)  P(B)  P(A  B) Ex.4 One card is drawn at random from a shuffled
iv. If B A, then standard of 52 cards. Find the probability
that the card selected is not a king.
(a) P (A  B)  P(A)  P(B) Sol.4 There are 52 different possible outcomes.
There are 4 kings in a deck, so the other 48
(b) P( B)  P( A )
cards are not kings, and these are the
successful outcomes. Hence, the probability
48
that the card selected is not a king is .
Ex.1 Find the probability of obtaining a number 52
greater than 4 on a single toss of a die. 48 12
P (Not K)   .
Sol.1 There are six different possible outcomes 52 13
and two of these outcomes, {5, 6}, are The sum of the probability that an event will
successful. occur and the probability that it will not occur
is 1. Therefore, we can solve this in another
Hence, the probability in favour of obtaining way.
2 Be sure to remember that if
a number greater than 4 is .
6 S
2 1 S
P (number greater than 4)   . P(A)  then P (not A)  1  (T  0)
6 3 T T
Alternate Solution : The probability of
Ex.2 Find the probability of drawing a king (one 4 1
pick) from a shuffled standard deck of 52 selecting a king is or . Therefor, the
52 13
cards. (A standard deck of cards is the most probability that the card selected is not a
common type of deck used in most card king is
1 13 1 12
games containing 52 cards). P (not K)  1  13  13  13  13 .

ANCE 230
 Probability

Ex.5 Use the sample space for the total number Ex.7 In a certain group of 75 students, it has
of possible outcomes when a pair of dice is been determined that 16 students are taking
tossed to find the probability of obtaining a statistics, chemistry, and psychology; 24
sum of 7 on a single toss of a pair of dice. students are taking statistics and chemistry;
Sol.5 There are 36 total possible outcomes and 30 students are taking statistics and
six of these outcomes are successful, psychology; 22 students are taking chemistry
and psychology; 6 students are taking only
because there are six ways of obtaining a
statistics; 9 students are taking only chemistry;
sum of 7. Hence, the probability of obtaining
and 5 students are taking only psychology.
6 1
a 7 is or ; S C
36 6 I III
6 1 II
P(7) =  6 8 9
36 6 V
IV 16 VI
Note that a 7 is the most likely outcome 11 14 6
when a pair of dice is tossed. It is believed 5
VII
that this is one of the reasons why many VIII P

people consider 7 as their lucky number. It (a) What is the probability that a student is
keeps coming up for them more often than not taking any of the three subjects?
other numbers. (b) What is the probability that a student is
Ex.6 At a recent college registration, 100 students taking chemistry?
were interviewed. Eighty of the students Sol.7 We first complete the necessary Venn
stated that they had registered for a diagram (See above figure). After completing
mathematics course, 14 of the students stated the diagram, we can answer the questions.
that they had registered for a history course, (a) The probability that a student is not taking
and 5 of the students stated that they had 11
registered for a mathematics course and a any of the three subject is .
75
history course. What is the probability that (b) The probability that a student is taking
a student in this survey registered only for 39
history. chemistry is .
75
M H
The answer to question (b) is obtained by
Sol.6 adding the number of students in each
75 5 9
partition of the chemistry circle. Hence, there
I II III are 39 students taking chemistry.
11 IV Ex.8 Mr. Examination is preparing a quickie quiz
A Venn diagram using the given information for his mathematics class to see if the students
is shown in above figure. With it, we can did their assignment. The quiz is to consist
summarize the information that 11 of the of three true-false questions. How many
students did not register for either a different arrangements of the answer are
possible? What are the possible outcomes?
mathematics course or a history course, 9
Sol.8 We have three questions and each questions
students registered only for history, and 75
has two possible outcomes (true or false).
students registered only for mathematics.
Using the counting principle, we compute
This information can also be used to solve 2 × 2 × 2= 8 total possible outcomes.
the probability problem. We note that the We can determine the various outcomes by
total number of students is 100. Whereas 9 means of a tree diagram. Remember that
of them are registered only for history. the quickie quiz consists of three questions
9 and the answer to each question is either
Hence, the answer is .
100 true or false.

ANCE 231
 Probability

Possible outcomes
First Second Third First Second Third
question question question question question question

Start

The sample space is listed beside the tree diagram.

Ex.9 What are the odds is favour of obtaining a 6

6 6 6 1
sum of 7 when a pair of dice is tossed once? 7 = 36     .
Sol.9 Using our definition, we first find probability 30 36 30 36 5
of obtaining a sum of 7 when a pair of dice 36
1
The odds in favour of obtaining a 7 are .
6 5
is tossed. It is . Next, we find the But remember that the odds may also be
36
probability of not getting a 7. Recall that if stated as 1 to 5 or 1 : 5.
Ex.10 What are the odds against obtaining an 11
S
P(A) = S/T, then P(not A) = 1 . when a pair of dice is tossed once?
T
Sol.10 Using the definition, we still find the
Hence, we have probability in favour of getting an 11 and the
probability against getting an 11 when a pair
6
P(7)  and of dice is tossed. The probability of getting
36
2
an 11 is , and the probability of not getting
6 36 6 30 36
P(not 7)  1     . an 11 is
36 36 36 36
2 2 2 34
Alternatively, if there are 6 ways in 36 that 1   
me may obtain a 7, then the remaining 30 36 36 36 36
Now we construct our ratio occording to
ways in 36 is the probability of not obtaining
the definition :
a 7.
Odds against an
Now we construct our ratio according to
34
the definition : 34 36 34 17
Odds in favour of 11  36    
2 36 2 2 1
Probabilit y that A will occur 36
A
Probabilit y that A will not occur 17
Odds in favour of The odds against otaining an 11 are ,
1

ANCE 232
 Probability

which we would usually write as 17 to 1, or Ex.12 A club holds an election for the post of
17 : 1. Therefore, from the odds (17 : 1), chairperson. The probabilities that the
we can see that we probably are not going candidates Anjani and Laxmi will be elected
to get an 11 when we roll the dice. Over the are 0.36 and 0.47 respectively. Find the
long run, we should get an 11 once out of probability that
every 18 tries. This is not a very good (a) either Anjani or Laxmi will be elected
percentage of successful outcomes.
(b) neither Anjani nor Laxmi will be elected.
Ex.11 Bag A contains 4 chips numbered 1, 3, 5
Sol.12 (a) Let A be the event that Anjani will be
and 7 respectively. Bag B contains 3 chips
elected,
numbered 2, 4 and 6 respectively. A chip is
B be the event the Laxmi will be elected.
drawn at random from each bag.
Since there is only 1 chairperson, the events,
(a) Draw a tree diagram to show all the
A and B, are mutually exclusive.
possible outcomes.
P (either Anjani or Laxmi will be elected)
(b) Find the probability that the sum of the
= P (A or B).
two chips drawn is
= P(A) + P(B)
(i) 7, (ii) odd, (iii) even.
(addition of probabilities of mutually exclusive
Sol.11
events)
(a) = 0.36 + 0.47
Bag A Bag B Outcome
2 (1, 2) = 0.83
1 4 (1, 4) (b) P (neither Anjani nor Laxmi will be elected)
6 (1, 6) =1 – P (either Monica or Roland will be
2 (3, 2) elected)
3 4 (3, 4)
6 (3, 6) = 1 – 0.83
2 (5, 2) = 0.17
5 4 (5, 4) Ex.13 A card is drawn at random from a pack of
6 (5, 6)
52 playing cards. Find the probability that
2 (7, 2)
7 4 (7, 4) the card drawn is
6 (7, 6) (a) an ace or a 3,
The above diagram is the required tree (b) an ace or a red card.
diagram. There are 12 equally likely Sol.13 Let A be event that the card drawn is an
outcomes in the sample space. ace,
(b) (i) The favourable outcomes for a sum of 7 B be event that the card drawn is a 3,
are : (1, 6), (3, 4) and (5, 2). C be event that the card drawn is red,
3 1 4 4
 P (the sum is 7)   . Then, P(A)  , P(B) = and
12 4 52 52
(ii) Since all the sums of the outcomes are 26
odd, P(c) = .
52
12 We cannot draw a card which is both an
P (the sum is odd)   1 ace and a 3.
12
(iii) There are no even sums.  events A and B are mutually exclusive
0 events.
 P (the sum is even)   0. P (an ace or 3) = P (A or B)
12

ANCE 233
 Probability
= P(A) + P(B) Sol.15 (a) P (Guru will miss) = 1 – P (Guru will hit)
4 4 8 2 4
      1
52 52 52 13 5
(b) As there are 2 red aces, the diamond ace 1

and the heart ace, events A and C are not 5
mutually exclusive events. Therefore, we 3
cannot apply the addition of probabilities Similarly, P (Srinu will miss)  1
of mutually exclusive events to evaluate 4
P(A or C). We have to find P(A or C) here 1

by counting. 4
A part from the two red aces, there are 24 Hence, we have a tree diagram as shown
red cards. below.
P (an ace or a red card) = P (A or C) Guru Srinu Outcome
3 H - Hit
4  24 28 7 4 H HH
   M - Miss
52 52 13 4 H
Ex.14 Meena has 7 Indian stamps 5 Singapore 5
1 M HM
stamps. Seema has 12 Indian stamps and 4
18 Singapore stamps. Each of them selects
a stamp at random from her own collection. 3
4 H MH
Find the probability that the two stamps 1
selected from one Indian stamp and one 5 M
Singapore stamp. 1 M MM
Sol.14 4
P (the target will be hit by both) = P (HH)
Meena Seema Outcome
12 4 3 3
30 I II I - Indian   
7 I stamp 5 4 5
12
18
S - Singapore (b) P (the target will be hit by only one of them)
S IS stamp
30 = P (Guru will hit and Srinu will miss)
12
I SI
+ P (Guru will miss and Srinu will hit)
5 30
12 S
= P (HM) + P (MH)
18 S SS 4 1 1 3 4 3 
30       
5 4 5 4 20 20 20
P (one Indian stamp and one Singapore Ex.16 The probability that a worker with
stamp)
occupational exposure to dust contracts a
= P (IS or SI)
= P (IS) + P (SI) lung disease is 0.2. Three such workers are
7 18 5 12 31 checked at random. Find the probability that
    
12 30 12 30 60 (a) none of the three workers contracted a
Ex.15 The probability that Guru will hit a target is lung disease,
4
. The probability that Srinu will hit the (b) at least one of them contracted a lung
5
3 disease.
same target is . If each of them fires once,
4 Sol.16 (a) P (a worker does not contract a lung
find the probability that the target will be hit
by disease)
(a) both of them, = 1 – P (a worker contracts a lung disease)
(b) only one of them. = 1 – 0.2 = 0.8

ANCE 234
 Probability

Hence, we have a tree diagram as shown has 8 Mathematics books and 12 Science
below, Books. Ravi goes to one of these shelves
1st 2nd 3rd Outcome and picks up a book at random. Find the
worker worker worker
probability that the book picked is a
Mathematics book.
Sol.17
Shelf Book Outcome
0.2 10
16 M AM
1 A
2 6 S AS
16
0.8
8
20 M BM
1
2 B
12 S BS
20
M - Mathematics
S - Science
P (none of them contracted a lung disease) P (picking a Mathematics book)
= P (NNN) = 0.8 × 0.8 × 0.8 (multiplication = P ({shelf A and Mathematics book} or
of probability) = 0.512 {Shelf B and Mathematics book})
(b) P (at least one of them contracted a lung = P (AM) + P (BM)
disease) (addition of probabilities)
= 1 – P (none of them contracted a lung 1 10 1 8
disesase) = 1 – 0.512 = 0.488    
2 16 2 20
Ex.17 In a library, shelf A has 10 Mathematics 41
 .
books and 6 Science books, while shelf B 80

1. The probability of raining on day 1 is 0.2 3. A bag contains 2 red, 3 green and 2 blue
and on day 2 is 0.3. What is the probability balls. 2 balls are to be drawn randomly.
of raining on both the days? What is the probability that the balls drawn
contain no blue ball?
(a) 0.2 (b) 0.1
5 10 2 11
(c) 0.06 (d) 0.25 (a) (b) (c) (d)
7 21 7 21
2. A bag contains 5 red balls and 8 balls. It 4. If the probability that A will live 15 years is
also contains 4 green and 7 black balls. If 7 9
a ball is drawn at random, then find the and that B will live 15 years is , then
8 10
probability that is is not green. what is the probability that both will live
(a) 5/6 (b) 1/4 (c) 1/6 (d) 7/4 after 15 years?

ANCE 235
 Probability

1 63 1 11. Two dice are tossed. The probability that

(a) (b) (c) (d) None the total score is a prime number is -
20 80 5
5. Suppose six coins are flipped. Then the 1 5 1 7
(a) (b) (c) (d)
probability of getting at least one tail is - 6 12 2 9
71 53 63 1 12. If the probability that A will live 15 years is
(a) (b) (c) (d) 7 9
72 54 64 12 and that B will live 15 years is , then
8 10
6. The probability that a student is not a what is the probability that both will live
swimmer is 1/5. Then the probability that after 15 years?
out of the five students, four are swimmers,
1 63 1
is - (a) (b) (c) (d) None
20 80 5
2 4
5 4 1 4 1 13. Four different objects 1, 2, 3, 4 are
(a) C2     (b)     distributed at random in four places marked
5 5  5 5
4
1, 2, 3, 4. What is the probability that
5 1  4  none of the objects occupy the place
(c) C1     (d) None of these corresponding to its number?
 5  5 
(a) 17/24 (b) 3/8 (c) 1/2 (d) 5/8
7. A set A is containing n elements. A subset P
14. Three students try to solve a problem
of A is chosen at random. The set is independently with a probability of solving it
reconstructed by replacing the elements of as 1/3, 2/5, 5/12 respectively. What is the
P. A subset of A is again chosen at random. probability that the problem is solved?
The probability that P and Q have no (a) 1/18 (b) 12/30 (c) 23/30 (d) 1/2
common element is - 15. If the probability of rain on any given day in
n n
3
  3
  Pune city is 50%, then what is the
(a) 5n (b)   (c)   (d) 2n probability that it rains on exactly 3 days in
4 5
a 5-day period?
8. If events A and B are independent and (a) 8/125 (b) 5/16 (c) 8/25 (d) 2/25
P(A) = 0.15, P(A  B) = 0.45, then
16. The probability that an even A happens in
P(B) = ________
one trial of an experiment is 0.4. Three
6 6 6 6 independent trials of the experiment are
(a) (b) (c) (d)
13 17 19 23 formed. The probability that the even A
9. One hundered identical coins each with happens at least once is -
probability p of showing up heads are tossed. (a) 0.934 (b) 0.784
If 0 < p < 1 and the probability of heads (c) 0.548 (d) 0.343
showing on 50 coins is equal to that of heads 17. A number is chosen at random among the
on 51 coins; then the value of p is - first 120 natural numbers. The probability of
1 49 50 51 the number chosen being a multiple of 5 or
(a) (b) (c) (d) 15 is -
2 101 101 101 (a) 1/5 (b) 1/6 (c) 1/7 (d) 1/9
10. The probability that Kumar will hit a target 18. From a pack of 52 playing cards, two cards
is given as 1/5. Then, his probability of atleast are drawn together at random. Calculate the
one hit in 10 shots is - probability of both the cards being Kinds -
1 4
10 (a) 1/15 (b) 25/57
(a) 10 (b) 1    (c) 35/256 (d) None
6 5 19. What is the possibility of getting at least
1 1 6 heads if eight coins are tossed
(c) 1 10 (d) 1 19
5 5 simultaneously?

ANCE 236
 Probability

(a) 37/256 (b) 25/57 25. A bag contains 3 white and 5 red balls. If
(c) 1/13 (d) None a ball is drawn at random, the probability
20. In a bag containing three balls, a white ball that the drawn ball to be red is -
was placed, and then one ball was taken 3 5 3 5
out at random. What is the probability that (a) (b) (c) (d)
8 8 15 15
the extracted ball would turn out ot be white,
if all possible hypothesis concerning the 26. The probability of getting an even number
colour of the balls that were initially in the when a dice is rolled is -
bag were equally possible?
1 1 1
(a) 5/8 (b) 3/4 (c) 1/2 (d) 3/8 (a) (b) (c) (d) none
6 36 2
21. From a box containing 60 standard and 40
substandard articles, two articles are chosen 27. A card is drawn from a packet of 100 cards
at random. What is the probability that one numbered 1 to 100. The probability of
of them is standard and the other drawing a number which is a square is -
substandard?
1 9 1 2
60 40 60 39 (a) (b) (c) (d)
(a)  (b)  10 100 100 100
100 100 100 100
16 28. The probability for a randomly selected
(c) (d) 24% number out of 1, 2, 3, 4, ..........., 25 to be
33
a prime number is -
22. From a normal pack of cards, a card is
drawn at random. The probability of getting 2 23 10 9
(a) (b) (c) (d)
a jack or a king is - 25 25 25 25
2 1 2 29. In a single throw of two dice, the probability
(a) (b) (c) (d) none
52 52 13 of getting a sum of 10 is -
23. Two numbers are chosen from 1 to 5. The 1 1 1
probability for the two numbers to be (a) (b) (c) (d) none
12 36 6
consecutive is -
1 2 1 2 30. Three letters, to each of which corresponds
(a) (b) (c) (d) an addressed envelope are placed in the
5 5 10 10
24. Two dice are thrown at a time. The envelopes at random. The probability that
probability that the difference of the all letters are placed in the right envelopes
numbers shown on the dice is 1 is - in -
5 1 1 1 1
(a) (b) (c) (d) none (a) (b) 1 (c) (d) 0
18 36 6 3 6

Q.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. d a a b c b a b d b
Q.No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. b b c c b b a d a a
Q.No. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans. c c b a b c a d a c

ANCE 237